JP7466194B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area.
(A so-called two-type gaming machine.) When the machine is controlled to such a big win gaming state, the big prize opening is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy for the gaming ball to enter the big prize opening, and the prize ball (gaming ball) corresponding to the gaming ball that entered the big prize opening can be paid out.

Then, based on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, in order to enhance the interest of the game, the first reach performance (long reach, SP reach) is performed, and then the second reach performance (SP
A gaming machine that performs a special bonus (SP reach) is known (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-236850 A

However, there has been a demand for further improving game presentation, such as reach presentation, to further increase interest in games.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further increase the entertainment value of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a sixth pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of an identification symbol when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and capable of transitioning to a special gaming state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, the performance accessory group 58, and the performance button device 6310) that performs a predetermined performance when the variable display of the identification pattern is being performed;
The performance execution means includes:
When a first effect (e.g., a cherry blossom accumulation notice) is performed and a first effect execution condition (e.g., the acquisition of a Road to the Ultimate Showdown icon) is established, a second effect (e.g., the Road to the Ultimate Showdown) can be executed;
When a third effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) different from the first effect is performed, and a second effect execution condition (e.g., display of five character icons) different from the first effect execution condition is established, a fourth effect (e.g., the path to the decisive battle) can be executed;
The second effect and the fourth effect are capable of executing a specific effect of the same kind related to the operation means (for example, an effect aiming to collect 10 character icons),
When a third effect execution condition (e.g., less than 10 character icons) is established by performing the second effect or the fourth effect, a fifth effect (e.g., a showdown reach) different from the special effect can be executed without executing a special effect (e.g., a decisive battle reach), and when the third effect execution condition is not established (10 character icons), the special effect can be executed without executing the fifth effect .
As the specific performance, it is possible to perform a performance in which predetermined development information is displayed and a development progress performance (for example, a performance in which the aim is to collect 10 character icons) that progresses according to the displayed development information,
The fifth effect is characterized in that it is possible to perform a development effect related to the development information (for example, an effect using a support icon).

The present invention can improve the enjoyment of games.

1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a first pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. 2 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine; 1 is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. 1 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 1A is an example of a special symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine; and FIG. 1B is an example of a decorative symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a main control process in a first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an initial setting process at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a ceiling counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition determination process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving setting process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a starting hole winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a sub-variable presentation pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a winning combination occurs) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when losing) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a flowchart showing a process for determining a pre-reading presentation pattern in a first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the jackpot-related look-ahead presentation format changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the time-saving hit look-ahead presentation form changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form to a big win type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, showing the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a timing chart of the signal "prize ball information 1" among the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine depending on the gaming status. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the second pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in a third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, showing (A) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after a limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in a normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in the C time-saving play state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal gaming state and a C time-saving gaming state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after a limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in a normal game state or a C-time shortened game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable normal symbol display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining the bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of a bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 13 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing the change in the operation mode of the effect button device of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a sixth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half variation pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a latter-stage change pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in a right-hit play state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable normal symbol display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the presentation flow for the right-hit game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for a right-hit playing state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a second half icon number determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half icon number determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half icon display scenario determination table for the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half icon collection order scenario determination table for the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a cherry blossom accumulation notification determination table in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for a confrontation reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table for right-hand play in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a fan notice determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal display image in the Western team mode and the Eastern team mode in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the cherry blossom accumulation announcement presentation in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the cherry blossom accumulation announcement presentation in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the pseudo consecutive performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the pseudo consecutive performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 3) explaining the pseudo consecutive performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image (part 1) illustrating the presentation of the road to the final battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image (part 2) illustrating the presentation of the road to the final battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the presentation of the "Path to the Ultimate Showdown" in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the presentation of a showdown reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the presentation of a showdown reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the lotus flower announcement presentation in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the presentation of a battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) explaining the presentation of a battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the operation presentation time and reception time of the presentation button device of the Road to the Final Battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a timing chart of the signal "External Information 3" among the signals outputted to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As examples of gaming machines according to the embodiments of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko machine is referred to as the forward direction.
The rear side of the pachinko machine is called the rear direction, and the left side when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is called the left direction.
The right side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is defined as the right direction, the upper side of the pachinko game machine as the upward direction, the lower side of the pachinko game machine as the downward direction, the clockwise direction when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front as the rightward direction, and conversely, the counterclockwise direction as the leftward direction.

Both the first and second pachinko gaming machines are so-called type one pachinko gaming machines called digital pachinko. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed in a variable manner. In contrast, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in parallel.

The third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, which is a combination of a type 1 machine called a digital pachinko machine and a type 2 machine called a feather machine. The third pachinko machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but this specification will be described using an example in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed in a variable manner. However, this is not intended to exclude a type 1/2 mixed pachinko machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel.

In this specification, when the term "special design" is used, it means both the first special design and the second special design, unless otherwise specified.

In addition, the term "variable display" in this specification is a concept that includes both "variable display" where the pattern is displayed by changing, and "static display" where the pattern is displayed by stopping, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display pattern is stopped (hereinafter also called "deriving"), the result of the special pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also called "special pattern lottery") described later or the normal pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also called "selection of special patterns") is displayed.
The result of the "regular symbol lottery" is determined. Note that although the symbols appear to be stopped, there are cases where the symbols are displayed in a manner in which the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the regular symbol hit determination process are not yet determined (for example, a provisionally stopped state), and such a manner is included in the variable display described above. Note that even if the symbols are temporarily stopped, for example, the results of the special symbol hit determination process and the regular symbol hit determination process are not yet determined at this point, so the symbols can be displayed again in a variable manner.

In addition, in this specification, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine and a third pachinko gaming machine
In explaining the pachinko gaming machines, the case where the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol and second special symbol) will be explained as an example. However, the number of special symbols may be one for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine.

[1. The first pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As for pachinko gaming machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel and only one of them is displayed, there are pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are reserved, the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the start conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first start port and the second start port (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine").
There are two types of machines:

In a priority variable machine, the start condition of the first special symbol is established when certain requirements are all met, such as neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol being variable displayed, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is not reserved, and the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved. In a priority variable machine, the start condition of the second special symbol is established when certain requirements are all met, such as neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol being variable displayed, the game is not in a jackpot game state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved.

In addition, in a sequential variable machine, the start condition of the first special symbol is established when at least all of the following are satisfied: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and the first reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, in a sequential variable machine, the start condition of the second special symbol is established when at least all of the following are satisfied: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner,
The game is not in a jackpot state, the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold, and
This is established when at least all of the following conditions are met: the first reservation is a reservation of a variable display of the second special pattern.

The following explains using a priority variable machine as an example.

[1-1. Appearance]
Fig. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 3 is an example of a perspective view of the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the rear right.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), a payout unit, and a payout unit. 8 (Figure 2
3), a board unit 9 (see FIGS. 2 and 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2
In addition, an LED unit 160 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the lower right of the game board unit 10. In this embodiment, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the plate unit 5, The launch device 6, the display device 7, the payout unit 8, and the board unit 9 will be briefly described below, and the game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described in detail later. 1 shows a reference drawing for the configuration.

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to an island facility of an amusement park. A hinge (no reference number) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is supported on this hinge. In this way, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward relative to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as an axis.

The outer frame 2 is connected to a dispensing unit 8, a base unit 9, and a
High strength is required to support many components such as the display device 7, the game board unit 10, the glass door 4, and the plate unit 5. On the other hand, there is a demand for larger display devices 7 (see FIG. 2) and game board units 10 in order to enhance the presentation effect. For this reason, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to reduce the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10.
It is possible to increase the size while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum,
It is also possible to reduce weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8 and a base unit 9 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 10 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 3. In addition, hinges (without reference numbers) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end of the base door 3, for example, on the front side of the left end, and the glass door 4 is journaled on the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 5 is journaled on the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end, respectively. In this way, the glass door 4 and the plate unit 5 can be rotated forward together or individually relative to the base door 3, with the hinges as an axis.

The launching device 6 is fixedly attached, for example, to the lower right side of the front surface of the base door 3, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to the left and right of the upper side. The speakers 32 output, for example, sound effects of characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio notifications, error notifications, and other sound effects.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side opposite to the hinge (i.e., the right end) of the base door 3. This locking device has the function of locking the base door 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member having an opening 41. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the rear side of the opening 41. When the glass door 4 is closed against the base door 3, the game area 105 (
4 described later) faces the protective glass 43. In this manner, the playing area 105 can be viewed from the front with the glass door 4 closed relative to the base door 3, and the playing balls flowing down the playing area 105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

The protective glass 43 may be a plurality of pieces of glass (e.g., two pieces) attached with a gap between them, or a plurality of pieces of glass may be unitized with a gap between them. Furthermore, if the protective glass 43 is a unitized glass, a light guide plate, for example, may be provided between the pieces of glass. The protective glass 43 is not limited to being made of glass, and may be made of, for example, a transparent resin.

In addition, an operation unit 66 that can be operated by, for example, a player to receive a game information providing service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)") is provided at the bottom of the glass door 4. This operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover 45 is provided on the upper portion of the glass door 4, and is disposed in front of the speaker 32. A large number of LED groups 46 are disposed on the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4 for use in light emission effects, and a LED light source 47 is disposed in front of the LED groups 46.
1 and 2 is an LED cover, strictly speaking, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for performing a light-emitting performance in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting performance, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal or a lamp.

(Dish unit)
The tray unit 5 is a unit formed by combining an upper tray 51 and a lower tray 52. The tray unit 5 is disposed in the front lower portion of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4.
As described above, the upper tray 51 and the lower tray 52 are configured to be pivotable relative to the base door 3 so that, for example, when balls get stuck, a game parlor attendant can clear the jam. The tray unit 5 does not necessarily have to have an upper tray 51 and a lower tray 52, and may be configured as an integrated tray.

The upper tray 51 is provided so as to be capable of storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a performance button 54, and the like. The game balls to be lent or paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 to the upper tray 51. The performance button 54 is a so-called "C
The effect button 54 is called a "HANCE button" or a "push button". The effect button 54 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to an operation function operated by the player. An example of the predetermined effect function is a function such as vibrating or projecting upward based on the result of a process for determining whether a special symbol has been hit. The effect button 54 may also serve the function of the operation unit 66.

The lower tray 52 is mainly for storing game balls that have overflowed from the upper tray 51.
2 is provided with a payout outlet 55 communicating with the upper tray 51, and game balls spilling over from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (without a reference symbol) that can be opened and closed by the player is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is in the open state, the lower tray 5
The game balls stored in the tray 52 can be transferred to a ball box placed under the lower tray 52. If a so-called per-machine counting system is installed on each machine, not only is a ball box unnecessary, but the game balls counted by the per-machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be used again for play.

(Launch device)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launching device 6 is disposed in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and below the right of the tray unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive unit (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is arranged so that when the tray unit 5 is closed relative to the base door 3, the tray unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 appear integrated in appearance.

The firing handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is connected to the panel body 61.
The drive device is disposed on the front side of the panel body 61. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 61, and is composed of, for example, a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 62, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

The game balls launched from the launching device 6 located at the lower right of the plate unit 5 are launched on the launch rail (
The balls pass through a guide rail 110 (not shown) and roll in an arc along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to be launched into the play area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The location of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the tray unit 5, but may be the lower left of the tray unit 5. In this case, the launching rail is not necessary, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, thereby increasing versatility.

(Display Device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached to the opening of the game panel 100 so that the display area faces the opening.
The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or may be one that projects an image using a projection device such as a projector. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, a performance identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern, a performance image according to the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern, a performance image during a big win game state, a demo performance image, a performance image showing the pending status of the variable display of the special pattern, and the like are displayed.
In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but the display device 7 may also be attached to the base door 3 as long as the display area of the display device 7 is positioned facing the opening of the game panel 100.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided for displaying the various performance images described above, but it is also possible to provide multiple display devices (for example, two) and use these multiple display devices to display the performance images.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see Figures 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, etc. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see Figures 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When a payout condition is met, the payout device 82 receives the game balls from the storage tank 80 through the ball passage 81.
Of the game balls supplied to the payout unit 8, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, for example, onto the upper tray 51. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the rear side of the payout unit 8 as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see Figs. 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted, and a sub-control board 9 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later) is mounted.
2. The board unit 9 is provided with a payout/launch control board 93 which implements a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see Figure 6 described below) that controls the payout/launch of game balls, and a power supply board which implements a power supply circuit 450 (see Figure 6 described below) that supplies power.

In FIG. 3, for convenience, a main control board 91, a sub-control board 92, and a payout/launch control board 9
3 and a power supply board 94 are shown by reference numerals, and these boards are all housed in a board case.

In this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 92 may be configured with multiple boards by forming all or part of a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, and a role-play control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6 for all of these) described later on separate boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the launched game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 110, a center role 115 disposed in the approximate center of the game area 105, a first start port 120, a general winning port 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric role unit 130, a second start port 140, a normal electric role unit 145, an LED unit 160, and an outlet 178.
and a back unit (not shown) disposed behind the game board unit 10.
As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the gaming area 105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) on which a decorative body is provided to enhance the presentation effect is disposed behind the gaming panel 100. The gaming panel 100 is made of a transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the gaming panel 10
The entirety of the game panel 10 may be made of a transparent material, or, for example, only a portion of the decorative body provided on the back unit that can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent material.
00 may be constructed from materials that do not have transparent parts (e.g., wood), with transparent materials provided in some areas to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the rear unit can be seen from the front, but the entire game panel 100 may be made transparent, or only a portion of it may be made transparent.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which are not designated by reference numerals). The play area 105 is defined by the guide rail 110.
The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 6 (see Figure 6 described below) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(Center role)
The center gambling device 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (not shown) of the gaming panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 on the upper side.
The game ball shot toward 5 is distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, the area of the game area 105 to the left of the center role 115 is referred to as the left area 106, and the area to the right of the center role 115 is referred to as the right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for the second and third pachinko game machines described later.

A game ball launched by the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107. A game ball flowing down the left area 106 or the right area 107 flows downward while changing its direction of travel due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figure 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 107.

In this specification, as an operation mode (hitting method) of the launch handle 62, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side area 106 is referred to as a “left hit”, and a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right side area 107 is referred to as a “left hit”.
The hitting style in which the game ball is shot so as to flow down the left side area 106 is called a “right hit.” In this way, the player can hit the game ball toward either the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

In addition, a warp entrance 117 is formed on the outer periphery of the left side of the center role 115, through which game balls flowing down the left area 106 can enter. The game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center role 115.
The stage 118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 7. The stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage.

At the rear of the stage 118, approximately at the center in the left-right direction, there is a chance entrance 119 through which a game ball can enter.
is formed, and the game ball that enters the chance entrance 119 is configured to be released directly above the first start opening 120. Therefore, the game ball that enters the chance entrance 119 is
The probability of the game ball entering (passing) the first start port 120 is higher than that of a game ball that does not enter the warp port 117 or a game ball that enters the warp port 117 but does not enter the chance port 119.

(First starting point)
The first start hole 120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win). When a game ball wins in the first start hole 120, a first start hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later) is turned on.
Refer to FIG. 13.) It should be noted that a game ball hit from the right may be able to win in the first starting hole 120. Also, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120, a first starting hole may be provided that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win).

When the first start hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 120, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot of the first special symbol, a symbol random number value of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach of the first special symbol,
and various random numbers such as a random number for selecting the effect of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the various extracted data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to in this specification as the "variation start condition of the first special symbol") is established, the various stored data are used in the winning determination process of the first special symbol. When a gaming ball enters the first start hole 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting entry of the first special symbol, and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol,
The random number value of the first special symbol, the random number value for reach judgment of the first special symbol, and the random number value for performance selection of the first special symbol, etc. are called the start information of the first special symbol. In addition, storing the start information of the first special symbol until the start condition is established is called reservation. The same applies to the second special symbol.

(General prize entry)
The general winning openings 122 are arranged in a plurality of general winning openings 122 at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 123 (see Figure 6 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 122 is not limited to four.

In this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 2, a general winning hole may be provided through which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 125 is located in the right area 107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 127 (see Figure 6 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126.

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126,
Various data related to the normal symbols (e.g., random numbers for determining whether the normal symbols are winning, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (e.g., up to four). The stored various data are used for the process of determining whether the normal symbols are winning. Note that even if the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 126, no prize balls are paid out. Also, the passing gate unit 125 may be arranged in the left region 106 instead of or in addition to the right region 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is referred to as a start passage, and various data related to the normal symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, etc.) is referred to as the start information of the normal symbol. In addition, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is satisfied is referred to as a hold.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric device unit 130 includes a big winning hole 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning hole 131, and a special electric device 133.
The special electric role unit 130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 131 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win a prize (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 131 described above, a large prize opening into which a game ball hit from the left can win a prize may be arranged, or a large prize opening into which a game ball can win a prize may be arranged above the center role 115.

The big prize opening 131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player. When the entry of a game ball into the big prize opening 131 is detected by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, when the big prize opening 1
The number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of a gaming ball on 31 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric device 133, i.e., the special electric shutter 134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass) the large prize opening 131 easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter (pass) the large prize opening 131 easily. In addition, in the big win game state, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the large prize opening 131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 140 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120). However, the second starting hole 140 is configured such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win, for example, due to game pins, etc., and a game ball hit to the right is guided to the vicinity of the second starting hole 140 so that it can win. However, the second starting hole 14
It is not essential that the pixel 0 be configured in this way, and it may be provided in the right region 107, for example.
In addition, the second starting hole 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit from the left can win.

When the entry (passage) of the game ball into the second start hole 140 is detected by the second start hole switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later), various data related to the second special symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot of the second special symbol, a symbol random number value of the second special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach of the second special symbol,
and various random numbers such as a random number for selecting the effect of the second special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to in this specification as the "variation start condition of the second special symbol") is established, the stored various data is used for the winning determination process of the second special symbol. When a gaming ball enters the second start hole 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start hole 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric device unit 145 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, the lower left side of the first starting hole 120), and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into the winning hole, and the normal electric device 146.
This is called a starting port 140, and the above switch is called a second starting port switch 141.

The normal electric device 146 includes a normal power movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chute and is made of, for example, a blade member, and a normal power solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described below) that operates the normal power movable member 147. The normal electric device 146, i.e., the normal power movable member 147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second start hole 140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 140. The normal power movable member 147 includes blade types, door types, protruding plate types, etc.

(Outlet)
The outlet 178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 105 but have not won any of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120, the second starting hole 140, the big winning hole 131, the general winning hole 122, etc.) out of the machine. This outlet 178 is
It is provided at the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged outside the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 122, so that game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be discharged outside the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is for decorating the game board unit 10, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a group of performance-use props 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as movable props controlled by the sub-control circuit 300. The group of performance-use props 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one of the props or prop-use prop component members constituting the props among the group of performance-use props 58 functions as a performance-use prop that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is disposed in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10, outside the play area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal pattern display section 161, a reserve display section for normal patterns 162, a first special pattern display section 163, a second special pattern display section 164, a reserve display section for first special patterns 165, a reserve display section for second special patterns 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time-saving notification display section 168.

(Normal pattern display section)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process, and is equipped with normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol starting condition") is satisfied, the normal symbol display LEDs 161
The variable display of the normal symbol is started, in which the normal symbols 161a, 161b are alternately turned on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the normal symbol was started, the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the result of the winning determination process of the normal symbol is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process is a normal symbol winning, the normal symbol display LED 161
A combination of the on/off of the LEDs 161a and 161b is a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned on and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned off. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a miss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a is turned off and the normal symbol display LED 161b is turned on. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric role 146 is operated, and the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, making it easy for the game ball to enter (pass) through the second starting hole 140.

(Regular pattern reserved display section)
The reserved display unit 162 for normal symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of normal symbols") when the start information of the normal symbols, i.e., the variable display, is reserved, and is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above "variable display of normal symbols is reserved" refers to the state from when the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are hit, etc.) are extracted until the start condition of the normal symbols is established. The start condition of the normal symbols is established when at least the following is satisfied: the normal symbols are not being variable displayed, and the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved.

The ordinary symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of reserved ordinary symbols by a combination of the on/off of the ordinary symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved ordinary symbols is one, the ordinary symbol reserved display LED 162a is turned on and the ordinary symbol reserved display LED 162b is turned off. Also, when the number of reserved ordinary symbols is two,
Both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols are lit. Also, when the reserved number of normal symbols is three, the reserved display LED 162a for normal symbols flashes and the reserved display LED 162b for normal symbols is lit. Furthermore, when the reserved number of normal symbols is four, both of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols flash. However, the display mode of the reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols, which indicate the reserved number of normal symbols, is not limited to this.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164.
The second special symbol display unit 164 includes a first special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "start condition of the first special symbol") is satisfied, the eight LEDs 163a to 163b constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 are turned on.
The variable display of the first special symbol, in which all or part of 63h alternately or mutually lights up and goes out, is started. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol started,
The variable display of the special symbol stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot, a combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the first special symbol display section 163 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is displayed stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "start condition of the second special symbol") is satisfied, the eight LEDs 164a to 164b constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 are turned on.
The variable display of the second special symbol, in which all or part of 64h alternately or mutually lights up and goes out, is started. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the second special symbol started,
The variable display of the special symbol stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol is derived.

When the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot, a combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 becomes a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is displayed stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reserved display section)
The special pattern reserve display unit displays the number of reserved special pattern variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special patterns") when start information for a special pattern, i.e., a variable display, is reserved, and is provided with a first special pattern reserve display unit 165 and a second special pattern reserve display unit 166.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol reserved display unit 165 is
The number of reserved first special symbols is displayed. The reserved display LED 165a for the first special symbol
, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is reserved" means that the first starting hole 1
After the entry (passage) of the game ball into number 20 is detected and the start information of the first special symbol is extracted,
This refers to the state until the starting conditions for the first special pattern are met.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 includes first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b.
The number of reserved first special symbols is displayed by a combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b. For example, when the number of reserved first special symbols is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a is lit and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is extinguished. When the number of reserved first special symbols is two, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. When the number of reserved first special symbols is three, the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit.
The ED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved first special symbols is four, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a
However, the display mode of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b, which indicate the reserved number of the first special symbol, is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 is configured to display a reserved variable display of the second special symbol.
The number of reserved second special symbols is displayed. The reserved display LED 166a for the second special symbol
, 166b. "The variable display of the second special symbol is reserved" means that the second starting hole 1
After the entry (passage) of the game ball into 40 is detected and the start information of the second special symbol is extracted,
This refers to the state until the starting conditions for the second special pattern are met.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 includes second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b.
The number of reserved second special symbols is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the reserved display LED 166a for the second special symbol is lit and the reserved display LED 166b for the second special symbol is extinguished. When the number of reserved second special symbols is two, both the reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol are lit. When the number of reserved second special symbols is three, the reserved display LEDs 166a for the second special symbol are lit and the reserved display LED 166b for the second special symbol is extinguished.
The ED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reserved second special symbols is four, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a
However, the display mode of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the reserved number of the second special symbol is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on while the probability change control described below is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability variable notification display unit 167 may be configured to light up while probability variable control is being executed, but it may also be configured not to light up so that it is not possible to tell from the outside that probability variable control is being executed, thereby concealing the fact that probability variable control is being executed.

However, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable control, the backup capacitor 2 described later will
By the function of 07, the data indicating that the probability variable control is being executed is not lost. Therefore, if the power is cut off during the execution of the probability variable control and then the power is turned on, the probability variable notification display unit 167 lights up in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that the probability variable control is being executed.

In addition, even if whether or not the probability variable control is being executed is kept secret before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the probability variable notification display unit 167 is turned on to inform the user.
It is configured so that it is possible to know that the probability variation control is being executed.

(Time-saving notification display unit)
The time-saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time-saving control described below is being executed, and is configured with, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In the present embodiment, the time-saving notification display unit 168 is, for example, a first time-saving notification display unit 168
However, the number of time reduction notification display units 168 is not limited to this.

In addition, although details will be described later, the time-saving game state includes a time-saving game state A, a time-saving game state B, and a time-saving game state C. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to know which time-saving game state is being used by a combination of lighting or extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and the second time-saving notification display unit 168b.

The time-saving notification display unit 168 displays the first time-saving notification display unit 168a in response to the time-saving control being executed.
Alternatively/and the second time-saving notification display unit 168b may be turned on, but for example, it may be turned on or off in a manner that makes it impossible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), thereby concealing the fact that time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed. In particular, while it may be possible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to know from the outside which time-saving control is being executed, so by concealing the type of time-saving control being executed, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the time-saving control, the backup capacitor 2 described later is
By the function of 07, not only the data indicating that the time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of the time-saving control being executed is not lost. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the time-saving control is being executed and then the power is turned on, the time-saving notification display unit 168 turns on or off in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that the time-saving control is being executed and the type of the time-saving control being executed.

Furthermore, even if the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed are concealed so that they cannot be seen from the outside before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the time-saving notification display unit 168 is configured to be turned on and/or off in a manner that allows the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed to be seen from the outside.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG.
2 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine;

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 204, and a backup capacitor 207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 is configured with a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors the operation of the main CPU.
It also has built-in functions such as a password timer and fraud prevention features.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. The main RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201.
Although a RAM is used as the temporary storage area 201, the present invention is not limited to this and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to the main RAM 203 so that data stored in the main RAM 203 is not lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 also includes an I/O port 205 that is communicatively connected to various devices, and a command output port 206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, normal symbol reserved display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, first special symbol reserved display unit 165, second special symbol reserved display unit 166, probability change notification display unit 167, time reduction notification display unit 168, normal power solenoid 148, and special power solenoid 135 are connected to the main control circuit 200. In addition to these, a performance display monitor 170 and an error notification monitor 172 are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by transmitting a signal via the I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is data indicating, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (e.g., 60,000 balls) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 172 displays an error code.
In addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. may be displayed on 72. Note that, as the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol display (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 200 includes a first start port switch 121 and a second start port switch 141.
, the pass gate switch 127, the count switch 132, and the general winning port switch 1
When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to I/O port 2
05 to the main control circuit 200.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 184 used when transmitting data to a hall computer 186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, and setting keys 174 that are operated to change or check the setting values in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later.
A backup clear switch 176 is connected to the main RAM 203, which can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 in response to an operation by an amusement center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing a setting value, which will be described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing a setting value may be provided.

Moreover, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (e.g., a player) other than the manager of the game arcade. "In a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176, and a case in which the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key 174 and/or the backup clear switch 176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back surface.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but are not limited thereto. For example, the payout/launch control circuit 40
0 or the power supply circuit 450. In this case, it is also preferable to prevent a third party other than the manager of the game arcade from easily touching the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, and a work RAM 303.
6, the sub-control circuit 300 is equipped with a sub-control circuit 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a role-playing device control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores a program for controlling the game presentation of the first pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 301, various tables, and the like.
The sub-CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub-CPU 301 performs control related to game presentation in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 301 .

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

In response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 301, the display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer.
The image data to be displayed on the display screen includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and image data for effects.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32.
In response to a voice generation command from the audio source IC 301, one piece of voice data is selected from a plurality of pieces of voice data stored in the audio data ROM. The audio source IC also reads out the selected voice data from the audio data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the converted voice signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46 including decorative LEDs, etc. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The role control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more roles among the group of performance role objects 58). The role control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role object, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, a role data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored, and the like.

In addition, the reel control circuit 307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. In addition, the lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200 .

[1-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, and a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending.
etc. are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 182 is connected to the card unit 180. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, but
It may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) in accordance with the rotation angle (amount of rotation), thereby controlling the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.

A power switch 95 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 450. The power switch 95 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. Fig. 7 is an example of a game flow. Fig. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. Note that the game flow shown in Fig. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be grasped from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120, etc.), a payout control process of the game ball is performed. Pachinko games include a "special symbol game" using a special symbol and a "normal symbol game" using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a special symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting hole 120, 140, and whether or not to transition to a big win game state is determined. In addition, the normal symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process of a normal symbol is performed based on the passage of a game ball into the passing gate 126, and whether or not to open a winning hole (in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140) is determined by operating the normal electric role 146. In this specification, a "special pattern game" may be referred to as a "game," however, "game" is a term used in a broad sense, and for example, normal pattern games and games with effects that use operating units such as the effect button 54 (see, for example, Figure 1) are also included in "game."

In this specification, one special symbol game is defined as the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts until the variable display ends and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is displayed (derived) (more specifically, until the special symbol determination time has elapsed). However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived and the game is controlled to a big hit game state, one special symbol game is defined as the period until the end of the big hit game state. Note that, in the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in the pachinko game machine in which a small hit is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, one special symbol game is defined as the period until the end of the small hit game state when the game is controlled to a small hit game state after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived.

When a stop display mode indicating a jackpot in the special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the special electric device 133 is operated to open the jackpot winning hole 131 for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30 minutes).
A round game is played in which the large prize opening 131 is open for a period of time (for example, 100000 msec), and the possibility of winning at the large prize opening 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, in the normal symbol game, the stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win is set to the normal symbol display unit 16
When the ball is led out to 1, the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140 in this embodiment) is opened by the operation of the normal electric device 146, and the possibility of winning through the second starting hole 140, for example, is relatively increased.

It should be noted that games that can be executed in a pachinko game are not limited to special symbol games and normal symbol games, and new games different from these may also be executable.

The following provides an overview of the game flow for special symbol games and regular symbol games.

[1-3-1. Special symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a first starting hole 120 or a second starting hole 122.
A special symbol start winning process that is performed when a winning (passing) occurs at the start port 140; and
This includes a special symbol control process that is carried out based on the establishment of a special symbol starting condition.

When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140, a special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (e.g., various random numbers such as a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for pattern, a random number value for reach determination, and a random number value for performance selection) are extracted (obtained) from various counters for special symbols (e.g., a counter for jackpot determination, a counter for pattern determination, etc.). Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even while the special symbol control process is being executed.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. When the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, a special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not there is a "big hit" by referring to a random number value for determining a big hit extracted from a counter for determining a big hit of the special symbol. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine a stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped is determined by referring to the random number value for determining a symbol extracted from the counter for determining a symbol of the special symbol and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the probability variable flag is on, the probability variable control is executed. In the above-mentioned special symbol winning judgment process, if the probability variable flag is off, it is judged to be a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variable flag is on, it is judged to be a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being judged to be a "jackpot" is referred to as the "jackpot probability."

The probability variable flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not the probability variable control is executed. When the probability variable flag is on, the game proceeds in a game state in which the probability variable control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the probability variable flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time-saving game state).

Next, a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the special symbol is determined by referring to the random number, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Then, a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, a performance pattern determination process is then performed to determine the performance pattern. Then, based on the result of the performance pattern determination process, the display device 7
The sub-CPU 301 controls the display of the display area, such as decorative patterns and character effects, and the sound effects, such as voice and sound effects, output from the speaker 32. The control process is performed by the sub-CPU 301.

Then, when the special symbol variable display control process and the presentation control process are completed and it is a jackpot, a jackpot game control process is performed. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in a jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-jackpot game state is performed. In this case, the game state transitions according to the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is one in which both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to on, the game state transitions to a high probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if it is not a big win, i.e., if it is a miss, the special symbol game ends. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in the pachinko game machine in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, a small win game control process is performed when a small win is won. In addition, if it is not a big win but is a time-saving hit described later, the game transitions to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the starting condition for the special symbol is satisfied, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, if a game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start winning process is executed. Also, the start information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 (for example, various data such as random numbers for jackpot determination, special symbol random number, reach determination random number, and effect selection random number) is reserved until the start condition of the special symbol is established.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the start information of the special symbols can be reserved up to a maximum of eight in total, consisting of four pieces of start information of the first special symbol and four pieces of start information of the second special symbol, but the number of start information of the special symbols that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, the start information of the first special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the second special symbol, or the start information of the second special symbol may be reserved more than the start information of the first special symbol.

7, a look-ahead determination (see, for example, S396 in FIG. 52 described later) may be performed to determine whether or not a special symbol will win (whether or not a "jackpot" will be won) and the variation pattern prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the start information extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the start hole 120, 140 between the start entry of the special symbol and the establishment of the start condition of the special symbol, and a look-ahead performance function may be provided to perform a predetermined performance based on the result of this look-ahead determination. Note that the look-ahead determination may be performed before or after the start information extracted by the entry of the game ball into the start hole 120, 140 is reserved.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal pattern game mainly includes a normal pattern start passing process which is carried out when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and a normal pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, a normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information for the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol) is extracted (obtained) from a winning determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit judgment random number value extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, executes the normal symbol hit judgment process to determine whether the normal symbol is a hit, and then executes the variation pattern determination process. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display control process to control the variable display of the normal symbols by referring to the result of the winning determination process of the normal symbols and the determined variable pattern of the normal symbols;
Also, a performance control process is executed to perform a predetermined performance. Note that there are cases where the performance control process is not executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance control process of the normal pattern are completed, the main CPU
201 judges whether or not a normal winning pattern indicating a "normal winning pattern" has been derived to the normal pattern display section 161 (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6). When it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning pattern has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal winning pattern game control process. In this normal winning pattern game control process, the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) is operated, and the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)) is opened so that the winning (passing) of the game ball can be or is easily opened. On the other hand, when it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning pattern has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal winning pattern game control process and ends the normal pattern control process.

In addition, in a game state where the time-saving control is not executed (for example, a normal game state), the probability of deriving a stop display mode indicating a normal win may be set to 0. The time-saving control includes a special symbol shortening control that shortens the variable display time of the special symbol compared to when the time-saving control is not executed, and a winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140 in this embodiment (see FIG. 4)) that operates the normal electric role 146.
This time-saving control may be a control that performs both the special chart shortening control and the electric support control, or a control that performs only one of the special chart shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control is a control that improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role 146. The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of a game ball entering a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)),
Probability of winning "normal symbol", variable display time of normal symbol, or/and normal electric device 1
46 opening patterns (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.). In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier for the game ball to enter the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, for example, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when the electric support control is executed, compared to when the electric support control is not executed, the winning probability of "normal symbol hit" is increased, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and/or winning is made easier by the normal electric role 146 (increasing the number of openings, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.).

Then, each time the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is reserved until the start condition of the normal symbol is established.

The variable display of the normal symbols is started in the order in which they are reserved, and when the start condition of the normal symbols is established, the variable display is executed for the start information that was reserved first among the reserved start information of the normal symbols.

In addition, various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot of the first special symbol, a pattern random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a jackpot of the second special symbol,
The method of extracting the random number values for the special pattern, the random number value for reach determination of the second special pattern, and the random number value for hit determination of the normal pattern, etc. may use a soft random number method in which random number values are generated within a specified range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 201, or a hard random number method in which random number values are extracted from a counter in a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a specified period.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game state transitions from the non-jackpot game state to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the jackpot game state. Note that the explanation of the small jackpot game state will be omitted.

The non-jackpot game state can be broadly divided into a low probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern hit determination process is relatively low, and a high probability game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern hit determination process is relatively high.

The high probability game state includes a high probability time-saving game state (high probability high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Note that, although not included in the high probability game state in the first pachinko game machine, a high probability non-time-saving game state (high probability low base state) in which time-saving control is not executed may be included in the high probability game state, as shown in FIG.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability, low base) in which time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving game state (low probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-shortened game state includes a time-shortened game state A, a time-shortened game state B, and a time-shortened game state C.

The time-saving game state A is a time-saving game state to which a player can enter after a specific big win game state ends, and the time-saving game state A ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when the player enters the big win game state. When the time-saving game state A ends due to the specified number of special symbol games being played, the player enters the normal game state in principle.

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a transition can be made when, for example, a jackpot game state ends and the variable display of special symbols in a non-high probability game state (i.e., a game state in which the probability flag is off) begins, or the number of times the special symbols are variable displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1,000 times), which starts when the RAM is cleared as described below, and the B time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition is made to the jackpot game state. When the B time-saving game state ends as a result of the specified number of special symbol games being played, a transition to the normal game state occurs, in principle.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a transition can be made when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol performed in the low probability state is a "time-saving hit" and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived,
The time-saving C game state ends when the special symbol game is played a set number of times determined by winning the "time-saving win" or when a transition is made to a big win game state. When the time-saving C game state ends by playing the special symbol game a set number of times, a transition is made to a normal game state, in principle. Note that, for example, if multiple time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is played a set number of times, the time-saving C game state continues, rather than transitioning to a normal game state.

In this specification, whether or not multiple time-shortened game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the establishment of a transition condition to a time-shortened game state in a time-shortened game state, or the establishment of transition conditions to multiple time-shortened game states simultaneously, is referred to as the time-shortened game states "overlapping." When multiple time-shortened game states overlap, the internal operation of all of the multiple overlapping time-shortened game states under the control of the main CPU 201, that is, the internal operation of the multiple overlapping time-shortened game states in parallel, is referred to as "executing in an overlapping manner." However, when the main CPU
Even if 201 internally executes a plurality of time-shortening game states in an overlapping manner, the time-shortening control that is actually executed is only the time-shortening control that corresponds to one of the time-shortening game states. In other words, even if a plurality of time-shortening game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player understands that the game is being controlled to one of the plurality of time-shortening game states.

Next, we will explain how the game state changes.

Normal game state, time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, C time-saving game state),
Even when the game is controlled to a high probability game state (for example, a high probability time-saving game state), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the game state transitions to a big hit game state.

When the big win game state ends, depending on the game specifications, the game state can be switched to any of the normal game state, the time-saving game state, and the high probability game state (for example, the high probability time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state to which the game state can be switched when the big win game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to the high probability game state, except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines, the high probability game state does not transition to the time-saving game state or the normal game state.
The time-saving game state or the normal game state does not transition to the high probability game state unless the big win game state is passed through.

When controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to transition to the time-shortened game state B or the time-shortened game state C, but it is not possible to transition to the time-shortened game state A unless via the jackpot game state.
However, since a transition to the normal game state occurs when a specified number of special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state A, a transition from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state is possible. Note that, regardless of whether the game is controlled in the time-saving game state B or the time-saving game state C, a transition to the normal game state occurs when a specified number of special symbol games are played, so a transition from the time-saving game state B or the time-saving game state C to the normal game state is also possible.

Next, we will explain how to transition between time-saving play states.

When controlled to the time-saving game state A, the number of time-saving times that can be executed in the time-saving game state A is set to a number less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the time-saving game state B, so there is no transition from the time-saving game state A to the time-saving game state B. Also, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state B to the time-saving game state A. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern in the time-saving game state A is a "time-saving hit", the transition condition to the time-saving game state C is established, so the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C may overlap. However, as described above, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state C to the time-saving game state A.

When the game is controlled to the B time-saving game mode, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit".
If the time-shortened game state is set to the value above, the condition for transition to the time-shortened game state C is met, and the time-shortened game state B and the time-shortened game state C may overlap. Also, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in the time-shortened game state C, the time-shortened game state C and the time-shortened game state B may overlap.

When the game is controlled in the C time-saving game mode, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit".
If so, a condition for transition to the C time-shortened gaming state is met, and the C time-shortened gaming state and the C time-shortened gaming state may overlap.

More details about overlapping time-saving game modes will be provided later.

[1-4. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG.

In the first pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which neither the probability variable control nor the time-saving control is executed, a high probability time-saving game state in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed, and a low probability time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is not executed but the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 can proceed with the game in any of these game states. However, the game states proceeded by the control of the main CPU 201 are not limited to these.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, a left hit is a regular game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, a right hit is a regular game mode.
The control is executed to display the hitting manner considered to be the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to the game mode that is the least disadvantageous to the player (the most advantageous to the player) among multiple game modes (for example, firing modes).

[1-4-1. Jackpot Probability for Each Setting Value]
9 is an example of a table showing the probability of winning (approximate) for each setting value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the setting key 17
4 or backup clear switch 176 (see FIG. 6) to set, for example, setting 1
The setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as setting 1 through setting 6. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the probability of a big win differs according to the setting value, and the main CPU 201 executes a process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won based on the set setting value.

Specifically, the probability of a jackpot in a game state in which the probability jackpot control is not executed and the probability jackpot flag is off (for example, in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), regardless of whether the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, is, for example, about 1 in 319 in setting 1, about 1 in 314 in setting 2, about 1 in 309 in setting 3, and about 1 in 4 in setting 5.
The probability of winning in a game state where the probability variation flag is on and the probability variation control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, the high probability time-saving game state) is about 1 in 77 in setting 1, about 1 in 76 in setting 2, and about 1 in 304 in setting 3, about 1 in 299 in setting 4, and about 1 in 294 in setting 5.
1 in 75 at setting 4, 1 in 74 at setting 5, 1 in 73 at setting 6, 1 in 72 at setting
It is as follows.

The time-saving hit probability is the same probability for all settings, unlike the jackpot probability. For example, the time-saving hit probability when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed is 1 in 160, and the time-saving hit probability when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed is 1 in 240. The time-saving hit probability may be different when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, or may be the same.

However, even if the probability of winning the time-saving function is the same for all the settings, the time-saving function continuation rate (for example, the number of times the time-saving function is set) may be different depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "time-saving function hit," the number of times the time-saving function may be set to 50 for setting 1, and 100 for setting 6.

In the first pachinko game machine, the small win is not included in the lottery, but the small win may be included in the lottery. When the small win is included in the lottery, the small win probability may be a common probability for all set values. Also, when the small win is included in the lottery, the small win may be won only when the hit determination process of one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (for example, the second special pattern) is performed. In this case, in the hit determination process of the other special pattern (for example, the first special pattern), in addition to a mode in which the determination of whether or not the small win has been won is not performed, a mode in which the small win probability is set to 0 and whether or not the small win has been won may be performed.

As described above, the above-mentioned time-saving hit probability and the small hit probability when small hits are included in the lottery targets are the same probability for all setting values, but are not limited to this and may be different probabilities depending on the setting value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a jackpot is different for each setting value, but this is not limited to this. For example, the probability of a jackpot may be the same for multiple setting values, such as a common jackpot probability for settings 1 and 2, a common jackpot probability for settings 3 and 4, and a common jackpot probability for settings 5 and 6.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is different depending on the setting value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the setting value, the target that differs depending on the setting value is not necessarily limited to the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, in a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a prize in the specific winning hole may be made different depending on the setting value. It is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol winning judgment table]
10 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 10 is an example of the case of setting 1 shown in FIG.

The special symbol winning judgment table is a table referred to in the winning judgment process of the special symbol, that is, a table referred to when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving winning", a "jackpot", or a "miss" is a winning result based on a random number value for winning judgment extracted when a game ball enters the start hole 120, 140. In this embodiment, the lottery objects are a "time-saving winning", a "jackpot", and a "miss", and other lottery objects (e.g., a small winning) are not included, but when a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or/and the second start hole 140, other lottery objects may be determined.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol is selected. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is 0 to 65535 (65536 types).
However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. In the hit determination table for the first special symbol, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variable flag.

In this specification, when the value of the probability flag is "0", the probability flag is off,
When the value of the probability variable flag is "1", the probability variable flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, similar to the hit determination process for the first special symbol. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variable flag.

In this embodiment, for example, the probability flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
If the extracted random number for determining a big win is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201
is judged as a "time-saving hit" and the hit/loss judgment value data is determined to be the "time-saving hit judgment value data."
In addition, when the probability of winning flag is OFF during the winning judgment process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for the big win judgment is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 judges whether the winning is a "big win".
If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning/losing determination value data is the "jackpot determination value data."
It is judged as "miss", and the judgment value data is determined as "miss judgment value data".

Also, for example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for the big hit determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and sets the determination value data to "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for the big hit determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and
The main CPU 201 determines the judgment value data as “jackpot judgment value data.” If the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines it as a “miss” and determines the judgment value data as “miss judgment value data.”

Similarly, for example, when the probability of winning flag is OFF during the winning determination process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for the winning determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201
The second judgment value data is determined to be "time-saving hit judgment value data".
When the probability of winning flag is OFF during the special symbol winning judgment process, and the extracted random number value for the big win judgment is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "big win",
The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data". Furthermore, when the winning judgment process of the second special symbol is performed, the probability variable flag is off and the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment is 478 to 65535.
If the result is either of the above, the main CPU 201 determines that the result is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to
The "miss judgment value data" is determined.

Also, for example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for the big hit determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and sets the determination value data to "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for the big hit determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "big hit" and
The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data". Furthermore, when the winning judgment process of the second special symbol is performed, the probability variable flag is on and the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment is 1124 to 6553.
If the result is any of the above, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "miss" and sets the judgment value data to "miss judgment value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, for example, of the random numbers for jackpot determination generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 in the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data are assigned adjacently. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag goes from off to on (or on to off), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the width of other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss determination value data by the amount that the width of the jackpot determination value data is increased (or decreased).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special pattern is performed is made different from the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special pattern is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in Figure 10, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special pattern is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special pattern is performed, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving win" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving win" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by executing the time-saving play state in a overlapping manner when the "time-saving win" is won in the time-saving play state, if the "time-saving win" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is substantially extended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

10, in this embodiment, whether the probability variable flag is on or off, the player can win a "time-shortened win." However, when the probability variable flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win," but when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win."

[1-4-3. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 11 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data.
The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops.
The random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2
".

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special pattern,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 2
01 selects "z4" as the selection command and "zA4" as the designation command
Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command, and selects "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the miss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special pattern,
Regardless of whether the random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.
The PU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and inputs "z
Select "A7".

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special pattern,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects
Select "z9" as the selection symbol command and select "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU
201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
Select "9".

In addition, when the miss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the second special pattern,
Regardless of whether the random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment by referring to the winning judgment table for the special symbol (see FIG. 10), and then the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol judgment table (see FIG. 11), but this is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12A shows the main ROM 20 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine.
2. The special symbol stop mode determination table is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 when the variable display of the special symbol stops.
This is referred to when determining the stopping mode of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) in response to the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of a 1-byte control signal composed of regions 0 to 7, for example. Each region 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) constituting the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, region 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, region 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, region 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, region 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d, region 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, region 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, region 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and region 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the regions 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) constituting the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, region 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, region 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, region 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, region 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d, region 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, region 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, region 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, and region 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit," the display mode (time-saving hit display mode) of the LEDs led to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the first special symbol display unit 163 by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the first special symbol area 0 and the LED 163h corresponding to the first special symbol area 7, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs.
When the selected symbol command is “z1”, the main CPU 201 selects the first special symbol display unit 163.
Of the eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern, LED 163a corresponds to area 0 of the first special pattern, LED 163b corresponds to area 1 of the first special pattern, and LED 163b corresponds to area 7 of the first special pattern.
When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 turns on LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol, LED 163c corresponding to area 2 of the first special symbol, and LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turns off the other LEDs, and determines to stop displaying the first special symbol display unit 163.
It is determined that the first special symbol display unit 163 is to be stopped and displayed. Also, the selected symbol command is "z
In the case of "7", the main CPU 201 controls the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164.
Among them, LED 164a corresponding to area 0 of the second special symbol, LED 164b corresponding to area 1 of the second special symbol, and LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol are turned on,
The main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the second special symbol display unit 164 in a state in which the other LEDs are turned off.
Among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 1664, the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol region 0, the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol region 2, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol region 7 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off.
It is decided to display 4 as stopped.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit", the special symbol display unit 163
For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 16 corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163.
3d, LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 4, and LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed.
The main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the first special symbol display section 163 by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display section 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 turns on the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display section 163.
Among the EDs, LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and LED 163b corresponding to the area 4 of the first special symbol
LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5,
The LED 163g corresponding to the special symbol area 6 is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, and the first special symbol display unit 163 is stopped and displayed.
In the case of "z10", the main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the second special symbol display section 164 in such a manner that, of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display section 164, the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3, the LED 164e corresponding to the second special symbol area 4, and the LED 164g corresponding to the second special symbol area 6 are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off.
Of the eight LEDs that make up 64, it is determined that LED 164d corresponding to area 3 of the second special pattern and LED 164f corresponding to area 5 of the second special pattern are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off, thereby stopping the display of the second special pattern display unit 164.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss", the special symbol display unit 163
For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 16, which corresponds to the area 7 of the first special symbol, from among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163.
The main CPU 201 determines to stop and display the first special symbol display unit 163 in such a manner that only the LED 3h is lit and the other LEDs are turned off.
Of the eight LEDs that constitute the second special pattern display unit 164, it is determined that only LED 164h corresponding to the second special pattern area 7 is lit, and the other LEDs are turned off, thereby causing the second special pattern display unit 164 to be displayed in a stopped state.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special pattern based on the results of the special pattern hit judgment process, it outputs a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to each LED that constitutes the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164, and controls the stopping mode of the special pattern that is output to the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164.

12A, the display mode of the LEDs led to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the display mode of the LEDs led to the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. However, it is preferable that the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164 transmit control signals separately.

FIG. 12B shows a program RO of the sub-control circuit 300 of the first pachinko gaming machine.
12(B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the M. The decorative symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative symbols derived when the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 stops in response to a symbol designation command. Note that the "Notes" column shown in FIG. 12(B) is shown for convenience of easy understanding.

In addition, since the first pachinko game machine can variably display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the display device 7 to perform a display performance for the variably displayed special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable that the sub-CPU 301 performs the display performance in a manner that allows the player to know whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 are, for example, nine symbols 1 to 9 on the left, ten symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol on the middle, and nine symbols 1 to 9 on the right. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is displayed in a stopped state when the game state transitions to a time-saving game state, for example, when the result of a special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By displaying the middle symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can understand that he or she has won the time-saving hit. In this embodiment, odd symbols are defined as symbols that are more advantageous to the player than even symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special symbol lottery includes a small win, for example, the symbols constituting the middle symbol may include a small win symbol (a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win). In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small win, the sub-CPU 301 stops and displays the middle symbol as a small win symbol, so that the player can understand that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the pattern designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special pattern lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative patterns, for example, by stopping the left and right patterns at even numbers and stopping the middle pattern at a time-saving pattern.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
When the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1", or "z7"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the left and right symbols as odd symbols and stops the center symbol as a time-saving symbol, for example, as a stopping mode of the decorative symbols. When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as will be understood by referring to FIG. 13 described later, the number of time-saving times set is greater than when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1", or "z7"), and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
In the case of a "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, the right symbol, and the center symbol in a matching odd-numbered pattern (a triplet).

If the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (the result of the special symbol lottery is "
In the case of "jackpot", the sub-CPU 301 stops the left, right and center symbols in a pattern of even numbers (double numbers) as the stopping mode of the decorative symbols. As will be understood from FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" may cause the probability variable flag to be set on (when the selected symbol command is "z4") or not to be set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5") after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop in a pattern of even numbers (double numbers), and may perform a promotion effect indicating a probability variable win (a win in which the probability variable flag is set on) in the jackpot game state.

Also, as will be seen from FIG. 13, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the expected value of the probability of the probability flag being set to ON after the end of the big win game state is smaller than when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8".
Or, when the symbol designation command is "zA8", the degree of advantage to the player is higher than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

If the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (if the result of the special symbol lottery is "miss"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols in a scattered pattern. The scattered pattern corresponds to a stop mode in which at least one of the left, right, and center symbols is different from the other symbols, for example.

FIG. 12(B) illustrates an example of the stopping mode of the decorative pattern according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the pattern designation command is "zA1", the left pattern is "2", the middle pattern is "time saving", and the right pattern is "4"), but the stopping modes shown in the decorative pattern stopping mode column in FIG. 12(B) are merely examples and are not limited to these.

[1-4-5. Winning Type Determination Table]
13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or/and the mode of the subsequent game state according to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state, so the mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 determines to set only the time-saving flag out of the probability-changing flag and the time-saving flag to ON, and determines to set the number of time-saving times to 10.
In the case of "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to ON, and decides to set the time-saving count to 50. In the case of the selected symbol command being "z2" and "z8", the main CP
U201 decides to set only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. When the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then sets the time-saving flag to ON and sets the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the big win game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the big win game state is not controlled, so the mode of the big win game state is not determined. Note that, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. However, this is not limited to the above, and the number of time-saving times to be set may be varied depending on the game state when the process for determining whether or not a special symbol has been hit is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times that is set is different according to the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variation in the progress of the game thereafter, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-limited game state even if the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-limited win". For example, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-limited game state even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state).
Even if it is, as shown in FIG. 10, a lottery for a "time-saving win" is performed, and if the result of the win determination process is a "time-saving win", a display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but without controlling to the C time-saving game state,
The high probability gaming state may be continued.

In addition, the main CPU 201 may draw a lottery for a "time-saving hit" when the special probability flag is on, and may forcibly derive a miss display mode to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, that is, the hit determination process may be performed without including "time-saving hit" in the lottery result (the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern). In this case, when the probability variable flag is off, the time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, and when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the range of random numbers that was assigned to the time-saving hit determination value data when the probability variable flag is off is assigned to the miss determination value data, the jackpot determination value data, or both the miss determination value data and the jackpot determination value data, instead of the time-saving hit determination value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the game may be configured to transition to a high probability time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the state of the hit game state and the state of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 20
In step 1, the number of rounds is determined as 10 rounds as the mode of the big win game state. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it is determined that both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, and it is determined that both the probability variable number of times and the time-saving number of times are set to 10,000 times.
In these cases, the main CPU 201 changes the display mode of the jackpot described above to the special symbol display section 16.
After the result is derived to 3,164, the game state is controlled to a big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, the game state can be controlled to a high probability time-shortened game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the big win game state to be 4 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag to ON, and determines to set both the probability change number and the time-saving number to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 2
01, after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special pattern display unit 163, it controls it to a jackpot gaming state, and after the end of this jackpot gaming state, it becomes possible to control it to a high-probability time-saving gaming state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the big win game state to be 4 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag is set to ON.
Also, it is determined that the number of time-saving times to be set is, for example, 200. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state.

Also, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the jackpot game state. Also, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag is set to ON among the probability change flag and the time-saving flag. Also, it determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot to the second special symbol display unit 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it can be controlled to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is also the A time-saving game state.

In addition, it is preferable that the time-saving performance in the high-probability time-saving game state is the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the main CPU 201 does not set either the mode of the big win game state or the mode of the subsequent game state.
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not change the game state, but continues control in the previous game state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), as described above, neither the mode of the big win game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is set, so it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of Fig. 13. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is shown in Fig. 13 to clearly show that, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss", neither the mode of the big win game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 10, and determines winning/losing determination value data based on the random number value for winning/losing determination extracted when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140 (performs winning/losing determination),
The result of the lottery (won or lost) is decided. Then, the main CPU
11, and determines a selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 and the above-mentioned winning/losing judgment value data, and determines the type of display mode (type of time-saving winning or type of big winning) to be derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing judgment and selection of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but this is not intended to exclude the case where the judgment is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times of the A time-saving game state controlled after the end of the big win game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5").
, or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). On the other hand, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z
In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the position of a "jackpot" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state.

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, for example, as shown in Figure 14, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state. Figure 14 is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in Figure 13.
In the case of 4, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (the selection symbol command is "z5",
In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving gaming state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1", "z
7") or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8").
In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous to the player than the time-saving game state A, the positioning of the "time-saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which a "jackpot" is not won continues for a long period of time, if a "time-saving hit" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous time-saving game state C, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In this specification, as in the case of the special bonus flag, when the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the time-saving flag is off, and when the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the time-saving flag is on.

The time-saving flag, like the probability change flag, is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time-saving control.

The time-saving count is the number of times that the special symbols can be displayed variably while the time-saving control is continued. That is, for example, if the time-saving count is determined to be "50", when the special symbols are displayed variably 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and transitions to a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state).

In addition, the number of times of special mode and time-saving mode shown in Figure 13, etc., "10,000" is intended to allow the special mode control to be continuously executed after the end of the jackpot game state until it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (i.e., the next jackpot).

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 15 is shown for the sake of convenience.
The time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C shown in the column are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A, B, C, and D
, E is a reach effect that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a possibility for both a time-saving hit and a big hit. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variable flag is off, and the illustration of the variation pattern table of the special symbol when the probability variable flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140. The variation pattern table of the special symbol in Fig. 15 is a table that is referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol in S96 in Fig. 28 described later.

As shown in Figure 15, the change pattern of the special pattern is determined based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process (win/lose), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), a random number value for reach determination, and/or a random number value for performance selection, but is not limited to this and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 301, which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 301 may make the decision.

In addition, the main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform the look-ahead performance) even when the time-saving flag or the probability variable flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 may set the look-ahead flag (to perform the look-ahead performance).

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of fluctuations per unit time of the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern is smaller than that when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time-saving flag is on tends to be shorter than that when the time-saving flag is off.

The determined fluctuation pattern information is transmitted to the main CPU 20 via the command output port 206.
1 to a command input port 308 of the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32, based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the determined special symbol may be made different for each set value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the winning judgment process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether the time-saving flag is on regardless of the type of time-saving, but this is not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of the special symbol per unit time may be different depending on the type of time-saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display number of the special symbol per unit time may be different between the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time-saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming states are the time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state B, and the time-saving gaming state C. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transition to the A time-saving game state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot with a selected symbol command of "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the transition condition to the A time-saving game state is established, the game does not necessarily transition to the A time-saving game state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the A time-saving game state is established (for example, if the backup is cleared), the game does not transition to the A time-saving game state.

In addition, the condition for terminating the A time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is initiated, or a variable display of special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected pattern command (hereinafter referred to as the "A time-saving specified number of times") is executed (see the "Number of time-saving times" column in Figure 13).

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value by updating (adding 1) the ceiling counter, starting, for example, from the end of a jackpot game state and the start of variable display of special symbols in a non-high probability game state (for example, in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment). That is, the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving game state may be when the variable display of special symbols when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final variation") starts, or when the ceiling final variation ends, or when the variable display of the next special symbol after the ceiling final variation starts. That is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the ceiling final variation and the start of variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the ceiling final variation is "
In the case of "miss", the display mode of the miss is derived on the special symbol display section 163, 164, but the game state is shifted to the B time-saving game state. In this case, the sub-CPU 301 displays a display effect (for example, stopping the decorative symbol with a special symbol,
A control may be performed to display on the display device 7 a special effect by a character, or an effect in which both are performed. Even if the condition for transition to the B time-shortened game state is met, transition to the B time-shortened game state is not necessarily performed. If a condition preventing transition to the B time-shortened game state is met (for example, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a jackpot, etc.), transition to the B time-shortened game state is not performed.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variable flag is on, and is always counted when the probability variable flag is off, regardless of whether the time-saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the machine is controlled to the B time-saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "big hit". In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", the B time-saving game state may be started when the display mode of the small hit is derived to the special symbol display section 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small hit game state ends. In other words, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small hit is displayed on the special symbol display section 163, 164, and no display effect is displayed to inform the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above. In the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the setting value. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot".
If so, the game is controlled to the big win game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, the ceiling counter is
When a clear process (backup clear process) of the working area (volatile area) in the AM 203 is performed, a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 17
The ceiling counter is reset when a predetermined condition is met, such as when the normal symbol hit probability is changed by operating the dedicated switch (4 or a dedicated switch), or when the high probability of the normal symbol hit ends in a gaming machine in which the normal symbol hit probability can be changed. Then, when the ceiling counter is allowed to be updated, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed,
The ceiling counter is updated. For example, if the probability flag is on, the ceiling counter is not allowed to be updated.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the next variable display of the special symbol.
It may be set by the main CPU 201, or it may be predetermined as something specific to the pachinko gaming machine, rather than being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared due to being controlled to the big win game state, if the probability variable flag is not on after the end of the big win game state, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol. Also, if the probability variable flag is on after the end of the big win game state, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special symbol is performed, but for example, in the case of a specification that performs an ST machine or a probability variable drop lottery, the ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after the probability variable flag is turned off. Note that, in the case of a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the probability variable flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, if the probability variable flag is off at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko game machine in which the probability drop lottery is performed by the main CPU 201, it is preferable that the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving a command transmitted from the main CPU 201, does not perform a presentation suggesting that the probability drop lottery has been won or a presentation suggesting a transition from a high probability game state to a low probability game state. By doing so, the start time of the count by the ceiling counter, i.e., the transition timing to the B time-saving game state, is not displayed on the display device 7.
It becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing of the transition to the B time-shortened game state based on the display effects and the like displayed on the display device 7, and it becomes possible to provide an interesting game. When it is difficult to grasp the timing of the transition to the B time-shortened game state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the timing of the transition to the B time-shortened game state or a false countdown effect can be displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub-CPU 301, thereby making it possible to further increase interest.

In addition, when a clearing process (backup clearing process) of the working area (volatile area) in RAM 203 is performed, the main CPU 201 updates (increments by 1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the clearing process of the working area in RAM 203.

Furthermore, a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (e.g., the setting key 17
4 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated (
+1).

The end condition of the B time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started; or the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "B time-saving specified number of times"). One of the end conditions of the B time-saving game state, "when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times for the B time-saving", is the variable display of special symbols for the B time-saving specified number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "final change of the B time-saving").
In other words, the end timing of the B time-saving game state may be any timing between the start of the B time-saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the B time-saving final variation.

The time-saving game state C is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit." That is, the condition for transitioning to the time-saving game state C is that a time-saving hit (a selected symbol command of "z0" to "z2,""z7," or "z8" is hit) is won, and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived (determined display) on the special symbol display section 163, 164.
In addition, even if the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is satisfied, the game does not necessarily transition to the C time-saving game state. If a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving game state is satisfied (for example, in a case where the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed in parallel (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit", etc.), the game will not transition to the C time-saving game state.
In addition, when a condition for preventing the transition to the C time-shortened game state is satisfied even though the condition for transition to the C time-shortened game state is satisfied, the main CPU 201 does not transition to the C time-shortened game state but changes the display mode of the time-shortened win to the special symbol display unit 163.
, 164.

The end condition of the C time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started, or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of C time-saving times") is executed (see the "number of time-saving times" column in FIG. 13). The prescribed number of C time-saving times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time-saving game state, may be when the variable display of the special symbols for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "final variation of C time-saving times") is started, or when the final variation of C time-saving times has ended. In other words, the end timing of the C time-saving game state is
It is sufficient if the period is from the start of the final C time-saving variation to the end of the variable display of the special pattern related to this final C time-saving variation.

The time-saving performance may be different between the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. Also, the time-saving performance of two of the time-saving game states A, B, and C may be the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving game states may be different from the time-saving performance of the other one of the time-saving game states. Furthermore, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C may be the same.

In addition, the end conditions of the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C may include, in addition to the above, for example, that the variable display number of the second special symbol reaches a specified number of times, that the normal electric device 146 opens a specified number of times, that a specific opening mode is selected as the opening mode of the normal electric device 146, etc. In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the above-mentioned end conditions may include that the number of small hits reaches a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above-mentioned end conditions may include that a time-saving fall lottery is held and that the time-saving fall lottery is won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal pattern hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal pattern hit determination process, i.e., a table referenced when determining a "normal pattern hit" or a "miss" by lottery based on the game state and the normal pattern hit determination random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see Figure 4) (i.e., when executing the normal pattern game determination process of S295 in Figure 43 described below).

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the winning determination process for the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol or not based on the extracted random number value for winning determination of the normal symbol.
The normal pattern hit determination table specifies, for each type of time reduction, the relationship between the range (width) of random number values for hit determination of normal patterns determined as "normal pattern hit" and the corresponding normal pattern hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of random number values for hit determination of normal patterns determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201
When the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is any one of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning/losing determination value data is "normal symbol winning determination value data." In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, when the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is any one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning/losing determination value data is "losing determination value data."

In the A time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." In the A time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "loss" and sets the determination value data to "loss determination value data."

In the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 judges a "normal symbol win" when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 79, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data as "normal symbol win judgment value data". In the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 judges a "loss" when the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 80 to 99, and determines the judgment value data as "loss judgment value data".

In the C time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any one of 0 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." In the C time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "loss" and sets the determination value data to "loss determination value data."

Thus, in this embodiment, the probability of winning by hitting a normal symbol in the time-saving game state A (the selection rate (estimated) shown in Figure 16) is the highest among the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Similarly, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of a normal symbol does not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol is not changed, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols to be described later is simply changed for each state, so that the control process can be simplified.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol determination table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table includes the type of time reduction, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the passing gate 12.
This is a table that is referenced when selecting a "regular symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol stop pattern based on the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through 6 (see FIG. 4). The "regular symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the normal symbol win pattern that is determined according to the normal symbol win type when the result of the normal symbol win determination process is a normal symbol win. The normal symbol random number value is, for example, 0 to
It is selected from 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol winning determination process, for example, the selected symbol command when the normal symbol wins is selected as follows.

For example, in a non-time-saving game state, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained as a result of the winning judgment process for the normal symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value from 0 to 99,
The main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the selected symbol command when a normal symbol is hit.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained as a result of the winning judgment process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 0 to 29, and selects "fz0" as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 30 to 69.
2" is selected, and if the random number value of the normal symbol is any one of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the selected symbol command when the normal symbol is hit.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz4" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 0 to 29, and selects "fz4" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 30 to 69.
If the random number value of the normal symbol is between 70 and 99, then "fz6" is selected as the symbol selection command when the normal symbol is hit.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "fz7" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 0 to 29, and selects "fz7" as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 30 to 69.
If the random number value of the normal symbol is between 70 and 99, then "fz9" is selected as the symbol selection command when the normal symbol is hit.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal symbol (see FIG. 16) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data based on the winning judgment random number value of the extracted normal symbol, and then refers to the normal symbol judgment table (see FIG. 17) and determines the selection symbol command when the normal symbol is won based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.
For example, the winning or losing of the normal symbol and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins may be determined based on the extracted random number value for winning the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

[1-4-10. Normal pattern type determination table]
18 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol winning type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol winning time selection symbol command determined in response to the normal symbol random number value (i.e., when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric role 146 executed in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S293 in FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, when the result of the winning judgment process of the normal symbol is "normal symbol winning", the normal symbol winning type is determined as follows. For example, when the normal symbol winning selection command is "f
In the case of "z0", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), to be the first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. In other words, the opening pattern is determined to be such that the normal electric role 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selection symbol command is "fz1" when a normal symbol is hit, the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 2
The initial time is determined to be 000 msec, the wait time is 200 msec, and the second release time is 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selection symbol command is "fz2" when a normal symbol is hit, the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time 2
The opening time is determined to be 500 msec, the wait time is 200 msec, and the second opening time is 2500 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol selection command is "fz3", the main CPU 201
The opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), is set to the first opening time of 3
The opening time is determined to be 000 msec, the wait time is 200 msec, and the second opening time is 3000 msec.

In addition, when the normal pattern is selected, the command is "fz4" or "fz7".
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the normal pattern is selected, the command is "fz5" or "fz8".
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal pattern is selected, the command is "fz6" or "fz9".
The main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal pattern in the non-time-saving play state is a "normal pattern hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4) will be the most unfavorable mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 is the degree of ease with which a game ball will enter the second starting hole 140 when the normal electric device 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process for the normal pattern in the A time-saving play state is a "normal pattern hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4) becomes the most advantageous pattern among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4) when the result of the hit determination process for the normal pattern in the B time-saving play state is a "normal pattern hit" has the same degree of advantage as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal pattern in the C time-saving play state is a "normal pattern hit", but is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal pattern variation table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (i.e., when executing the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The normal symbol effect selection random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving game state, the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99.
In any of the above, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state.

In the A time-saving game state, when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 0 to 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 90 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.
It is determined to be c.

In the B time-saving game state, when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 40 to 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 ms.
ec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 40 to 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 ms.
ec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal pattern per one variable display is the non-time-saving game state, A
Among the variable display times of normal symbols in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C, the expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving game state A is the shortest. Therefore, among the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C, the time until the normal electric device 146 is opened is the shortest in the time-saving game state A.

In addition, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time-saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time-saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" may be determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Also, even in a high probability game state where the probability flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time-saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving hit on the special symbol display section, but does not execute control to transition to the time-saving game state, and continues to control the high probability game state. Meanwhile, there is known a gaming machine that turns the probability flag from ON to OFF when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a prescribed number of times, such as a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine. In such an ST machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the final game in the high probability game state is "time-saving hit", when the process of deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit is later than the process of turning off the probability flag, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit.

[1-5-2. Overlapping of time-saving game states]
When multiple time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time-saving game state, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state will overlap. Also, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state will overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving game states may not be overlapped (i.e., the "time-saving hit" may be ignored). In order to prevent the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state from overlapping, the A time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the A time-saving game state, is specified to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state.

When the time-shortened game states overlap, a mode in which the time-shortened game states are executed in an overlapping manner and a mode in which the time-shortened game states are not executed in an overlapping manner will be described below.

[1-5-2-1. Mode of overlapping execution of time-saving gaming state]
Possible modes of overlapping the time-shortened game states when the time-shortened game states overlap include a mode in which the time-shortened game state C is overlapped and executed when a time-shortened prize is won in any one of the time-shortened game states A, B, and C, and a mode in which the time-shortened game state B is overlapped and executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-shortened game state C.

[1-5-2-1-1. Mode of executing C time-saving gaming state on one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display section 163,
In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts, as the number of times of time reduction, the number of times that the variable display of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-shortened game state is established while maintaining the time-shortened performance of one time-shortened game state.

For example, if a "time-saving win" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the number of remaining time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving win", the main CPU 2
01 maintains the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, and controls the time-saving game state until the remaining number of times of the A time-saving game state is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state in the A time-saving game state is 200 times, if a "time-saving win" is won and the number of times of time-saving that can be executed based on this "time-saving win" is 50 times, the display mode of the time-saving win is derived on the special pattern display section 163, 164, but while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, the number of times of time-saving from here is 200 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states of the A time-saving game state, the appearance of the number of times of time-saving and the time-saving performance is the same as when the A time-saving game state continues without winning the "time-saving win".

On the other hand, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the main CP
U201 maintains the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived.
The game is controlled to the time-saving game state until the number of time-saving times set based on the "time-saving win" is consumed. To explain with specific numbers, for example, if the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state is 20, the "time-saving win" is won, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving win" is 50.
In the case where the number of times is 50, the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state is maintained, and the number of times of time-saving from this point on is 50 unless a "big win" is derived. In other words, the remaining number of times of time-saving in the A time-saving game state is 2
Even if the variable display of the special symbols is executed 0 times, thereafter, the variable display of the special symbols is further executed 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. Mode in which the time-saving gaming state B is superimposed on the time-saving gaming state C]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the following explanation will also include the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit.

First, a case will be described where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "small hit" or a "miss."

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving game state C, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving game state C is greater than the prescribed number of time-saving times B, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state C and controls the game state to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving game state C is consumed, unless a "big win" is derived. To explain this with specific numbers, for example,
When the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving game state is 300 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and B
When the time-saving regulation number is 200, the number of time-saving times from this point on is 300, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the appearance of the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance is the same as when the C time-saving game state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C game state, if the B time-saving prescribed number of times is greater than the remaining number of times in the time-saving C game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is consumed while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "big win" is derived. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of times of time-saving in the C time-saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of times of time-saving that can be executed as the B time-saving game state is 300 times, the number of times of time-saving from this point on is 300 times while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "big win" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of times of time-saving in the C time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is further executed for 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state.

When the variable display of the special symbol ends in the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode in the special symbol display units 163 and 164 according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. That is, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "miss", a miss display mode is derived. When the small hit display mode is derived, the game is controlled to a small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, a case will be described in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit" in the final ceiling fluctuation, that is, the condition for transition to the time-saving B game state and the condition for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied in the final ceiling fluctuation. In this case, the main CPU 201 starts control of the time-saving B game state before the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 starts control of the time-saving B game state before the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163 and 164.
64 and then control of the time-shortened gaming state B is started.

First, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is
At the time when the main C is output to 164, the game is already in the B time-saving game state.
The PU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the B time-saving game state and controls the game state to the time-saving game state until the larger number of time-saving times out of the B time-saving prescribed number and the C time-saving number of times is consumed, unless a "big win" is derived.

Next, when the control of the B time-saving game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is
At the time when the time-shortening game state is derived to 164, the game state is not yet controlled to the time-shortening game state B. Therefore, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to the time-shortening game state B until the larger of the time-shortening number of times of the time-shortening game state B and the time-shortening number of times of the time-shortening game state C is consumed, while maintaining the time-shortening performance of the time-shortening game state C, unless the end condition of the time-shortening game state (for example, the derivation of the display mode of a big win, the derivation of the display mode of a small win or a specific small win, etc.) is established. In this case, it is preferable that the time-shortening game state is terminated when the end condition of the time-shortening game state in which the time-shortening performance is maintained or executed is established.

In addition, when the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state and the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied in the final change of the ceiling, the sub-CPU 301 may perform a special display effect different from the time-saving B transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state are satisfied, and the time-saving C transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied. Alternatively, for example, when the time-saving performance of the time-saving B game state is maintained, the time-saving B transition display effect is performed, and when the time-saving performance of the time-saving C game state is maintained, the time-saving C transition display effect is performed, etc.
It is also possible to give priority to either the B time-saving transition display effect or the C time-saving transition display effect.

In addition, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls the game state to the jackpot game state without also controlling the game state to the B time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time]
The above describes a mode in which a time-shortened game state C is superimposed on one time-shortened game state, and a mode in which a time-shortened game state B is superimposed on a time-shortened game state C.

In this way, when a pachinko machine is designed to be able to execute multiple time-saving game states in a superimposed manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In a pachinko machine with this kind of design, the time-saving performances of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner may be different from each other, but it is preferable to make the time-saving performances of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner the same.

For example, in the case where a specification allows a time-saving game state C to be overlapped and executed on one time-saving game state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state C the same as that of the time-saving game state C. Also, in the case where a specification allows a time-saving game state B to be overlapped and executed on the time-saving game state C, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state C the same as that of the time-saving game state B.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine capable of executing a plurality of time-saving game states in a superimposed manner, a time-saving game state that can be executed later on a previously executed time-saving game state may be provided with, for example, one time-saving performance that is the same as the previously executed time-saving game state, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. When a time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on a previously executed time-saving game state, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and when a time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, such as when a time-saving game state is activated in a normal game state, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine capable of overlapping a time-shortening game state B with a time-shortening game state C, the time-shortening game state B may have, for example, two time-shortening performances, one time-shortening performance that is the same as the time-shortening game state C, and another time-shortening performance that is different from the one time-shortening performance. In the time-shortening game state C, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value, the one time-shortening performance may be activated, and in a normal game state that is neither of the time-shortening game states, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value, the other time-shortening performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed in succession]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, there are a mode in which the hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which the hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and even if the time-saving game state is overlapped, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode"). As the latter mode, there are two modes that are considered: a mode in which the time-saving hit is ignoring the time-saving hit in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, and the time-saving game state C is not executed in a superimposed manner, and even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving game state C, the time-saving game state B is not executed in a superimposed manner. The above two modes that can be considered as the latter mode will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. Mode in which the C time-saving gaming state is not executed in addition to one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 as described above.
1 controls the game to the first time-shortened game state until the remaining number of times of time-shortened play in the first time-shortened game state is consumed, without controlling the game to the C time-shortened game state based on the "time-shortened hit", unless the last variable display of the special symbol in the first time-shortened game state (hereinafter referred to as the "time-shortened final change") occurs. In this case, being controlled to the first time-shortened game state (excluding the time-shortened final change) is a condition that prevents the game from transitioning to the C time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, if you win the "time-saving hit" in the final time-saving fluctuation in one time-saving game state,
The main CPU 201 determines whether or not a time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving win is output to the special symbol display section 163, 164, or whether or not the display mode of the time-saving win is output to the special symbol display section 163.
, 164, different controls can be executed depending on whether a time-shortened gaming state ends or not.

First, when one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving win is derived on the special symbol display section 163, 164, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win, and then
Control of the time-saving gaming state begins.

Next, when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display section 163, 164 and the first time-saving game state ends, that is, when the derivation of the display mode of the time-saving hit and the end of the first time-saving game state are performed within the same interrupt processing, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-saving game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the processing of deriving (determining display) the display mode of the time-saving hit is performed before the end processing of the first time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling it to the C time-saving game state. In this case, performing the processing of deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit before the end processing of the first time-saving game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving (determining) the display mode of the time-saving hit is performed after the process of ending the first time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state and controls the game to the time-saving game state C. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but sets the time-saving performance to the time-saving game state C. That is, the main CPU
At the time when the display mode of the time-shortening hit is derived, if the end process of one time-shortening game state has not been processed, 201 ends the one time-shortening game state without controlling it to the time-shortening game state C, and if the end process of one time-shortening game state has already been processed, it controls it to the time-shortening game state C.

[1-5-3-2. Mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is not executed in parallel with the C time-saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

First, we will explain the cases where the result of the special pattern hit determination process in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," a "small hit," or a "miss."

In the C time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," a "small hit," or a "miss," the main CPU 201 controls the game to the C time-saving game state until the remaining number of times for the time-saving game state in the C time-saving game state is consumed.

However, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is 0 at the final ceiling fluctuation, the main C
The PU 201 may or may not start control of the time-shortened B game state depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the time-shortened C game state is performed before the start processing of the time-shortened B game state, the main CPU 201 ends the time-shortened C game state and controls it to the time-shortened B game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the time-shortened C game state is performed after the start processing of the time-shortened B game state, the main CPU 201 ends the time-shortened C game state without controlling it to the time-shortened B game state. That is, when the time-shortened B game state is about to be started, if the end processing of the time-shortened C game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the time-shortened C game state without controlling it to the time-shortened B game state, and if the end processing of the time-shortened C game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the time-shortened B game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the time-shortened C game state after the start processing of the time-shortened B game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the time-shortened B game state.

In addition, in the final ceiling fluctuation, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts control of the jackpot game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, referring to FIG. 20 to FIG. 23, the main processing (
20 to 23 are flow charts showing an example of the main control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at a high level (S
11) Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets a stack pointer and an address of an interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at a high level (if S11 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at a high level (S11 is Y
If the determination is ES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this processing, a process of saving the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 is performed.
The OFF state is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. In addition, in this process, the game permission flag is set to OFF. After executing the process of S12, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process. In this process, the sub-control circuit 300 waits for startup. In this case, the startup wait time (wait period) is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S14.

In addition, while waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start up, the main CPU 201 may perform, for example, checking an interrupt request signal, outputting a WDT when an interrupt request signal is generated, and outputting various sensor initialization signals at specified timing.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption before the start (the previous time) was normal or abnormal, based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (if a NO determination is made in S14), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was normal (if S14 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 calculates a checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then performs a process of comparing the checksum value of the work area (S16).
After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the comparison result is abnormal.

If the collation result is not abnormal in S17, that is, if it is determined that the result is normal (S17
If the answer is NO, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S22. The process from S22 onwards will be described later.

On the other hand, if the collation result is determined to be abnormal in S17 (
If the determination in S17 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is OFF. That is, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are ON, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is OFF.
When both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or when either one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off, the determination is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not OFF, that is, both are ON (NO in S18),
If so, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S21. The process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (if S18 is determined as YES),
The main CPU 201 shifts the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process is performed on the I/O port 2 through which a signal is output to the performance display monitor 170.
The main CPU 201 sets data for displaying an error to the output port of S205. This causes a predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 170 to light up and display an error.
After executing the process for 0, an endless loop is entered.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not normal, or if the comparison result of the checksum value of the working area stored in the main RAM 203 is not normal, game play will not be possible on the first pachinko game machine until it is determined that both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on.

Next, the process of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed at the time of abnormal start-up, and is for storing the value indicating a setting change again. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 returns to S2
Move to 2.

In S22, the main CPU 201 executes a process of clearing the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether the startup state is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203.
Determine the current startup state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Main C
After executing the process of S23, the PU 201 shifts the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a clear process (
For example, the creation of a working area and address setting are performed. This process is performed both when power is restored after a power outage and when the system is initialized, and the backup area is not cleared.
After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs a startup initialization process.
An initial setting process is performed according to the current startup state (power failure recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Details of the startup initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt disable process. After executing the process of S26, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power cut process.
After the process of S27 is executed, the process proceeds to S28.
This will be described later with reference to 5.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an update process of the initial random numbers. In this process, the update process of the initial random numbers of various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a special symbol, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 returns to S29.
Move to.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a game is permitted based on the value of a game permission flag.

When it is determined in S29 that the game is not permitted (when a NO judgment is made in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that the game is permitted (YES in S29), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onward.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process.
After executing the process of S31, the process proceeds to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 executes a performance display monitor tallying and calculating process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. This process is also executed in the main RAM 2.
The work is performed using an area other than the work area in .03 (outside the area).
After executing the process of S32, the process proceeds to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 executes an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 ms, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).
ec.

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if the determination is NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system period has elapsed (YES in S35),
If so, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process.
After executing the process of S36, the PU 201 advances the process to S37.

In this embodiment, in the main control process, before various processes related to game control (for example, processes of S37 to S44) described later are executed, an interrupt prohibition period of, for example, 6 msec (S
A processing period of S26 to S35 is provided. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control described later are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example in which the interrupt inhibition period is three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but this is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages a system period (e.g., 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in a system period management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.
After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs a main control command transmission/reception process. In this process, a command transmission/reception process for payout control is mainly performed.
After executing the process of S38, the process proceeds to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol control process. In this process, a process related to the special symbol game is executed. For details of the special symbol control process, see FIG.
After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 returns to S4
Move to 0.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing.
The process for the normal symbol game is carried out. Details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After carrying out the process of S40, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S40.
Move to 41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process. In this process, each display section of the LED unit 160 (for example, the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, the
The main CPU 2 performs a process of setting the display data to be output to the special symbol display unit 164, etc.
After executing the process of S41, the process proceeds to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, control of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting of output data, generation of a test firing signal, etc. are performed. The test firing signal generation process is performed using an area separate from (outside) the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs a port output process. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process. In this process, a launch position determination process, a game abnormality detection determination process, a payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (e.g., right hit or left hit), a launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of loading a start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power interruption.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating power interruption recovery (S5
2 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the start-up control flag is a value indicating recovery from power interruption (if a YES determination is made in S52), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing. The details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S53, the startup initial setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main control process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, i.e., a value indicating RAM clear (if NO is determined in S54), the main CP
U201 transfers the processing to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. The details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S56, the startup initial setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main control process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

[1-6-3. Electrical disconnection processing]
Next, the power cut process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S
61).

When it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (when a NO determination is made in S61), the main CPU 201 ends the power cut processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (FIG. 20
-Refer to Figure 23.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (S61 is Y),
If the determination is ES, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a process of calculating a checksum value.
After executing the process of S62, the PU 201 shifts the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power interruption detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, they are stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access inhibition value setting process (S65). After executing S65, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset waiting process until power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game).
After executing the process of S71, the process proceeds to S72.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process,
Prior to the process of S71, an address setting process is performed to set the address of a work area for special symbols in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

Also, although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, if the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are both "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command,
The sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

When it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (when a NO judgment is made in S72), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S72 is YES),
In the case of S judgment), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether the second special symbol is to be variably displayed or not.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the start information for the second special pattern is on hold.

When it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has not started to be variably displayed, that is, when it is determined that the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (when S73 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S74.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol is to start variable display, that is, when it is determined that the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (when S73 is determined as YES), the main CPU
201, the process proceeds to S75.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first special symbol is to be variably displayed or not.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the start information for the first special symbol is on hold.

When it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has not started to be variably displayed, that is, when it is determined that the start information of the first special symbol is not reserved (when S74 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201
ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol is to start being variably displayed, that is, when it is determined that the start information of the first special symbol is reserved (when S74 is determined as YES), the main CPU
201, the process proceeds to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol management process. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 23).
Return to the previous page (see reference).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S
It is preferable to perform steps S71 to S75 within an interrupt disabled section.

In this manner, in the present embodiment, as the first pachinko gaming machine, a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, the special symbol management process (
S75) may be executed as a priority variable machine, or the first start port 120 or the second start port 1
It may also be a sequential variable machine in which special pattern management processing is executed in the order of winning on 40.

[1-6-5. Special design management process]
Next, referring to FIG. 27, in S75 of the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26), the main CPU
27 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, in the case where the control state number is "0", when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is judged as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the process of S74 (see FIG. 26) is judged as YES.
When the control state number is "0
If not, the special symbol management process targets the special symbol currently being executed.

27, the numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process are control state numbers for the special symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S8
1).

When it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (when S81 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (
(see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S81 is YES),
In the case of S judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S83.
U201 performs the processes from S83 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process.
The process of S83 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of the special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to Fig. 28. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process.
The process of S4 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of the special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to Fig. 29. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S85 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening preparation process. This process of S86 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this large prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening control process. This process of S87 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This process of S88 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5." Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process.
The process returns to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, referring to FIG. 28, in S83 of the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
28 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first checks whether the control state number of the special symbol is "
It is determined whether the value is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S91 is N
In the case of O judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S9
1 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) and uses a random number value for special symbol hit determination to determine whether the special symbol is a hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and sets the big hit flag to ON if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S93, the process proceeds to S94. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when the game state transitions to the C time-saving game state, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit game state starts. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit game state starts.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process for determining whether or not there is a jackpot is performed, and if this process determines that there is no jackpot, a process for determining whether or not there is a time-saving hit is performed, and if this process determines that there is no time-saving hit, it is determined that there is a miss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (e.g., time-saving hit, big hit, or miss). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command" is determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big win). In this process, the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94) by referring to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, or there may be only one type of time-saving hit. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of misses may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small win, and multiple types of such small wins may be provided. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and for example, the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S93), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the reach judgment random number value or/and the like are determined.
The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the random number value for effect selection, etc. The variation pattern table to be referred to when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may be different according to the game state, etc. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbols. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbols (S96) is determined as the change time for the special symbols. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, the special symbol variable display end process (see S84 in FIG. 27) is performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed.
After executing the process of S98, the process proceeds to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, an update process is performed for parameters related to the game state (for example, the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs a game status management process.
It mainly performs update processing of various flags related to management of the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) After executing the processing of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special pattern variable display start processing (particularly the game status management processing (S100) and the special pattern presentation start command transmission reservation processing (S101)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 29, in S84 of the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
29 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “1” (S111
If the answer is NO, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display ending process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S
If the answer is YES in step S111, the main CPU 201 advances the process to step S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S85 in FIG. 27) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed.
After executing the process of step 2, the process proceeds to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later).
After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, may be provided, but the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state may be managed by the determined symbol counter. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201:
The special symbol variable display ending process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 30, in S85 of the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
30 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “2” (S121
is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game judgment process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is “2” (S
If the answer is YES in step S121, the main CPU 201 advances the process to step S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S122, when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, that is, when it is determined that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (when S122 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S123.

On the other hand, in S122, if it is determined that the jackpot is not reached, that is, if it is determined that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if NO is determined in S122), the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., big win signals, etc.) outputted to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the processing targets of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S123, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S124. Note that the signals outputted to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control at S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value for the number of times the big win opening 131 is opened (S125), a process of setting a big win signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), etc.
), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S128), and a process of reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command (S12
9) and other processes. In addition, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S12
7) to switch the control state number, the special symbol game determination process is terminated, and then the special prize opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 terminates the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S130, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game ending process. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.
When the special symbol game end process is performed, the special symbol game determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game end process in the pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving management process (S131). Details of this time-saving management process will be described later with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0." By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this manner, it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game.
After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a game state designation parameter for a special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of scheduling the transmission of a special symbol game end command (
The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S134,
U201 ends the special pattern game ending process, and returns the process to the special pattern game determination process (see FIG. 30).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management process]
Next, the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see Fig. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). The details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.
After executing the process of step S142, the process proceeds to step S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. The details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.
After executing the above process, the time-saving management process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 shows the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 in FIG.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving counter update process (S151). The time-saving counter update process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S151, the process proceeds to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process. The details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.
After executing the process of S152, the counter update process is terminated, and the process returns to the time-saving management process (FIG. 32
Return to the previous page (see reference).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update process]
Next, the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 shows the counter update process (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko game machine.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 of the processing shown in FIG.

The time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when multiple time-saving game states overlap and are executed in succession.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, if both the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made, and if either one of them is not met, a NO determination is made.

The time-saving flag is set to ON when the state is shifted to the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C. When the state is shifted to the high probability game state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time-saving counter is in the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, or the C time-saving game state.
Each indicates the number of times the time saving is executed.

When a transition condition to the time-shortened game state A, the time-shortened game state B and/or the time-shortened game state C is established, a time-shortened counter for the time-shortened game state in which the transition condition is established is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time-saving game state is terminated when the time-saving counter becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an addition method may be adopted in which the time-saving counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and the time-saving game state is terminated when the time-saving counter becomes the set number of time-saving times. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the time-saving counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the time-saving game state may be terminated when the time-saving counter becomes 0 (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter becomes the set number of time-saving times (in the case of the addition method).

In S161, if it is determined that both the time-saving flag ON and the time-saving counter are not greater than 0 are not satisfied (if NO is determined in S161), the main CPU 201
The time-saving counter update process is terminated, and the process returns to the counter update process (FIG. 33).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S161 that the time-saving flag is ON and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter (S162).
The process proceeds to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 judges whether the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES judgment is made. If a YES judgment is made in S163, the main CPU 20
1, the process proceeds to S164.

The C time-saving counter is a counter that is set when a condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is satisfied during the time-saving game state. Although not shown in the flowchart, the C time-saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time-saving counter described later is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when multiple time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured with, for example, 2 bits, and is set to "time-saving mode = 3" when the C time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on the previously executed time-saving game state.
In addition, when the B time-saving game state is executed in addition to the previously executed time-saving game state, the time-saving mode is set to "2".

On the other hand, in S163, if it is determined that both the time-saving mode=3 and the C time-saving counter is not greater than 0 are not satisfied (if NO is determined in S163), the main CPU 20
1, the process proceeds to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time-saving counter. This process may also be performed by using an addition method instead of a subtraction method.
After executing the process of S164, the process proceeds to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 judges whether the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES judgment is made. If a YES judgment is made in S165, the main CPU 20
1, the process proceeds to S166.

The B time-saving counter is a counter that is set when a condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is met during the time-saving game state (in this embodiment, during the C time-saving game state). Although not shown in the flowchart, this B time-saving counter is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time-saving counter is set.

On the other hand, in S165, if it is determined that both the time-saving mode=2 and the B time-saving counter is not greater than 0 are not satisfied (if NO is determined in S165), the main CPU 20
1 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time-saving counter. This process may also be performed by using an addition method instead of a subtraction method.
After executing the process of S166, the time-saving counter update process is terminated, and the process returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown in the figure, if the C time-saving counter becomes 0 as a result of processing S164, or if the B time-saving counter becomes 0 as a result of processing S166, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving mode to off (=0).

Incidentally, when multiple time-saving game states are executed in a superimposed manner, not only two time-saving game states may be executed in a superimposed manner, but also three or more time-saving game states may be executed in a superimposed manner. In this case, since the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C do not overlap as described above, the case where three or more time-saving game states overlap corresponds to the case where the time-saving game state A or the time-saving game state B overlaps with two or more time-saving game states C, and the case where three or more time-saving game states C overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 shows the counter update process (FIG. 3) in the first pachinko game machine.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 in the game (see FIG. 3).

First, the main CPU 201 judges whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is OFF or not (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set ON when the probability variable flag is set ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is,
If the probability flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value,
The ceiling count prohibition flag is OFF. The ceiling counter value is stored in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is a value specific to the pachinko game machine that is a condition for transitioning to the time-saving game state B. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 may perform processing to set the ceiling value when the big win game state ends, when a backup clear process is performed, when a dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if S171 is judged as NO), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (YES in S171), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter.
After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process.
The process returns to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter Determination Process]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 shows the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 in FIG.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving transition determination process (S181). The details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.
After executing the process of step S182, the process proceeds to step S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 executes a time-saving transition process. Details of this time-saving transition process will be described later with reference to Fig. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is smaller than one.

In S183, if it is determined that the time-saving counter is not smaller than 1 (S183 is N
O judgment), that is, when the time-saving counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 201 ends the process.
Move to 185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time-saving flag.
After executing the process of S184, the process proceeds to S185.

In addition, if it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is smaller than 1 (S183 is Y
In the case of ES judgment), both the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter should be smaller than 1 (i.e., 0). However, in consideration of the possibility that some malfunction may occur in the execution of the process by the main CPU 201, for example, when the B time-saving counter or the time-saving counter is 1 or more despite the YES judgment in S183, an abnormality process such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormality process, when the YES judgment is made in S183, not only the time-saving flag is turned off (see S184), but also the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter are reset, thereby achieving consistency between the time-saving counter, the B time-saving counter, and the C time-saving counter.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a parameter for designating a game state of a special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of scheduling the transmission of a time-saving transition command (S186).
The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a judgment process for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is performed. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter judgment process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko game machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability flag is OFF (S191).
.

In S191, when it is determined that the probability variable flag is not OFF (when S191 is determined as NO), that is, when the probability variable flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). In other words, when the probability variable flag is ON, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the probability variable flag is OFF (S191 is YES),
In the case of S judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

In S192, if it is determined that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (if S192 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition judgment process, and returns the process to the counter judgment process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (YES in S192), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter.
After executing the process of S195, 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving transition process]
Next, the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 shows the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 in FIG.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability flag is OFF (S202).
.

In S202, when it is determined that the probability variable flag is not OFF (when S202 is determined as NO), that is, when the probability variable flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). In this way, when the probability variable flag is ON, neither the B time-saving game state nor the C time-saving game state can be started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the probability variable flag is OFF (S202 is YES),
S judgment), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON.

In S203, if it is determined that the ceiling flag is not on (if the determination in S203 is NO), that is, if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 returns to S206.
Move to.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (S203 is YES),
S judgment), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the B time-saving game state. In this process, the number of time-saving times to be set in the B time-saving counter, the time-saving mode to be set to 2, and the time-saving performance, etc. are determined.
After executing the process of S205, the process proceeds to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the B time-saving counter is a predetermined number.
The probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving feature is calculated based on the normal symbol hit determination table (Figure 16
17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Furthermore, among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern of the normal electric role object 146 (number of times opening, opening time, wait time) is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Furthermore, among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the time-reduction hit flag is on.

In S206, if it is determined that the time-saving hit flag is not on (if S206 is judged as NO), i.e., if the time-saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 terminates the time-saving transition processing and returns the processing to the counter judgment processing (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in S206, when it is determined that the time-reduction hit flag is ON (YES determination in S206), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving gaming state. In this process, the number of time-saving times to be set in the C time-saving counter, the time-saving mode to be set to 3, and the time-saving performance, etc. are determined.
After executing the process of S207, the process proceeds to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the C time-saving counter is determined based on the winning type determination table (e.g., FIG. 1
3) according to the selected symbol command. In addition, the winning probability of the "normal symbol hit" among the time-saving performances is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role object 146 among the time-saving performances is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). In addition, the variable display time of the normal symbol among the time-saving performances is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving setting process. Details of this time-saving setting process will be described later with reference to Fig. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see Fig. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time-saving transition process (see Fig. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the time-saving flag is on (S211).
.

In S211, when it is determined that the time-saving flag is on (when S211 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S212.

A YES judgment at S211 corresponds to a case where the special probability flag is off, and, for example, the time-saving game state B is executed in addition to the time-saving game state C being executed first (when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value), or the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed in addition to the time-saving game state C being executed first (when a "time-saving hit" is won).

Although not shown, when the time-saving game state B is executed in addition to the time-saving game state C being executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2" and
The B time-shortening counter determined in S205 is set. When the C time-shortening game state is executed in addition to the A time-shortening game state, the B time-shortening game state, or the C time-shortening game state that has been executed previously, the main CPU 201 sets "time-shortening mode=3" and sets the C time-shortening counter determined in S207.

In S211, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (NO in S211),
In other words, if the time-saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the number of remaining time-saving times in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-saving times (the number of time-saving times determined in S205 or S207), and determines whether the current time-saving counter is smaller than the new number of time-saving times.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of times of time-saving (if NO is determined in S212), that is, if the current time-saving counter is larger than the new number of times of time-saving, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and performs the time-saving transition process (
(see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times (YES in S212), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter reset process. In this process, when the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the larger of the current time-saving counter value (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times) and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if the time-saving counter reset process (S213) is executed, the main CPU 2
01 does not reset the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).
Return to.

In addition, when the time-shortening game state B is executed in a state where the time-shortening game state C is executed first, or when the time-shortening game state C is executed in a state where the time-shortening game state A, the time-shortening game state B, or ... are executed first, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-shortening performance of the time-shortening game state executed first. In other words, the time-shortening performance of the time-shortening game state executed first is not changed to the time-shortening performance of the new time-shortening game state, nor is it changed to the time-shortening performance of the time-shortening game state corresponding to the larger of the current time-shortening counter and the new number of time-shortening times.

As described above, the time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease with which a game ball can enter a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see Figure 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of times it opens, opening time, wait time, etc.).

In this embodiment, by providing a time-saving counter B and a time-saving counter C, it is possible to manage the fact that two time-saving game states are being executed in overlapping fashion internally. Then, in the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving counts is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if two time-saving game states are being executed in overlapping fashion internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is only the time-saving performance of one of the two time-saving game states that are being executed in overlapping fashion internally. For this reason, without managing the fact that two time-saving game states are being executed in overlapping fashion internally (
In other words, when multiple time-saving game states are executed in overlapping fashion (without providing a B time-saving counter and a C time-saving counter), the greater of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times may be reset as the new time-saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving mode setting process.
This process is performed when the result of the judgment of NO in step S211 is NO, that is, when the game is switched from the non-time-saving game state to the B time-saving game state (when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value) or when the game is switched from the non-time-saving game state to the C time-saving game state (when the "time-saving win" is won). In this process, the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time-saving control mode determination process (S2
The number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance determined in step S21 are set.
After executing step S4, the process proceeds to step S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag to ON.
After executing the process of S215, the PU 201 ends the time-save setting process, and returns the process to the time-save transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the process of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation has ended. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the hit determination process includes a small hit, there may be cases in which the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 performs the process of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state based on the end of the small hit gaming state.
It is advisable to carry out processing to transition to a time-saving gaming state.

In the time-saving management process described above with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 20
In the first pachinko game machine, the transition process to the B time-saving game state is performed when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variable displayed in parallel, it is preferable to perform the transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. This is because, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is performed when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation is completed, if the variable display of the other special symbol is started during the variable display of one of the special symbols as the ceiling final variation, the variable display of the other special symbol cannot be provided with the benefit of the B time-saving game state, and there is a risk of reducing interest. Note that in the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long variation such as 600,000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine in which the variable display of special symbols can be performed with such long fluctuations, by performing processing to transition to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of special symbols as the final ceiling fluctuation, it is possible to avoid a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state, even when the variable display of special symbols, which is the final ceiling fluctuation, is performed with a long fluctuation.

In addition, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as a process related to the transition to the B time-saving game state is performed in priority over the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state (see S203 to S207 in Figure 38), but this is not limited to this. For example, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state
The B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) is a process related to the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.
) may be given priority.

Also, in the ceiling counter update process described above with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not OFF (S171 in FIG. 35 judges NO), the ceiling counter is not updated, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in ST machines or pachinko machines that perform a probability change drop lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when a variable display of a special pattern is performed even if the probability change flag is ON. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game may not transition to the B time-shortened game state, and may transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value. In this case, the main CPU 201 may execute the command "
The game state will not be transitioned to the B time-shortened game state just because the ceiling counter equals the ceiling value, but when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter reaches the ceiling value, a process for transitioning to the B time-shortened game state will be performed.

Also, the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variable flag is off (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times). In this embodiment, for example, as shown in the hit determination table for special symbols (see FIG. 10), the jackpot probability when the probability variable flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319×2.5 to 319×3.0 (times).

In addition, it is preferable that the upper limit of the B time-saving specified number of times, which is the condition for terminating the B time-saving game state, is set to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off.
Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving game state, is preferably set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability variable flag is off by a prescribed number (for example, up to 3.8 times the denominator of the jackpot probability). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the probability variable flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), it is preferable to set the upper limit of both the B time-saving prescribed number of times and the C time-saving prescribed number of times to approximately 1212 (319 x 3.8).
It is not essential that the upper limit of the B time-saving regulation number of times and the upper limit of the C time-saving regulation number of times be the same value.

Incidentally, in the case of a pachinko machine like the first one, which can be set to any one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities, such as settings 1 to 6, as described above, the probability of winning in the time-saving mode is the same for all settings. In such a case, the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the time-saving mode B, is set to the jackpot probability (
If the denominator of the probability of winning (when the probability flag is off) is multiplied by a prescribed number (for example, 3.0),
The ceiling value varies depending on the setting value, and there is a risk that the set setting value may be discovered by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of the set setting value, it is preferable to set the ceiling value to the same value regardless of the set value, rather than determining it by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability variable flag is off) by a specified number.

[1-6-18. Modifications related to time-saving management processing]
In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figs. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see Fig. 35) is executed in the special symbol game end process (see Fig. 31). Also, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving game state is given priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag to the B time-saving game state (ceiling flag) and a transition flag to the C time-saving game state (time-saving hit flag) are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the game is transitioned to the B time-saving game state, and when the time-saving hit flag is on, the game is transitioned to the C time-saving game state. However, the timing of execution of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order between the transition to the B time-saving game state and the transition to the C time-saving game state, and whether the transition flag to the B time-saving game state and the transition flag to the C time-saving game state are separate or common are not limited to the above.
Time-saving management processing can be performed in a variety of ways.

For example, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be when the fluctuation stops, and the processing at the time of transition may be given priority to the B time-saving play state, and a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state may be set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be when the fluctuation stops, and the processing at the time of transition may be given priority to the C time-saving play state, and a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state may be set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the transition to the B time-saving game state may be made after confirming that the "time-saving hit" is not a winning result when the ceiling is reached.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the processing at the time of transition may be given priority to the B time-saving play state, and a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state may be set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the processing at the time of transition may be given priority to the C time-saving play state, and a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state may be set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition may be given priority to the B time-saving play state, and the transition flag to the B time-saving play state and the transition flag to the C time-saving play state may be set as a common flag.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition may be given priority to the C time-saving play state, and the transition flag to the B time-saving play state and the transition flag to the C time-saving play state may be set as a common flag.

Furthermore, when multiple time-saving game states are not executed in succession, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, and does not subtract 1 from the time-saving counter in other cases.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 40, in S86 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
40 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S251
If the result is NO, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S
If the answer is YES in S251, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads a round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is the main RA.
The result is stored in a predetermined area in the main CPU 201. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the special prize opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of times the round game has been executed in the special prize game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (S253 is Y
On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S253 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S254.
The main CPU 201 transfers the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254) and switching the control state number, the big win end process (see S88 in FIG. 27) is performed after the big win opening preparation process is completed.
After executing the process of S254, the process proceeds to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process.
After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for scheduling the transmission of the big win end display command (S25
6). The big win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the big win opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing the processing of S257, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 131 is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. It is not intended to exclude the case where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating data for controlling the opening/closing of the special prize opening 131 is performed.
After executing the process of S259, the process proceeds to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later).
The signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the special prize opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 41, in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
41 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “4” (S271
If the result is NO, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is “4” (S
If the answer is YES in S271, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is judged whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S272, when it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is not the maximum number of winning balls (when a NO judgment is made in S272), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S273.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 is a YES determination), the main CPU 201 ends the process in S272.
Move to 274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, various setting processes related to the special prize opening (see S258 in FIG. 40)
It is determined whether the maximum open time set in has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 131 has not elapsed (
If S273 is a NO judgment, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process.
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 131 has elapsed (if S273 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting to close the special prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2
By performing step S275) to switch the control state number, the special prize opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed again after the special prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process.
After executing the process of S276, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big win end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 42, in S88 of the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27), the main CPU
Next, a description will be given of the big win end process executed by 201. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S281
If the result is NO, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 27).

When it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is “5” (S281
is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, various counters (
For example, the main CPU 20 sets or resets the values of a probability-change counter, a time-saving counter, a symbol-determined-number counter, a round counter, a large prize-winning-port counter, etc.
After executing the process of S282, the process proceeds to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to Fig. 31 is executed. After executing the process of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the big win end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 43. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Fig. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. The numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flow chart shown in Fig. 43 are control state numbers of normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. For convenience, each process shown in Fig. 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S2
91).

When it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (when S291 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns to S41 ( FIG. 2
Return to step 3).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (when S291 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S293 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. The processing in S293 is performed when the control state number for the normal symbols is "0".
In this variable display start process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, a process of determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol, and if the result of the process of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, a process of setting the opening pattern (number of times of opening, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role object 146. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CP
U201 transfers the processing to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs variable display end processing for the normal symbols. The processing in S294 is performed when the control state number for the normal symbols is "1".
In this process, the main CPU 201 performs various processes when ending the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process.
The process of 5 is carried out when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol game judgment process, a process of judging the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss) is carried out. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU
201 shifts the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory opening process.
The process of S6 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the opening process of the normal electric role 146 is performed in a predetermined manner. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 stops the process.
Move to 297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol winning end processing.
The process of No. 7 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes the normal symbol winning end process, it ends the normal symbol control process.
The process returns to the main control process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the winning judgment table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16),
A random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is generated within a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and, for example, 0 to 79 is used as the winning determination value data for the normal symbol (in the case of a non-time-saving game state). The probability of winning a normal symbol is as follows:
Since the probability of a normal symbol winning is determined by the number of normal symbol winning judgment value data relative to the total random numbers for the normal symbol winning judgment, for example, the probability of a normal symbol winning is 80/100 in this embodiment. This probability of a normal symbol winning is different when time-saving control is executed and when time-saving control is not executed in this embodiment, but it may be the same or approximately the same. Also, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec, in a non-time-saving game state where time-saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 1,000 msec, in a game state where time-saving control is executed.
In this way, when the time-saving control is executed, the frequency of the normal electric accessory opening process, that is, the frequency of the game ball entering the second start hole 140, is increased.

[1-7-4. External Maskable Interrupt Processing]
Next, an external maskable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 44. This process is an interrupt process executed in response to an external interrupt request generated, for example, when power is interrupted. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the external maskable interrupt process in the first pachinko game machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protected register (S301).
After executing the process of S301, the PU 201 advances the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the state of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The predetermined input port is, for example, an input port in which the state of a power interruption detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, a solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. is set. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 returns to S30.
Move to 3.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has not been detected (if S303 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has been detected (if S303 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S305.
Move to 4.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag that indicates power interruption, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203.
After executing the process of S304, U201 transfers the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 executes an interrupt permission process. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a protection register backup process (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is OFF (
If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not OFF (i.e., a power interruption has been detected) (if a NO determination is made in S312), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S326.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., power interruption is not detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process.
The I/O port 201 reads the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on, for example, the value of a startup control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining whether the startup state when the power is turned on is one of power interruption recovery, setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. For example, if the power interruption recovery is selected, it is determined that the game is permitted, and if the setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. is selected, it is determined that the game is not permitted.

The start control flag is formed by a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, power interruption recovery is performed. If both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, setting change is performed.
If the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, the setting is confirmed.
If the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared.

When it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (when S315 is determined as NO)
The main CPU 201 then performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, every 2 msec, and are performed when the game is not permitted, i.e., when the game is not permitted. After performing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S326. Note that in S3
The setting control process of 16 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In addition, if play is not permitted (if S315 is judged as NO), it is preferable for the main CPU 201 to set the following: prohibiting the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 (see Figure 6), disabling various switches except for specific switches (e.g., setting key 174, backup clear switch 176, etc.), prohibiting the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82, etc.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that the game is permitted (if S315 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of incrementing the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the number of interrupt-prohibited sections during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). The count value of the interrupt counter is stored in the main RAM 2.
The interrupt counter value is stored in an interrupt counter area in a working area of 03. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process of the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in an interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a special symbol, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to guarantee the reliability of various random numbers, which are important factors related to the number of balls dispensed.
After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. The details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.
After executing the process of S320, the process proceeds to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 executes a winning information command setting process. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is executed.
After executing the process of S321, the process proceeds to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 executes a performance control command transmission process. In this process, a command that has been reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process.
After executing the process of S323, the process proceeds to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) separate from the work area in which data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if the RAM is cleared, for example. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control process]
Next, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the value of the start-up control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the start control flag indicates a setting change (S
If the determination in step S331 is YES, the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332).
Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing 2), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the launch control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (if the determination is NO in S331), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S333.

In S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the start-up control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

When it is determined in S333 that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating the setting confirmation (S
If the answer is YES in step S333, the main CPU 201 performs a setting confirmation process (S334).
Details of this setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing 4), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, i.e., if it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared (if NO is determined in S333), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 executes a setting operation display process.
The main CPU 201 performs a process of displaying the currently set setting value.
After executing the process of step S336, the process proceeds to step S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power interruption recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S336, the process proceeds to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs a process of outputting a watchdog timer (WDT). In this process (WDT output process), a process of reading the address of the WDT clear register,
The T clear process and the WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process performed in S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Note that Fig. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading out information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (if the determination in S341 is NO), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S343.
In the case of S judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the set value within the range.
After executing the process of S342, the PU 201 advances the process to S343.

In this embodiment, in the setting change process, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176. However, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided so that the setting value can be changed by operating this setting switch.

At S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has not been turned off (if S343 is a NO judgement), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if S343 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After the first normal game pre-processing (S344) is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing, and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Note that Fig. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 has been turned off (S3
51) This determination process is performed in the same manner as in S343 in the setting change process described above (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has not been turned off (if the determination in S351 is NO), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process, and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (when S351 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing (S352).
Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to Figure 50. As described above, when this second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After the second normal game pre-processing (S352) is performed, the main CPU 201
The setting confirmation process ends, and the process returns to the setting control process (see Figure 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see Fig. 47) will be described. Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. Note that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation are not performed in the startup initial setting processing (see Fig. 24), that is, when the RAM is cleared.

The main CPU 201 first performs an initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored in the event of a power outage (hereinafter, “RAM setting process”) is set.
A clearing process (e.g., constructing a working area and setting an address, etc.) of the "backup area" (referred to as the "backup area"). Note that the area in which data is stored in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45) is not cleared. Also, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data is stored in the constructed working area in the main RAM 203.
That is, the data backed up at the time of power failure is erased, and the game state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown, in this process, the game state is returned to the initialized state, making it possible to start playing, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. After the initialization RAM setting process (S361) is executed, the main C
The PU 201 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving transmission of an initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a performance control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When this first normal game pre-processing is ended, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see Fig. 48) will be described. Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process when the power is restored in the startup initial setting process (see Fig. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read out, and the read out data is stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 that has been constructed. The above data is, for example, various information required to progress in the game, such as game status information, the on/off state of the hit flags for special and normal symbols, and reserved number information. In other words, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power loss to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same game status as before the power loss. Although not shown,
In this process, the game state is restored to the same state as before the power failure, making it possible to start playing the game, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. After executing the power failure recovery RAM setting process (S371), the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability variable flag is ON. This process is performed by reading data stored in the work area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the high probability flag is not on (if S372 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S374.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S372 that the probability variable flag is on (S372 is YES),
If so, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag when the power is restored. If the probability change notification flag is ON, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to know from the outside whether the probability change flag is ON or not when the power is restored. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 returns to the process of S3
Move to 74.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs processing to schedule the transmission of a power interruption recovery command.
The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a performance control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S374 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
51 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the start hole winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S382. The start-hole winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process (S382). In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. is set when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a special prize opening passage detection process (S383). In the special prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts when a prize is won through the special prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol wins) for normal symbols are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 by the passage gate switch 127. The main RAM 203 has normal symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) that reserve various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol wins) extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 until the start condition for the normal symbol is established. In addition, in the ball passage detection process, it is also determined whether there is free space in the normal symbol start memory area (1) to (4), that is, whether the number of reserved normal symbols extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 126 is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 terminates the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start gate winning detection process]
52 is a flow chart showing an example of the start hole winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start hole winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that the first start switch 121 has not detected a game ball (S391 is N
If the answer is NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first start switch 121 detects a game ball (S391 is Y
If the determination is ES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a big win, a symbol random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance of the first special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to winning the first starting port. After executing the processing of S392, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first starting hole 120 is, for example, less than four.
The main RAM 203 has the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) which reserves various random numbers extracted based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 120 until the start condition is satisfied, and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is free space in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4).
In addition to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), there is also a first special symbol start memory area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (S393
is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (if S393 is judged as YES),
The main CPU 201 transfers the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process of incrementing the reserved number of the first special symbol by 1. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start hole 120 in the main RAM 2 until the variation start condition of the first special symbol is established.
03. As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols and performing a win determination process, etc., using the random number value extracted in S392, prior to the win determination process of the special symbols (see S93 in FIG. 28).
It is also determined whether the read ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any timing between the extraction of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the special symbol winning determination process, but considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead performance before the variable display of the special symbol starts, it is preferable to perform the look-ahead determination process around the time of S395, for example. After executing the process of S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the first special symbol. The winning command for the first special symbol is a command including information for increasing the number of reserved first special symbols by 1, information on the variation pattern of the first special symbol (i.e., a command for the variation pattern of the special symbol), and the winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141.

If it is determined that the second start switch 141 has not detected a game ball (S398 is N
If the judgment is O), the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second start switch 141 detects a game ball (S398 is Y
If the determination is ES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a big win, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting an effect of the second special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to winning the second starting port. After executing the processing of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on the winning of the second starting hole 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 has the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) in which various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second start hole 140 are reserved until the start condition is satisfied, and in this process, it is determined whether or not there is free space in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4).
The main RAM 203 includes a second special symbol start memory area (1) to a second special symbol start memory area (
In addition to 4), there is also a second special symbol start memory area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (S400
If the result is NO, the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process, and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (if S400 is judged as YES),
The main CPU 201 transfers the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process of incrementing the reserved number of the second special symbol by 1. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 stores various random numbers extracted based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start hole 140 in the main RAM 2 until the variation start condition of the second special symbol is established.
03. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command including information for increasing the reserved number of the second special symbol by 1 and information on the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

53, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508 described below are repeatedly executed.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). This process is performed by reading a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S504.

In S504, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the display presentation mode to be displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 6) and the sound presentation mode to be output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined.

In the performance mode determination process (S504), the sub-CPU 301 generates an animation request including designation information for the performance content, and generates various requests (e.g., a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and a role request) for operating various performance devices based on the generated animation request. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub CPU 301 executes a drawing control process, in which the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6).
The display control circuit 304 receives a message (drawing request) from the sub-CPU 301.
Based on this, the sub-CPU 301 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 advances the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes a voice control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the voice control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The voice control circuit 305 performs voice control for outputting sound from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking all or a part of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes a role control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a role request to the role control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6).
The role control circuit 307 receives a message (role request) from the sub-CPU 301.
Based on the above, the sub-CPU 3 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the performance props constituting the performance prop group 58.
01 ends the sub-control circuit main processing.

[1-9. Specific example of the performance mode determination process by the sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs a presentation mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command sent from the main control circuit 200.

As one of various processes performed in the presentation mode determination process, the sub-CPU 301 performs, for example, a sub-variation presentation pattern determination process for determining a presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "sub-variation presentation pattern") of a sub-variation presentation corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as the "variation"), a look-ahead presentation pattern determination process for determining a presentation pattern of a look-ahead presentation (hereinafter referred to as a "look-ahead presentation pattern"), etc. In addition, in the presentation mode determination process, various presentation modes related to the progress of the game are also determined, such as a presentation mode of a countdown presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and a presentation mode of a B time-saving game state transition presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value.

The sub-variation performance pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation performance pattern is a performance pattern (e.g., a decorative symbol variation pattern, a character performance pattern, etc.) that is performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol as a performance indicating the expected degree of the result of the variation.

In the sub-variable performance, depending on the sub-variable performance pattern being executed, it is possible to show that the expectation level for the result of the special pattern winning determination process is maintained or increased as the time passes from when the variable display of the special pattern starts to when the special pattern stops.

The sub-variable performance patterns include, for example, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C, big hit type reaches A, B, and C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E, as shown in FIG. 54 described later. As described above, the time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C are determined by the hit determination process of the special symbol (FIG. 2
The jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). The common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, when the execution timing of the countdown effect suggesting the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub-CPU 301
It is advisable to give priority to one of the effects.

The pre-reading performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as a result of the pre-reading judgment process. The pre-reading performance is a performance pattern performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 during a pending state (i.e., after winning in the first starting hole 120, until the start information such as various random numbers extracted based on this winning is provided to the hit judgment process of the special symbol (the variable display of the special symbol is started)) as a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the pre-reading judgment process.

In the look-ahead performance, depending on the look-ahead performance pattern being executed, it is possible to show that when in a pending state, the expectation level for the result of the look-ahead judgment process is maintained or increased as time passes (more specifically, as the variable display of the previously pending start information progresses).

The look-ahead effect is performed, for example, by using a hold image displayed on the display device 7. The hold image is an image that indicates the current hold status.

The look-ahead performance patterns include look-ahead winning type performance patterns that can suggest the expected value for the type of result (whether it is a time-saving winning or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, i.e., the winning judgment process for the special symbol, and look-ahead expected value performance patterns that can suggest the expected value for the result of the winning judgment process for the special symbol being a winning (a jackpot or a time-saving winning). In other words, the look-ahead performance can suggest both or either of the expected value for the type of result of the winning judgment process for the special symbol and the expected value for the result of the winning judgment process for the special symbol being a winning. In addition, the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described below) includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described below),
A process for determining a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern (see S3008 and S3009 in FIG. 59 described later) is performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead winning type presentation pattern, the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern, the look-ahead winning type presentation pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variable performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation presentation pattern determination process will be described. Figure 54 is an example of a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table (detailed description omitted) in a game state where the time-saving flag is off (normal game state). This sub-variation presentation pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 of the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in a game state where the time-saving flag is on (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), but the description will be omitted here.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state of Fig. 54, and determines the sub-variation presentation pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in Fig. 54) to be displayed on the display device 7 as the variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 200. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variation presentation patterns include time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C, big hit type reaches A, B, and C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E.

As described above, the time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects which indicate the possibility of a time-saving hit, and are reach effects which make it clear from appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit. The time-saving hit type reach A is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect which is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss or a big hit, and is displayed only if it is a "time-saving hit" (see Figure 15). This time-saving hit type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for which pre-reading is performed, but is not limited to this and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for which pre-reading is performed. The time-saving hit type reach B and the time-saving hit type reach C have the same or approximately the same performance mode in appearance. However, while the time-saving hit type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern for which pre-reading is performed, the time-saving hit type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern for which pre-reading is performed (see the "Pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15,
See Figure 54 and Figure 55 below).

As described above, the jackpot-related reach A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a jackpot, and are reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of a jackpot just by looking at them. The jackpot-related reach A is a reach effect that indicates a jackpot, and is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a miss or a "time-saving hit" (Figure 1).
5). This big win-related reach A is not a sub-variation presentation pattern that is a pre-reading target, but is not limited to this and may be a sub-variation presentation pattern of a pre-reading mode. The presentation modes of the big win-related reach B and the big win-related reach C are the same or almost the same in appearance. However, while the big win-related reach B is not a sub-variation presentation pattern that is a pre-reading target, the big win-related reach C is a sub-variation presentation pattern that is a pre-reading target (see the "Pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15).

As described above, common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit, and from the outside, it is difficult to know whether there is a time-saving hit or a jackpot. Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a miss, and is displayed only if there is a jackpot or a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15).
(See FIG. 1.) The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance. The common reach D is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit reach C.
Furthermore, the common reach E is an effect that develops from the common reach C to the big win reach C. Note that the common reach A and the common reach B are not sub-variable effect patterns that are read ahead, whereas the common reach C, the common reach D, and the common reach E are sub-variable effect patterns that are read ahead (see the "read ahead flag" column in FIG. 15).

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 determines the sub-variable performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 54)
and determines a sub-variation performance pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub-CPU 301 controls so that the determined sub-variation performance pattern is displayed on the display device 7.

[1-9-2. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process and a pre-reading expected value presentation pattern determination process, which are performed as the pre-reading presentation pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) is provided with the first sub-reserved area (0), the first sub-reserved area (1), the first sub-reserved area (2), the first sub-reserved area (3), and the first sub-reserved area (4) as areas corresponding to the first special symbol start memory area (0), the first special symbol start memory area (1), the first special symbol start memory area (2), the first special symbol start memory area (3), and the first special symbol start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203. Various reserved information related to the extracted random number value is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) and the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4). In addition, the first special symbol start memory area (0) and the first sub-reserved area (0) store information corresponding to the fluctuation. When the sub-CPU 301 receives a winning command for the first starting port winning, it stores the received information in the first sub-reserve area corresponding to the current first special pattern starting memory area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 is provided with a second sub-reserve area (0), a second sub-reserve area (1), a second sub-reserve area (2), a second sub-reserve area (3), and a second sub-reserve area (4) as areas corresponding to the second special pattern start memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1), the second special pattern start memory area (2), the second special pattern start memory area (3), and the second special pattern start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading performance for the first special pattern is performed in the normal game state, but this is not limited to this and may be performed in other game states (e.g., high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), or may be performed for the second special pattern.

The pre-reading performance is performed, for example, by using a reserved image displayed in the display area of the display device 7. In the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-reserved area (0) is provided as an area for displaying the reserved image.
There are provided a 0th area corresponding to the 1st sub-reservation area (1), a first reserving area corresponding to the 1st sub-reservation area (2), a third reserving area corresponding to the 1st sub-reservation area (3), and a fourth reserving area corresponding to the 1st sub-reservation area (4).

[1-9-2-1. Tables referenced in the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination process]
The tables referenced in the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process will be described below.

The forms of the pending images in which the pre-reading performance is executed with the determined pre-reading hit type performance pattern include a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form indicating the possibility of a time-saving hit, a jackpot type pre-reading performance form indicating the possibility of a jackpot, and a common hit type pre-reading performance form indicating the possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot.

The pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special pattern hit determination process by changing the form of the pending image, for example, from a common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, or from a common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form.

FIG. 55 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number determination table.
In this Fig. 55, only the variation patterns of the pre-reading target are shown among the variation patterns shown in Fig. 54. Also, Fig. 56 is an example of a pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table.
These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. 55, when the sub-CPU 301 receives a variable pattern in which the pre-reading flag is set, the sub-CPU
The PU 301 determines the table number for determining the type of performance pattern for the pre-reading based on, for example, the variation pattern and the reserved number. The reserved number here includes the start information to be pre-read. In other words, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is reserved, the reserved number after the reservation corresponds to the reserved number shown in FIG. 55.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the reserved number is "3", the pre-reading type performance pattern determination table number is determined to be "3".
If the number of reserved items is "2", the table number for determining the type of pre-reading winning pattern is "
The date was decided as "22".

When the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number is determined, the sub-CPU 301
The pre-reading winning type presentation pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table of Fig. 56. In detail, as shown in the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table of Fig. 56, for example, the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern is determined based on the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number and the sub-presentation selection random number value 1.

In FIG. 56, for convenience, the "pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number" is "S
The sub-effect selection random number value 1 is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, if the table number for determining the pre-reading winning type performance pattern is "3" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting the sub-performance is "55", the pre-reading winning type performance pattern is determined to be "07H". Also, if the table number for determining the pre-reading winning type performance pattern is "7" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting the sub-performance is "77", the pre-reading winning type performance pattern is determined to be "16
It is decided to be "H".

In addition, "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column of Figure 56 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively.

In addition, in each of the columns "1" to "4" of the remarks (for reservation) in FIG. 56, "A" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number and the sub-performance selection random number value 1 is,
The reserved image is displayed in a time-saving winning type pre-reading performance form, which indicates that the result of the special pattern winning judgment process is a possibility of a time-saving winning. When the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving winning type pre-reading performance form, it is possible to grasp from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving winning.

In addition, in each of the columns "1" to "4" of the remarks (for reservation) in FIG. 56, "B" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number and the sub-performance selection random number value 1 is,
The result of the special pattern hit determination process indicates that a reserved image is displayed in a big win type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a big win. When the reserved image is displayed in the big win type pre-reading performance form, it is possible to grasp from the appearance that there is a possibility of a big win.

In addition, in each of the columns "1" to "4" of the remarks (for reservation) in FIG. 56, "C" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number and the sub-performance selection random number value 1 is,
The reserved image is displayed in a common winning type pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special pattern winning judgment process is a possibility for either a time-saving winning or a big winning. When the reserved image is displayed in a common winning type pre-reading performance form, it is difficult to grasp from the outside whether there is a possibility of a time-saving winning or a big winning.

For example, if the pre-reading winning type performance pattern is determined to be "07H", the common winning type pre-reading performance form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area, and the second pre-reading performance form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area after the shift.
The common winning type pre-reading performance form "C" is also displayed in the reserved area. Then, when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the common winning type pre-reading performance form "C" is changed to the time-saving winning type pre-reading performance form "A", and the time-saving winning type pre-reading performance form "A" is displayed in the first reserved area.

In addition, when the pre-reading winning type performance pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common winning type pre-reading performance form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, the common winning type pre-reading performance form "C" is changed to the big winning type pre-reading performance form "
The display changes to "B", and in the second reserved area and the first reserved area after being shifted from the second reserved area, the big win type pre-reading performance form "B" is displayed.

That is, the pre-reading winning type performance pattern includes the following (a) to (c) as shown in FIG.
In this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big win type pre-reading performance form "B" to the time-saving win type pre-reading performance form "A" and the time-saving win type pre-reading performance form "
The patterns in which the winning combination changes from "A" to "B" are not included in the pre-reading winning type presentation patterns, but these patterns may be included in the pre-reading winning type presentation patterns.
(i) A pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern in which a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "09H").
(b) A pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern in which a jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed (for example, pre-reading jackpot type presentation pattern "17H").
(c) At the time of being put on hold, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, pre-reading common hit presentation pattern A (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "24H").
ii) When placed on hold, it is displayed in a common win type pre-reading presentation format, and then changes to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation format, a pre-reading common win presentation pattern B (for example, pre-reading win type presentation pattern "12H").
E) When the ball is reserved, it is displayed in a common hit type pre-reading performance format, and the performance format does not change after that. A pre-reading common hit performance pattern C (
For example, the pre-reading winning type performance pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number determination table (for example, see FIG. 55 ) and determines the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number (SASPT number) based on the fluctuation pattern and the reserved number.
The PU301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see Figure 56) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) based on the determined pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation.

In FIG. 56, at the time of reservation, the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" is displayed,
Although the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern that subsequently changes to the big win type pre-reading presentation form "B" is not shown, the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern that changes from the time-saving winning type pre-reading presentation form "A" to the big win type pre-reading presentation form "B" may be determined by the sub-CPU 301 in this way. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that can be given to the player by the pre-reading presentation.

In addition, in Fig. 56, the big win type pre-reading performance form "B" is a big win type pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big win (i.e., there is also a possibility of a miss), as described above, but in addition to this, a big win confirmation pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern determined by the sub-CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type performance patterns E) to H).
(e) A pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed.
At the time of reservation, other pre-reading performance forms (for example, time-saving pre-reading performance form "A"
, big win type pre-reading presentation form "B", common win type pre-reading presentation form "C", etc.) are displayed, and then the pre-reading big win confirmation presentation form is changed to a big win confirmation pre-reading presentation form.
At the time of reservation, other pre-reading performance forms (for example, time-saving pre-reading performance form "A")
, common hit type pre-reading performance form "C", etc.) is displayed, and then the big hit type pre-reading performance form "
"B" is displayed, and then it changes to a pre-reading big win confirmed performance form, a pre-reading big win confirmed performance pattern C.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" and the big hit type pre-reading performance form "B"
Of the common hit type read-ahead performance form "C" and the common hit type read-ahead performance form "C", the display frequency of the common hit type read-ahead performance form "C" is the highest at the time of reservation, but this is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving hit type read-ahead performance form "A" may be displayed most frequently at the time of reservation, or the jackpot type read-ahead performance form "B" may be displayed most frequently at the time of reservation. Furthermore, the common hit type read-ahead performance form "C" may be displayed least frequently at the time of reservation.

In addition, in FIG. 56, all the "pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table numbers (SASP
A random number value of 1 for selecting a sub-performance within a predetermined range is assigned to each SASPT number (T number), but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign a random number value for selecting a sub-performance to only certain SASPT numbers (i.e., the allocation rate for certain SASPT numbers can be set to 0 so that they are not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Tables referenced in the process of determining the expected value effect pattern ahead of time]
Next, a table to be referred to in the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described.

FIG. 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a "time-saving win" or a "big win".
FIG. 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when the result is a miss) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss.

Incidentally, the form of the reserved image in which the look-ahead performance is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value performance pattern differs depending on the expected value for a win (time-saving win, big win).

When a reserved image is displayed as a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed as a triangle, can be changed in shape to "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star" to show the change in expected value. In this case, the expected value is lowest when the reserved image is a square, and highest when the reserved image is a star.

In addition, when a reserved image is displayed as a big win type pre-reading performance form, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed in white, can be changed in color to show a change in expected value, such as "blue < yellow < green < red <rainbow." In this case, when the reserved image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the reserved image is rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

As will be described in more detail later, when the pending image is displayed as a common win type pre-reading presentation format indicating that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit, the pending image may be represented, for example, by both a color indicating the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for a time-saving hit, or it may be represented in a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation format.

Although the reserved image in which the look-ahead performance is performed can be changed from a performance form with a relatively low expected value to a performance form with a relatively high expected value, it is preferable not to change from a performance form with a relatively high expected value to a performance form with a relatively low expected value. In addition, when changing the performance form of the reserved image, it is not necessarily required to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star" or "blue < yellow < green < red <rainbow", and it may be changed, for example, from "pentagon to circle" or "yellow to rainbow". In addition, it is not necessarily required to start the form of the reserved image from the square or blue, which have the lowest expected value, and it may be changed, for example, from a circle or red.

In addition, "1" to "4" shown in the "Notes (Reserved)" column in FIG. 57 are the same as in FIG. 56.
These respectively indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the remarks (hold correspondence) column of FIG. 57, the "0" shown corresponding to the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number and the sub-performance selection random number value 2 is displayed.
" to "5" indicate the expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, big hit). For example,
The above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", and the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1".
", the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2", the above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5".

In the following, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the remarks (hold correspondence) column of FIG. 57, the "0" shown corresponding to the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number and the sub-performance selection random number value 2 is
" to "5" are referred to as expectation levels "0" to "5."

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a hit occurs) in FIG. 57. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined as follows:
As shown in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (missed) of FIG. 58, for example, it is determined based on the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect.
is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a predetermined trigger, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received. Note that in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, only the reserved numbers are illustrated for "1" to "3", and the reserved number is illustrated for "4" for convenience.
It has been omitted.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-performance selection is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". When the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "3" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reserved area, and the expected value level changes from "2" to "4" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when winning) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when losing) (see FIG. 58) based on the result of the special symbol winning judgment process, and determines the reserved number and the sub-performance selection random number value 2
Based on this, a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern is determined.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot," the allocation rate of each pre-reading expected value presentation pattern is not limited to the allocation rate shown in Figure 57 and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "miss," a bias is introduced by increasing the selection rate of pre-reading expected value presentation patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H" or "0BH"), but this is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, for example by distributing them evenly.

In addition, in Figures 57 and 58, a predetermined range of random number values 2 for selecting sub-performances are assigned to all "look-ahead expected value presentation patterns," but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign random number values 2 for selecting sub-performances to only specific "look-ahead expected value presentation patterns" (i.e., the allocation rate of a specific "look-ahead expected value presentation pattern" is set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, the pre-reading performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to each table of FIG. 54 to FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59.
1 is an example of a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance pattern determination process executed by 01.
As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 executes the pre-reading presentation pattern determination process only in the normal game state in which left-handed hits are considered the normal game mode, but this is not limited to this.

The sub-CPU 301 first determines whether or not a winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201 has been received (S3001).

If the winning command has not been received (if S3001 is determined to be NO), the sub-CPU 30
1 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (if S3001 is determined to be YES),
The sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 checks whether there is currently no pending data to be read ahead.
That is, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead effect is being performed for the current hold. If there are multiple holds, the look-ahead effect may be performed for multiple hold images.
The pre-reading effect is performed for only one reserved image.

If a pre-reading performance is being performed on the current hold (if S3002 is determined to be NO)
The sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if a look-ahead effect is not being executed for the current hold (if S3002 is judged as YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S3003.

In S3003, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is not the pre-read target (S3003 is N
In the case of O judgment), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received by the winning command is the pre-read target (S300
3 is judged as YES), the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 or 8). This process is to avoid a transition to the B time-saving game state before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the reserved balls for which the pre-reading performance has been performed, even though the pre-reading performance has been performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest. After performing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number that can be reserved. However, this is not limited to this. If the fluctuation pattern information received by the winning command is to be read ahead (if S3003 is judged as YES),
It may be determined whether the ceiling value and the ceiling counter are greater than the reserved number including the number of pre-read targets. In addition, the ceiling value and the ceiling counter may receive information as a command from the main CPU 201, or may be managed by the sub-CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs a pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referenced to determine the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 refers to a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56 ) and
The pre-read winning type presentation pattern is determined. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 advances the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot". In this process, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is judged based on the variable pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", a YES judgment is made. However, this is not limited to this, and the winning/losing information of the special symbol is sent from the main CPU 201 to the sub-CPU
By transmitting the signal to 301, a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" may be determined.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" (S300
7 is a YES judgement), the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "jackpot" (NO determination in S3007), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of determining a pre-reading expected value presentation pattern (when a winning combination occurs). In this process, the pre-reading expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a winning combination occurs) of FIG.
After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of determining a pre-reading effect pattern when the player loses. In this process, the pre-reading expected value effect pattern determination table (when the player loses) in FIG.
After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading performance, examples of pre-reading performance extensions]
In the above-mentioned pre-reading performance, not only is it interesting to see whether the reserved image will change into a big win pre-reading performance form or a time-saving win pre-reading performance form, but it also provides a sense of whether the player will win (
It is possible to change the expected value level of the winnings (big win, time-saving win), and it is possible to increase interest by performing new performances that have never been performed before. The timing for changing the form of the reserved image is not limited to when the reserved image shifts, but may be during the variable display of the special pattern of the change, for example.

In addition, the form of the reserved image performed as a pre-reading performance (for example, the first sub-reserved area (4) to
Regarding the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reservation area (1), the first starting port 1
The shape of the reserved image in the variable display of the special symbol of the change may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, the variation pattern in which the pre-reading performance is executed in the pre-reading time-saving performance pattern (Figure 5
4 (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH") and the probability of being determined to be a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15).
In other words, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern than in the look-ahead big win performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines in which the look-ahead performance was performed only when there was a possibility of a big win, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of the win,
It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead big win performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving win performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead performance is executed, the expected value for the big win is higher than the expected value for the time-saving win, so that it is possible to increase the interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state), a "time-saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (see FIG. 10). However, in this embodiment, a pre-reading performance is performed in the normal game state, but a pre-reading performance is not performed in the low-probability time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit," the possibility of the number of time-saving times increasing is low in both cases where the time-saving game state C is overlapped and executed on the time-saving game state A, and where the time-saving game state C is not overlapped and executed on the time-saving game state A. Therefore, by preventing the player from knowing as much as possible that he or she may have won the "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state A, it is possible to reduce the disappointment given to the player by winning the "time-saving hit," and to suppress a decrease in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the pre-reading performance from being performed in the low probability time-saving game state, and the pre-reading performance may be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low probability time-saving game state and the high probability low time-saving game state. In this embodiment, the pre-reading performance is performed only for the first special symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the pre-reading performance may also be performed for the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving reach, a big win reach, or a common reach can be executed as a sub-variable performance pattern.
56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern, it executes the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable performance pattern, and does not execute the jackpot type reach. Also, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern, it executes the jackpot type reach as the sub-variable performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving hit type reach.

In this embodiment, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern or the look-ahead common winning performance pattern, the sub-CPU 301 can execute a time-saving winning reach as a sub-variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead big winning performance pattern, the sub-CPU 301 does not execute a time-saving winning reach as a sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, the pre-reading big win presentation pattern (for example, the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56), the pre-reading time-saving winning presentation pattern (for example, the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56), and the pre-reading common winning presentation pattern (for example, the pre-reading presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56)
In either case, the sub-CPU 301 performs a common reach as a sub-variation performance pattern (for example, the sub-variation performance patterns “0AH” and “0BH” shown in FIG. 55).
") may be executed.

Also, a presentation pattern may be provided in which a time-saving hit type reach is executed, and after the time-saving hit type reach is clearly indicated as a miss, a big win type reach is executed. In this case, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end as to whether or not a big win type reach with a high profit rate will be executed, thereby improving the player's interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for start information in which a look-ahead performance has been performed, when a common reach E is performed, a performance common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to a performance common to the big win reach C. On the other hand, when no performance common to the common reach C is performed,
There is no transition to the big win type reach C. Similarly, in target fluctuation, if a common reach E is executed, after a performance common to the common reach C is displayed, it is possible to transition to a performance common to the time-saving hit type reach C. On the other hand, if no performance common to the common reach C is executed, there is no transition to the time-saving hit type reach C.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading performance is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a pre-reading performance mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as a "big hit pre-reading performance") has already been performed, the sub-CPU 301 does not perform a new pre-reading performance. Even if the pachinko game machine performs pre-reading performance for multiple reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new pre-reading performance if a big hit pre-reading performance has already been performed.

For example, if there are multiple reserves including an arbitrary reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "first reserve") and another reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "second reserve") in which the variable display of the special pattern starts after the first reserve, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead winning type performance pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is executed in the first reserve, even if the look-ahead performance is executed in the second reserve, the look-ahead performance in the second reserve may be meaningless. In particular, if a jackpot is derived for the first reserve and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to an A time-saving game state after the end of this jackpot game state, even if a "time-saving win" is derived for the second reserve, the player may not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving win", and in this case, the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, if the jackpot look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead performance for the reserve that is consumed after the jackpot look-ahead performance is executed.

In addition, even if the first reservation is a jackpot reservation (a reservation from which a jackpot is derived),
If a look-ahead performance has not been performed for the first hold, a look-ahead performance may or may not be performed for the second hold.

In addition, even if a false jackpot pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "53H" in Figure 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the pre-reading effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving winning pre-reading performance (for example, the pre-reading winning type performance pattern "05H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first reservation, a big win pre-reading performance or a time-saving winning pre-reading performance may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a time-saving winning is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to expect a big win that is more profitable for the player.

In addition, in the first pachinko game machine, the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, even if a small hit pre-reading performance is executed in the first reservation, a big hit pre-reading performance or a time-saving hit pre-reading performance may be executed in the second reservation. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern includes a small hit, a pre-reading performance mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as "small hit pre-reading performance").
When the "big win pre-reading effect" or the "time-saving win pre-reading effect" is executed in the first reservation, the second reservation may be executed. This is because, even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to expect a small win that is more profitable for the player.

In addition, as a sub-variable performance pattern, for example, the first starting hole 120 during the execution of a big win-related reach
When a winning combination is won and the start information is reserved, the sub-CPU 301 does not execute a look-ahead performance for this reservation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the big win display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the look-ahead judgment performed by the main CPU 201 is reserved (this reservation is referred to as a "specific reservation" in this paragraph), whether the look-ahead performance is performed for this specific reservation or not, the sub-CPU 301 does not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation after the big win game state ends, unless the normal game state is in effect. However, the sub-CPU 301 may be made capable of not executing the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation even if the normal game state is in effect after the big win game state ends. Furthermore, even if the pachinko game machine executes the look-ahead performance in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a low-probability time-saving game state), if there is a specific reservation when the big win display mode is derived, the sub-CPU
301 may make it possible not to execute a pre-reading performance for a specific reserved ball after the end of a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern is completed and the big win display mode is derived, the main CP
When start information determined to be a "time-shortened hit" by the pre-reading judgment performed by U201 is reserved (this reservation is referred to as a "specific reservation" in this paragraph), even if this specific reservation is a "time-shortened hit" reservation, the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-shortened game state based on the "time-shortened hit" after the end of the big win game state. For example, in the case of a specification in which multiple time-shortened game states are not executed in overlapping fashion when the time-shortened game states overlap, and the A time-shortened game state is controlled after the end of the big win game state, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-shortened game state based on the "time-shortened hit" even if the specific reservation is a "time-shortened hit" reservation.

[1-10. Examples of pre-reading performance]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to Figures 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 is capable of executing the look-ahead effect using a reserved image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific examples of when a pre-reading performance is performed with a pre-reading jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern. First, a specific example of a look-ahead performance in a look-ahead big win performance pattern as the look-ahead winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process of the big win type look-ahead performance form changing, which indicates the possibility of a big win. Note that the look-ahead winning type performance patterns shown in Fig. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in Fig. 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in Fig. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted in Fig. 57.

As shown in FIG. 60(a) to FIG. 60(f), the display area 7a of the display device 7 displays the first
The reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are displayed. As described above, the first reservation area 411 to the fourth reservation area 414 are areas that indicate whether or not reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (1) to the first sub-reservation area (4), respectively. In addition, the 0th area 410 is
This is an area corresponding to the first sub-reservation area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub-CPU 301
The reserved area 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-reserved area in which the reserved information is stored is
In addition, when the reserved information is not stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved information in the reserved image shown in a triangle (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "reserved image").
The reserved image is not displayed, and only the frame of the reserved area is displayed.

In Fig. 60(a), the first reserve area 411 to the third reserve area 413 display normal reserved images without the pre-reading effect, and the fourth reserve area 414 displays only a frame without displaying a reserved image. This indicates that reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved areas (1) to (3), and that no reserved information is stored in the first sub-reserved area (4).

In Fig. 60(b), a reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in Fig. 60(a). This indicates that new reserved information has been stored in the first sub-reserved area (4) from the state shown in Fig. 60(a).

As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., colors) according to the expected value for the big win. In this embodiment, except for the rainbow, the difference in color is illustrated by the shade of the color.

In this embodiment, in Figure 60 (b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reservation area 411 to the third reservation area 413 is white (expectation level "0"), and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reservation area 414 is blue (expectation level "1").

Figure 60 (c) is an image in which the reservation has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (b), and shows that the color of the reservation image displayed in the fourth reservation area 414 in Figure 60 (b) has changed from blue to yellow (expectation level "2") when it is shifted to the third reservation area 413.

Figure 60 (d) is an image in which the reservation has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (c), and shows that the color of the reservation image displayed in the third reservation area 413 in Figure 60 (c) has changed from yellow to green (expectation level "3") when it is shifted to the second reservation area 412.

Figure 60 (e) is an image in which the reservation has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (d), and shows that the color of the reservation image displayed in the second reservation area 412 in Figure 60 (d) has changed from green to red (expectation level "4") when it is shifted to the first reservation area 411.

Figure 60 (f) is an image in which the reservation has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (e), and shows that the color of the reservation image displayed in the first reservation area 411 in Figure 60 (e) has changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a jackpot does not necessarily need to be changed when the reserved image shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern of the change.

60, the big win system read-ahead performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the big win is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, a read-ahead performance that changes from the big win system read-ahead performance form to the big win confirmation read-ahead performance form may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big win confirmation read-ahead performance form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.

[1-10-2. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading time-saving performance patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading performance performed with a pre-reading time-saving winning performance pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

61(a) to 61(f) are examples of pre-reading performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process of the pre-reading performance form of the time-saving hit indicating the possibility of a time-saving hit changing. Note that the pre-reading time-saving hit type performance patterns shown in FIG. 61(a) to FIG. 61(f) are "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in FIG.
57, the pre-reading expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the pre-reading expected value presentation patterns shown in FIG. 61(a) to FIG. 61(f) are omitted from FIG.

In Figure 61 (a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images with no preview performance being executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays no holding images, only a frame.

In Fig. 61(b), a reserved image is newly displayed in the fourth reservation area 414 from the state shown in Fig. 61(a).
The form (e.g., shape) of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is displayed differently depending on the expected value per time reduction.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the expected value for a big win is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving win is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in Figure 61 (b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 in FIG. 61(b) has been shifted to the third reserved image.
This image shows that when it is shifted to the reserved area 413, it changes from a square to a pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 61(d) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(c), and the shape of the reserved image displayed in the third reserved area 413 in FIG. 61(c) has been shifted to the second reserved image.
This image shows that when it is shifted to the reserved area 412, it changes from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3").

FIG. 61(e) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(d). In FIG. 61(d), the shape of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 has been shifted to the first reserved image.
This image shows that when it is shifted to the reserved area 411, it changes from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4").

FIG. 61( f ) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61( e ). In FIG. 61( e ), the shape of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved area 411 has been shifted to the 0th reserved image.
This is an image showing a change from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when shifted to region 410.

In addition, the shape of the reserved image indicating the expected value for the time-saving hit does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle <star" and may change, for example, from "pentagon → circle."

In addition, the shape of the reserved image (expected value level) that indicates the expected value for the time reduction is not necessarily
The change does not have to occur when the reserve shifts, and may occur, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in Fig. 61, the time-saving hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big win confirmation pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading common winning effects patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading effect performed with a pre-reading common winning effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process of the reserved image changing from a common win type look-ahead performance form, which indicates that both a big win and a time-saving win are possible, to a big win type look-ahead performance form. Changes in the common win type look-ahead performance form include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving win, big win) and a change in the type of win to one that is clear as to whether it is a big win or a time-saving win. The look-ahead winning type performance patterns shown in FIG. 62(a) to FIG. 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in FIG. 56, and the look-ahead expected value performance pattern shown in FIG. 62(a) to FIG. 62(d) corresponds to "43H" in FIG. 57.

In this embodiment, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form indicating the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit is represented by displaying both a color indicating the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for a time-saving hit.

In Figure 62 (a), the first holding area 411 and the second holding area 412 display normal holding images with no preview performance being executed, and the third holding area 413 and the fourth holding area 414 display no holding images, only frames.

In FIG. 62(b), a reserved image is newly displayed in the third reservation area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a).
The form (e.g., color and shape) of the reserved image shown in 4 is used to indicate a hit (a big hit or a time-saving hit).
In this embodiment, when the pre-reading performance is not performed or when the expected value for the win is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle,
The expected value for a short hit increases in the following order: blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), a first reservation area 411 and a second reservation area 412
The reserved image shown in the first reserved area 413 has the shape of a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 414 has the shape of a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

FIG. 62(c) shows an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(b). In FIG. 62(b), the reserved image displayed in the third reserved area 413 has been shifted to the second reserved image.
When shifted to the reserved area 412, the yellow pentagon to the green hexagon (expected value level "3")
This is an image showing the change to

FIG. 62(d) shows an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 62(c), and the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in FIG. 62(c) has been shifted to the first reserved image.
This image shows that when it is shifted to the pending area 411, it changes from a green hexagon (a common hit type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "3") to a rainbow triangle (a big hit type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "5").

That is, the pre-reading effects shown in Fig. 62(b) and Fig. 62(c) are effects in which it is difficult to know from the form of the reserved image whether the form of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a big win or the expected value for a time-saving win.
) the predictive effect shown in the figure indicates the expected value for a jackpot through the shape of the pending image, and it is possible to grasp that the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5").

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern, the pre-reading performance is
The device is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead performance in any one of a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern showing an expected value for a time-saving hit, a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern showing an expected value for a jackpot, and a look-ahead common hit performance pattern showing an expected value for a hit (jackpot or time-saving hit). When the look-ahead performance is executed in the look-ahead common hit performance pattern, the player can be entertained by wondering whether the reserved image will change to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit-based look-ahead performance form, and this can enhance the player's interest.

The form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a time-saving hit does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star" and may change, for example, from "yellow pentagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) -> red triangle (big hit type pre-reading presentation form)" or from "green hexagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) -> triangular star (time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form)". Also, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue square which has the lowest expected value,
For example, you may start with the red circle.

Furthermore, the form of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a win does not necessarily need to be changed when the reserved image shifts, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern of the change.

In addition, in Fig. 62, the common hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to change the expected value derived from any hit (big hit or time-saving hit) or to change the expected hit from an unknown state to a big hit, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big hit confirmed pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
・The common hit type pre-reading performance form changes to the big hit type pre-reading performance form, and then,
A pre-reading effect that changes into a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading effect form.

[1-10-4. Modification of common hit type pre-reading performance form]
In addition, as a form of reserved image, the common hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit does not necessarily have to be a color that indicates the expected value for a jackpot,
The shape is not limited to the shape that shows both the expected value for the time-saving hit and the shape that shows the expected value for the time-saving hit. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common hit type pre-reading performance form may be provided. When a dedicated common hit type pre-reading performance form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both the big hit and the time-saving hit, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it becomes possible to play with a sense of expectation for the change in the performance mode in the future, which can increase interest.

Figures 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process of the reserved image changing from a dedicated common win look-ahead performance form to a big win look-ahead performance form. The look-ahead winning type performance patterns shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value performance pattern shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

64(a) to 64(d) are examples of pre-reading performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process in which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common winning pre-reading performance form to a time-saving winning pre-reading performance form. The pre-reading winning type performance patterns shown in FIG. 64(a) to FIG. 64(d) are "07H", "27H", and "43H" in FIG.
, or "63H", and the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

In FIG. 63(a) and FIG. 64(a), the first reservation area 411 and the second reservation area 412
A normal reserved image in which the pre-reading performance is not being performed is displayed in the third reserved area 41.
In the third and fourth reservation areas 414, no reserved images are displayed, only frames are displayed.

In Figure 63 (b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in Figure 63 (a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both Fig. 63(b) and Fig. 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common winning type pre-reading performance form, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

Figure 63 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (b), and shows that the dedicated common hit type pre-reading performance form that was displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 63 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Similarly, Figure 64 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (b), and shows that the dedicated common hit type pre-reading performance form that was displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 64 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

FIG. 63(d) shows an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 63(c), and the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in FIG. 63(c) has been shifted to the first reserved image.
When it is shifted to the reserved area 411, a red triangle (
This is an image showing that the expected value level of the jackpot has changed to "4".

On the other hand, Figure 64 (d) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (c), and shows that the form of the reserve image displayed in the second reserve area 412 in Figure 64 (c) has changed from a dedicated common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a white circle (expected value level for time-saving hits of "4") when shifted to the first reserve area 411.

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is represented by a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form, the player can be entertained by wondering whether the dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form will change to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form or a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form, thereby making it possible to increase interest.

[1-11. Signals output to outside the device]
Next, a signal output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer (not shown) provided on each island) will be described. Note that, in this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described, but it is also possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1",
These are various signals for "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8", "prize ball information 2" and "security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or the machine may be configured so that none of these signals are output.

65 is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 65, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output from CN1, and the signal of "prize ball information 2" is output from CH2.
The "door/frame open" signal is output from CH3 to CH10, and the "external information 1
" through "External Information 8" signals are output from CH11, a "prize ball information 2" signal is output from CH12, and a "security" signal is output from CH13. The output conditions of signals from the first pachinko game machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in FIG.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine is shown below.
The following description will be given by taking the signal of "prize ball information 1" as an example. As shown in Fig. 65, in this embodiment, the signal of "prize ball information 1" is output for 120 msec every 10 prize balls paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the signal "prize ball information 1" among the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on every time one prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, the big prize opening 131 (FIG. 4)
If the game ball enters the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 140 (see Figure 4)), for example, 10 prize balls will be paid out, if the game ball enters the starting hole (first starting hole 120 or second starting hole 140 (see Figure 4)), for example, 3 prize balls will be paid out, and if the game ball enters the general winning hole 122 (see Figure 4), for example, 4 prize balls will be paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs a signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the signal of "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 ms from the time when the previous output of the signal of "prize ball information 1" is the starting point, at the timing when the payout detection switch of the 10th prize ball is turned on.
ec, the "prize ball information 1" signal is output. Note that outputting the "prize ball information 1" signal when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is merely an example, and it may be output, for example, between the time when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on and the time when it is turned off. Also, the "prize ball information 1" signal may be output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, or every 120
Outputting the signal for msec is merely one example, and the output timing and output time of the "prize ball information 1" signal can be set as appropriate.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be described. The "security" signal is a signal that is mainly outputted when an error occurs.

FIG. 67 is a table showing an example of an outline of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. More specifically, for each error name, the trigger for the occurrence in the main control circuit 200, the trigger for the release in the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6), and the "security" signal (illustrated as "security signal" in FIG. 67).
1 is a table showing output times and notes.

In addition, the first pachinko game machine does not have a large prize hole for small wins, but for convenience, in FIG.
The error of the abnormal winning of the large winning hole for small winning is also described. Also, in FIG. 67, the large winning hole 131 is described as the large winning hole for big winning.

The outline of errors shown in Fig. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, anything not shown in Fig. 67 may be determined to be an error.
For example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error occurs when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or more, a large prize entry port entry/ejection abnormality error occurs when there is an undischarged game ball inside the large prize entry port (large prize entry port for a large win or a large prize entry port for a small win) or when a prize is won inside the large prize entry port when the large prize entry port is not open, a vibration sensor error occurs when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time, etc. Also, for example, if a specific area is provided inside the large prize entry port for a large win, and the probability variable control is executed after the end of the large prize game control based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the large prize game control, it is preferable to configure it to be judged as an error when there is an abnormality in passing to the specific area, or when the game ball passes through the specific area even though there is no undischarged game ball inside the large prize entry port for a large win.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred,
The sub-CPU 1 (see FIG. 6) receives the fraud detection command.
The control unit 301 executes notification control according to the content of the error.

Below is an example of when an abnormal winning error occurs at the big win slot.
The control by the CPU 201 and the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) will be briefly described.

As shown in Fig. 67, for example, after the initial power-on, if one winning is detected before the first big win opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see Fig. 6) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. Also, it transmits a fraud detection related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see Fig. 6) indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening.

In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the type of error, so that an external device (for example, hall computer 186 (see Fig. 6) or island computer (not shown)) can know that an error has occurred by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot know the content of the error. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output time of the "security" signal may be changed depending on the content of the error, so that an external device that receives the "security" signal can know the content of the error.

When the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6 ) receives a fraud detection related command indicating an abnormal winning error at a big winning port, the sub-CPU 301 executes all or part of the notification control shown below, for example:
When, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since the fraud detection-related command was received, the notification control described below ends.
Notification control for displaying, for example, the text "Abnormal winning error at large prize port" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control to output a voice such as "There is an abnormal winning error at the large prize port" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, Figure 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for lighting up all of the LEDs 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) in red via the LED control circuit 306.

In addition, if a power outage occurs, for example, before 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub-CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 301 receives a fraud detection related command indicating an abnormal winning error at the large prize winning port for a jackpot while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning error at the large prize winning port for a jackpot, the sub-CPU 301 re-executes the above-mentioned notification control.

Next, regarding the signal outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state, FIG.
8. Fig. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions of signals output to the outside of the machine according to the game state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In Fig. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the signals output are different depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during a normal game state (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a probability change or time reduction), no signal is output, during a low probability time reduction game state (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 7" are output, and during a high probability time reduction game state (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3", "External Information 5", and "External Information 7" are output. Also, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high probability non-time reduction game state, during a high probability non-time reduction game state (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 6" are output.

In this way, by making the signal output according to the game state controlled by the main CPU 201 different, it is possible to control the reception of the signal from an external device (e.g., a hall computer 1
86 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown) can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko gaming machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (normal game state) is the signal output during the normal game state (except during a big win or small win, during a special bonus or time reduction).
Similarly, during small hit game control processing (low probability time-saving game state)
The signal output to is the same as the signal output during the low probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), and the signal output during the small win game control process (during a high probability time-saving game state) is
The signal output during the high probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win) is the same as the signal output during the small win game control process (during a high probability non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high probability non-time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win). In other words, an external device capable of receiving a signal (for example, a hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or an island computer (not shown)) cannot know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information transmission. However, instead of this, the signal output during the small win game control process may be made different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not being executed, so that the external device capable of receiving the signal can know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information transmission.

Also, during the low probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win, other than during a small win), during the high probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win, other than during a small win), during the small win game control process (low probability time-saving game state), and during the small win game control process (high probability time-saving game state) shown in Fig. 68, the signal is output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, the time-saving control may be executed when both the electric support control and the special chart shortening control are executed, or the time-saving control may be executed when only the electric support control is executed among the electric support control and the special chart shortening control, or the time-saving control may be executed when only the special chart shortening control is executed among the electric support control and the special chart shortening control.

In the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU controls the following:
The description is based on the premise that the time-shortening game state A, the time-shortening game state B, and the time-shortening game state C can be controlled (the function of the time-shortening game state A, the function of the time-shortening game state B, and the function of the time-shortening game state C are installed), but this is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko game machine may be equipped with only one of the functions of the time-shortening game state A, the function of the time-shortening game state B, and the function of the time-shortening game state C, (for example, the function of the time-shortening game state A), and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the function of the time-shortening game state B and the function of the time-shortening game state C). Also, the pachinko game machine may be equipped with only two of the functions of the time-shortening game state A, the function of the time-shortening game state B, and the function of the time-shortening game state C, (for example, the function of the time-shortening game state A, and the function of the time-shortening game state B or the function of the time-shortening game state C), and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the function of the time-shortening game state B or the function of the time-shortening game state C).

In addition, for example, in a pachinko game machine called an ST machine, after the end of the jackpot game state,
In a pachinko game machine in which the probability of ...

[2. The second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko gaming machine will be described. As mentioned above, the second pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type one pachinko gaming machine called Digi-Pachi. However, the second pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different.
There is a difference from the first pachinko gaming machine.

In the following description of the second pachinko game machine, we will omit as much as possible descriptions of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko game machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 1184 (see Figure 70 described below) to outside the second pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 1186 (see Figure 70 described below) and the island computer (not shown) provided on each island).

In addition, in describing the second pachinko game machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in describing the first pachinko game machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as the first pachinko game machine. However, in describing the second pachinko game machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in describing the second pachinko game machine will be described using reference numerals and step numbers different from those of the first pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has functions and the like in common with the first pachinko game machine.

Pachinko gaming machines that can changeably display the first and second special patterns in parallel include pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are on hold, the start condition of the second special pattern is established with priority over the start condition of the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "priority change machine"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the start conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second start ports (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential change machine").

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 has a game area 1105.
is formed.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 1120, etc.) arranged in the play area 1105 of the second pachinko game machine have some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine (see Figure 4), but they will be explained again in detail.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, and a guide rail 11.
10, a center role 1115 arranged in the approximate center of the game area 1105, a first start port 1120, a general winning port 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric role unit 1130, a second start port 1140A, 1140B, and a normal electric role unit 1145.
The game board unit 1010 includes a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) disposed behind the game board unit 1010.
The D unit 1160 is similar to the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko gaming machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this second pachinko gaming machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. A guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted thereon. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the gaming area 1105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 1105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body to enhance the presentation effect is disposed behind the game panel 1100. The game panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 1100 may be made of a transparent material, or, for example, only the part where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent material. In addition, the game panel 1100 may be made of a material that does not have a transparent part (for example, wood), and a transparent material may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference numbers).
The play area 1105 is defined by a guide rail 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding a game ball launched from a launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the play area 1105.

(Center role)
The center device 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

The game ball launched by the launching device 1006 toward the game area 1105 lands in the left area 1
The game ball flows down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 or the right side area 1107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 1100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side area 1106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side area 1107.

In addition, the center role 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. The game ball that enters the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center role 1115. The stage 1118 is formed in the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

At the rear side of the stage 1118, approximately at the center in the left-right direction, there is a chance entrance 11 through which a game ball can enter.
19 is formed, and the game ball that enters the chance entrance 1119 is a first start entrance 1120
Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 1119 has a higher probability of being released into the first starting opening 1118 than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 1117, or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 1117 but did not enter the chance entrance 1119.
The goal is to win (pass) 120.

(First starting point)
The first start hole 1120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 1007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win). When a game ball wins in the first start hole 1120, a first start hole switch 1121
(See FIG. 70 described later). In addition, when the game ball hit from the right side enters the first starting hole 112
Alternatively, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120,
The machine may be provided with a first starting hole through which a gaming ball hit from the right can win (a gaming ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win).

When the first start hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 1120, start information for the first special symbol is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are reserved. When the start condition is met, the reserved start information is used for the winning determination process for the first special symbol. When a game ball enters the first start hole 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 1120 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
The general winning ports 1122 are arranged in a plurality on the lower left side of the display area of the display device 1007.
The general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize).
123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the general winning port switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general winning port 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out.
The number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of a gaming ball into number 22 is not limited to four.

In this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 122, a general winning hole may be provided through which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 1125 is located in the right area 1107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 1126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 1127 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 1126.

When the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal pattern is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved start information of the normal pattern is used for the winning judgment process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, no prize balls are paid out. Also, the passing gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left area 1106 instead of or in addition to the right area 1107.

The pass gate 1126 may also function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the accessory. That is, the condition for transition from a non-jackpot game state (such as a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the consecutive operation device of the accessory are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, the condition device may be activated but the consecutive operation device of the accessory may not be activated. Then, assuming that the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the accessory may be activated by the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 1126, i.e., the detection of a game ball by the pass gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later), to transition to the jackpot game state.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric role unit 1130 includes a big prize winning hole 1131 for a big win and a big prize winning hole 1132 for a big win.
A big win hole count switch 1132 for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big win hole 131
The special electric role unit 1130 is a unit body that integrates the pass gate unit 1125 (see FIG. 70 described later) and the special electric role unit 1133.
is placed lower than

The big win opening 1131 for a big win is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big win opening 1131 for a big win, a big win opening for a big win that can win a game ball hit from the left may be arranged, or a big win opening for a big win that can win a game ball may be arranged above the center role 1115.

The big win opening 1131 is an opening that is opened so that a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) can win (pass) when the game is controlled to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player.
When the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 1131 for a big win is detected by the jackpot detection unit 1132, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 1131 for a big win is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134.
31, a state where the game ball can enter (pass) through the big prize winning hole 113 for a big win, or an open state where the game ball can enter (pass) through the big prize winning hole 113 for a big win.
The jackpot game state is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass) through the jackpot big prize opening 1131 and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter (pass) through the jackpot big prize opening 1131. The transition from the closed state to the open state of the jackpot big prize opening 1131 is performed over a predetermined number of rounds.
This is a game state in which a round game in which the ball 1 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time is played over multiple rounds, making it possible to pay out a large number of game balls as prize balls.

(Second starting hole)
In this embodiment, the second starting port is a second starting port 1140A and a second starting port 1140B.
are arranged in the play area 1105, and these second starting holes 1140A, 1140B are,
In both cases, balls hit from the right can win (balls hit from the left are difficult or impossible to win).
However, this is not limited to the above, and a game ball hit from the left may be able to enter the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described later). When a game ball enters the second start hole 1140B, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later).
Regardless of whether the gaming ball lands on 0A or 1140B, this triggers the process of determining whether the second special symbol has been won.

The second start port 1 is operated by the second start port switch 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later).
When the entry (passage) of a game ball into 1140A, 1140B is detected, start information for the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information is used for the winning determination process for the second special symbol. When a game ball enters second start port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters second start port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, when a game ball enters second start port 1140A, 114
The number of winning balls paid out based on the entry of a gaming ball into 0B is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, two flow paths 1107a and 1107b are formed on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit from the right but does not enter the big winning hole 1131 for the big win. The game ball that is hit from the right and does not enter the big winning hole 1131 for the big win and flows further downstream is, for example, a branch pin 11 shown in FIG.
08, the water is distributed to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that the game balls sorted to the upper flow-down path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow-down path 1107a can win. However, most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow-down path 1107a are not included in the second starting port 1140A.
It is not essential that the balls are configured to win at the second starting hole 1140A, and the balls may be configured to have almost no chance of winning at the second starting hole 1140A, or may have a predetermined expected chance (for example, about one-third to one-fifth) of the balls that flow down the upper flow path 1107a. The balls that flow down the upper flow path 1107a but do not win at the second starting hole 1140A are discharged from the outlet 1178 to the outside of the machine.

The second starting hole 1140B is positioned so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can enter, and details thereof will be described later in the explanation of the normal electric role unit 1145.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and the switch is the second start hole switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and for example, the first start hole may be the winning hole.

The normal electric device 1146 includes a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 1147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 1147. The normal electric device 1146, i.e., the normal power shutter 1147, can be set in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start hole 1140B or easily, and in a closed state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start hole 1140B or easily.
The machine is configured to be capable of transitioning between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a gaming ball to enter 0B and a closed state in which it is difficult or impossible for a gaming ball to enter 0B.
In addition, instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, so-called an electric tulip, may be used.
Includes blade type, door type, protruding plate type, etc.

(Small hit unit)
The small win unit 1150 has a large winning hole 1151 for small wins and a large winning hole 1151 for small wins.
It is a unit that integrates a small win large prize opening count switch 1152 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening, a small win shutter 1153 that can move back and forth, and a small win solenoid 1154 that can operate this small win shutter 1153.

The small win shutter 1153 is moved forward and backward to open the small win large winning hole 115
1, a state where the game ball can enter (pass through) the large winning hole 1151 for small winnings, or an open state where the game ball can enter (pass through) the large winning hole 1151 for small winnings.
The machine is configured to be capable of transitioning between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a gaming ball to enter the machine and a non-closed state in which it is difficult to enter the machine.

When the small win large prize opening 1151 is opened and a game ball enters the small win large prize opening, the winning game ball is detected by the small win large prize opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described later). When the small win large prize opening count switch 1152 detects a game ball, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the small win large prize opening 1151 is not limited to 10.

In addition, the small winning unit 1150 is disposed on the lower flow path 1107b downstream of the normal electric role unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric role 1146, even if the small winning large winning port 1151 is opened, the game ball that has flowed down the lower flow path 1107b will enter the second starting port 1140B provided upstream before reaching the small winning large winning port 1151.
It becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the large prize slot 1151 for small wins.

In this embodiment, large prize opening 1131 for a large win and large prize opening 1151 for a small win are provided separately, but this is not limited to this, and the large prize opening that is opened when the large win game control process is executed and the large prize opening that is opened when the small win game control process is executed may be the same large prize opening.

(Outlet)
The outlet 1178 is a hole for receiving various winning balls (for example, the first starting hole 1120, the second starting holes 1140A and 1140B, the big winning hole 1131 for the big win) that are shot toward the game area 1105.
, general winning port 1122, etc.) to discharge game balls that have not won a prize outside the machine. This outlet 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged outside the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 1122 or between the normal electric role unit 1145 and the small win unit 1150, so that game balls flowing down the game area 1105 can be discharged outside the machine.

(Back unit)
The rear unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and as described above, is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100. This rear unit includes a sub-control circuit 1300.
It is equipped with a group 1058 of props for performance, such as movable props, controlled by a controller (see FIG. 70 described below).
The group of performance-use props 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. At least one of the group of performance-use props 1058 or a performance-use prop component constituting the props functions as a performance-use prop that can be operated based on the result of a hit determination process of a special symbol.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG.
1 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but the control circuit will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read and write memory), and an initial reset circuit 1204.
and a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 is connected to a WDT that monitors the operation.
It has built-in features such as a watchdog timer and functions to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 1202 stores a program for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, and the like.
01 has the function of executing various processes in accordance with the programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 1203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. Note that, although a RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 in this embodiment, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to the main RAM 1203 so that data stored in the main RAM 1203 is not lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to various devices and the like via an I/O
It also includes a port 1205 and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 1300 .

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 includes a normal symbol display unit 1161, a normal symbol reserved display unit 1162, a first special symbol display unit 1163, a second special symbol display unit 1164, a first special symbol reserved display unit 1165,
2nd special symbol reserved display section 1166, probability change notification display section 1167, time reduction notification display section 11
68, a normal power solenoid 1148, a special power solenoid 1135, and a small hit solenoid 1154 are connected to the main control circuit 1200. In addition to these, a performance display monitor 1170 and an error notification monitor 1172 are also connected to the main control circuit 1200.
The 00 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O ports 1205 .

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is data indicating, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (e.g., 60,000 balls) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 1172. In addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function described later, the error notification monitor 1172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that, as the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol display (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first start port switch 1121 and a second start port switch 1
141A, 1141B, a passing gate switch 1127, a large winning port count switch 1132 for a big win, a general winning port switch 1123 and a large winning port count switch 11 for a small win
52, etc. are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to I/O port 1
The signal is output to the main control circuit 1200 via 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 1184 used when transmitting data to a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key 1174 that is operated when changing or checking a setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, a backup clear switch 1176 that can clear backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 in response to an operation by a gaming center manager, etc. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing a setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing a setting value may be provided.

Moreover, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (e.g., a player) other than the manager of the game arcade. "In a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176, and a case in which the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key 1174 and/or the backup clear switch 1176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back surface.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but this is not limiting and may be configured to be connected to, for example, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 or the power supply circuit 1450. In this case, too, a third party other than the manager of the game center may operate the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1176.
It is preferable to prevent easy access to 176 .

[2-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work R
AM 1303, display control circuit 1304, audio control circuit 1305, LED control circuit 1306
, a role control circuit 1307, and a command input port 1308.
300 executes presentations according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 1200.
Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) which can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores a program for controlling the game presentation of the second pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 1301, various tables, etc.
The sub-CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub-CPU 1301 performs control related to game presentation in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 1301 .

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 1301.
The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and image data for effects.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to a game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, and an amplifier (hereinafter, referred to as an AM amplifier) for amplifying the audio signal.
It is equipped with a power supply (hereinafter referred to as P) and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032.
In response to a sound generation command from the PU 1301, one piece of sound data is selected from a plurality of pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046 including decorative LEDs, etc. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The role control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more roles among the performance role group 1058). The role control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, a role data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored, and the like.

In addition, the reel control circuit 1307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected operation pattern is read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. In addition, the lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected lighting pattern is read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 1006 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 1200, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 1182 is connected to the card unit 1180. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending and a loan return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card in which cache data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) in accordance with the rotation angle (amount of rotation), thereby controlling the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

The power supply circuit 1450 is connected to a power switch 1095 and the like. The power switch 1095 is a power switch for turning on and off the power supply circuit 1450.
It is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the various components (such as the dispense/launch control circuit 1400, dispense/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.
Descriptions relating to setting functions will be omitted.

In the second pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which neither the probability variable control nor the time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed, a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is executed but the time-saving control is not executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is not executed but the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 120
1 is capable of progressing the game in any one of these game states. However, the game states progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 are not limited to these, and any one of the normal game state, the high-probability time-shortened game state, the high-probability non-time-shortened game state, and the low-probability time-shortened game state may not be progressed. For example, the game may be progressed in any one of the normal game state, the high-probability time-shortened game state, and the low-probability time-shortened game state, and the game may not be progressed in the high-probability non-time-shortened game state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is considered the normal game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is considered the normal game mode.
The sub-CPU 1301 determines the normal game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left),
For example, control for displaying in the display area of the display device 1007 is executed.

[2-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 71 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko gaming machine.
1 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in

The special symbol winning determination table is used in the special symbol winning determination process (S1034 in FIG. 78 described later).
The table referred to in (see reference), i.e., the first starting port 1120 or the second starting port 1
This is a table that is referred to when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving hit", a "small hit", a "big hit" or a "miss" is obtained based on the random number value for determining whether a game ball has entered 140A or 1140B. In this embodiment, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "big hit", and a "miss", and a "small hit" is not included in the objects of the lottery. In contrast, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "small hit", a "big hit", and a "miss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol is selected. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is 0 to 65535 (65536 types).
However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit", a "big hit", or a "miss" based on the extracted random number value for big hit determination in the hit determination process of the first special symbol.
The relationship between the range (width) of the random number values for determining a jackpot determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number values for determining a jackpot determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number values for determining a jackpot determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In addition, in the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the winning combination is a "time-saving hit", a "small hit", a "big hit", or a "miss" based on the extracted random number value for big hit determination.
In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value (0 or 1) of the probability variable flag, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, the probability flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol,
If the extracted random number for determining a big win is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 120
If the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as the "jackpot determination value data." If the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as the "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 120
1 is judged as a "miss" and the judgment value data is determined as the "miss judgment value data."

In addition, for example, when the probability of winning flag is ON during the winning judgment process of the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for the winning judgment is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 executes the following:
The first judgment value data is determined to be "time-saving hit judgment value data".
When the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the special symbol, and the extracted random number value for hit determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines a "hit" and determines the determination value data as "hit determination value data." Also, when the extracted random number value for hit determination is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, when the probability of winning flag is OFF during the winning judgment process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for the winning judgment is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201
The main CPU 1201 judges it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the judgment value data as "time-saving hit judgment value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit judgment process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment is any of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 judges it as a "small hit" and determines the judgment value data as "small hit judgment value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit judgment process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment is any of 22118 ...
If the result is any of 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that the result is a "jackpot" and sets the determination value data to "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 22323 and 65535,
If either of the above is true, the main CPU 1201 judges it as a "miss" and sets the judgment value data to "miss judgment value data."

In addition, for example, when the probability of winning flag is ON during the winning judgment process of the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for the big win judgment is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 executes the following:
The second judgment value data is determined to be "time-saving hit judgment value data".
If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the special symbol and the extracted random number value for the big hit determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as the "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for the big hit determination is one of 22118 to 22119, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as the "small hit determination value data."
If the result is any one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that the result is a "jackpot" and sets the determination value data to "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that the result is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "
The "miss judgment value data" is determined.

In this way, in this embodiment, for example, of the random numbers for determining a big win that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, the random numbers are selected from 0 to a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 22117 for the hit determination process of the second special symbol).
) to other determination value data excluding the big hit determination value data and the miss determination value data (for example,
The time-saving hit determination value data and the small hit determination value data are assigned to the data. Also, the data is assigned to the end of the predetermined value (for example, if the probability flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special pattern, 22
323 to 65535) are assigned to the miss judgment value data. Furthermore, the big win judgment value data and the miss judgment value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), it is possible to change the big win probability without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss judgment value data by the amount that the width of the big win judgment value data is increased (or decreased).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special pattern is performed is made different from the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special pattern is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in Figure 71, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special pattern is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special pattern is performed, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the normal gameplay state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving win" when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed may be higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving win" when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving play state when the "time-saving win" is won in the time-saving play state, if the "time-saving win" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is substantially extended, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit" whether the probability variable flag is on or off. However, when the probability variable flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 1201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit", but when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit".

[2-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 72 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko gaming machine.
1 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in

The special symbol determination table is the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140A, 1140
This is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the gaming ball enters B and the aforementioned winning/losing judgment value data (i.e., when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78 described below). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol that is determined according to the result of the winning/losing judgment process of the special symbol, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects,
The main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA1" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special pattern,
The main CPU 1201 selects the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main C
The PU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and inputs "
zA3". Also, if the random number value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9,
The main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. If the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 70, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
If the selected symbol command is either one of the symbols shown in FIG. 99, the main CPU 1201 selects “z6” as the selected symbol command.
and select "zA4" as the design specification command.

In addition, when the miss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special pattern,
For example, even if the random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 120
1 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201:
The main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special pattern,
For example, regardless of whether the random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes a small win game control process. In the small win game control process, for example, the small win shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to open the small win large prize opening 1151 (
Control is executed to make the opening into the drawer (see Figure 69) open so that game balls can enter (pass through) or easily, and prize balls can be paid out.

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special pattern,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.
The PU 1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the miss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the second special pattern,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows.
Select "z14" as the selected symbol command, and select "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment by referring to the winning/losing judgment table for the special symbol (see FIG. 71), and then the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol judgment table (see FIG. 72), but this is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot judgment and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the explanation of the second pachinko game machine is omitted, the main RO of the main control circuit 1200
M1202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 output the display mode of a time-saving hit, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) in response to a selected symbol command.
2(B)), the sub-control circuit 13
00 is stored in program ROM 1302.

[2-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 73 shows the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko gaming machine.
The winning type determination table is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the . The winning type determination table is used when determining the winning game state and/or the subsequent game state in response to a selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of a special symbol (i.e., S10 of FIG. 78 described later).
73) is referred to when executing the winning type determination process of FIG. 36. The winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the big win game state or the small win game state. The game state after that indicates the game state after the winning game state ends. However, if the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving winning, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so the game state after that indicates the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9", the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time-saving hit described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then:
Without controlling to the big win game state, the time-saving flag is set to ON and the determined number of time-saving times is set, so that it is possible to control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit", the game is not controlled to the winning game state, so the mode of the winning game state is not determined. In this embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the hit determination process of the special symbol is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times that is set is different according to the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variation in the progress of the game thereafter, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Incidentally, as described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-shortened win". For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for a "time-shortened win" as shown in FIG. 72, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-shortened win", the main CPU 1201 derives a display mode of a time-shortened win indicating that a "time-shortened win" has been won to the special pattern display sections 1163 and 1164, but does not control to the C time-shortened game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 may perform a lottery for a "time-shortened win" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-shortened win", the main CPU 1201 may forcibly derive a display mode of a loss to the special pattern display sections 1163 and 1164. Furthermore,
When the special probability flag is on, the random number value for determining a jackpot may not be assigned time-saving hit determination value data, i.e., a hit determination process may be performed in which a "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery result.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, even if the probability variable flag is on, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off, if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the game may transition to a high-probability time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the state of the hit game state and the state of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z10
In the case of ", the main CPU 1201 sets the mode of the small win game state to the small win large win port 1.
The number of times that the special symbol 151 (see FIG. 69) is opened is determined to be 1.
If it is a "small win", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the small win described above to the second special symbol display section 1164, then sets the determined number of times the large prize winning opening 1151 for small wins is opened, and control becomes possible to the small win gaming state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win", after the small win gaming state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag, and returns to the gaming state immediately before being controlled to the small win gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the state of the hit game state and the state of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1
201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 as the mode of the jackpot game state, and determines to set only the probability variable flag out of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag as the mode of the subsequent game state, and determines to set the probability variable count to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then becomes capable of controlling to a high probability non-time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", or "z12", the main CPU 1201 sets the number of rounds to 10 as the mode of the big win game state.
rounds, 4 rounds, and 10 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it is determined that both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to ON, and it is determined that both the probability variable number and the time-saving number are set to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls it to a jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it becomes possible to control it to a high probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z13", the main CPU 1
201 indicates the mode of the big win game state, with the number of rounds set to 4 rounds and 1 round, respectively.
0. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it is determined that only the time-saving flag out of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. In addition, the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and is determined to be, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the display mode of the above-mentioned jackpot to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164, and then controls it to a jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it becomes possible to control it to a time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state. Note that the mode of time-saving control in the high probability time-saving game state (
It is preferable that the time-saving performance (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving performance") is the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

In addition, for example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201
Neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state is set.
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not change the game state, but continues control in the previous game state.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), neither the mode of the hit game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of Fig. 73. However, in this embodiment, in order to clearly show that when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "miss", neither the mode of the hit game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined, it is shown in Fig. 73 for convenience.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the winning judgment table of the special symbol in FIG. 71, and determines the winning/losing judgment value data based on the random number value for jackpot judgment extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B (performs winning/losing judgment), and determines the winning/losing result ("time-saving winning", "small winning", "jackpot" or "miss").
After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table of FIG. 72, and determines a selection symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the gaming ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B and the winning/losing determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (for example,
The type of time-saving winning, the type of big winning, etc. are determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing judgment and the selection pattern command are determined at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, but this is not intended to exclude the fact that they are performed between the start of the variable display of the special pattern and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times of the A time-saving game state controlled after the end of the big win game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6").
or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, which is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player compared to the C time-saving game state, the positioning of a "jackpot" can be increased. For example, if a player wins a "jackpot" but does not win the "jackpot" (
It is possible to prevent a decline in interest that may occur due to the disadvantage of being in a position where the winner is not as likely to win as a "time-saving winner" (if the winner is selected in the "time-saving winner").

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state. In this way, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if a state in which a "jackpot" is not won continues for a long period of time, if a "time-saving hit" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Also, FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. Both of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Notes" columns in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. Main CPU
1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 1120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting holes 1140A, 1140B. The variation pattern table of the special symbol in Fig. 74 and Fig. 75 is a table that is referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol in S1037 in Fig. 78 described later.

In a normal game state in which hitting from the left is considered the normal game mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for a low start shown in FIG.

As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbols for low start in FIG. 74, the main C
The PU 1201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 1301, which has received a variation pattern command for the special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 1301 may make the decision.

On the other hand, in a gaming state in which right-hand hit is the normal gaming mode, i.e., a high-probability time-saving gaming state, a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, or a low-probability time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special pattern for a high start shown, for example, in Figure 75.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set a look-ahead flag when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for a high start, but this is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, the variation pattern of the special symbol depends on the type of the special symbol,
It is determined based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high start in Fig. 75, the expected number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time is larger than when the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start in Fig. 74. In particular, when the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is, for example, approximately 6000
The variable display is performed for an extremely long period of time, for example, 00 msec (long variation A to C).
On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbols for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely short period of time, for example, 1000 msec (for example, ultra-fast variation).

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special pattern to be determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74), and for example, in the high probability time-saving game state, the high probability non-time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 75), but this is not limited to this. For example, as the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different expected values of the variable display number of the special symbol per unit time may be provided, and the table to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol may be different depending on the type of the time-saving game state.

Also, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figures 74 and 75 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the explanation of the second pachinko gaming machine will be omitted, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine,
The main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a normal symbol winning judgment table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol judgment table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 1201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operation mode of the normal electric device 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are similar to those in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for the special symbol control process executed at S39. Therefore, the following will describe the special symbol control process, and will omit a description of the other processes executed by the main CPU 1201. Note that, although some of the processes executed in the special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine are the same as those executed in the first pachinko gaming machine (e.g., the jackpot end process (Figs. 42, 86)), the following will include the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko gaming machine, with the step numbers changed.
The special symbol control process will be explained again.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first executes the second
The control state number of the special symbol is loaded. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1002.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process to set the addresses of the working areas, etc. of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register prior to the process of S1001.

Also, although not shown, when executing the special pattern control process, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the reserved number of first special patterns and the reserved number of second special patterns.
Then, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the reserved number of the first special symbol remains at "0" for a certain period of time or more.
If the number of reserved symbols is "0" for a certain period of time or more, a transmission reservation process for a demo display command for the second special symbol is performed. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is sent in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (S322 in FIG. 45).
) is sent to the sub-control circuit 1300. Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command for a main special symbol, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demo display effect.

In the second pachinko game machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel, but the sub-CPU 1301 selects either the first or second special symbol as the main special symbol and the other as the sub-special symbol, and mainly controls the presentation of the main special symbol. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which hitting from the left is the regular game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and in the game state in which hitting from the right is the regular game mode (
For example, in a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a low probability time-saving game state, the second special symbol is set as the main special symbol. The sub-CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects such as characters for the main special symbol, and sound effects for the main special symbol.
For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, the sub-special symbol may be displayed while the main special symbol is displayed. In addition, in a low-probability time-saving game state among game states in which right-hitting is the regular game mode, another display image (for example, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving times until the time-saving game state ends) may be displayed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed, based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not yet reached (if S1002 is determined as NO), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1003. For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, NO is determined in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1002 is determined as YES), the main CPU 1201 returns to S1004.
Move to.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S1003, the process proceeds to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variably displayed, based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

When it is determined in S1005 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the first special symbol (when S1005 is NO), that is, when any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1006. For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, NO is determined in S1005.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1005 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (when S1005 is determined as YES), the main CPU 1201 returns to S1007.
Move to.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S1006, the process of the communication device 201 proceeds to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed, based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (if S1008 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1008 is a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the second special symbol has been executed and the variable display can be started, the main CPU 1201 returns to S1
Move to 009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S1009, the process proceeds to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variably displayed, based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that it is not the timing for the first special pattern to start being variable displayed (if S1011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1011 is a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been executed and the variable display can be started, the main CPU 1201 returns to S1
Move to 012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S1012, 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control process (see Figures 20 to 23).

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S
It is preferable to perform steps S1001 to S1012 within an interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the special pattern management process described below is executed in the following order of priority: when any process related to the second special pattern is being executed, when any process related to the first special pattern is being executed, when no process related to the second special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started, when no process related to the first special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started.

[2-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, referring to FIG. 77, S1003 and S100 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76)
77 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, the special symbol management process is performed in step S1003 or S1009 during the special symbol control process.
When the special pattern management process is called and executed at S1006 or S1012 during the special pattern control process, the second special pattern is the target for processing, and when the special pattern management process is called and executed at S1006 or S1012 during the special pattern control process, the first special pattern is the target for processing.

77, the numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 1201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S
1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (S1021 is N
In the case of O judgment), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S102
1 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1023.
The main CPU 1201 performs the processes from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This process of S1023 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 returns to S102.
Move to 4.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S1024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to Figures 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the processing to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process.
The process of 1025 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 81 and 82.
If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 returns to S1.
Move to 026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for preparing to open the big prize opening.
The process of 1026 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
Details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to Fig. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a special prize opening control process.
The process of 1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to Fig. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process.
The process of No. 8 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "5." Details of this big win end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). If the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 and returns to S1005.
If it is called at S1006, the process returns to S1007; if it is called at S1009, the process returns to S1010; if it is called at S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, referring to FIG. 78, in S1023 of the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The special symbol variable display start process executed by the PU 1201 will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the target of the process. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the target of the process.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S10
31 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (
If the determination in S1031 is YES, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 judges whether the special symbol pause flag is OFF. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the game from proceeding to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is established), if the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, that is, ON (S1032 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., ON (if NO is determined in S1032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S10
32 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process for the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a big hit. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss, and the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. In addition, the time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving game state, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit game state starts, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit game state starts.

In the above-mentioned special pattern hit determination process (see S1034), first, a process for determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a big hit, a process for determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a small hit, a process for determining whether or not it is a time-saving hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined to be a miss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is carried out based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit,
In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol is used to determine or determine the special symbol to be stopped.
The above-mentioned "selection symbol command" or "symbol designation command" is judged. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, but multiple types of misses may be provided and the stop symbol may be determined when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (time-saving win, small win, or big win). In this process, the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035) by referring to the win type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, the type of win is multiple, but the type of big win may be one, and the type of time-saving win may also be one. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of win, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 74 and FIG. 75), for example, according to the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S1034), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. In this embodiment, in a normal game state in which a left hit is a regular game mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 74), and in a game state in which a right hit is a regular game mode (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, a low probability time-saving game state), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 75). After executing the process of S1037, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 1201 refers to the variable pattern table (see FIG. 74 and FIG. 75), and sets the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the variable pattern determination process for the special symbol (S1037),
The main CPU 1201 executes the process of S1038 and then shifts the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see S1024 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is executed.
After executing the above process, the process proceeds to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs a game status management process. In this process, the main CPU 1201 mainly performs an update process of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the process of S1041, the main CPU 1201 returns to S1
Move to 042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. Note that the special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45) in the performance control command transmission process.
The signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 .

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special pattern variable display start processing (particularly the game status management processing (S1041) and the special pattern presentation start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)) within the interruption prohibited area.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), S102
In Section 4, a special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 will be described. Figures 79 and 80 are flow charts showing an example of the special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S10
51 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display ending process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is “1” (
If the determination in S1051 is YES, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value.
After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is OFF based on the special symbol pause flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S1053 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern variable display end processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S10
If step S1053 is answered YES, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to step S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed.
After executing the process of S1054, the process proceeds to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 returns to S10.
Move to 56.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game is executed), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter for managing the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state such as the number of times of remaining probability bonus or the number of times of remaining time reduction may be provided, but the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state may be managed by the determined symbol counter. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol winning determination process (S
It is determined whether the result of the calculation (see 1034) is a small win or not.

In S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (if S1057 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a small winning (if S1057 is a YES determination), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started or stopped during the execution of the small win game control process.
After executing the process of S1058, the process of the communication device 201 proceeds to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol winning determination process (S
It is determined whether the result of the calculation (see 1034) is a jackpot or not.

In S1059, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a jackpot (if S1059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a big win (YES in S1059), the main CPU 1
201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during the execution of the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (S1061
If the answer is NO, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display ending process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S1
If step S1061 is answered YES, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to step S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 increments the value of the determined symbol number counter by 1. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss.
After executing the process of S1063, the process of the communication device 201 proceeds to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) of the special symbol being processed is a big hit, even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process of this other special symbol is a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a miss. The main CPU 1201 performs S10
After executing the process of step S1064, the process proceeds to step S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 executes a process of clearing a working area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S1065, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 executes a process of setting a predetermined confirmation waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, the confirmation waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a miss. After executing the process of S1066, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2
After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 returns to S1
Move to 068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process for the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
After executing the above process, the special symbol variable display ending process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special pattern variable display termination processing of this embodiment, if the special pattern pause flag is not set for the special pattern being processed, and the result of the hit determination processing for this special pattern (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, and the other special pattern is being variably displayed, processing is performed to forcibly change the variable display of the other special pattern to a miss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), S102
81 and 82 are flow charts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol game judgment process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the object of processing. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the object of processing.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “2” (S10
71 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern game judgment process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is “2” (
If S1071 is judged as YES, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1072, if it is determined that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e., the stopped special symbols are not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel is a jackpot, i.e., the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small win.

In S1073, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a small win, that is, that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a miss (if S1073 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol game ending process. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83.
When the special pattern game ending process is performed, the special pattern game determination process is ended and the process is returned to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1073, if it is determined that the special symbol is a small win, that is, the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (if S1073 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 1
201 shifts the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) or the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. Main CPU
After performing the process of S1075, the process of 1201 proceeds to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the big win game control process of S1075, the main CPU 120
1 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters such as a probability variable flag, a probability variable counter, a time-saving flag, and a time-saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value of the number of times that the large prize opening (for example, the large prize opening 1131 for the large prize or the small prize opening 1151 for the small prize) is opened (S1077), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S107
8), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S1080), and a process of reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command (
S1081) and other processes are performed. By switching the control state number by performing a process (S1079) to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the main CPU 1201 performs a process to prepare for opening the large prize opening (see S1026 in FIG. 77) after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After that, the main CPU 1201 completes the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 83, in the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81 and FIG. 82), S1
The special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 in step S074 will be described below. Fig. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs a time-saving management process (S1091). The details of this time-saving management process are the same as those described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine, and therefore will not be described here. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 advances the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this manner, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a miss,
The main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 84, in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The big prize opening preparation process executed by the PU 1201 will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for preparing to open a large prize opening in a pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the object of processing. Similarly, when the large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the object of processing.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S11
77. If NO is determined as 01, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is “3” (
If the determination in S1101 is YES, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When the large prize opening counter is a large prize opening control process, it corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds executed in the large prize game state, and when the small prize game control process is executed, it corresponds to a counter that counts the number of small prize game control processes. The count value of the large prize opening counter (large prize opening counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 judges whether the number of times the large prize opening (for example, the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize or the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize) has been opened is the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize that is opened in a large prize game state, is, for example, 4 rounds or 10 rounds, as shown in the prize type determination table (see FIG. 73). On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize that is opened in a small prize game state is, for example, 1 time.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (S1103
is judged as YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104
) to switch the control state number, the big win end process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) is performed after the big win opening preparation process is completed.
After executing the process of S1104, the process proceeds to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a transmission reservation process for a jackpot end display command (
S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45).
The signal is then sent to the sub-control circuit 1300. After the process of S1106, the main CPU 120
1 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see Figure 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (S110
3 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special prize opening count counter. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1107.
Move to 1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of selecting the big prize slot to be opened.
In this process, the big win opening 1131 for big win (see FIG. 69) is selected as the big win opening to be opened if the big win game control process is being executed, and the small win game control process is being executed, the small win game opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the big win opening to be opened.
After executing the process of step S1108, the process proceeds to step S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize winning hole. In this process, for example, the large prize winning hole (large prize winning hole 1131 for a large prize winning, small prize winning hole 1151 for a small prize winning)
The number of times the large prize opening is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening, the maximum number of winning balls that can be won into the large prize opening, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is being executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small prize large prize opening 1151 is opened when the small prize opening control process is being executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes.
After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize winning hole is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the large prize winning control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when the small prize winning control process is executed. The maximum number of winning balls into the large prize winning hole is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize winning control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 5 balls when the small prize winning control process is executed. The number of winning balls when the large prize winning hole is entered is set to, for example, 10 balls for both the large prize winning hole 1131 for the large prize winning hole for the large prize winning hole for the small prize winning hole 1151 for the large prize winning hole ...

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 executes a large prize opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 1201 generates data for controlling the opening/closing of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes and large prize opening 1151 for small prizes). After executing S1110, the main CPU 1201 advances the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111
) to switch the control state number, the special prize opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the special prize opening preparation process is completed.
After executing the process of S1111, U1201 transfers the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 executes a transmission reservation process for the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 85, in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
The big prize opening control process executed by the PU 1201 will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the object of processing. Similarly, when the large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the object of processing.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “4” (S11
21 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is “4” (
If the determination in S1121 is YES, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 detects the big prize hole (big prize hole 1131 for big win).
It is determined whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 1151 for small wins is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening counter (for example, the large prize opening count switch 1132 for large prizes, the large prize opening count switch 1152 for small prizes (see FIG. 70 for both)) that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening is the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening counter value counted by the large prize opening counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203.

In S1122, the large prize winning hole (large prize winning hole 1131 for the large prize winning, small prize winning hole 115 for the small prize winning)
1) If it is determined that the number of winning balls is not the maximum number of winning balls (NO in S1122),
If so, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1123.

On the other hand, in S1122, if it is determined that the number of game balls entering the large prize opening (large prize opening 1131 for large prize, large prize opening 1151 for small prize) is the maximum number of winning balls (S1122
is judged as YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 detects the big prize hole (big prize hole 1131 for big win).
In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port 1151 for small wins has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize winning port related various setting process (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

In S1123, the large prize winning hole (large prize winning hole 1131 for the large prize winning, small prize winning hole 1151 for the small prize winning)
) has not elapsed (NO in S1123),
The main CPU 1201 terminates the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see Figure 77).

On the other hand, in S1123, the large prize winning hole (large prize winning hole 1131 for the large prize winning hole, small prize winning hole 1
If it is determined that the maximum opening time of 151) has elapsed (YES in S1123), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 detects the big prize hole (big prize hole 1131 for big win).
The main CPU 1201 performs a process of closing the large prize winning hole 1151 for small prizes.
After executing the above process, the process proceeds to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (
By performing step S1125) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) is performed again after the large prize opening control process is completed. After executing step S1125, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 shifts the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 86, in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), the main C
A description will now be given of the big win end process executed by the PU 1201. Fig. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, this jackpot end processing is S1 during the special pattern management processing for processing the first special pattern.
When the jackpot end process is called in S1028, the first special symbol is the target of processing. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the target of processing, the second special symbol is the target of processing.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “5” (S11
31 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 ends the big win end process and the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is “5” (
If the determination in S1131 is YES, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., high probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and the values of various counters (e.g., high probability counter, time-saving counter, number of confirmed symbols counter, number of times large prize openings have been opened counter, large prize opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) are set or reset. The special symbol pause flag and ceiling counter are both reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). Also, when the high probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, in a high probability game state where the high probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter is not updated. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 executes the process of S1132,
The process proceeds to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 executes the special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 31 is executed.
After executing the processing of S1133, 01 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-5. Small Hit Rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small win rush can be realized. The small win rush will be described below.

In the second pachinko game machine, as described above, a normal game state, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a low probability time-saving game state are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 controls the game state to one of these game states. As described above, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered to be a regular game mode, so a first special symbol game based on a game ball entering the first start hole 1120 is mainly executed. In other game states (high probability time-saving game state, high probability non-time-saving game state, and low probability time-saving game state), a right hit is considered to be a regular game mode, so a second special symbol game based on a game ball entering the second start hole 1140A, 1140B is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is set as the first starting hole, the first special pattern game is primarily executed in any one of the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state, and the second special pattern game is primarily executed in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-limited game state, the frequency with which game balls enter the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (e.g., normal game state, high-probability time-limited game state, low-probability time-limited game state), resulting in a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small win rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 1126. In the high probability non-time shortening game state, the normal electric device 114
6 to increase the frequency of opening the winning hole (for example, the second start hole 1140B in this embodiment). In addition, unless the big win game control process is executed, the big win winning hole 1131 is not opened, so the frequency of the second start hole 1140B being opened in the high probability non-time-saving game state is lower than in the game state in which the time-saving control is executed.
Therefore, if the small win large prize opening 1151 is open, a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win in the small win large prize opening 1151. When a game ball wins in the small win large prize opening 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. Also, a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upward flow path 1107a can win in the second start opening 1140A. When a game ball wins in the second start opening 1140A or 1140B, for example, 3 balls are paid out as shown in the special symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 71).
Not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with a relatively high probability of 1 in 1000 (estimated), but also an ultra-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 75), so that the frequency of the game ball entering the large winning hole 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, number of winning balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in a game state in which the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), the second start port 1140B is opened by executing the electric support control,
Most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b enter the second starting hole 1.
Therefore, even if the large prize winning hole 1151 for small prizes is open, the expectation value of the game ball winning in the large prize winning hole 1151 for small prizes is low. Moreover, as described above, even if the game ball wins in the second start hole 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out.
When the ball enters the starting hole 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out.
Of the game balls that are shot to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a, only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls enter the ball slot 40A. In this way, in a game state in which the time-saving control is executed, the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of winning balls)
The expected value of does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered to be a regular game mode, but if a right hit is performed, when the game ball hit from the right passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal pattern win is derived, the normal electric device 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second start hole 1140B, which may open the large winning hole for small wins 1151. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special pattern for low start (see FIG. 74), so even if the game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, 1140B, the variable display of the second special pattern is performed in one of the long variation A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the large winning hole for small wins 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to hit from the right in the normal game state. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the normal game state may be set to 0, for example, so that there is no practical benefit in hitting to the right. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time-saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, the small win rush is configured to occur in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win rush may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which the special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol without executing the electric support control.

[3. The third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, and has a first route and a second route as routes until it is controlled to a jackpot game state. The first route is when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived.
The second route is when the V Attacker opens due to a stop display mode being derived that indicates that the result of the special pattern determination is a "hit on the opening of the special device," and the game ball that enters the opened V Attacker enters the V winning hole within the V Attacker.

The third pachinko game machine is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established in priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third pachinko game machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

In the following explanation of the third pachinko game machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, layout positions, etc. that are common to the first pachinko game machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 2184 (see Figure 88 described below) to outside the third pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 2186 (see Figure 88 described below) and the island computer (not shown) provided on each island).

In describing the third pachinko game machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine will be described using the same reference numerals and step numbers as the first pachinko game machine. However, in describing the third pachinko game machine, the configuration described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in the description of the third pachinko game machine will be described using reference numerals and step numbers different from those of the first pachinko game machine, even if the configuration has functions and the like in common with the first pachinko game machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
With reference to FIG. 87, a game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine will be described. This game board unit 2010 also has a protective glass 4, like the first pachinko gaming machine.
2) so as to be located in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) and behind the base door 3 (see FIG. 2).

87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which a launched game ball can roll down.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 2120, etc.) arranged in the play area 2105 of the third pachinko game machine have some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but they will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, and a guide rail 21.
10, a center gamble 2115 arranged in the approximate center of the game area 2105, a first start port 2120, a second start port 2140, a general winning port 2122, and a passing gate unit 212
5, a special electric accessory unit 2130, a normal electric accessory unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). The LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted in this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 2100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the gaming area 2105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 2105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) provided with a decorative body to enhance the presentation effect is disposed behind the game panel 2100. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent material, or, for example, only the part where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be seen from the front may be made of a transparent material. In addition, the game panel 2100 may be made of a material that does not have a transparent part (for example, wood), and a transparent material may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is configured with an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference numerals) in the same manner as in the first pachinko gaming machine.
110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(Center role)
The center device 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

The game ball launched by the launching device 2006 toward the game area 2105 lands in the left area 2
106 or the right side area 2107. The game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 or the right side area 2107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side area 2107.

In addition, the center role 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which a game ball flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. The game ball that enters the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center role 2115. The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

At the rear side of the stage 2118, approximately at the center in the left-right direction, there is a chance entrance 21 through which a game ball can enter.
19 is formed, and the game ball that enters the chance entrance 2119 is a first start entrance 2120
Therefore, the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2119 has a higher probability of being released into the first start opening 2118 than the game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 2117, or the game ball that entered the warp entrance 2117 but did not enter the chance entrance 2119.
The goal is to win (pass) 120.

(First starting point)
The first start hole 2120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 2007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win). When a game ball wins in the first start hole 2120, a first start hole switch 2121 (
88 described later).
Also, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole may be provided that allows a game ball hit to the right to win (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or cannot win).

When the first start hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, start information for the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). When the start condition is met, the reserved start information is used for the winning determination process for the first special symbol. When a game ball enters the first start hole 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be the second starting hole 2140.
It may be possible to win at the starting hole 2140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 2141. When the second start hole switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 2140, the start information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information is used for the winning determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 2140 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
The general prize winning ports 2122 are arranged in a plurality on the lower left side of the display area of the display device 2007.
The general winning ports 2122 are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the general winning ports 2122, it is detected by a general winning port switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general winning port switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general winning port 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out.
The number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of a gaming ball into number 22 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
In place of or in addition to 122, a general winning hole may be provided through which a game ball hit to the right can win a prize.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is located in the right area 2107 and is a unit that integrates a passing gate 2126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a passing gate switch 2127 (see Figure 88 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 2126.

When the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 2126 is detected, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted,
The extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved data is used for the winning judgment process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out.
The pass gate unit 2125 may be provided in the left region 210 instead of or in addition to the right region 2107.
6.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric device unit 2130 includes a large prize opening 2131, a large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131,
It is a unit body that integrates the special electric role 2133. Special electric role unit 2130
is disposed below pass gate unit 2125 in right side region 2107 .

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right side can win a prize (a game ball hit from the left side has difficulty or cannot win a prize). However, the present invention is not limited to this.
Instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 2131 described above, a large prize opening into which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a large prize opening into which a game ball can win may be arranged above the center device 2115.

The big prize opening 2131 is an opening that is opened so that a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) can enter (pass through) the big prize opening when the game is controlled to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player.
When the entry of a game ball into 131 is detected, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out.
The number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a gaming ball into the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric device 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric device 2133, i.e., the special electric shutter 2134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass) the large prize opening 2131 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening 2131 or is difficult to enter. The large prize opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state when the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above. When the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state via the first route is a game state which makes it possible to pay out a large number of game balls as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 2146, and is disposed in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 2140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 2141.

The normal electric device 2146 includes a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 2147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 2147. The normal electric device 2146, i.e., the normal power shutter 2147, can be set in an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start hole 2140 or can be easily opened, and in a closed state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second start hole 2140 or can be easily closed.
The state can be transitioned to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the game.
Instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 2147 which can move back and forth in the forward and backward directions, a movable member known as a power chute may be used.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning port 2151 that is opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, and a V winning device that can open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151.
an attacker 2152, a solenoid 2154 for the V attacker which activates the V attacker 2152 to open and close the opening/closing winning port 2151, a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening/closing winning port 2151 is opened by the activation of the V attacker 2152, a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 can pass, and
A V winning port switch 2156 detects that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 has entered (passed) the V winning port 2155, a losing port 2157 through which game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 but have not entered the V winning port 2155 can enter (pass), and a V shutter 2155 is opened and closed.
58, a V-shutter solenoid 2159 that operates the V-shutter 2158 to open and close the V-winning port 2155, and a locking member 2160 that can hold only one of the game balls that has entered the V-winning device 2150.
It may be provided upstream of pass gate 2126 or in left region 2106 .

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arc-shaped member, and is normally in a closed state in which the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode is derived indicating a "winning reel opening" (described later), the V attacker solenoid 2154 (see FIG. 88 described later) is activated and the V attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once, almost simultaneously with the end of the variable display of the special symbol. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is opened for, for example, 1,800 msec. Then, the V attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once.
While the opening/closing winning port 2151 is open by the operation of 152, a maximum of, for example, 10 game balls can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 per opening.

In addition, the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when a stop display mode indicating a "hit on the opening of the special feature" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be opened twice for 900 msec, or it may be closed based on a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one) entering the interior of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150.
When the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing winning hole 2151 is detected, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and increments the value of the V Attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. When the V Attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the maximum time that the opening/closing winning hole 2151 can be opened (for example, 1800 msec) is determined.
) has not elapsed, the V-attacker 215 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154.
2 is activated and the opening/closing winning opening 2151 is closed.

On the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155, the V attacker 2152 continues to be opened. In other words, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 is opened,
The open control of the V attacker 2152 is continued. That is, the state is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route. When the state is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the first route, a round game is executed in which the large prize winning port 2131 is shifted from a closed state to an open state, whereas when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is shifted from a closed state to an open state. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the first round is
152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state, a round of play may be executed in which, for example, the large prize opening 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state midway through the round of play.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric device 2133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state),
The number of attackers opened in the winning hole and the big win game state may be one each. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "winning of the special feature opening" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and the V winning hole 2155 provided inside the special electric feature 2133 is opened.
When the game ball enters the hole, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state (a jackpot game state via a second route).

The losing hole 2157 is configured to allow a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 2155 to enter (pass through).
If all of the game balls that entered the V winning device 2150 pass through the losing port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends.

The V-shutter 2158 is in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V-winning hole 2155, and in a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to pass through the V-shutter 2155, by the operation of a V-shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later).
A constant operation is constantly performed between an opening state where the game ball can (or can easily) pass through the winning opening 2155. In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly performs a constant operation in a cycle (period) of 7000 msec, repeating the operation of "closed for 6000 msec -> opened for 1000 msec -> closed for 6000 msec."

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning port 2155, and the V winning device 2150
The V winning device 2150 is configured to be capable of holding, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. Game balls that have entered the V winning device 2150 but have not been held by the locking member 2160 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the losing port 2157. Even if multiple game balls have entered the V winning device 2150, all game balls that have not been held by the locking member 2160 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the losing port 2157.

In addition, the locking member 2160 is held in place for a certain period of time (for example, 3
After the lapse of 1000 msec), the game ball is released from the lock by the operation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is open at this timing, it enters (passes through) the V winning hole 2155, and if the V winning hole 2155 is closed at this timing, it enters the losing hole 2157.
It is also possible to dispose the locking member 2160 and have the game ball that enters the inside of the V winning device 2150 be distributed to the V winning port 2155 or the losing port 2157.

(Outlet)
The out hole 2178 is a hole that is opened by the balls launched toward the game area 2105 and is connected to various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 2120, the second starting hole 2140, the large winning hole 2131, the V winning device 2150,
The outlet 2178 is for discharging game balls that have not won or entered any of the general winning ports 2122, etc., to the outside of the machine. This outlet 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between a plurality of general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric role unit 2130 and the second starting port 2140, so that game balls flowing down the game area 2105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 2010, as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and is provided with a group of performance-use accessories 2058, such as movable accessories, controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 2058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG.
1 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but will be explained again in detail.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 2300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read and write memory), and an initial reset circuit 220.
4 and a backup capacitor 2207, and are housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 is connected to a WDT that monitors the operation.
It also has built-in features to prevent fraud and other fraudulent activity.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like.
01 has the function of executing various processes in accordance with the programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has a function for storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. Note that, although in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has a function of temporarily supplying power to the main RAM 2203 so that data stored therein is not lost in the event of a power outage or the like.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 is connected to various devices and the like via an I/O
It also includes a port 2205 and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 2300 .

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 includes a normal symbol display unit 2161, a normal symbol reserved display unit 2162, a first special symbol display unit 2163, a second special symbol display unit 2164, a first special symbol reserved display unit 2165,
The second special symbol reserved display unit 2166, the time-saving notification display unit 2168, the normal power solenoid 21
48, a special power solenoid 2135, a V attacker solenoid 2154, and a V shutter solenoid 2159 are connected to the main control circuit 2200. In addition to these, a performance display monitor 2170 and an error notification monitor 2172 are also connected to the main control circuit 2200.
Main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals through I/O port 2205 .

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is data indicating, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state to a predetermined number (e.g., 60,000 balls) of game balls shot, and is also called a base value.

An error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the error notification monitor 2172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that, as the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol display (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first start port switch 2121 and a second start port switch 2
Also connected are 141, the pass gate switch 2127, the large prize opening count switch 2132, the V attacker count switch 2153, the V prize opening switch 2156, and the general prize opening switch 2123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 2200 via the I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 2184 used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, and, if the pachinko machine has a setting function, setting keys 217 that are operated when changing or checking the setting values.
4. A backup clear switch 2176 is connected, which can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 in response to the operation of the amusement facility manager.
In addition, if the pachinko machine has a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 is turned on.
The switch may also be used to change the set value, or a setting switch for changing the set value may be provided.

Moreover, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by a third party (e.g., a player) other than the manager of the game arcade. "In a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176, and a case in which the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key 2174 and/or the backup clear switch 2176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back surface.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but this is not limiting and may be configured to be connected to, for example, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 or the power supply circuit 2450. In this case, too, a third party other than the person in charge of the game arcade may operate the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.
It is preferable to prevent easy access to 176 .

[3-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 2300 includes a sub-CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work R
AM 2303, display control circuit 2304, audio control circuit 2305, LED control circuit 2306
, a role control circuit 2307, a command input port 2308, etc.
300 executes presentations according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 2200.
Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 230
0 is also connected to a presentation button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores a program for controlling the game presentation of the third pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 2301, various tables, etc.
The sub-CPU 2301 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub-CPU 2301 performs control related to game presentation in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 2301 .

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 2301.
The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display an image related to a game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, and an amplifier (hereinafter, referred to as an AM amplifier) for amplifying the audio signal.
It is equipped with a power supply (hereinafter referred to as P) and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032.
In response to a sound generation command supplied from the PU 2301, one piece of sound data is selected from a plurality of pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs, etc. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The role control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each role (for example, one or more roles among the performance role group 2058). The role control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, a role data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored, and the like.

In addition, the reel control circuit 2307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected operation pattern is read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. In addition, the lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected lighting pattern is read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from the main control circuit 2200 .

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 2006 for launching game balls, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending and a loan return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card in which cache data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) in accordance with the rotation angle (amount of rotation), thereby controlling the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.

A power switch 2095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 2450. The power switch 2095 is a power switch that switches the power supply circuit 2450 on and off.
It is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the various components (such as the dispense/launch control circuit 2400, dispense/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the third pachinko game machine, the probability variable control is not executed. In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which the time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving game state in which the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 can progress the game in the normal game state or the time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right hitting is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 2301 executes control to display the hitting method that is the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 89 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko gaming machine.
1 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in

89, when a game ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "miss" based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol. Also, when a game ball enters (passes) the second start hole 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "gimmick release hit" based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

In addition, it is not essential that the "performer opening hit" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special pattern is performed, but even if it is determined to be a "performer opening hit",
It is preferable that the probability of the second special symbol being determined is extremely low (for example, a probability equal to or lower than that of a "jackpot") compared to when the winning determination process for the second special symbol is performed.
In addition, it is not essential that the second special pattern is not determined to be a "miss" when a hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined to be a "miss", the probability may be higher than the probability of it being determined to be a "hit on the opening of the special feature", or the probability may be lower than the probability of it being determined to be a "hit on the opening of the special feature".

The winning determination table for the special symbol stored in the main ROM 2202 includes the first starting hole 21.
The range of random numbers for determining a jackpot, which is determined as a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "miss", is used in the process of determining whether the first special symbol is hit based on the winning of the number 20.
The relationship between the second start hole 2140 and the corresponding judgment value data ("time-saving hit judgment value data", "big hit judgment value data", "miss judgment value data").
As data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of
The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a jackpot that is determined as a "time-saving hit,""jackpot," or "device opening hit" and the corresponding judgment value data ("time-saving hit judgment value data,""jackpot judgment value data,""device opening hit judgment value data") is specified.

It should be noted that this third pachinko game machine does not have a function for changing the jackpot probability determined for a "jackpot," but this is not essential, and the jackpot probability may be increased, for example, by setting a special probability flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, the total random number value of the random number value for determining a jackpot for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65536. That is, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of winning the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of winning the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of winning the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of winning the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of winning the time-saving feature to be a common probability in all settings.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the opening of the special feature according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 2150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 2155, or the number of times the time-saving continues may be changed for each set value. In other words, the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the opening of the special feature, the opening frequency of the V winning port 2155 (i.e., the V
By adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the frequency of operation of the attacker 2152, the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving function continues, the expected value controlled for the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 90 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko gaming machine.
1 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the start hole 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when the time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 9
Regardless of whether the number is 1 or 9, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special pattern,
The main CPU 2201 selects the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows, for example. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.
If either of the above is true, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the miss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process of the first special pattern,
Regardless of whether the random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 2
201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.
".

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special pattern,
For example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 22
01 selects "z6" as the selection command and "zA5" as the designation command
Select .

Furthermore, when the reel opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows.
In other words, even if the random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CP
U2201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "z
Select "A6".

In the third pachinko game machine, the main RO of the main control circuit 2200 is
M2202 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops in response to the selection symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164 derive the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the big hit, the display mode of the opening of the special symbol, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 91 shows the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko gaming machine.
1 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the. The winning type determination table is referenced when determining the mode of the jackpot game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, the time-saving flag and the end condition of the time-saving) according to the selection pattern command determined in response to the random number value of the special pattern. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern is a time-saving hit, the game is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the jackpot game state.
The "L" shown in the column of the time-saving termination condition in Fig. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special symbol, and "N" indicates the number of times per opening of the special symbol. Note that the remarks column in Fig. 91 is written for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the end conditions of the time-saving to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the end conditions of the time-saving to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. Note that, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1," the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=50, M=5, and N=2.
If the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4, determines to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the end conditions of the time-saving to be L=50, M=5, and N=1. If the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4, and determines not to set the time-saving flag to ON.
When the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag to ON, and sets the time-saving end condition to L=
We decide on 50, M=5, and N=2.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special symbol" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game is controlled to a big hit game state via the second route, the main CP
U2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10, determines to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the end conditions of the time-saving to be L = 50, M = 5, and N = 2. However, even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "release of the special feature", if the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU2201 not only does not execute the jackpot game state, but also does not set the time-saving flag to ON, and after executing control based on the hit of the special feature, returns to the game state immediately before the hit of the special feature.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 does not set either the mode of the big win game state or the mode of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 2201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), as described above, neither the mode of the big win game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is set, so it is not necessary to show it in the hit type determination table of Fig. 91. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is shown in Fig. 91 to clearly show that, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss", neither the mode of the big win game state nor the mode of the subsequent game state is determined.

In addition, the "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the time-saving end condition in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this and may be different conditions depending on the game state. For example, all of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different in the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only in one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In addition, only one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different in the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only in one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In other words, at least one of the termination conditions "L", "M" and "N" may be different in at least one of the time-shortened game states A, B and C.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the third pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Notes" column in FIG. 92 is shown for the sake of convenience.
The PU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special pattern when the game ball enters the first starting hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special pattern when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a “time-saving hit,” the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special pattern based on a random number value for effect selection extracted when the game ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a "big hit", the main CPU 22
01 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on a random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "miss", the main CPU 22
01 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the time-saving flag, the reach judgment random number value and the performance selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes) the first start hole 2120. In the time-saving gaming state, hitting from the right is considered to be the regular gaming mode, so it is considered that the gaming ball rarely enters the first start hole 2120.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2
201 indicates the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the game ball enters (passes) the second starting hole 2140.
The effect is determined based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the

In addition, if the result of the second special pattern lottery is a “jackpot,” the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special pattern based on a random number value for selecting an effect extracted when the game ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

When the result of the hit determination process for the second special pattern is a "hit on the release of the special device" and the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special pattern based on the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for performance selection extracted when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit when the reel is opened" and the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to be a long fluctuation performance with an extremely long fluctuation time of, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the game ball will not basically enter (pass) the second start hole 2140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and the game ball enters the second start hole 2140, this is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

The random number for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the gaming ball into the first start hole 2120 is a specific random number value.
The sub-CPU 2301 receives the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the sub-CPU 2301.
If the look-ahead flag is set, a look-ahead effect is performed.

Although not shown in the special pattern variation pattern table of FIG. 92 for convenience, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set a look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the special variable flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 2301 may decide.

In addition, the main CPU 2201 may set the look-ahead flag (so that a look-ahead performance is performed) even when the time-saving flag is on or the probability change flag is on.
In addition, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the pre-reading flag is set (
(A pre-reading effect may be performed).

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of fluctuations per unit time of the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern is smaller than that when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time-saving flag is on tends to be shorter than that when the time-saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

Also, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Fig. 92 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described in detail, it has the same structure as the first pachinko gaming machine.
The main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a normal symbol winning judgment table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol judgment table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine, and controls the operation mode of the normal electric device 2146 based on the determined opening pattern.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are similar to those in the other processes, except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and the other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will not be described. Note that, although some of the processes executed in the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine are the same as those executed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot end process (Figs. 42, 103), etc.), in the following,
The process will be explained again with different step numbers, including the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Fig. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game).
After executing the process of S2001, 2201 shifts the process to S2002.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203, etc., in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Also, although not shown, when executing the special pattern control process, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the reserved number of first special patterns and the reserved number of second special patterns.
Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of reservation for sending a demo display command. The demo display command reserved for sending in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command sending process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demo display performance. The third pachinko game machine is not a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and therefore does not have the concept of a main special symbol as described in the first pachinko game machine.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (S2002 is N
If the answer is NO, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S200
2 is judged as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, that is, whether or not start information for the second special symbol is reserved.

In S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not reserved (if S2003 is a NO judgment), the main CP
U2201 transfers the processing to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, that is, whether or not start information for the first special symbol is reserved.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, that is, that the start information of the first special symbol is not reserved (if S2004 is determined to be NO), the main CP
U2201 ends the special pattern control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information of the first special symbol is pending (if S2004 is determined as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is in the variable display start state, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is reserved (if S2003 is determined as YES), the main C
The PU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94.
After the process of 2003 is executed, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23).

In addition, the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol control process (
It is preferable to perform steps S2001 to S2005 within an interrupt disabled section.

In this way, in the present embodiment, as the third pachinko gaming machine, when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol.
For example, when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, the priority variable machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 2120 or the second start port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, referring to FIG. 94, in S2005 of the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93), the main C
A description will now be given of the special symbol management process executed by the PU 2201. Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is judged as YES), the special symbol management process is performed when S2003 is judged as YES, and when S2004 is judged as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target.
In the case of S judgment, the first special symbol is the processing target. Also, if the control state number is not 0 (S
If 2002 is judged as NO), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol currently being executed.

94, the numbers ("0" to "7") in parentheses to the right of each process are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 2201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S
(2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (S2011 is N
In the case of O judgment), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S201
1 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 returns to S2013.
The main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onward based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol variable display start process. This process of S2013 is executed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 returns to S201.
Move to 4.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This process of S2014 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 returns to S201
Move to 5.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process.
The process of 2015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2".
Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Fig. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S2016 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 executes the V winning device opening control process. This process of S2017 is executed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 executes the process of S2018.
Move to.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for preparing to open the big prize opening.
The process of 2018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5".
Details of this special prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to Fig. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a special prize opening control process.
The process of 2019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6".
Details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to Fig. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process.
The process of 0 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is 7. Details of this big win end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, referring to FIG. 95, in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The special symbol variable display start process executed by the PU 2201 will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target.
S20 during special symbol management processing in which the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing target of the second special symbol
If the process is called in 13, the second special symbol is the target of the process.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S20
21 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (
If the determination in S2021 is YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of the starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the special symbol winning judgment table (see FIG. 89) is referenced, and the special symbol winning judgment is performed using the random number value for the special symbol winning judgment. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the processing target, it is judged whether it is a time-saving winning, a big win, or a miss. Also, if the second special symbol is the processing target, it is judged whether it is a time-saving winning, a big win, or a special feature opening winning. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, a role-opening hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command".
After executing the process of S2024, the process proceeds to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot, or special feature release hit). In this process, the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) by referring to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). Note that the type of win determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a special feature release hit is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the special feature release hit. In addition, in this embodiment, the types of time-saving hit, jackpot, and special feature release hit are all multiple types, but the type of time-saving hit, jackpot, and/or special feature release hit may be one type. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving wins, big wins, and/or role-opening wins, a plurality of types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S202.
Move to 6.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process of judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 2201 refers to a variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 92) and determines, for example, the type of the special symbol,
As a result of the special symbol winning determination process (S2023), a variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the value of the time-saving flag, the reach determination random number value and/or the effect selection random number value, etc. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbols. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbols (S2026) is determined as the change time for the special symbols. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed.
After executing the process of step 8, the process proceeds to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, an update process of parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times of the probability change remaining, the number of times of the time reduction remaining, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 is performed. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs a game status management process. In this process, the main CPU 2201 mainly performs an update process of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the process of S2030, the main CPU 2201 returns to S2
Move to 031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol effect start command. Note that the special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45) in the transmission control command transmission process.
The signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 .

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special pattern variable display start processing (particularly, the game status management processing (S2030) and the special pattern presentation start command transmission reservation processing (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 96, in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The special symbol variable display end process executed by the PU 2201 will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the target of the process. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the target of the process.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S20
94), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display ending process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is “1” (
If the determination in S2041 is YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S2 in FIG. 94) is performed.
After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also performed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 returns to S20
Move to 44.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol determination number counter. As described above in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the symbol determination number counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game is executed), but may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game executed under a specific state such as the number of times remaining in the probability bonus mode or the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).
Return to.

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 97, in S2015 of the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
The special symbol game determination process executed by the PU 2201 will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game judgment process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target.
S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol game judgment process is the process target for the second special symbol
When called, the second special symbol is the subject of processing.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S20
51 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special pattern game judgment process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is “2” (
If the determination in S2051 is YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot, i.e., the stopped special symbol is not a stop display mode indicating a jackpot (if S2052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, i.e., the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a jackpot (if S2052 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2053. Note that if the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a jackpot opening, or if the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a miss, a NO judgment is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for setting the start of the jackpot game control. In this process, a signal (e.g., a jackpot signal, etc.) is generated and updated to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2054.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control in S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and counters, such as a time-saving flag and a time-saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value for the number of times the big prize opening 2131 is opened (S2055), a process of setting a big win signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057),
The game state designation parameter setting process (S2058), the big win start display command transmission reservation process (S2059), etc. are performed. In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), after the special symbol game judgment process is completed,
The special prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns to the special symbol management process (see S2018 in FIG. 94).
Return to the previous page (see reference).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a bonus feature has been opened, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a bonus feature has been opened.

In S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a winning combination, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is a winning combination (if NO is determined in S2060), the main CPU 22
On the other hand, in S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a special symbol opening (S2061), the process proceeds to S2062.
If step S2060 is answered YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to step S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for game control per release of a special feature. In this processing, signals (e.g., a signal per release of a special feature, etc.) outputted to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the processing targets of the special symbol game judgment processing. After executing the processing of S2061, the main CPU 2201 shifts the processing to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the upper limit of the number of times the V prize winning device 2150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the V prize winning device 2150 set in this process
The upper limit of the number of times the button can be opened is, for example, 1. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting a signal for opening a special symbol to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), and a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064).
The main CPU 2201 then performs a process such as a process for setting a game state designation parameter (S2064), a process for setting a game state parameter setting (S2065), and a process for reserving a transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S2066). By performing a process for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), a process for preparing to open a V winning device (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol game ending process. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98.
When the special pattern game ending process is performed, the special pattern game determination process is ended and the process returns to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs a time-saving management process (S2071). Since the third pachinko gaming machine, which is called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, the time-saving management process executed in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as that executed in the first pachinko gaming machine shown in FIGS.
9. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine,
When the probability flag is set to ON and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value,
Although the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to ON as described above, the third pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high probability game state. Therefore, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to ON only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, instead of being set to ON when the probability variable flag is set to ON and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Also,
In the first pachinko game machine, in the time-saving transition judgment process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether the probability variable flag is off (see S191), and then the process of S192 is performed on the condition that the probability variable flag is off. However, in the third pachinko game machine, as described above, since it is not controlled to a high probability game state, the process of S192 is performed without performing the process of S191. As for other processes in the time-saving management process, in the first pachinko game machine,
2 to 39. The main CPU 2201 performs S2071
After executing the process, the process proceeds to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By carrying out the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, the current special symbol game ends, and the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game, can be executed. After carrying out the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to FIG. 99, in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), the main C
A description will be given of a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the PU 2201. Fig. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S20
If the result of step 81 is NO, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process.
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is “3” (
If the determination in S2081 is YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 determines the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (
That is, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of times of opening are set as the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152. In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, it may be set to a maximum of two times of opening for a maximum of 900 msec each time, or the first time may be set to a maximum of 60
The first release may be set to 0 msec, and the second release may be set to a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, a plurality of release patterns may be provided for each release of the reel within a total period not exceeding a specified time (e.g., 1800 msec), and one of the plurality of release patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155 is performed.
After executing the process of S2083, the process proceeds to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084
), after the V prize device opening preparation process is completed, the V prize device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed.
After executing step 4, the process proceeds to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 100, a V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S20
If the result of step 91 is NO, the main CPU 2201 ends the V prize device opening control process.
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is “4” (
If the determination in S2091 is YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 judges whether or not the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is judged whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

In S2092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 is judged as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines the maximum opening time (
That is, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time of the open/close winning port 2151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2093 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 terminates the V winning device opening control processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (if S2093 is determined as YES), the main CPU 2201 returns to S209.
Move to 4.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V win has been detected.
In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 2155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V winning port switch 2156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, and may be, for example, within a specified time from when the V attacker 2152 starts to operate, or within a specified time from when the game ball is released from the locking member 2160, etc.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V winning has been detected (if S2095 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for V hit game control. In this process, a signal (e.g., a V hit signal, etc.) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game judgment process. When the V hit game control is executed, for example, 10 rounds of round play are executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player can win a large number of prize balls in the same way as when the big hit game control process is executed. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V hit game control and the big hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V hit game control can also be called the big hit game control process. Main C
After executing the process of S2096, the PU 2201 shifts the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V hit game control of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters, such as a time-saving flag and a time-saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 2152) that was first executed based on the opening of the role is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S2095 is Y
The V hit game control executed by the fact that the ES judgment has been made) will start from the second round of round play. After executing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 2152 is activated) (S209
9), V hit signal setting process to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), game state designation parameter setting process (S
94, S2102), and a process for reserving the transmission of a V-win start display command (S2103). By performing a process for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2101), after the special symbol game judgment process is completed, a process for preparing to open the large prize opening (S2102 in FIG. 94) is performed.
Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined that no V winning was detected in S2095 (if S2095 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is executed.
After executing the processing of S2104, 01 terminates the V winning device opening control processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “5” (S21
11 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is “5” (
If the determination in S2111 is YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads a round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the number of times the special prize opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of times the round game has been executed in the special prize game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (S2113
is judged as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114
), after the completion of the big prize opening preparation process, the big prize end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) is performed. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for a jackpot end display command (
S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45).
The signal is then sent to the sub-control circuit 2300. After the process of S2116, the main CPU 220
1 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see Figure 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (S211
3), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process of S2117, the main CPU 2201 returns to S2118.
Move to.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of selecting the big prize slot to be opened.
In this process, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big hit and a stop display mode indicating a big hit is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 97), the big win opening 2131 is selected as the big win opening to be opened, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit for opening a special feature and a stop display mode indicating the opening of a special feature is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 97).
Furthermore, in the case of a V-winning game control started by detecting a V-winning (YES judgement in S2095 of FIG. 100), the V-winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning hole 2151) is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process of S2118, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150 wins, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that in one round, the large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150
However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S2119, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2120.

The "large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150" corresponds to the large prize opening selected in S2118 as the large prize opening to be opened from the large prize opening 2131 and the V prize device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a special prize opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process for generating opening/closing control data for the special prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121
) is performed, after the completion of this special prize opening preparation process, the special prize opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 executes a transmission reservation process for the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 102, a special winning port opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “6” (S21
31 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is “6” (
If the determination in S2131 is YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2
It is determined whether the number of winning balls in the number 150 is the maximum number of winning balls.
A large prize opening count switch 2132 (
88) or the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88) which counts the number of game balls entering the V winning device 2150 is determined to be the maximum number of winnings. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large winning port count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is determined to be the maximum number of winnings.
It is stored in a specified area in AM2203.

In S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 is a NO judgment),
The PU 2201 transfers the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 is determined to be YES),
The main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2
In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of 150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize opening related various setting process (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2133 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 2201 terminates the large prize opening opening control processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 22
01 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2
After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 advances the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (
By performing step S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs the large prize opening preparation process (see step S2018 in FIG. 94) again after the large prize opening control process is completed.
After executing the process of S2135, the process proceeds to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 shifts the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “7” (S21
41 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the big win end process and the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the big win end process was called.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is “7” (S21
If step S2141 is answered YES, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to step S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a symbol determination number counter, a round counter, a large prize winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. Main CPU
After executing the process of S2142, 2201 transfers the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is executed.
After executing the process of S2143, 01 ends the big win end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, it returns to the process from which the big win end process was called.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[4. Extension Example]
The following describes an example of an extension common to the first, second, and third pachinko game machines. Since the symbols attached to the components are different depending on the first, second, and third pachinko game machines, the symbols are omitted in the following description except when the description is limited to a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Example of extended probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, whether or not to set the special probability flag on is determined depending on the type of jackpot, and when the special probability flag is set on, the number of special probability rounds is determined, but this is not limited to this and may be, for example, in the following manner.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it may be a so-called V-type high probability machine that judges whether or not a specific area provided in a large prize winning port has passed, and if it is judged that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, sets a high probability flag to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Note that the specific area can be displaced between an open state where game balls can or easily pass through and a closed state where game balls cannot or have difficulty entering, for example, by the operation of a movable member during a specific round of play during the execution of the jackpot game control process.

In such a V-type high probability machine, for example, the ease with which the game ball will pass through the above-mentioned specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, i.e., the probability that the high probability flag will be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process, may be made different between when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special pattern is a jackpot, as will be described later with reference to Figures 104 to 107.

FIG. 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize winning port and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during the execution of the big prize game control process of the extended example, and shows (A) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which the game ball cannot easily pass through the specific area. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

In addition, although FIG. 104 shows a mode in which the large prize opening is first opened short and then opened long, the opening mode of the large prize opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first open mode, the specific area is also open while the large prize winning hole is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large prize winning hole is started. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole can easily pass through the specific area. In other words, the probability variable flag is likely to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, if no game ball has passed through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the probability variable flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the large prize winning hole to the end of the long opening of the large prize winning hole. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is very easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole to pass through the specific area. In other words, the probability variable flag is very easily set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball has passed through the specific area despite the specific area being in an open state, the probability variable flag is not set to on at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, except for the time during which the large prize winning port is short-opened and the time after the large prize winning port starts to be long-opened (both of these times are short),
The specific area is in a closed state. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control, even if only one of the multiple game balls that have entered the jackpot opening passes through the specific area, it is considered that the first
It is more difficult than either the opening mode or the second opening mode. That is, it is difficult to set the probability variable flag to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability variable flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In FIG. 104, an example of a specific area opening mode in which at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole during the execution of the jackpot game control process can easily pass through the specific area, that is, a first opening mode and a second opening mode, is described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole can easily pass through the specific area.
The number of opening modes of the specific area through which a gaming ball can easily pass through the specific area is not limited to two modes, but may be one mode or three or more modes.

104, an example of providing a third opening mode has been described as an example of the opening mode of the specific area in which even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning port has difficulty passing through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning port has difficulty passing through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process is not limited to one mode, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 105, when the winning/losing determination value data is "jackpot determination value data" (when the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a jackpot), the winning time selection symbol commands of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected as follows. That is, when the result of the winning determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z0" with a selection rate of 40%, "z1" with a selection rate of 10%, and "z2" with a selection rate of 50%. Also, when the result of the winning determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot,
For example, the symbol command selected at the time of winning is "z3" with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" with a selection rate of 35%.

FIG. 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 106, the type of jackpot (e.g., the number of rounds, the opening mode of a specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning selection command is "z0
", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (3R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning pattern selection command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning pattern selection command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (10R special jackpot A). Also, when the winning pattern selection command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the third opening mode jackpot (10R normal jackpot B). When the winning pattern selection command is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode jackpot (
When the winning selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode of the jackpot (10R certain probability jackpot C).

That is, according to the above-mentioned Figures 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special pattern is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined to be 3R normal big hit A with a selection rate of 40%, and
With a selection rate of 0%, it is determined to be a 10R normal jackpot A, and with a selection rate of 50%, it is determined to be a 10R variable jackpot A. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special pattern is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be a 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, a 10R variable jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%, and a 10R variable jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way,
It is possible to make different the probability that the probability of the probability variable flag being set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special pattern is a jackpot.

In addition, in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to being opened by time control as shown in Figures 104 (A) to (C), but may be opened in response to a game ball entering a jackpot opening, for example, as shown in Figure 107 described below.

Figure 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a jackpot game control process (an example in which the specific area is controlled to be in an open state based on a win in the large prize opening), showing (A) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large prize opening is opened, when the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened based on this detection until the large prize opening is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the multiple game balls that entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability variable flag is easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the probability variable flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large prize opening is opened, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time only when the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch. Even if a second game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area does not enter the open state and remains closed until the entry opening is closed. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control, even if even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening passes through the specific area,
This is more difficult than the first opening mode. That is, it is difficult to set the probability variable flag to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even in this case, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability variable flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In the above, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the probability variable flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the time-saving flag may be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. Such a specification is particularly effective in the case of a one-type two-type mixed machine such as a third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, an example has been described in which the same opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special pattern is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and for example, an opening pattern dedicated to the first special pattern and an opening pattern dedicated to the second special pattern may be set.

Furthermore, in the above, an example has been described in which a third mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area may be determined in both cases where the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a hit and where the result of the hit determination process for the second special pattern is a hit. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special patterns (e.g. the second special pattern) is a hit, it may be determined only in a mode in which it is easy for at least one game ball to pass through the specific area (the first mode or the second mode).

In the above, in the third mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, the specific area is
The large prize opening is in an open state twice (both for a short period of time) during the short opening and for a specified period after the long opening of the large prize opening has begun, but if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through to the specific area, the specific area may be in an open state once or multiple times.

The closing of the specific area may be controlled so as to close it when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, when the round in which the specific area is open has ended, or when a specified number of large prize winning openings or a prize has been won in the specific area. Also, the closing conditions may be one or a combination of multiple conditions.

Also, the machine may be a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are alternately and repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed (for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, etc.). At this time, the loop number is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number, or may be determined according to, for example, a random number value of a special pattern, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the limiter number may be different depending on the setting value.

In the above, the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached has been described, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the time-saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a one-type two-type mixed machine such as the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned V-type probability machine, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the probability control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-type probability machine, if the limiter number is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached,
The game state after the big win game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth big win game control process, the predetermined limit number is not reached, but since the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the big win game control process, the game state after the big win game control process is completed is also controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed. Note that the same is true for a gaming machine in which the time-saving flag is set to ON at the end of the big win game control process when the game ball passes through the specific area during the execution of the big win game control process.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the machine is controlled to a game state (e.g., a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) in which the probability variable control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, and when a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, the machine may be a so-called ST machine in which the probability variable control is not executed (e.g., a normal game state, a time-saving game state, etc.). In such a game machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variable control is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "ST number") may be a fixed number, or may be different each time. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the ST number may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the machine may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which the probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state when a game ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game state.

[4-2. Example of time-saving control extension]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, the time-saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process is completed, but the time-saving control may also be executed even if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is not a jackpot.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, a time-saving hit determination process may be performed separately from the special symbol hit determination process, using a specific random number value (e.g., a random number value for special symbol hit determination, a pattern random number value of a special symbol, etc.) among the random numbers extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control. When the time-saving hit determination is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, for example, when the pattern random number value of a special symbol extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is a specific pattern random number value, it can be determined to be a "time-saving hit" in which time-saving control is executed. Note that the time-saving hit determination process may be performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit.

In addition, when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed separately from the special pattern winning/losing determination process, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed prior to the special pattern winning/losing determination process in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is used exclusively for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be generated within a predetermined range, and a random number value for time-saving winning/losing may be extracted, for example, based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing.

Also, the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process does not necessarily have to be extracted based on the game ball winning the start port, but may be extracted based on the game ball winning in other areas (for example, a general winning port, a small winning port, a large winning port, etc.). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that serves as a trigger for the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be provided, and the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be extracted based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area.

For example, when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judgment process are executed at different times, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, which, when confirmed, will derive a stop display mode indicating a big win, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be a "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may determine whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning".
Regardless of this, for example, it is advisable to forcibly derive a display mode indicating "time saving failure."

In addition, it is preferable that the sub-CPU executes control to display on the display device an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern change effect or a character display effect) that allows or makes it easy to understand from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning/losing" result. In this case, the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special pattern winning/losing judgment process, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Also, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing", a control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern variation effect or a character display effect, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing". In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is disclosed.

In addition, in a typical pachinko game machine, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU controls the display device (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) to display a presentation image indicating, for example, a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching the game ball in the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the sub-CPU controls the display device to display, for example, a presentation image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching the game ball when time-saving control is executed. However, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the presentation image showing the recommended method of launching the game ball when time-saving control is executed may be displayed on the display device at all times, or may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time-saving times set based on the "time-saving hit" is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2
It is possible to display the number of times when the number of times is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than two times), and not to display the number of times when the number of times is less than a predetermined number. Note that the above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the number of times when the time reduction is performed, and may be any condition as appropriate.

In addition, when the time-saving hit/lose determination process is executed before the special pattern hit determination process is executed, the sub-CPU may execute control to display on the display device a presentation image that can be grasped or easily grasped from the outside to determine whether or not the special pattern hit determination process will be executed under a situation in which a "time-saving hit" has occurred (i.e., under a situation in which the time-saving flag is set on).

The processes related to time-saving, such as the type of random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process, the timing of extracting the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process, the conditions for determining a time-saving winning/losing determination process, the timing of executing the time-saving winning/losing determination process, the game state in which the time-saving winning/losing determination process can be executed, the state of the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times set when a time-saving winning/losing is achieved, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the number of time-saving times, the probability of a time-saving winning, and the display of the results of the time-saving winning/losing determination process, are summarized as follows.

(Type of random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any of a plurality of types of random number values, such as a random number value for special symbol winning judgment, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for normal winning judgment, a random number value for normal symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol fall judgment, and a dedicated random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment. In addition, in the case of a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number values used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process are not limited to one type (for example, only a random number value for determining whether or not a time-saving winning/losing result has been achieved), but may be determined using multiple types of random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether or not a special pattern has been won and a random number value for determining the pattern).

(Timing of extracting random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extracting the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is when the game ball enters the starting gate, which triggers the special symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through the passing gate, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol winning/losing judgment process, when the game ball passes through the dedicated area, which triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, etc.
The timing may be any timing. The random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be extracted based on winning a specific winning hole or the like that awards prize balls, or based on passing through a specific gate or a specific out-hole that does not award prize balls.

In addition, when the random number value for determining whether or not the time-saving feature has been selected is extracted based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the starting port, the random number value for determining whether or not the time-saving feature has been selected may be extracted regardless of whether the game ball has entered the first starting port or the second starting port, or the random number value for determining whether or not the time-saving feature has been selected may be extracted only when the game ball has entered one of the specific starting ports.

(Conditions for determining whether a time-saving win has been won in the time-saving winning/losing determination process)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment process, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern winning/losing judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing judgment value data, a specific small winning judgment value data, or/and a specific big winning judgment value data. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the pattern random number value of the special pattern, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing pattern, a specific small winning pattern, or a specific big winning pattern. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern falling judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific random number value for special pattern falling judgment. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the changed setting value, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for normal winning judgment or the random number value for normal pattern determination. Furthermore, the conditions for determining a time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process are as follows:
The conditions are not limited to those mentioned above, and various conditions can be arbitrarily determined.

In the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the reel and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened passes through the V winning port 2155, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of times to shorten the time depending on the type of hit to open the reel.
In the case where the passage of the game ball to 155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not executed, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201
However, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving losing", the result of the special symbol winning judgment process is "winning the special symbol opening", and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened does not pass through the V winning port 2155, the time-saving control is not executed.

(Time-saving winning/losing judgment processing execution timing)
When the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special pattern using a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting hole, the main CPU may retain the obtained random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination, in the same manner as the start information of the special pattern.

In addition, the main CPU may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (for example, before it is reserved), or may reserve the extracted random number value and execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process until the variable display of the special pattern begins, or may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

(Game state in which time-saving winning/losing judgment processing can be executed)
The time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or may be executed only in a game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). In addition, for example, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed in any game state.
Conditions for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be determined in advance, such as executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process only in a specific game state, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed when the determined conditions are met.

(Mode of time-saving control)
The mode of time-saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time-saving control executed according to the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag may be prepared, and when the time-saving control is executed according to the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag may be set to on, and when the time-saving control is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the second time-saving flag may be set to on. In this case, when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, it is preferable to execute time-saving control with different functions. For example, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, both the special chart shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, only one of the special chart shortening control and the electric support control is performed. Also, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, the first time-saving game state is controlled in which only the special chart shortening control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, the second time-saving game state is controlled in which only the electric support control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags is set to on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, for example, or may be determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed.

(Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits)
It is preferable that the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning/losing", is determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process was performed. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, when multiple random number values for time-saving winning/losing judgment are specified as time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times to be set may be determined according to the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment instead of or in addition to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process was performed. For example, if the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is the first
If the time-saving hit judgment value data is the first time-saving hit judgment value data, the number of time-saving hits is determined to be "100", and if the time-saving hit judgment value data is the second time-saving hit judgment value data, the number of time-saving hits is determined to be "50", etc.

In addition, the game state in which the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.)
Even if the number of times the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning", the main CPU sets the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning",
Instead of the remaining number of time-saving times, a new number may be set (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times may be reset). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time-saving times is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving times, which broadens the scope of the game, and the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is on can be made more interesting, making it possible to increase interest.

In addition, the game state in which the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.)
Even if the number of times the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning", the main CPU sets the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning",
In this case, the remaining number of time-saving times will not be less than the current remaining number of time-saving times, so that the player can play with peace of mind in a game state in which the time-saving control is being executed.

In addition, the game state in which the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.)
Even if the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing," the main CPU may predetermine one of a process of replacing the remaining number of time-saving times with the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" and setting it as a new number, or a process of adding the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" to the remaining number of time-saving times, and set the number of time-saving times in a manner that satisfies the predetermining condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a time-saving control having different functions is executed when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on,
When the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning", the main CPU may change the process of setting the number of time-saving times depending on whether the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function or different functions. For example, when the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" is added to the remaining number of time-saving times, and when the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of different functions, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be newly set (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times may be reset) instead of the remaining number of time-saving times being executed. Also, when the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving winning" may be executed after all the remaining number of time-saving times being executed is consumed.

When the number of time-saving times is set based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning", the number of time-saving times may be set to "0". In other words, when the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be "0", the time-saving flag is set to ON even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning". Also, when the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed during the execution of the time-saving control is "time-saving winning" and the number of time-saving times is set to "0", the time-saving control being executed is terminated.

(Time-saving control start timing)
The timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process being a "time-saving hit," can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the time-saving control can be started based on the passage of the special symbol determination time during which the special symbol is determined. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process.
In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, time-saving control can be started based on the end of the jackpot game control process.

When the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process being a "time-saving hit," is the end of the special pattern game, and the time-saving hit/miss determination process is performed prior to the special pattern hit determination process in the same frame, even if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit," if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, it is preferable to invalidate the "time-saving hit" (the time-saving flag is not set on based on the "time-saving hit") and set the time-saving flag on based on the hit-time selection pattern command (the time-saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of jackpot).

In addition, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed prior to the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is executed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. In this case, the game state (i.e., whether or not the time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time when the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is extracted and the time when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed, which can increase the interest.

Furthermore, the timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning" may be set to after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process becomes a "time-saving winning" and until the time-saving control starts, the sub-CPU executes a provocative performance as to whether or not the time-saving control will start, thereby making it possible to increase interest.

In the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot for which time-saving control is executed), the time-saving control based on the jackpot may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Also, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role-opening hit (a role-opening hit for which time-saving control is executed) and the jackpot game control is executed because the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the time-saving control may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Also, when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a role-opening hit, the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected despite the V attacker 2152 being opened, and the jackpot game control is not executed.
The main CPU may start time-saving control based on a "time-saving hit" when the opening/closing winning port 2151 is closed.

(End timing of time-saving game mode)
The timing at which the time-saving game state ends is, for example, "when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, a variable display of a special pattern is executed for a set number of time-saving times,""when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the result of a special pattern hit determination process," or "when the number of time-saving times is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a time-saving hit," etc.

In addition, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, if a small win game control process is executed based on the result of the special pattern hit determination process, the time-saving control continues to be executed even after the small win game control process is terminated.

In the third pachinko game machine, during the execution of the time-saving control, the winning judgment process of the special symbol indicates that the special symbol is a winning combination, and the opening and closing winning hole 2 is determined to be a winning combination.
If the V attacker 2152 is opened but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened and the big win game control process is not started, the main CP
U2201 continues to execute time-saving control even after the opening/closing winning port 2151 is closed.

(Rewrite the number of time-saving times)
In a game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), a time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed, and if the result of this time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning",
The main CPU may rewrite the number of time-saving times, or may not rewrite the number of time-saving times (i.e., execute the time-saving control until the number of time-saving times in the currently executed time-saving control has been exhausted).

In addition, when rewriting the number of time-saving times, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" at the time when the number of time-saving times in the time-saving control being executed is consumed, or may set it when the special symbol hit determination process is executed, or may set it when the variable display of the special symbol starts or stops, or may set it during the time-saving hit/fail determination process, and may set it at various times. In addition, when setting it during the time-saving hit/fail determination process, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" is overwritten to the number of time-saving times in the time-saving control being executed. In addition, it is also possible to set the number of time-saving times in a manner that satisfies the predetermined condition by predetermining either "rewriting the number of time-saving times" or "adding to the previous number of time-saving times".

(Time-saving hit probability)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port or the second start port, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port (hereinafter referred to as the "first time-saving winning/losing judgment process") and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the second start port (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving winning/losing judgment process") may have different winning probabilities. For example, the time-saving winning probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be set to be higher than the winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed.
The probability of winning in the time-saving mode may be made higher when the time-saving win/loss judgment process is performed, the probability of winning in the time-saving mode may be made higher when the first time-saving win/loss judgment process is performed than the probability of winning in the time-saving mode when the second time-saving win/loss judgment process is performed, or the probability of winning in the time-saving mode may be made the same or approximately the same when the first time-saving win/loss judgment process is performed and when the second time-saving win/loss judgment process is performed.

(Displaying the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process)
A time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning or losing time-saving) and/or a winning number of time-saving times display unit that displays the number of time-saving times determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning time-saving) may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit and/or the winning number of time-saving times display unit may be provided in an LED display group that includes a special pattern display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and/or the number of time-saving times determined based on the winning of the time-saving on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU may make the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss." Note that, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, it is preferable that the sub-CPU displays an effect image indicating a "time-saving hit" on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device until the above-mentioned interval time has elapsed.

Also, in the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a hit to open the special device and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this hit to open the special device, the main CPU 2201 may set the interval time after the end of the operation related to the hit to open the special device when the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit" to be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a "time-saving miss", or may set it to be the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Examples of extensions related to management of game media]
The first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification use a gaming medium to play a game, and based on the results of the game, a bonus (e.g.,
The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines in which prizes (such as prize balls, prize data, etc.) are awarded.
In addition to the form in which a game is played by shooting or inserting game media (e.g., game balls, medals, etc.) through the physical action of the player, and game media is paid out based on the results of the game, the main control circuit itself may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player, enabling games to be played by circulating enclosed game balls or medal-less games. In addition, electromagnetic management of game media held by the player may be achieved by a device attached to the main control circuit (
The gaming medium may be connected to a gaming media management device that manages the gaming media.

In the case of a gaming machine in which enclosed gaming balls are circulated to play, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that when a prize is won, prize ball data as a gaming medium is awarded instead of prize balls being paid out. In this specification, the "paid-out gaming value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if 15 prize balls are entered into a prize slot, prize ball data of a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is awarded in the case of an enclosed gaming machine. In addition, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be anything equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, in the case where the game media is managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device is a device having a ROM and a RWM (or a RAM) and provided in the game machine,
The device is connected to an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface for two-way communication, and is used for performing a game medium lending operation (i.e., an operation of providing the game medium required for the player to insert the game medium) or a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium (
When the winning combination is achieved, the game media management device may perform a payout operation of the game media (i.e., an operation of making the player acquire the game media necessary for paying out the game media) or an operation of electromagnetically recording the game media used for the game. In addition, the game media management device may not only manage the actual number of game media, but may also, for example, perform the following operations based on the management result of the number of game media:
A display device (not shown) for displaying the number of game media owned by a player may be provided on the front of the pachinko machine, and the number of game media displayed on the display device for the number of game media owned may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of electromagnetically recording and displaying the total number of game media that a player can use for playing games.

In this case, the game media management device has the capability to allow the player to freely send a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game media handling device, and also has the capability to prevent the number of recorded game media from being reduced except in cases where the player operates it directly, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game media management device and the external game media handling device, it is desirable that the game media management device have the capability to prevent the player from sending a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except via that external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device may be provided with an insertion slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., an IC card), a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, and various other operation means such as a lending operation means, a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side (all not shown).

The flow of the game is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value based on the operation of any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are needed. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play a game based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media were sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device may send only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player may be divided and processed. Also, instead of just discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged, or the media may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Also, the game media handling device may be configured to allow insertion of a member recording medium of the amusement facility, and the member recording medium may be stored so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a lock operation may be executed to lock the gaming media or valuable data communication to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown).In that case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the gaming media handling device.

In addition, the above describes the application of the gaming media management device to a pachinko gaming machine, but gaming media management devices can also be installed in pachislot machines, slot machines that use gaming balls, and sealed gaming machines to manage the player's gaming media.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned gaming medium management device, the number of parts inside the gaming machine can be reduced compared to when the gaming medium is physically provided for playing, and not only can the cost and manufacturing cost of the gaming machine be reduced, but the player can also be prevented from directly touching the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and the reduction in parts also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts via the gaming medium and the insertion and withdrawal slots of the gaming media. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a gaming system having an enclosed gaming machine configured to allow play without the gaming medium being ejected to the outside, and a gaming medium management device connected to the gaming machine so as to be able to send and receive data regarding the increase and decrease in the gaming medium associated with the consumption, lending and payout of the gaming medium via optical signals via a communication cable, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

An outline of an enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In an enclosed gaming machine, a launching device is located above a play area and launches game balls, which serve as game media, from above into the play area.
When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid,
The ball feeding pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. A subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the waiting position to the launch pad to detect the game ball moving to the launch pad. When the subtraction sensor detects the game ball, the number of balls held is subtracted by one. In this way, the game ball as the game medium is launched from above the game area, so that the enclosed game machine can avoid so-called return balls (foul balls). Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game ball is not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number of game balls (for example, 50 balls) are configured to circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Alternatively, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism for discharging game balls to the outside of the gaming machine and a take-in mechanism for taking in the game balls polished outside the gaming machine may be provided. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in the game balls from a winning hole provided in the game area.

In an enclosed gaming machine, the gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, so there is no upper or lower tray for temporarily holding the gaming balls. In an enclosed gaming machine, the gaming balls are not actually in the player's hands, so the number of gaming balls does not actually increase or decrease as the player plays. In an enclosed gaming machine, the player begins playing after obtaining balls loaned from a gaming media management device. Here, obtaining balls means:
It means that a player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, when game balls are shot from the launching device, the balls are consumed and the number of balls held decreases. Also, when game balls pass through each winning hole or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls held is paid out according to the conditions set for each winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held also increases by loaning from the game medium management device. Also, when all or part of the balls held are integrated into the game value managed by the game medium management device, for example, by liquidating all of the game value (i.e., balls held) stored in the enclosed game machine at the end of the game or by performing an operation to transmit some of the balls held to the game medium management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. Furthermore, there is no concept of foul balls in a game machine in which game balls are shot from above the game area, but foul balls may occur when game balls are shot from below as in conventional game machines. Therefore, in the case of gaming machines in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls held can increase or decrease depending on whether or not a foul ball has been hit.
Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to the consumption, lending, and payout of balls in hand. Additionally, "increase/decrease in game media" refers to the increase/decrease in the number of balls in hand due to consumption, lending, and payout. Additionally, "data related to increase/decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to data related to the decrease in balls in hand due to game balls being launched, and the increase in balls in hand due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of gaming balls through each winning port, etc. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a gaming ball passes through each winning port, the number of game balls paid out as a result is added to the number of balls held. Also, when a gaming ball is released, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to a gaming media management device through the player's operation. Also, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine,
Conversion of the game value managed by the game media management device to balls (ball lending) and counting the number of balls (
The game system receives requests for balls (return) from the game player. These requests are then transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game system to transmit data on the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "game value" refers to currency, paper money, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted to balls by the game media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept paper money, prepaid media, etc. Furthermore, the counted balls held can be used for prize exchange, etc., in the game center where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. This allows the data immediately before the power supply is turned off to be retained even if the power supply is turned off at night. This backup power supply may also allow the door open sensor to continue to detect the opening of the door frame, for example. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored.
Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device of the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed gaming machine is required to be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming balls. For example, enclosed gaming machines include a type in which the gaming balls are not circulated through an island facility but are circulated only through the gaming machine itself, and a type in which the gaming balls are circulated through an island facility but the player cannot touch them.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The gaming media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the gaming machine via the gaming machine connection board. The transmitted and received data is information such as a unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, a unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, a gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, a security chip manufacturer code, and a gaming machine model code. Then, with either the gaming machine or the gaming media management device as a transmission source and the other as a transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal transmits a confirmation signal that is the same as the transmission signal to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same or not.

In this way, the source of transmission can compare the confirmation signal transmitted from the destination with the transmission signal to determine whether they are identical, thereby making it possible to confirm that the signal transmitted from the source of transmission has been transmitted to the source of transmission without being tampered with, thereby making it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as tampering with the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming system, the source may have a modulation unit that modulates a signal, and transmit the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the destination may have a demodulation unit that demodulates the signal modulated by the modulation unit.

This makes it possible, even if the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device are read, to make it difficult to decipher these signals, thereby preventing fraudulent activities such as tampering with the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

In addition, in the above gaming system, when the destination receives the transmission signal from the source, it may transmit an acknowledgement signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, to the source separately from the confirmation signal.

This makes it possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received by comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal, thereby further strengthening the prevention of fraudulent activities. Also, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device for communication, a frame control circuit may be provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit and the gaming media management device may be connected for communication via the frame control circuit. Also, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit,
A frame control circuit may be provided between the launch control circuit and the game media management device. In this case, the frame control circuit may perform error control of the main control circuit and the launch control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel,
The main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination indicating a big win symbol.

In detail, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being variably displayed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a big win symbol, the main CPU performs control to forcibly stop the other special symbol at a symbol combination that indicates a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery.
As described above, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the jackpot game state. In this jackpot game state, neither the first special symbol start condition nor the second special symbol start condition is met, and the main C
The PU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol,
The main CPU suspends the measurement of the time for the other special symbol to fluctuate based on the transition from the normal game state to the small win game state (stopping at a symbol combination showing a small win symbol), and resumes the measurement of the time for the other special symbol to fluctuate based on the transition from the small win game state to the normal game state (end of the small win game). When one special symbol stops at a symbol combination showing a small win symbol, the normal game state transitions to the small win game state as described above, but in this small win game state, neither the starting condition for the first special symbol nor the starting condition for the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU
Neither the variable display of the special symbol nor the variable display of the second special symbol will be newly performed. However,
When both the first special pattern and the second special pattern are being variably displayed, if one of the special patterns stops at a pattern combination indicating a small winning pattern, the main CPU variably displays the other special pattern being variably displayed, which is composed of a group of LEDs in a manner similar to that during the variably displayed state, but the timing of the fluctuation time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other extension examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been given as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other gaming machines, such as pachislot machines.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, the performance involving a temporary stop of the symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. Note that the "stop" of the symbols may be a permanent stop or a temporary stop, and the "stop" may be interpreted in either way. Furthermore, the operation by the player to play the game may be any of the operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., touch, etc.

In pachinko machines, the manager of the machine may set the effects by operating the effect button, and the machine may be operated so that the player starts playing after the settings are made using the effect button. In this case, it is expected that the operation by the manager will ultimately become the operation for the player to play the game. Similarly, in pachislot machines, the manager may play a two-bet game,
In some cases, it is assumed that a player plays a 3-bet game when a BB flag corresponding to a 2-bet game is established. In this case, although a player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, since a 2-bet game may be played by an administrator of the gaming machine, a game played by the administrator (e.g., a 2-bet game, etc.) or a selection of a hall menu may be an operation for a player to play a game.

In a pachinko game machine, the main CPU controls the player to notify the player of whether to hit from the right or left, thereby managing the player's playing method, and if the player's playing method is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to notify the player of the unintended play by issuing an error or warning, etc.

In pachislot, the main CPU determines the player's playing method, such as the player's push order (assist).
However, if the player's playing method is not as intended,
The sub-CPU may be controlled to notify the player of unintended gameplay, such as an error or warning.

In addition, in pachinko machines, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be one board. In pachislot machines, the payout control board may not exist, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the main control board and the payout control board may be separated.

Also, a pachinko slot machine usually has a rectangular housing that houses various devices necessary for playing games and a door that can be opened and closed relative to the housing, but the housing in a pachinko slot machine can be regarded as a frame. On the other hand, in a pachinko machine, the outer frame can be regarded as the housing, the outer frame and the base door can be regarded as the housing, or the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, the base door, the glass door and the plate unit can be regarded as the housing. Note that between the housing and the door, or between the frames and the doors, there may be a unit, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., in which various control boards are provided, and various control boards, display means, decorative parts, gimmicks, etc. may be present in the door, frame, housing, etc.

[5. First embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. The fourth pachinko game machine has a first embodiment and a second embodiment, and both embodiments are pachinko game machines called one-type two-type mixed machines, like the third pachinko game machine. The first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine have different basic specifications of playability compared to the third pachinko game machine, and therefore the configurations of various members arranged in the play area are partially different.

In addition, the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine are priority variable machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established in priority over the start condition of the first special symbol, like the third pachinko game machine. However,
This is not limiting, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may also be used.

First, a first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described, and then a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described. In the following description of the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and detailed descriptions of the components and processes will be omitted.

<First embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine>
[5-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 108, the fourth embodiment of the pachinko game machine includes a game board unit 3.
010 will be described. This game board unit 3010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) in the same manner as in the first pachinko game machine.

108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 3010 includes a game panel 3100 on which various components are arranged, and a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed on the front side of the game panel 3100.

As shown in FIG. 108, the game board unit 3010 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine has the following differences compared to the first pachinko game machine: a first passage gate 3126A,
The configurations and arrangements of the second passing gate 3126B, the first starting gate 3120, the second starting gate 3140, the normal electric role unit 3145, the special electric role unit 3130, and the V winning device 3150 are different. The configurations and arrangements of each are described below.

(First Passage Gate)
The first passing gate 3126A is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can pass through it (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot pass through it). The first passing gate 3126A is provided with a first passing gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the first passing gate 3126A.

(Second Passage Gate)
The second passage gate 3126B is a normal electric accessory unit 314 (described later) in the right side area 107.
The second passage gate 3126B is disposed below the right-handed ball 3126B and is disposed so that only game balls hit from the right can pass through. The second passage gate 3126B is provided with a second passage gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the second passage gate 3126B.

When a game ball passes through the first passing gate 3126A or the second passing gate 3126B (hereinafter, also referred to as "passing gates 3126A, 3126B" as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery or a variable display of normal symbols is performed. In this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A, 3126B, no prize balls are paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

In addition, the passing gates 3126A and 3126B may function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device of a special device. On the premise that the condition device is in operation, the passing gates 3126A and 3126B may be used to activate the consecutive operation device of a special device, thereby shifting to a jackpot game state.

The same applies to the passage gate 126 of the first pachinko gaming machine and the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko gaming machine described above.

(First starting point)
The first starting opening 3120 is in the direction of travel of the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A (i.e., directly below the first passing gate 3126A) and is approximately 100 mm from the first passing gate 3126A.
The first starting gate 3120 is arranged close to the first starting gate 3126A at a distance of about one game ball. Furthermore, the first starting gate 3120 is arranged so that it is difficult for game balls other than those that have passed through the first passing gate 3126A to enter the first starting gate 3126A due to game nails or the like.

When a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 3120, a special pattern lottery will be held, a first special pattern will be variably displayed, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, three gaming balls) will be paid out.

In this embodiment, the distance between the first starting hole 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A is set to the distance of approximately one game ball, but it may be set to the distance of approximately 1 to 2 game balls. In principle, the shorter the distance between the first starting hole 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A, the better.
In order to make the functions of first starting opening 3120 and first passing gate 3126A independent of each other, it is desirable to leave a distance of at least one game ball between first starting opening 3120 and first passing gate 3126A.

In this way, by arranging the first starting hole 3120 immediately below and adjacent to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting hole 3120.
The ball will enter gate 3126A at gate 3126C. The start time of the variable display of the normal pattern triggered by the game ball passing through gate 3126A can be adjusted with the start time of the variable display of the special pattern triggered by the game ball entering gate 3120 at gate 3126A (the variable display can start at approximately the same time).

In addition, by positioning the first starting hole 3120 so that it is difficult for any ball other than that which has passed through the first passing gate 3126A to enter the hole, it is possible to prevent an event in which only the variable display of special patterns is performed while the variable display of normal patterns is not performed, and it is possible to operate the variable display of special patterns triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 3120 and the variable display of normal patterns triggered by the passage of a game ball through the first passing gate 3126A as a set.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 3140 is positioned so that a game ball hit from the right can enter the hole (but it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the left to enter the hole).

When a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 3140, a special pattern lottery will be held, a second special pattern will be variably displayed, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, one gaming ball) will be paid out.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole into which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of game balls into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 3146, and is disposed in the right area 107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 3140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 3141.

The normal electric device 3146 includes a normal power shutter 3147 of a protruding plate type that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 3148 (see FIG. 109 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 3147.
The normal electric device 3146, i.e., the normal electric shutter 3147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters the second starting hole 3140 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the second starting hole 3140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 3147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section arranged in front of the entrance of the second starting port 3140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guide section inclined toward the second starting port 3140. When the normal power shutter 3147 is in an open state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section protrudes a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100, so as not to impede the game ball from entering the second starting port 3140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guide section protrudes a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100, so as to receive the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107 and guide the received game ball to the second starting port 3140. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 3147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion protrudes a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100 to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting hole 3140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guide portion is embedded in the surface of the game panel 3100 and does not accept the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, but allows it to flow downward. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 3147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 3131, a large prize opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131, and a special electric accessory 3133. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is disposed at the lower part in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 3131 is arranged in the right area 107 so that game balls hit from the right can enter (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or cannot enter). However, this is not limited to this, and a large prize opening that can receive game balls hit from the left or a large prize opening that can receive game balls may be arranged above the center role 115.

The big prize opening 3131 is an opening that is opened to allow up to a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) to enter when the game is controlled to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player. When a game ball enters the big prize opening 3131, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

The big prize opening 3131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in a first route when a stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big prize", and in a second route when a stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination process is a "gimmick opening hit", causing the V Attacker 3152 to open, and a game ball that enters the opened V Attacker 3152 enters the V prize opening within the V Attacker 3152.

The special electric device 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 3135 (see FIG. 109 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 3134. The special electric device 3133, i.e., the special electric shutter 3134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 3131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 3131.

Specifically, the special power shutter 3134 is composed of an opening/closing door whose lower part is supported on a shaft.
When the special power shutter 3134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door falls to the front side and the big prize opening 3
131 opens, receives the game balls flowing down into the right side area 107, and guides the received game balls to the large prize opening 3131. On the other hand, when the special power shutter 3134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door is inverted to close the large prize opening 3131, making it impossible or difficult for the game balls to enter the large prize opening 3131.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 3150 is provided downstream of the normal electric role unit 3145 in the right area 107. The V winning device 3150 includes an opening and closing winning port 3151 that is opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 3150, a V attacker 3152 that can open and close the opening and closing winning port 3151, and a V attacker 3152 that can open and close the opening and closing winning port 3151 by operating the V attacker 3152.
A V attacker solenoid 3154 for opening and closing the V attacker 3151, a V attacker count switch 3153 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the opening and closing winning opening 3151, and a V attacker count switch 3153 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the opening and closing winning opening 3151.
A V-shaped winning hole 3155 through which the game ball that has entered the inside of the winning device 3150 can pass, and a V-shaped winning hole 3
A V winning hole switch 3156 for detecting the passage of a game ball through the winning hole 3155 and an opening/closing winning hole 31
The V winning device 3150 is provided with a loss port 3157 through which game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 from 51 but have not entered the V winning port 3155 can pass, a V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning port 3155, and a V shutter solenoid 3159 that operates the V shutter 3158 to open and close the V winning port 3155. The V winning device 3150 may be provided upstream of the normal electric role unit 3145, or may be provided in the left side area 106.

The V attacker 3152 is made of a protruding plate-type plate-like member that can move forward and backward, and is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the opening and closing winning opening 3151 by advancing the V attacker 3152 forward, and an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the opening and closing winning opening 3151 by retracting the V attacker 3152 backward.

The opening and closing winning hole 3151 is a winning hole that is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 when a "perfect opening of the role" occurs, and up to a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) can enter each time it is opened. When a game ball enters this opening and closing winning hole 3151, the value of the V attacker winning counter is incremented, and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 game balls) are paid out.

The V winning hole 3155 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 4000
This is a winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot gaming state via the second route described above, provided that the gaming ball passes through it within 100 msec.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the V attacker 3152 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155 is regarded as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the large winning hole 3131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the V winning hole 3152 is opened so that the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued.
Even after the game ball has passed through 5 (from the second round onwards), a round game in which the V Attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be played for a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric device 3133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the open state),
The number of attackers opened in the winning hole and the big win game state may be one each. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "winning of the special feature opening" is derived, the special electric shutter 3134 is opened, and the V winning hole 3155 provided inside the special electric feature 3133 is opened.
When the game ball enters the hole, the state is controlled to a jackpot game state (a jackpot game state via the second route).

The loss hole 3157 is configured to allow a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 but has not passed through the V winning hole 3155 to enter (pass through).
If all of the game balls that have entered the V winning device 3150 pass through the losing port 3157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 3155, the game ends without being controlled to a big win game state.

The V-shutter 3158 is a V-shutter solenoid 3159 (see FIG. 109 described later).
By the operation of the V winning hole 3155, the game ball cannot pass through (or is difficult to pass through),
It operates between an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning port 3155.

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine has a normal power solenoid 3148 and a special power solenoid 3
135, V attacker solenoid 3154, V shutter solenoid 3159, 1st
Start port switch 3121, second start port switch 3141, first pass gate switch 312
The configurations of the 7A, the second pass gate switch 3127B, the large prize opening count switch 3132, the V attacker count switch 3153, and the V prize opening switch 3156 are partially different. The configurations and arrangements of each are described below.

In addition, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine does not execute the probability variation control, so it does not have the probability variation notification display unit 167 in the first pachinko game machine. Furthermore, as described later, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine does not have a reservation function for reserving the start information of the normal symbol or the special symbol up to a predetermined number, so the reservation display unit 162 for the normal symbol, the reservation display unit 165 for the first special symbol, and the reservation display unit 16 for the second special symbol in the first pachinko game machine are not provided.
6 is not provided either.

(Solenoid for general purpose power supply)
The normal power solenoid 3148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 3147. When the normal power solenoid 3148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 3147 forward to open the second starting port 3140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it retreats the normal power shutter 3147 backward to close the second starting port 3140.

(Special power solenoid)
The special power solenoid 3135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special power shutter 3134, which is an opening and closing door. When the special power solenoid 3135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), it tilts the special power shutter 3134 forward to open the large prize opening 3131, and when it is not energized by the main CPU 201 (OFF),
The special power shutter 3134 is inverted backward to close the large prize opening 3131.

(Solenoid for V-Attacker)
The solenoid 3154 for the V attacker is an electromagnetic solenoid that activates the V attacker 3152. When the solenoid 3154 for the V attacker is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V attacker 3152 backward to open and close the winning hole 3151.
is in an open state, and when no power is supplied by the main CPU 201 (when it is OFF), the V attacker 3152 is advanced forward and the opening/closing winning hole 3151 is put into a closed state.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 3159 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 3158. When the V shutter solenoid 3159 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 3158 backward to open the V winning port 3155, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201,
The V shutter 3158 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 3155.
In this embodiment, the V-shutter solenoid 3159 is operated 200 msec after the opening of the opening/closing winning hole 3151, to open the V-winning hole 3155.
The winning hole 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening of the opening/closing winning hole 3151.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 3121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 3120. When the first start hole switch 3121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 3120, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the first special symbol, and uses the extracted start information of the special symbol in a winning determination process of the first special symbol, performs a variable display process of the first special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 3141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 3140. When the second start hole switch 3141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 3140, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the second special symbol, and uses the extracted start information of the special symbol in a winning determination process of the second special symbol, performs a variable display process of the second special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball).

(First pass gate switch)
The first passing gate switch 3127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball through the first passing gate 3126A. When the first passing gate switch 3127A detects the passage of a gaming ball through the first passing gate 3126A, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the normal symbol, and uses the extracted start information of the normal symbol in a winning determination process of the normal symbol, or performs a variable display process of the normal symbol.

(Second pass gate switch)
The second passing gate switch 3127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball through the second passing gate 3126B. When the second passing gate switch 3127B detects the passage of a gaming ball through the second passing gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the normal pattern, and uses the extracted start information of the normal pattern in a winning determination process of the normal pattern, or performs a variable display process of the normal pattern.

In addition, when the first pass gate switch 3127A detects the passage of the game ball to the first pass gate 3126A, and when the second pass gate switch 3127B detects the passage of the game ball to the second pass gate 3126B,
In addition, even if the first pass gate switch 3127A or the second pass gate switch 3127B (hereinafter, also referred to as "pass gate switches 3127A, 3127B") detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gates 3126A, 3126B,
No prize balls are paid out.

(Big prize slot count switch)
The large prize opening count switch 3132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131. When the large prize opening count switch 3132 detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per round and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls).

(V attacker count switch)
The V attacker count switch 3153 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing winning hole 3151. When the V attacker count switch 3153 detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing winning hole 3151, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the V attacker winning counter and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 game balls). When the V attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V attacker 3152 is operated by the V attacker solenoid 3154 to close the opening/closing winning hole 3151 even if the maximum time for opening the opening/closing winning hole 3151 has not elapsed.

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 3156 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 3155.
sec), when the V winning hole switch 3156 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 3155, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 3156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 3155,
No prize balls are paid out.

[5-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 120. Note that the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, a time-saving game state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which the time-saving control is not executed are provided, although the probability-changing control is not executed.
The main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in a normal game state or a time-saving game state. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential. For example, the probability variable control may be executed by setting the probability variable flag to ON according to the type of the big win.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, as will be described later in detail, under a specific condition (
The number of consecutive jackpots that have caused a transition to a jackpot game state in the A time-shortened game state is counted, and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number, a "limiter function" is provided that partially restricts the game state to which the game state is transitioned after the end of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B, right hitting is the regular game mode. In the time-saving game state C, the game mode changes between left hitting and right hitting as appropriate depending on the opening state of the normal electric role 3146. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method that is the regular game mode, for example, on the display area of the display device 7.

[5-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 110 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 110 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table includes data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 3120, such as "big hit" and "hit to open the special symbol."
Or, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining the jackpot determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding judgment value data ("jackpot judgment value data", "game opening hit judgment value data", "time-saving hit judgment value data"). In addition, as data used in the hit judgment process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second start hole 3140, "jackpot" or "
The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a jackpot determined by the "hit when the special feature is opened" and the corresponding judgment value data ("jackpot judgment value data", "hit when the special feature is opened") is stipulated. Note that the total random number value of the random number value for determining a jackpot is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 110, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, the main CPU 2
01 determines the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol as a "big hit", "a hit with the release of the special symbol" or a "time-saving hit" based on the hit determination process of the first special symbol using the random number value for the big hit determination of the first special symbol.
1 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern as a "jackpot" or a "hit by opening the special device" based on the hit determination process for the second special pattern using a random number value for determining a jackpot for the second special pattern.

In addition, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, a "miss" may be determined. Also, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, a "gimmick release hit" may not be determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, it is an essential requirement that a "jackpot" or a "time-saving hit" is determined, but other requirements can be freely changed as appropriate.

Also, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, a "miss" may be determined. However, when a "miss" is determined, it is preferable to set a relatively low probability so that the judgment made in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more favorable than the judgment made in the hit determination process of the first special symbol. Also, when the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed, a "time-saving hit" may be determined. That is,
In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "jackpot" or a "performer opening hit" is determined when the hit determination process for the second special pattern is performed, but other requirements are free to be modified in design as appropriate.

In addition, when the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of winning the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of winning the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of winning the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of winning the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. However, even if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the probability of winning the time-saving feature is set to a common probability in all settings.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the opening of the special feature according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 3152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate to the V winning device 3150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 3155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 3155, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the opening of the special feature, the opening frequency of the V winning port 3155 (i.e., the V
By adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the frequency of operation of the attacker 3152, the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving function continues, the expected value controlled for the jackpot gaming state may be configured to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting.

[5-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
The main control circuit 200 according to the embodiment includes a main ROM 202.

The special pattern determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select pattern command" and a "pattern designation command" that determine the stopping pattern based on the random number value of the special pattern extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 or the second starting hole 3140 and the aforementioned determination value data.

The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of the big win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.
3" and select "zA1" as the design specification command.

In addition, when the winning determination process of the first special symbol results in the acquisition of the winning determination value data, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201
selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 89, the main C
The PU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and inputs "z
Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command, and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the reel opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern, the special pattern determination table shown in FIG. 111 is configured so that the selected pattern commands are more likely to be selected in the order of "z6"<"z5"<"z4".

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected pattern command and selects "zA3" as the pattern designation command regardless of whether the pattern random number value of the first special pattern is, for example, any value from 0 to 99.

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special pattern,
Even if the random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CPU 201
selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the winning judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained as a result of the winning judgment process of the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any one of 0 to 99, the main CP
U201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA" as the symbol designation command.
Select "5".

Although the description of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is omitted, the main control circuit 200
The main ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 300 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 109) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, according to the selected symbol command. In addition, the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164 output the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the big hit, the display mode of the hit of the role release, or the display mode of the miss, based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[5-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 112 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
112(a) is an example of a winning type determination table that is referred to when the limiter function is not activated (when the limiter function is inactive), and FIG. 112(b) is an example of a winning type determination table that is referred to when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated).

As shown in FIG. 112, the win type determination table corresponds, for each selected symbol command, the opening mode of the special feature when it is released, the mode of the jackpot game state, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times), the opening mode of the special feature when it is released, and the number of limiters at the time of the first win.

The main CPU 201 refers to a win type determination table and determines, based on the selected symbol command, the opening mode when the special feature is released, the mode of the jackpot game state, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times), the opening mode when the special feature is released, and the number of limiters.

The "opening mode of the special feature opening win" is the opening and closing winning hole 31 that is opened when the special feature opening wins.
The "first opening mode" indicates the opening mode of the open/close winning port 3151 for a short period of time (for example, 200 msec in this embodiment), which is disadvantageous to the player.
Since the V winning hole 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening of the open/close winning hole 3151, the open/close winning hole 3151 is opened in the first opening mode, and the game ball enters the open/close winning hole 315
Even if the game ball enters the opening/closing winning hole 3151 in the second opening mode, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 3155, and from this point of view, this is an opening mode that is disadvantageous to the player. Also, the "second opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing winning hole 3151 has a long opening time (e.g., 18,000 msec), and is advantageous to the player. And, when the opening/closing winning hole 3151 opens in the second opening mode and the game ball enters the opening/closing winning hole 3151, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 3155, and from this point of view, this is an opening mode that is advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the opening time of the open/close winning opening 3151 is set to a short time in the "first opening mode" and a long time in the "second opening mode". However, if the opening times of the open/close winning opening 3151 are made substantially the same in the "first opening mode" and the "second opening mode", the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode" (the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode" (the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode" (the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode" (the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode)), and the opening time of the open/close winning opening 3151 is made substantially the same in the "first opening mode" and the "second opening mode" (the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode) (the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode) (the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode) (the V shutter 3158 is more likely to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "second ...
155 may be configured to be in an open state, making it easier for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155.

The "type of the big win game state" indicates the opening type of the big win opening 3131 that is opened when a "big win" occurs, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds of the big win. In addition to the number of rounds of the big win, the opening time per round and the big win opening to be opened may be determined.

The "state of the game state after that" indicates the state of the game state after the end of the big win game state, and means the setting of the "time-saving flag" and the "number of times of time-saving". If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state, and the "time-saving flag" and the "number of times of time-saving" are set.

The "limiter number" indicates the limiter number set when a jackpot occurs in a state other than the time-saving game state A (normal game state, time-saving game state B, or time-saving game state C). The limiter number is subtracted every time a jackpot game state is entered under a specific condition (time-saving game state A), and when the limiter number becomes 0, the limiter function is activated and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 112(b) is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z4 to z6" corresponding to the "hit of the opening of the special symbol", the main CPU 201 determines the "first opening mode" which is disadvantageous to the player as the "opening mode of the hit of the special symbol",
When the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is the selected symbol command "z9" corresponding to a "hit on the opening of the special feature", a "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is determined as the "opening mode of the hit on the special feature".

In this embodiment, as described above, either a "jackpot" or a "performer opening perk" is determined in the hit determination process of the second special symbol. Then, when a "performer opening perk" is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, a "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is determined, and the game ball is likely to pass through the V winning hole 3155 in the open/close winning hole 3151, and it is likely to transition to a jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 3140, it is likely to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and it is configured so that the game ball entering the second starting hole 3140 can essentially transition to a jackpot game state.

In contrast, even if a "gimmick release hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, a "first release mode" that is unfavorable to the player is determined, and it is difficult to transition to a jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, a gimmick release hit triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 is essentially treated the same as a miss.
A hit that opens the reel triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 is treated the same as a miss, but will be referenced when switching the fluctuation pattern table described below.

In this embodiment, when a "gimmick opening hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, only the "first opening mode" disadvantageous to the player is determined as the "opening mode of the gimmick opening hit", but it may be configured so that a "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is determined. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is set to be more difficult to select than the "first opening mode" disadvantageous to the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 112(a), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z1-z3" corresponding to "jackpot", the main CPU 201 decides to set the time-saving flag to ON and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 10 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 5 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving game state. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 4 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 3 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving game state. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 4 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 3 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving game state.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the number of rounds and the limiter count are set differently depending on the selected symbol command.
This allows the player to receive different benefits depending on the type of jackpot (pattern),
It is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 112(a) and (b), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z7" corresponding to the "time-saving hit", the main CPU 20
1 decides to set the time-saving flag to on and decides to set the number of time-saving times to one.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit",
As a result of the special symbol hit determination process, a time-saving game state of an extremely short duration is determined as compared to a "jackpot".

The winning type determination table when the limiter function is activated shown in FIG. 112(b) is the same as that shown in FIG. 112(a).
In comparison with the winning type determination table when the limiter function is not activated shown in FIG. 112, the settings of "the mode of the subsequent game state" and "the number of times of the limiter" are different, while the settings of "the opening mode of the opening of the role" and "the mode of the big win game state" are the same. Note that, as shown in FIG. 112(b), since the limiter function is activated, the "number of times of the limiter" is not set.

As shown in Figure 112 (b), when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, and the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times will be set in the same manner as in Figure 112 (a).

However, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is "jackpot" or "hit with the release of the special symbol," the time-saving flag is set to off and the number of time-saving times is not set as the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state ends, regardless of the selected symbol command. In other words, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), the game state after the jackpot game state ends will transition to the normal game state.

[5-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
113 to 116 are examples of variation pattern tables of special symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 113 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 114 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 115 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 116 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
113 to 116 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 116 are generated by the main RO of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.
It is stored in M202.

As shown in Figures 113 to 116, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the reach determination random number value, the performance selection random number value, the special symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the special symbol. The reach determination random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the performance selection random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in Figures 113 to 116 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 determines a variation pattern table of any one of the special symbols shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 116 according to the game state, etc., and refers to the variation pattern table of the determined special symbol.
The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is configured to be able to identify whether the fluctuation pattern is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 3120 or the second start hole 3140.

The jackpot-related reach and jackpot-related normal reach shown in the "Notes" column of Figures 113 to 116 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). The chance fluctuation is a fluctuation effect that indicates that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, as the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state, the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 113(1) and the variation pattern table T2 of the special symbol shown in FIG.
113(3) and the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113(2), and the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3). The number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one or more.
Two or more may be acceptable.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) is a fluctuation pattern table selected after the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is backed up and cleared (i.e., the initial value fluctuation pattern table), after the first special pattern corresponding to the selection pattern command "z4" for "hit on opening of the special device" is displayed stationary, after the limiter function is activated and the game transitions to the normal game state, and after the first hit determination process for the first special pattern is completed (i.e., after the transition from the special pattern fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) described later).

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113(2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for "hit on opening of the reel" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening of the reel" is stopped and displayed.

The variation pattern table T1 to T2 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 113 (1) to (3)
In T3, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the variable pattern "01H" (hereinafter "
Either a variation pattern "02H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance variation A") in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, or a variation pattern "02H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance variation B") in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is selected.

More details will be given later using Figure 137, but in the normal game state, chance fluctuation A which is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an unfavorable manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern, and chance fluctuation B which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an advantageous manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern.

The variation pattern table T1 to T2 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 113 (1) to (3)
In T3, the selection rate of the chance fluctuation A is different from that of the chance fluctuation B. In the normal game state, the chance fluctuation B in which the second starting hole 3140 is likely to be opened in an advantageous manner is configured to be selected in the order of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 < the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T2 < the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3.

For this reason, among the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. As described above in FIG. 111, the selection symbol command is as follows:
Since the order of ease of selection is "z6"<"z5"<"z4", the variable pattern table T3 of the special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

(C Time-saving special symbol variation pattern table)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, as a variation pattern table of the special symbol in the C time-saving gaming state, the variation pattern table C1 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 114(1) and the variation pattern table C2 of the special symbol shown in FIG.
The special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 14(2) and the special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3) are provided with three variation pattern tables.
The number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the time-saving game state is not limited to three, and may be one, or two or more.

The special pattern variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is a variation pattern table that is selected after a transition from a normal game state to a C time-saving game state, or after the first special pattern corresponding to the selection pattern command "z4" for "hit on opening of the special device" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114(2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

Table C1 of special symbols in the C time-saving game state shown in FIG. 114 (1) to (3)
In the case of C3, the variation pattern table T1 of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG.
Similarly to T1 through T3, when the result of the winning determination process of the first special symbol is a "time-saving winning", either a "chance variation A" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, or a "chance variation B" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is selected as a variation pattern.

More details will be given later using Figure 138, but even in the C time-saving playing state, chance fluctuation A which is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an unfavorable manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern, and chance fluctuation B which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an advantageous manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern.

Table C1 of special symbols in the C time-saving game state shown in FIG. 114 (1) to (3)
〜C3, the selection rate of the chance fluctuation A and the chance fluctuation B is different. In the C time-saving game state, the chance fluctuation B in which the second starting hole 3140 is likely to be opened advantageously is configured to be selected in the order of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 < the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C2 < the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3.

For this reason, among the special pattern variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving play state, the special pattern variation pattern table C3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. However, as described above in FIG. 111, the selected pattern commands are configured to be most likely to be selected in the order of "z6"<"z5"<"z4", so that the special pattern variation pattern table C3 corresponding to the selected pattern command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

In addition, the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 113,
The variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the special symbols in the C time-saving game state shown in FIG. 114 are the first
The variation patterns of the special symbols are the same, but the variation patterns of the second special symbols when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit of the opening of the special symbol" are different. That is,
In the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 113, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is "a hit to open the special symbol", the main CPU 201 changes the variation pattern of the second special symbol to a variation time of, for example, 500,000 msec or 600
This is because, in the normal game state, the game ball does not basically enter (pass) the second start hole 3140, but even if an unexpected event occurs and the game ball enters the second start hole 3140, this is done in order to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

For this reason, the variation pattern tables T1 to T3 of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
A special symbol variation pattern table common to the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 114 may be adopted.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving game state A or time-saving game state B)
The special pattern variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115 is a variation pattern table that is selected when the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state.

The variable pattern table A of the special symbol is configured so that the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively short, except when the result of the winning judgment process is "jackpot". As a result, in the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state, the game ball enters the V winning hole 3155 in the opening and closing winning hole 3151.
It is possible to transition to a big win game state via the second route by passing through in a short time.

(Special pattern variation table after limiter function activation)
The special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) is a specific fluctuation pattern table selected in the first special symbol winning determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function.

In the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit", the second start hole 31 in the normal game state
The system is configured so that chance variation B, which is likely to result in an advantageous opening mode, is always selected.

When the chance variation B is selected in the normal game state, the second start hole 3140 is in an advantageous opening state, and the game ball is more likely to enter the second start hole 3140. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second start hole 3140, it is easy to transition to a big win game state from the first route or the second route, and the game ball entering the second start hole 3140 makes it possible to substantially transition to a big win game state.

Therefore, even if a winning streak in the time-saving play state ends due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special pattern after transition to the normal play state is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to transition again to the jackpot play state via the second route, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern fluctuation pattern table Z1 is configured so that chance fluctuation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a "time-saving hit," but it may also be configured so that chance fluctuation A, which is more likely to result in an unfavorable opening state of the second starting hole 3140, is selected with a lower probability than chance fluctuation B.

In addition, after the transition to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated and the first hit determination process for the first special pattern is completed, the special pattern fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) will be selected from the special pattern fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1).

The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) is a modified example of the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1), and is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 increases chance variation A by 20% and chance variation B by 10% when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit".
is configured to be selected with a probability of 80%.

Even in this way, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal game state is a "time-saving hit," the probability of transitioning again to the jackpot game state via the second route increases, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, the special pattern fluctuation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 are fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the first special pattern hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated, but this is not limited to the first time. For example, in the case where there is a special pattern reservation function, the fluctuation pattern tables may be selected based on the special pattern hit determination process up to the fourth time, or may be fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the special pattern hit determination process up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a "time-saving hit," there is one chance variation A and one chance variation B, but the configuration may also be such that, based on the variable display time of the normal pattern, there are multiple groups of chance variations A in which the variable display time of the special pattern is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern, and multiple groups of chance variations B in which the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern.

[5-3-5. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
117 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 117 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, i.e., a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol hit" or a "miss" is obtained based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B.

The winning judgment table for the normal symbol shown in FIG. 117 includes the game state, the range (width) of the random number for judging the winning of the normal symbol, and the winning judgment value data for the normal symbol ("winning of the normal symbol" or "miss").
The above are specified in correspondence with each other.

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 117, and determines normal symbol hit determination value data based on the game state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, if the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 0 to 89, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal symbol winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data as "normal symbol winning judgment value data." Also, in the non-time-saving game state, if the random number value for winning judgment of the extracted normal symbol is any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "loss" and determines the judgment value data as "loss judgment value data."

In the A time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." In the A time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "loss" and sets the determination value data to "loss determination value data."

In the B time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a win is any one of 0 to 89, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." In the B time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a win is any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "loss" and sets the determination value data to "loss determination value data."

In the C time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any one of 0 to 89, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." In the C time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any one of 90 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "loss" and sets the determination value data to "loss determination value data."

In this manner, in the present embodiment, among the normal game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the time-saving game state A (FIG. 117
The selectivity rate (estimated) shown in is the highest.

In addition, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the normal game state. Similarly, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, even if the game state is shifted between the normal game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of a normal symbol does not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol is not changed, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols to be described later is simply changed for each state, so that the control process can be simplified.

[5-3-6. Normal symbol determination table]
FIG. 118 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.
The information is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in this embodiment.

The normal symbol determination table is the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data and the passing gates 3126A and 312
This is a table to be referred to when selecting a "regular symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol to be stopped based on the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through 6B. The "regular symbol selection command" is a command for designating the normal symbol to be hit, which is determined according to the type of normal symbol hit, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit.

In the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, the normal symbol hit determination value data ("normal symbol hit" or "miss"), the normal symbol random number value, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command are associated with each other. The normal symbol random number value is, for example, 0 to 9.
It is selected from 9 (100 types).

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, and determines the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol is hit, based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the pattern selection command when the normal pattern hits is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained as a result of the winning judgment process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 0 to 29, and selects "fz2" as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 30 to 60.
If the random number value of the normal symbol is any of 70 to 99, "fz3" is selected as the selected symbol command when the normal symbol is hit.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the "selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit", the selection is made based on the hit/miss judgment value data (the result of the hit judgment process for the normal pattern) and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal symbol (see FIG. 117) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data based on the winning judgment random number value of the extracted normal symbol, and then refers to the normal symbol judgment table (see FIG. 118) and determines the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment for the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

[5-3-7. Normal pattern type determination table]
119 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal pattern hit type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, depending on the game status and the normal pattern hit selection pattern command which is determined corresponding to the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 119 specifies the game state, the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 in correspondence with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the normal symbol selection command, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146.
The sub-CPU 301 transmits an opening pattern command for a normal electric role corresponding to the opening pattern of the normal electric role.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 selects an opening pattern, which is an opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, for a first opening time of 200 msec, regardless of which normal symbol selection command is selected.
It is decided that there will be no wait time and no second release.

In addition, in the normal game state, the first opening time may be changed according to the normal symbol hit selection symbol command. For example, in the normal game state, if the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146, is set to a first opening time of 200 msec, and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "f
When the symbol command selected when a normal symbol is hit is "fz2", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, is set to a first opening time of 250 msec, and when the symbol command selected when a normal symbol is hit is "fz3", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, is set to a first opening time of 300 msec, and regardless of the symbol command selected when a normal symbol is hit, the second opening time may be set to 0.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving game state, if the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, is determined to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving game state, if the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, is determined to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 20
The first release time is set to 0 msec, and the second release time is set to 2500 msec.
1, when the A time-saving game state is in, if the normal symbol winning selection symbol command is "fz3", the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, is set to the first opening time 300
The initial time is determined to be 0 msec, the wait time is 200 msec, and the second release time is 3000 msec.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, if the selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening manner of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the same normal symbol is hit, the selection symbol command (for example, "fz
1"), the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is configured to differ depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 becomes the most unfavorable mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 3146 in each game state. The favorable degree of the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is the degree of ease of the game ball entering the second starting hole 3140 when the normal electric device 3146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 becomes the most advantageous pattern among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 3146 in each play state.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal pattern in the B time-saving play state is a "normal pattern hit" has the same degree of advantage as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal pattern in the C time-saving play state is a "normal pattern hit", but is not limited to this.

[5-3-8. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
Fig. 120 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 120 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 is a game state and a passing gate 3126
A random number value for selecting a normal symbol effect, which is extracted when the game ball passes through 3126A and 3126B, is associated with a normal symbol variation pattern and a variable display time of the normal symbol. The random number value for selecting a normal symbol effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, even if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 0 and 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to, for example, 10000.
It is determined to be msec.

In the A time-saving game state, when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 0 to 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 90 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.
It is determined to be c.

In the B time-saving game state, when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and when the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 40 to 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 ms.
ec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol per one variable display in the A time-saving game state is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal symbol in each game state.
Number 6 takes the shortest time to open.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is fixed to 10,000 msec.
In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 15, as described above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the chance variation A, which is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is a variable display time of 13,000 msec, which is longer than 10,000 msec, and the chance variation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is a variable display time of 9,000 msec, which is shorter than 10,000 msec. For details, see FIG. 137 and FIG. 138.
As will be described later using the above, the normal electric device 3146 opening pattern (opening mode of the second starting hole 3140) as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 will change depending on the relationship between the game state and the variable display time of the normal pattern and the variable display time of the special pattern.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 20 of the main control circuit 200
The various processes (various modules) executed by the main control process (FIGS. 20 to 23) are
Although the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and switch input detection process performed in S39 in the main CPU 100 are partially different, the other processes are the same. Therefore, the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and switch input detection process will be described below.
The other processes executed by 201 will not be described here.

In addition, the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine includes the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example,
The jackpot end processing (Figures 42, 133, etc.) will be explained below again with different step numbers, including the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

[5-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 121. Fig. 121 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S3001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game).
After executing the process of S3001, the process proceeds to S3002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process,
Prior to the process of S3001, an address setting process is performed to set the address of a work area for special symbols in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

In S3002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S3001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (S3002 is N
If the answer is NO, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S300
2 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed.

When it is determined in S3003 that the second special symbol is not variable display start (S3003
is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed.

When it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol is not variable display start (S3004
is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process, and returns the process to the main control process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol is to be variable displayed (S3
If step S3004 is answered YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S3005.

Returning to S3003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is to be variable-displayed (S300
3 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3005.

In S3005, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.
After the process of 003 is executed, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control process (FIG. 2
0 to (see FIG. 23).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S
It is preferable to perform steps S3001 to S3005 within an interrupt disabled section.

[5-4-2. Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S3002 is judged as YES), the special symbol management process is performed when S3003 is judged as YES, and when S3004 is judged as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target.
In the case of S judgment, the first special symbol is the processing target. Also, if the control state number is not 0 (S
If 3002 is judged as NO), the special symbol management process targets the special symbol currently being executed.

The numbers in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG.
The control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S3
011).

If it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (S3011 is N
In the case of O judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S301
1 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3012.

In S3012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
Then, after executing the process of S3012, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3013. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S3013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S3012.

In S3013, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This process of S3013 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 performs the process of S3014.
Move to.

In S3014, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This process of S3014 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 performs the process of S3015.
Move to.

In S3015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process.
The process of 015 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Fig. 126. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3016.

In S3016, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process.
The process of 3016 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3".
Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to Fig. 129. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3017.

In S3017, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning device opening control process.
The process of 3017 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4".
Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to Fig. 130. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3018.

In S3018, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening preparation process.
The process of 018 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to Fig. 131. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3019.

In S3019, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening control process.
The process of 019 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to Fig. 132. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3020.

In S3020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process.
The process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7." Details of this big win end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S3013 to S3020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[5-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S3013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target.
S30 during special symbol management processing in which the special symbol variable display start processing is the processing target of the second special symbol
If the process is called in 13, the second special symbol is the target of the process.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021).

If it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S30
If the result of step 21 is NO, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process.
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (
If the determination in S3021 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3022.

In S3022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this special symbol hit determination process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 110) is referenced, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a random number value for determining a jackpot for the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, a bonus feature release hit, or a time-saving hit. Also, if the second special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a bonus feature release hit. The main CPU 20
After executing the process of S3022, the process proceeds to S3023.

In S3023, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol determination process.
This is a process for determining or deciding the stopping pattern of the special pattern corresponding to the result of the special pattern hit determination process (S3022) (for example, a big hit, a hit for opening a special feature, or a hit for time reduction).
The special symbol determination table (see FIG. 111) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S3023, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (jackpot, special feature release hit, or time-saving hit). In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3023). Note that the type of win determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a special feature release hit is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 3155 opened based on the special feature release hit. In addition, in this embodiment, the types of jackpot and special feature release hit are both multiple types, but the type of jackpot and/or special feature release hit may be one. Furthermore, the type of time-saving hit may be multiple types. The main CPU 201
After executing the process of S3024, the process proceeds to S3025.

In S3025, the main CPU 201 executes a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols. This process is a process for determining or deciding the variation pattern of the special symbols.
Depending on the game state, etc., a special symbol variation pattern table of any one of Figs. 113 to 116 is determined, and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced, and the special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to Fig. 124. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3026.

In S3026, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbols. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table (see Figs. 113 to 116) determined in the variation pattern determination process for the special symbols (S3025), and determines the variable display time for the special symbols based on the determined variation pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time for the special symbols, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start variable display of the special symbols. After executing the process of S3026, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3027.

In S3027, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving management processing. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when variable display of a special symbol is started, a ceiling counter update process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter and a time-saving counter update process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving count counter are performed. Specifically, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (the time-saving flag is turned on), the time-saving count counter is set to a specified number, and the time-saving identification number is set to 2, which identifies the B time-saving game state, and transition control to the B time-saving game state is performed. In addition, when the time-saving count counter becomes 0, the time-saving flag and the time-saving identification number are cleared, and transition control from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, which is called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, the high probability game state is not controlled, so the time-saving management process executed in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the process described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko game machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on, but in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the high probability game state is not controlled. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the ceiling counter is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the first pachinko game machine, in the time-saving transition judgment process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether the probability variable flag is off (see S191), and then the process of S192 is performed on the condition that the probability variable flag is off. However, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, since the game is not controlled to a high probability game state as described above, the process of S192 is performed without performing the process of S191. Also, in the time-saving transition process (see FIG. 38), the transition control to the B time-saving game state (see S208) is performed by the ceiling flag that is turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, without performing the process of S202. The other processes in the time-saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 39 in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. After performing the process of S3027, the main CPU 201 returns to the S
Move to 3028.

In S3028, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (
The main CPU 201 performs the process of S3028.
After executing the above process, the process proceeds to S3029.

In S3029, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (for example, the number of remaining time reductions, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed.
After executing the process of S3029, the process proceeds to S3030.

In S3030, the main CPU 201 performs a game status management process. In this process, the main CPU 201 mainly performs an update process of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., a time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the process of S3030, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3031.

In S3031, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special pattern variable display start processing (particularly, the game status management processing (S3030) and the special pattern presentation start command transmission reservation processing (S3031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 124, in the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123), S302
124 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the limiter activation flag is on (S
3025-1). If the main CPU 201 determines in S3025-1 that the limiter operation flag is on, it shifts the process to S3025-2, and if it determines that the limiter operation flag is not on, it shifts the process to S3025-5.

Here, the "limiter activation flag" counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to a jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving game state), and is a flag that activates when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a specified limiter number, and is turned on in the limiter number update process (see Figure 127) described below.

In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines in S3025-2 that the ceiling counter is 0, the process proceeds to S3025-3, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S3025-5.

Unlike the first pachinko game machine, the "ceiling counter" is updated (incremented by 1) when the variable display of the special symbol starts, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, B
This is a counter for controlling the time-saving game state. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the process of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed, the ceiling counter has not yet been incremented in the "time-saving management process" of S3027, so when the ceiling counter = 0, it means the start of the first variable display of the special symbol in the normal game state.

In S3025-3, the main CPU 201 turns off the limiter activation flag,
The process proceeds to S3025-4.

In S3025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in Fig. 116(1) as the specific variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated. Note that, as shown in the modified example, the special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in Fig. 116(2) may be determined.

In addition, in S3025-4, the small winning symbol switching information = 0 described later is set, and from the next time onwards, the special symbol switching information shown in FIG. 113 is selected from the variable pattern table Z1 or Z2 of the special symbol shown in FIG.
Preparations are made so that the special symbol variable pattern table T1 shown in (1) is selected.

In S3025-5, the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state,
In order to know which of the time-shortened game states A, B, and C is being controlled, information on the game state (time-shortened identification number) is acquired.

In S3025-6, the main CPU 201 acquires information about the pattern that was stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display unit 163 when a "performer opening hit" was previously determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "small hit pattern switching information").

The "small win symbol switching information" is an overwrite process of the small win symbol switching information described later (S in FIG. 126).
When the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is determined to be "a hit for opening the special symbol", the selection symbol command "
When the first special symbol corresponding to "z4" is stopped and displayed, the small win symbol switching information = 0 is stored,
When the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z5" is stopped and displayed, small win symbol switching information = 1 is stored, and when the first special symbol corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is stopped and displayed, small win symbol switching information = 2 is stored.

In S3025-7, the main CPU 201 determines one of a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the acquired game state information and small win symbol switching information.

Specifically, when the main CPU 201 determines that the game is in the normal game mode, if the small win symbol switching information corresponding to the selected symbol command “z4” is “0”, the following is executed:
If the small win pattern switching information in response to the selection pattern command "z5" is 1, the special pattern fluctuation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is determined, and if the small win pattern switching information in response to the selection pattern command "z6" is 2, the special pattern fluctuation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113 (3) is determined.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that the game is controlled to the C time-saving gaming state,
When the small win pattern switching information according to the selection pattern command "z4" is 0, the special pattern variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114(1) is determined. When the small win pattern switching information according to the selection pattern command "z5" is 1, the special pattern variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114(2) is determined. When the small win pattern switching information according to the selection pattern command "z6" is 2,
The special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114 (3) is determined.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that it is being controlled to the A time-shortened game state or the B time-shortened game state, it determines the special pattern variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115 without relying on the small win pattern switching information.

In S3025-8, the main CPU 201 acquires the type of special symbol and winning/losing information (jackpot, special feature release win, or time-saving win) as a result of the special symbol winning determination process.

In S3025-9, the main CPU 201 obtains a random number value for reach determination and a random number value for effect selection from the special symbol determination area.

In S3025-10, the main CPU 201
The special symbol variation pattern table determined in 3025-7 is referenced, and the special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the type of special symbol, winning/losing information, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for effect selection.

[5-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the target of the process. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the target of the process.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S3041).

If it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S30
If the result of step 41 is NO, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process.
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is “1” (
If the determination in S3041 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3042.

In S3042, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S3 in FIG. 122) is performed.
After executing the process of S3042, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S3043.

In S3043, the main CPU 201 executes a process of reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also executed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3043, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3044.

In S3044, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol number counter.
As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko game machines, the symbol determination number counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game is executed), but it may also manage the number of special symbol games executed under a specific state such as the number of times a special symbol game is remaining or the number of times a time-saving game is remaining, etc. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-6. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game judgment process is a process called in S3015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target.
S3015 during the special symbol management process in which the special symbol game judgment process is the processing target of the second special symbol
When called, the second special symbol is the subject of processing.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S3051).

If it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S30
122), the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern game determination process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is “2” (
If the determination in S3051 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3052.

In S3052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S3052, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S3052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201
The process is transferred to S3061. On the other hand, in S3052, if it is determined that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a jackpot (if S3052 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3053. Note that if the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a jackpot release, or if the special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a miss, the result is NO in S3052.

In S3053, the main CPU 201 subtracts the limiter number every time the A time-saving gaming state transitions to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter number update process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. This limiter number update process in S3053 is a process that is updated when the state transitions from the first route to the jackpot gaming state. Note that, as will be described later, when the state transitions from the second route to the jackpot gaming state, the V winning device opening control process (FIG. 130) is performed.
The limiter count is updated in the limiter count update process (see S3096). Details of the limiter count update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127.
After executing the process of S3053, the process proceeds to S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for big win game control.
In this process, the hall computer 186 (both shown in FIG. 109) is connected via the external terminal board 184.
The signals (e.g., big win signals, etc.) output to the UE400 (see reference) are generated and updated.
The signal generated and updated in this process is a winning signal for the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game judgment process. After executing the process of S3054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3055.

In addition, in the start setting process of the big win game control of S3054, the main CPU 201
It also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as time-saving flags and time-saving counters.

In S3055, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value for the number of times the big prize opening 3131 is opened (S3056), a process of setting a big win signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3057), etc.
3057), processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), processing for setting game state designation parameters (S3059), and processing for reserving transmission of a big win start display command (S3060) are performed. By performing the processing for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), after the special symbol game judgment processing is completed, the big win opening preparation processing (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed. After that, the main C
The PU201 ends the special pattern game determination process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a bonus feature has been opened, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a bonus feature has been opened.

In S3061, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a winning combination, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is a winning combination or a losing combination (if S3061 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a winning combination, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is a winning combination (if S3061 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3062.

In S3062, when the main CPU 201 judges that the first special symbol hit is a "hit on the release of the special symbol", it refers to the selected symbol command, and when the selected symbol command is "z4", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "0", when the selected symbol command is "z5", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "1", and when the selected symbol command is "z6", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "2". When the second special symbol hit is judged to be a "hit on the release of the special symbol", it does not overwrite the small hit symbol switching information and moves the process to S3063. After executing the process of S3062, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3063.

In S3063, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for game control per release of a special feature. In this processing, signals (e.g., a signal per release of a special feature, etc.) outputted to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the processing targets of the special symbol game judgment processing. After executing the processing of S3063, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S3064.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value for the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened. In this embodiment, the V winning device 3150 set in this process
The upper limit of the number of times the button can be opened is, for example, 1. After executing the process of S3064, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S3065.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a signal for opening a special symbol to the external terminal board 184 (S3065), and a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S30
The main CPU 201 then performs a process such as a process for setting a game state designation parameter (S3067), a process for setting a transmission reservation for a display command for starting a special symbol release (S3068), etc. By performing a process for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S3066), after the special symbol game judgment process is completed, a process for preparing to open a V winning device (see S3016 in FIG. 122) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 completes the special symbol game judgment process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3069, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a time-saving hit has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a time-saving opening hit.

In S3069, when it is determined that the time-saving hit is not reached, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3071. On the other hand, in S3061, when it is determined that the time-saving hit is reached, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3070.

In S3070, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the time-saving winning selection symbol command "z7", and sets the data of the determined mode of the game state. Specifically, it sets the time-saving flag = 1 (turns the time-saving flag on), sets the time-saving number counter = 1, and sets the time-saving identification number = 3, which identifies the C time-saving game state.
The time-saving identification number is set to 1 when the game is switched to the A time-saving game state, and is set to B time-saving identification number = 1 when the game is switched to the B time-saving game state.
When the game is switched to the time-saving game state, the time-saving identification number = 2 is set.

In this embodiment, the winning type determination table is divided into two types depending on whether the limiter function is activated or not.
The main CPU has two winning type determination tables, but for time-saving winning, regardless of whether the limiter function is activated or not, it refers to the winning type determination table when the limiter function is not activated.
After executing the process of S3070, the process of the communication device 201 proceeds to S3071.

In S3071, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game ending process. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.
When the special pattern game end processing is performed, the special pattern game judgment processing is terminated and the processing is returned to the special pattern management processing (see FIG. 122).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S3051 to S3071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-7. Limiter count update process]
Next, the details of the limiter number update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3053 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described with reference to Fig. 127. Fig. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of the limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

First, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the game is in the A time-saving gaming state (S3053-
1) In S3053-1, if the main CPU 201 determines that the A time-shortened gaming state is in effect, the process proceeds to S3053-2, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the A time-shortened gaming state is not in effect, the process proceeds to S3053-5.

In S3053-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the limiter count to update it. After executing the process of S3053-2, the main CPU 201 returns to S3053-
Move to 3.

In S3053-3, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the limiter number is 0. If the main CPU 201 judges that the limiter number is 0, it moves the process to S3053-4, and if it judges that the limiter number is not 0, it ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game judgment process (see FIG. 126).

Here, if it is determined that the limiter number=0, it means that the number of transitions to the jackpot game state in the A time-saving game state has reached the limiter number.

In S3053-4, the main CPU 201 turns on the limiter operation flag.
After executing the process of S3053-4, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process, and returns the process to the special pattern game determination process (see FIG. 126).

In S3053-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the limiter number of times at the time of the first win. The main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table when the limiter function is not activated shown in Fig. 112(a), determines the limiter number of times based on the selected symbol command, and sets the determined limiter number of times. After executing the process of S3053-5, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see Fig. 126).

[5-4-8. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3071 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S30
In this way, by carrying out the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game, can be executed. After carrying out the process of S3072, the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S3073.

In S3073, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting parameters for specifying the game state of the special symbol. Also, the main CPU 201 clears various random numbers stored in the special symbol determination area. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S3074).
The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-9. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 129, a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S3081).

If it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S30
81 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is “3” (
If the determination in S3081 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3082.

In S3082, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, and determines the opening mode of the winning device as the opening pattern of the V winning device 3150,
The determined opening mode (for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings, etc.) is set. In this embodiment, when the "first opening mode" is the one that is disadvantageous to the player, the maximum opening time is set to 200 msec.
The opening pattern is set to a pattern in which the opening of the first reel is performed only once, and the second reel is set to a pattern in which the opening of the first reel is performed only once, which is advantageous to the player.
In this case, the release pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec release once. The release pattern is not limited to this. For example, in the "second release mode" advantageous to the player, the release may be set to a maximum of two times with a maximum of 900 msec each time, or the first time may be set to a maximum of 600 msec and the second time to a maximum of 1200 msec.
Furthermore, the total time for each opening of the reel (
For example, a plurality of opening patterns may be provided within a range not exceeding 1800 msec, and one of these opening patterns may be set based on, for example, a random number value of a special pattern.

In addition, in S3082, the main CPU 201 controls the V winning port 3155 to open and close.
The operation mode of the shutter 3158 is determined, and the determined operation mode (for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings, etc.) is set.
The operation mode is set so that the V winning hole 3155 is opened after 00 msec.
After executing the process of S3082, the PU 201 shifts the process to S3083.

In S3083, the main CPU 201 performs a V winning device opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the V winning port 3155 is performed.
After executing the process of S3083, the process proceeds to S3084.

In S3084, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S3084)
By performing the above, after the V winning device opening preparation process is completed, the V winning device opening control process (
The main CPU 201 performs the process of S3084.
After executing the above process, the process proceeds to S3085.

In S3085, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3085, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3086.

In S3086, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
The signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S3086, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-10. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 130, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S3091).

If it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S30
91 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is “4” (
If the determination in S3091 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3092.

In S3092, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 3150 when the opening and closing winning port 3151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is judged whether or not the value counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 (see FIG. 109), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 3150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

In S3092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 3150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S3092 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the process in S3092.
Move to 3093.

On the other hand, in S3092, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 3150 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S3092 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3094.

In S3093, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 (i.e., the maximum opening time of the open/close winning port 3151) has elapsed. In this process, it is judged whether or not the maximum opening time set in the process of S3082 (see FIG. 129) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has not elapsed (if S3093 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 terminates the V winning device opening control processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has elapsed (if S3093 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 returns to S3094.
Move to.

In S3094, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 3150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 3151). After executing the process of S3094, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3095.

In S3095, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it is judged whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 3155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has been performed by the V winning port switch 3156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V winning device 3150, and for example, the above-mentioned specified time may be within a specified time after the V attacker 3152 starts operating.

If it is determined in S3095 that a V winning has been detected (if S3095 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3096.

In S3096, the main CPU 201 subtracts the limiter number every time the A time-saving gaming state transitions to the jackpot gaming state, as in S3053, and performs a limiter number update process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. This limiter number update process in S3096 is a process that is updated when the state transitions from the second route to the jackpot gaming state.
After executing the process of S3096, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3097.

In S3097, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for V hit game control.
In this process, the hall computer 186 (both shown in FIG. 109) is connected via the external terminal board 184.
The signals (e.g., V hit signals, etc.) output to the PLC 100 (see reference) are generated and updated.
The signal generated and updated in this process is the winning signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game judgment process. When the V-winning game control is executed, for example, 4 rounds or 10 rounds are played as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 112), so the player can win a large number of prize balls as in the case of the big win game control process. In this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the V-winning game control and the big win game control process are distinguished and called, but the V-winning game control can also be called the big win game control process. After executing the process of S3097, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3098.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V hit game control of S3097, the main CPU 201
It also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as time-saving flags and time-saving counters.

In S3098, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 3150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 3152) that was first executed based on the opening of the role is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S3095 is YES).
The V hit game control executed as a result of the V hit being determined to be a winning combination (S judged) starts from the second round of play. After executing the process of S3098, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3099.

In S3099, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 sets, for example, the number of times the V winning device 3150 has been opened (
That is, a process of setting an upper limit of the number of times the V attacker 3152 is activated (S3100)
, a process for setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3101), a process for setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), a process for setting a game state designation parameter (S310
3), and a process for reserving transmission of a V hit start display command (S3104).
In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), after the special symbol game judgment process is completed, the big prize opening preparation process (S301 in FIG. 122) is performed.
8) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3095, if it is determined that no V winning has been detected in S3095 (if S3095 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3105.

In S3105, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 128 is executed.
After executing the processing of S3105, 1 terminates the V winning device opening control processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 122).

[5-4-11. Preparation for opening the large prize hole]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to the special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3018.
A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S3111).

If it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S31
122), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is “5” (
If the determination in S3111 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3112.

In S3112, the main CPU 201 loads a round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in the main R
The result is stored in a predetermined area in the AM 203. After executing the process of S3112, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S3113.

In S3113, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times the special prize opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of times the round game has been executed in the special prize game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S3113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (S3113
is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3114.

In S3114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S3114)
By carrying out the process above, after the completion of the big prize opening preparation process, the big prize end process (see S3020 in FIG. 122) is carried out. After carrying out the process of S3114, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3115.

In S3115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a jackpot end display command (S3
116). The big win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3116, the main CPU 201 ends the big win opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (S311
3 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3117.

In S3117, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing the processing of S3117, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3118.

In S3118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the special prize opening to be opened. In this process, the special prize opening 3131 is selected as the special prize opening to be opened for the special prize winning state.
In addition, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, and the big hit game control process is started by deriving the stop display mode indicating a big hit, the big win opening 3131 is selected as the big win opening to be opened, and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a role opening hit,
When a stop display mode indicating the opening of a special feature is derived, and a V winning game control is started by detecting a V winning, the big winning hole to be opened is not the big winning hole 3131, but
The V winning device 3150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 3151) may be selected.
After executing the process of S3118, the process proceeds to S3119.

In S3119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 3131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 3131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 3131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 3131 is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 3131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 3131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case,
It is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the special prize opening 3131 is opened and closed as separate processes.
The process proceeds to S3120.

In S3120, the main CPU 201 executes a special prize opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process for generating opening/closing control data for the special prize opening 3131 or the V prize device 3150 is executed. After executing the process of S3120, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3121.

In S3121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S3121)
By carrying out the above, after the completion of the large prize opening preparation process, the large prize opening control process (FIG. 1
After executing the process of S3121, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S3122.

In S3122, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3122, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3123.

In S3123, the main CPU 201 executes a transmission reservation process for the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3123, the main CPU 201
The large prize opening preparation process is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern management process (see Figure 122).

[5-4-12. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 132, a special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to the special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3019.
A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S3131).

If it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (S31
31 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is “6” (
If the determination in S3131 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3132.

In S3132, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is judged whether or not the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 3132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S3132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S3132 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 returns to S3
Move to 133.

On the other hand, in S3132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S3132 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3134.

In S3133, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 3131 has elapsed. In this process, various settings related to the special prize opening (S311 in FIG. 131) are performed.
9) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 3131 has not elapsed (if S3133 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 terminates the large prize opening opening control processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 3131 has elapsed (if S3133 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3134.

In S3134, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the special prize opening 3131. After executing the process of S3134, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3135.

In S3135, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S
After the special prize opening control process is completed, the special prize opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed again by performing S3135. After performing S3135, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3136.

In S3136, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3136, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3137.

In S3137, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3137, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-13. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to Fig. 133. Fig. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S3141).

If it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “7” (S31
121), the main CPU 201 ends the big win end process and the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the big win end process was called.

When it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is “7” (S31
If step S3141 is answered YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S3142.

In S3142, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags are set, and the values of various counters (for example, a ceiling counter, a round counter, a big prize winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing the process of S3142, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3143.

In S3143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the end of the jackpot. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the main CPU 201 refers to the on/off state of the limiter operation flag, and if the limiter operation flag is off, it determines the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112(a), and if the limiter operation flag is on, it determines the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112(b). Then, it refers to the determined winning type determination table, determines the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and time-saving count), and sets the data of the determined game state mode. Specifically, if the limiter operation flag is off, it sets the time-saving flag = 1 (time-saving flag on), sets the time-saving count counter = 100, and also sets the time-saving identification number = 1 that identifies the A time-saving game state. Also, if the limiter operation flag is on, it sets the time-saving flag = 0 (time-saving flag off).
At the same time, the time-saving count counter is set to 0, and the time-saving identification number is set to 0.
After executing the process of S3143, 01 ends the big win end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, as described above, it returns to the process from which the big win end process was called.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[5-4-14. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 in the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23) will be described.
It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 134 are control state numbers of normal symbols.
The PU 201 executes each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol to progress the normal symbol game. Note that, for convenience, each process shown in FIG. 134 is not illustrated as a subroutine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S3
291).

If it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (S3291 is N
In the case of O judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process, and transfers the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S329
1 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3292.

In S3292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal pattern.
After executing the process of S3292, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3293.
Processing from 3293 onwards is performed.

In S3293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This processing of S3293 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3294.

In this variable display start process of the normal symbol, if various random number values are stored in the normal symbol determination area as start information, the main CPU 201 performs "normal symbol hit determination process", "normal symbol determination process", "normal symbol variation pattern determination process", and "normal symbol time reduction management process", and then performs a process of setting the normal symbol control state number to "1". Note that if the random number value for the normal symbol hit determination process, etc. is not extracted (if various random number values are not stored in the normal symbol determination area), the normal symbol hit determination process, normal symbol determination process, normal symbol variation pattern determination process, etc. are not performed, and the normal symbol control state number is held at "0", and the game ball will wait to pass through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B.

In the normal symbol winning determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 20
1 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 117 and determines the winning/losing judgment value data ('normal pattern winning' or 'missing') based on the game state and the random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern judgment area.

In the normal symbol determination process in the variable display start process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201
By referring to the normal pattern determination table shown in Figure 118, a "pattern command selected when a normal pattern is hit" is determined based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal pattern winning determination process) and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern determination area.

In addition, in the normal symbol variable pattern determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variable pattern table shown in Fig. 120, and determines the normal symbol variable pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the normal symbol performance selection random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the determined normal symbol variable display time, and causes the normal symbol display unit 161 to start variable display of the normal symbol.

In the normal pattern variable display start process, the time-saving management process for normal patterns is performed.
It is determined whether or not the time-saving count counter is equal to or greater than 1, and if the time-saving count counter is equal to or greater than 1, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving count counter. If the time-saving count counter = 0 as a result of the subtraction, the time-saving flag and the time-saving identification number are cleared, and transition control from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is performed. Also, if the time-saving count counter is not equal to or greater than 1, the current time-saving management process for normal games is terminated, and even if the time-saving count counter is equal to or greater than 1, if the subtraction result from the time-saving count counter is not equal to 0, the time-saving flag and the time-saving identification number are not cleared and the current time-saving management process for normal games is terminated.

In this embodiment, in any of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the time-saving game state is incremented by 1 from the time-saving counter when the variable display of the normal symbol starts.
However, it may be configured so that 1 is subtracted from the time-saving count counter when the variable display of the normal symbols starts only in the time-saving game state C, and so that 1 is not subtracted from the time-saving count counter when the variable display of the normal symbols starts in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B.

In S3294, the main CPU 201 performs variable display end processing for the normal symbol. This processing of S3294 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3295.

In this variable display end process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "2." If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and the process waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S3295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process.
The process of 295 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 performs the process in S
Move to 3296.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or miss). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time) setting process of the normal electric device 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In addition, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146 in the normal symbol game judgment process, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection command by referring to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 119, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the determined normal electric device 3146.
The sub-CPU 30 issues an opening pattern command for a normal electric accessory corresponding to the opening pattern of 146.
Send to 1.

In S3296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory opening process.
The process of 296 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 performs the process in S
Move to 3297.

In this normal electric role release process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the normal electric role 146 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric role 3146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric role 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "5".

In S3297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol winning end processing.
The process of 297 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol winning end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs the above steps S3293 to S32
In step 96, various parameters related to the normal symbol determined and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area are reset (cleared).

As described above, the winning judgment process of the normal symbol is determined based on the game state when the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (when the variable display of the normal symbol is started) in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S3293.
In the normal symbol game judgment process of 3295, the game state when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variable display of the normal symbol ends) is determined. Therefore, if the game state is changed while the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed, the winning judgment of the normal symbol and the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 146 are determined based on the game state that differs between when the variable display of the normal symbol starts and when the variable display of the normal symbol ends.

[5-4-15. Switch input detection process]
Next, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 in S320 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 135. Fig. 135 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not provided with a hold function for holding the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number until the start condition is satisfied, and the process contents of the start hole winning detection process and the ball passing detection process are partially different from those of the first pachinko game machine. Also, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is provided with a large winning hole count switch 3132, a V attacker count switch 3153, a V winning hole switch 3154, a V winning hole switch 3155, and a V winning hole switch 3156, and a V winning hole switch 3157, and a V winning hole switch 3159, and a V winning hole switch 3160, and a V winning hole switch 3161.
6 is added, some of the processing is added.

First, the main CPU 201 executes a first start port winning detection process (S3381). After executing the process of S3381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3382.

In this first start port winning detection process, the main CPU 201 detects whether the first start port switch 3
When the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 3120 is detected by the sensor 121, the first starting hole 3120
The main CPU 201 sets payout information according to the first special symbol determination area and determines whether there is an empty area in one of the first special symbol determination areas. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one of the first special symbol determination areas, it extracts various random number values (for example, various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot of the first special symbol, a pattern random number value of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach of the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting a performance of the first special symbol) as start information of the first special symbol, and stores the various extracted random number values in one of the first special symbol determination areas. On the other hand, when it determines that there is no empty area in one of the first special symbol determination areas, it ends the first start port winning detection process without extracting various random number values.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a second start port winning detection process (S3382). After executing the process of S3382, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3383.

In this second start port winning detection process, the main CPU 201 detects whether the second start port switch 3
When the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 3140 is detected by the sensor 141, the second starting hole 3140
The main CPU 201 sets payout information according to the second special symbol determination area and determines whether there is an empty area in one of the second special symbol determination areas. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty area in one of the second special symbol determination areas, it extracts various random number values (for example, various random number values such as a random number value for determining a big win of the second special symbol, a pattern random number value of the second special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach of the second special symbol, and a random number value for selecting a performance of the second special symbol) as start information of the second special symbol, and stores the various extracted random number values in one of the second special symbol determination areas. On the other hand, when it determines that there is no empty area in one of the second special symbol determination areas, it ends the second start port winning detection process without extracting various random number values.

In this way, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process for the first special pattern and the hit determination process for the second special pattern, only one first special pattern determination area and one second special pattern determination area are provided, and the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) are not provided for holding the start information of the special pattern until the start condition is met.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process (S3383). In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc. is set. After executing the process of S3383, the main CPU 201 returns to the process of S338.
Move to 4.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a large prize opening passage detection process (S3384). In the large prize opening passage detection process, when the large prize opening count switch 3132 detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the large prize opening 3131, and adds 1 to a large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 to update it. After executing the process of S3384, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S3385.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a V attacker passage detection process (S3385). In the V attacker passage detection process, the main CPU 201 detects whether the large prize opening count switch 3132
When the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131 is detected by the above, the payout information corresponding to the V prize device 3150 (opening and closing prize opening 3151) is set, and the V attacker prize counter for counting the number of game balls entering the V prize device 3150 (opening and closing prize opening 3151) is updated by adding 1. After executing the process of S3385, the main CPU 201 returns to the process of S33
Move to 86.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process (S3386). In the V prize opening passage detection process, the main CPU 201 detects whether the V prize opening 3 is in the V prize opening 3 by the V prize opening switch 3156.
When the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 3155 is detected, the V winning hole passage flag is turned on. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155, no payout information is set.
After executing the process of S3386, the process proceeds to S3387.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S3387). In the ball passage detection process, when the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B detects the passage of a game ball through the first passage gate 3126A or the second passage gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an empty area in one of the normal symbol determination areas.
When it is determined that there is an empty space in one normal symbol determination area, 01 extracts various random numbers (for example, various random numbers such as a random number for determining whether a normal symbol is hit, a random number for a normal symbol, and a random number for selecting a performance of a normal symbol) as start information for the normal symbol, and stores the various extracted random numbers in one normal symbol start determination area. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no empty space in one normal symbol start determination area, the ball passage detection process is terminated without extracting various random numbers.

In this manner, in this embodiment, in order to perform the winning determination process for the normal pattern, only one normal pattern determination area is provided, and normal pattern start memory area (1) to normal pattern start memory area (4) are not provided for holding the start information of the normal pattern until the start condition is satisfied.

[5-5. Game state transition diagram]
Next, the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 136. Fig. 136 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, right hitting is the regular game mode.
In the C time-saving play state, the play mode changes between left-handed and right-handed play as appropriate depending on the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

For this reason, in the normal game state, the game state is changed when the game ball enters the first start hole 3120, and in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state, the game state is changed when the game ball enters the second start hole 3120.
A transition of the game state is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 or the second starting hole 3140 in the time-saving game state C. In the time-saving game state C, a transition of the game state is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 or the second starting hole 3140. In the following, the normal game state is described on the premise that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 3120, and the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B are described on the premise that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 3140.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, it is determined to be a "big hit", a "performer opening hit", or a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 110).
.

In the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "jackpot" is determined, the game transitions to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the normal game state, a game ball enters the first start hole 3120 and a "gimmick opening hit" is determined, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155, the game state transitions to a big win game state.
When the game ball does not pass through the V winning port 3155, the game state is not changed and the normal game state is maintained.

As described above, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "perfect opening of the special feature" is determined, the opening mode of the V winning device 3150 (opening and closing winning hole 3151) is disadvantageous to the player, so it is extremely difficult to transition to a big win game state. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "perfect opening of the special feature" is determined, the game state is not substantially transitioned and the normal game state is maintained.

After the normal game state is changed to the big win game state, the state is changed to the time-saving game state A.

The A time-saving game state is terminated when the A time-saving game state is terminated after 100 time-saving times (see FIG. 1).
12) or "transition to a jackpot gaming state" is established.

Here, "100 time-saving cycles completed" means that "the total number of times the variable display of the special symbols and the variable display of the normal symbols is counted is 100."

In this embodiment, "100 times of time-saving" refers to "the total number of times that the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times". However, it may be that either of the conditions "the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times" or "the variable display of the normal symbol is performed 100 times" is satisfied, or "the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times".
It may be sufficient to simply state that the procedure is carried out "once per year."

Then, when the A time-saving game state transitions to a jackpot game state (a series of wins during the A time-saving game state), the limiter number of times is counted, and if the limiter number of times is reached, the game transitions to a normal game state,
If the limit number has not been reached, the game moves again to the A time-shortened game state.

Also, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "time-saving hit" is determined, the game state transitions to the time-saving game state C.

The C time-saving game state is terminated when the time-saving number of times is completed (FIG. 112).
It is set when either the condition "transition to a jackpot game state" (see reference) or "transition to a jackpot game state" is met.

Here, "one time of time reduction" means "the variable display of the special pattern is counted once" and "
"The variable display of the normal symbol is counted once" means that either of the conditions is satisfied. In this embodiment, the "time-saving count" is counted when the variable display of the special symbol or the normal symbol is performed, and if the game state has not been shifted to the big win game state, the C time-saving game state ends and the game state is shifted to the normal game state when the first variable display of the special symbol or the first variable display of the normal symbol is performed.

After the transition from the C time-shortened game state to the big win game state, the game state transitions to the A time-shortened game state after the end of the big win game state.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, when the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed (for example, a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (for example, 1000 times), the normal game state is switched to the time-saving game state B.

The B time-saving gaming state is terminated by a specified number of times (for example, 1212
It is set when one of the following conditions is met: "End of variable display of special symbols (number of times)" or "Transition to a jackpot game state."

In the B time-saving game state, when "the variable display of the special symbol ends for a specified number of times" is established, B
The time-saving game state is shifted to the normal game state. Also, after the shift from the time-saving game state B to the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state A is shifted to after the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state includes three time-saving game states, namely, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. However, the B time-saving game state is not included.
The game machine may be configured with two time-saving game states, namely, time-saving game state A and time-saving game state C.

[5-6. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the normal electric device 3146 can be changed by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit" in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. An example of the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 will be described below.

Fig. 137 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, Fig. 138 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

FIG. 137 and FIG. 138 show the fluctuation and stop of the normal symbol display section 161, the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol display section 163, and the normal power solenoid 3148 constituting the normal electric role 3146.
The operation and stopping of the game and the transition of the game state are illustrated at the top and bottom.

137 and 138 are based on the premise that the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is "normal symbol hit" and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit". In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state is 1000 as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table in FIG.
It is fixed at 0 msec (10 s).

In addition, in FIG. 137 and FIG. 138, as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the opening time of the normal electric device 3146 in the normal game state (200 msec
The disadvantageous opening mode in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the normal electric device 3146 in the C time-saving game state is short is illustrated as "short opening", and the advantageous opening mode in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the normal electric device 3146 in the C time-saving game state is long is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol that is displayed in a stopped state in response to a "time-saving hit" is illustrated as "stopped with the C time-saving symbol".

Figure 137 (a) is an example of a time chart when, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special pattern variation pattern table for the normal game state of Figure 113 and determines "Chance Variation A" in which the variable display time of the special pattern is longer than the variable display time of the ordinary pattern.

As shown in FIG. 137(a), since the variable display time of the special pattern is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern, after the variable display time of the normal pattern has ended (after the fluctuation of the normal pattern has ended), the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

For this reason, when the variable display time of the normal pattern ends (when the fluctuation of the normal pattern ends), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal pattern winning type determination table in Figure 119, a "short opening" in the normal game state is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

Figure 137 (b) is an example of a time chart when, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special pattern variation pattern table for the normal game state of Figure 113 and determines "Chance Variation B" in which the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter than the variable display time of the ordinary pattern.

As shown in FIG. 137(b), since the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C-time-saving game state before the variable display time of the normal pattern ends (before the normal pattern ends changing).

For this reason, when the variable display time of the normal pattern ends (when the normal pattern fluctuation ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal pattern hit type determination table in Figure 119, a "long opening" is performed in the C time-saving game state as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

Here, FIG. 137(b) shows the opening state of the normal electric device 3146 when "fz1" is selected as the selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit in the C time-saving game state,
The figure shows one operation (one opening) of the normal power solenoid 3148. When "fz2" or "fz3" is selected as the symbol command for selecting a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state, the normal power solenoid 3148 is operated twice, with a wait time in between. This is also the case with FIG. 138(b) described later.

Figure 138 (a) is an example of a time chart when, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special pattern variation pattern table for the C time-saving game state of Figure 114 and determines "Chance Variation A" in which the variable display time of the special pattern is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern.

As shown in Fig. 138(a), when the variable display of the special symbol is performed once in the time-saving C game state, the condition for ending the time-saving C game state (ending one time of time-saving) is met, and the game state transitions from the time-saving C game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. While the game state is normal while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, once the variable display of the special symbol ends and "stops at the time-saving C symbol", the game state transitions again from the normal game state to the time-saving C game state.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, after the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended (after the fluctuation of the normal symbols has ended), the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

For this reason, when the variable display time of the normal pattern ends (when the fluctuation of the normal pattern ends), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal pattern winning type determination table in Figure 119, a "short opening" in the normal game state is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

Figure 138 (b) is an example of a time chart when, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special pattern variation pattern table for the C time-saving game state in Figure 114 and determines "Chance Variation B" in which the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern.

As shown in Fig. 138(b), when the variable display of the special symbol is performed once in the time-saving C game state, the condition for ending the time-saving C game state (ending one time of time-saving) is met, and the game state transitions from the time-saving C game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. While the game state is normal while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, once the variable display of the special symbol ends and "stops at the time-saving C symbol", the game state transitions again from the normal game state to the time-saving C game state.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C-time shortened game state before the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (before the normal symbols finish varying).

For this reason, when the variable display time of the normal pattern ends (when the normal pattern fluctuation ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal pattern hit type determination table in Figure 119, a "long opening" is performed in the C time-saving game state as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "time-saving count ends once", is conditioned on "the variable display of the special symbol being counted once" as well as "the variable display of the normal symbol being counted once".
As shown in Figures 7(a) and 138(a), in the case where the game state transitions to the C-time shortened game state after the variable display of the special pattern has ended, even if an unintended right-handed hit is made and the game ball passes through the second passing gate 3126B, the game state will transition from the C-time shortened game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern, thereby preventing an unintended "long opening" from being performed as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

In this way, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the winning judgment process of the normal symbol is determined based on the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed (when the normal symbol starts to change), and the opening state of the normal electric role 3146 is determined based on the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol ends (
Since the game state is determined based on the time when the variation of the normal symbols is completed), the game state is changed or maintained while the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed, which gives new interest and can further improve the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, by adjusting the variable display time of the special pattern in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a “time-saving hit,” the game state can be intentionally changed and maintained while the variable display of the normal pattern is being performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 113 and 114, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a "time-saving hit," there are provided a plurality of special pattern fluctuation pattern tables with different selection rates for "chance fluctuation A," in which the variable display time of the special pattern is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern, and "chance fluctuation B," in which the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the special pattern fluctuation pattern table is switched according to a predetermined change condition, so that the switching of the special pattern fluctuation pattern table can also be interesting, thereby making the game more entertaining.

In particular, in this embodiment, the special pattern variation pattern table can be switched based on the information of the pattern (small win pattern switching information) stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display section 163 when a "hit on the release of the special device" is determined as a specified change condition, so that the "hit on the release of the special device" and the small win pattern switching information can be made interesting, thereby making the game more entertaining.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the second starting hole 31
If the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, it is easier to transition to a big win game state from the first route or the second route than when the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120.
The game is configured to be able to transition to a substantial big win game state by the game ball entering the second starting hole 3140. For this reason, the value of the "long opening" in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 3140 is increased as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, and the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 is more interesting, thereby making the game more exciting.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a limiter function is provided, but even if the consecutive wins in the A time-saving game state are ended by the operation of the limiter function and the game is switched to the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 116 is selected in the first special symbol hit determination process in the normal game state after the operation of the limiter function. Since the special symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 116 is a specific variation pattern table in which the advantageous chance variation B in which "long opening" is likely to be performed as the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146 in the normal game state is likely to be selected, if the result of the first hit determination process of the first special symbol after the transition to the normal game state is "time-saving hit", the game can be transitioned to the big win game state via the second route again, and the decrease in interest in the game due to the operation of the limiter function can be prevented.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "ending one time of time-saving play", is set to "the variable display of a special pattern is counted once", and the game state can be transitioned by subtracting the number of time-saving play times when the variable display of a special pattern is performed. Therefore, even if the probability that the result of the special pattern hit determination process will be a "time-saving hit" is increased, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect of the time-saving game state being constantly controlled, and playability can be maintained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state is "time-saving count 1
Since the condition for "end of round" is "the variable display of the special pattern being counted once" as well as "the variable display of the normal pattern being counted once," even if an unintentional right hit is made in the C time-saving game state and the game ball passes through the second passing gate 3126B, the game state can be transitioned from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern, thereby preventing an unintentional "long opening" from being performed as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passage gate 3126B
is located below the normal electric accessory unit 3145 in the right side area 107,
In the time-saving game state C, even if the game ball happens to flow down the right side area 107 and pass through the second passing gate 3126B, the game ball can be prevented from unintentionally entering the normal electric device 3146.

In addition, in this embodiment, by positioning the first starting hole 3120 directly below and in close proximity to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting hole 3120, making it possible to adjust the time when the normal pattern starts to change as a result of the game ball passing through the first passing gate 3126A and the time when the special pattern starts to change as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 (the changing display can start at approximately the same time).

<Second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine>
Next, a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in the configuration of the game board unit (arrangement of passing gates), in the provision of a reserve function for retaining the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, and in the end conditions of the time-saving game state.

Hereinafter, in explaining the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko game machine and the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configurations and processing will be omitted.

[6-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 139, the fourth embodiment of the pachinko game machine includes a game board unit 4.
The game board unit 4010 will be described. This game board unit 4010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) in the same manner as the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine.

139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 4010 includes a game panel 4100, on which various members are arranged, and a game area 105 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed on the front side of the game panel 4100.

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board unit 4010 of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is the same as the game board unit 3010 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.
In comparison, the main difference is that the right side area 107 does not include the second passage gate 3126B of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passage gate 31 is provided in the right area 107.
The reason why 26B is not provided is that, due to the provision of a hold function for holding the start information of normal and special symbols up to a specified number, a game ball hit to the right passes through the second passing gate 3126B, causing the held number of normal symbols only to be stored, making it impossible to adjust the variable display time of the normal and special symbols.

Another difference, although not shown in Figure 139, is that the LED unit 160 is equipped with a reserve display section 162 for ordinary symbols, a reserve display section 165 for a first special symbol, and a reserve display section 166 for a second special symbol.

[6-2. Electrical configuration]
As for the control circuit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, compared to the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine (Figure 109), the configuration of the second passing gate switch 3127B that detects the passage of the game ball through the second passing gate 3126B has been deleted, and only the configurations of the ordinary symbol reserve display unit 162, the first special symbol reserve display unit 165, and the second special symbol reserve display unit 166 in the first pachinko game machine have been added, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, a reservation function for reserving the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number is provided, so the main RAM 203 has a normal symbol start memory area (1) to a normal symbol start memory area (4) for reserving the start information of normal symbols up to a predetermined number, a first special symbol start memory area (1) to a first special symbol start memory area (4) for reserving the start information of special symbols up to a predetermined number, and a second special symbol start memory area (1) to a second special symbol start memory area (5) for reserving the start information of special symbols up to a predetermined number.
It has a special symbol start memory area (4).

[6-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 140 to 142.

The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly in the special pattern change pattern table, the normal pattern change pattern table, etc., in order to synchronize the change times of the special patterns and the normal patterns.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the end condition of the A time-saving gaming state is,
The end condition of the C time-saving game state is set to be either "end of 100 time-saving times" or "transition to a jackpot game state" being satisfied, but "end of 100 time-saving times" is set to "the variable display of special symbols being performed 100 times" without counting the variable display of normal symbols. Similarly, the end condition of the C time-saving game state is set to be either "end of 1 time-saving time" or "transition to a jackpot game state" being satisfied, but "end of 1 time-saving time" is set to "the variable display of special symbols being performed once" without counting the variable display of normal symbols.

In addition, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine has in common the special pattern winning determination table (Figure 110), the special pattern determination table (Figure 111), the winning type determination table (Figure 112), the normal pattern winning determination table (Figure 117), the normal pattern determination table (Figure 118) and the normal pattern winning type determination table (Figure 119) of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

[6-3-1. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 140 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state and the time-saving game state C in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 141 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Note that the variation pattern table of special symbols in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B is the same as that in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, so the explanation is omitted. Note that the variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. 140 and FIG. 141 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 140 and FIG. 141 includes the type of special symbol,
The result of the special symbol winning determination process, a random number value for effect selection, a variation pattern of the special symbol, and a variable display time of the special symbol are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table according to the game state, etc., and determines the variation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning judgment process, and the random number value for performance selection by referring to the determined special symbol variation pattern table. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Notes" column of Figures 140 and 141, the "special electric feature opening end time" and the "special chart processing end time" are stated for reference.

The "special electric feature opening end time" is the time when the "feature opening hit" is opened.
112, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "a hit for opening the special feature", the opening and closing winning hole 3151 is opened for 200 msec as the disadvantageous "first opening mode", so "200 msec" is shown as the "special electric feature opening end time".

"Special symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the special symbol management processing shown in Fig. 122 for the start information of one special symbol. Specifically, it means the time from the special symbol variable display start processing (special symbol control state number = 0) in Fig. 123 to the special symbol game end processing in Fig. 128.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state and C time-saving game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table TC1 shown in FIG. 140 is used after the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared, or after the selection symbol command "z
This is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special pattern corresponding to "4" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC2 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for "hit on opening of the reel" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC3 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening of the reel" is stopped and displayed.

In the special pattern fluctuation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIG. 140, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is "time-saving hit," one of the fluctuation patterns is selected: "chance fluctuation A" of the fluctuation pattern "01H" in which the variable display time of the special pattern is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern (13,300 or 13,500 msec); or "chance fluctuation B" of the fluctuation pattern "02H" in which the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern, chance fluctuation A is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to be in an unfavorable opening state due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146, and short chance fluctuation B is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to be in an advantageous opening state due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146.

In addition, the special pattern variation table TC1 to TC3 shown in FIG. 140 (1) to (3)
In the fourth embodiment of the pachinko game machine, the selection rates of the chance fluctuation A and the chance fluctuation B are different.
Chance fluctuation B, which is likely to be an advantageous opening state, is the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1
The tables are configured to be easily selected in the order of <Special symbol variation pattern table T2<Special symbol variation pattern table T3.

For this reason, among the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3, the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player. However, as described above, the selected symbol commands are configured to be most likely to be selected in the order of "z6"<"z5"<"z4", so the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when attention is paid to the "special symbol processing end time" in the "Notes" column of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in Figures 140 (1) to (3), the machine has the following characteristics.

The variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when the first special symbol is judged to be a "time-saving hit" in the hit judgment process is "1350
The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the variable display time of the special symbol is "0 msec".

In addition, the variation pattern of the special symbol (0BH) when it is determined that the first special symbol is a "perfect hit" in the hit determination process is that the "special symbol processing end time" is "13,500 msec."
The variable display time of the special symbols is set so that:

That is, the difference between the variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that the "time-reduction hit" is reached and the variation pattern (0BH) of the special symbol when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that the "gimmick release hit" is reached.
The variable display time of the special pattern is set so that the "special pattern processing end time" is the same time.

Here, the variation pattern (01H) of the special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that the "time-saving hit" is reached, and the variation pattern (0BH) of the special symbol when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that the "gimmick release hit" is reached are variation patterns of the special symbol that are substantially equivalent to a "special symbol miss" in the fourth pachinko game machine.
The variable display time of the special pattern is set so that all of the special patterns (01H, 0BH) have the same "special pattern processing end time".

(Special pattern variation table after limiter function activation)
The special pattern variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1) is a specific variation pattern table that is selected in the first special pattern winning determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function.

In the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit", the second start port 3 in the normal game state
The system is configured so that chance variation B, which is likely to result in an advantageous opening mode, 140, is always selected.

As in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in the normal gaming state, chance fluctuation B
When the selection is made, the second starting hole 3140 is opened in a favorable manner, and the game ball enters the second starting hole 31
In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 3140, it is easy to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and by the game ball entering the second starting hole 3140, it is possible to substantially transition to a jackpot game state.

Therefore, even if a winning streak in the time-saving play state ends due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special pattern after transition to the normal play state is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to transition again to the jackpot play state via the second route, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special pattern fluctuation pattern table ZC1 is configured so that chance fluctuation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a "time-saving hit," but it may also be configured so that chance fluctuation A, which is more likely to result in an unfavorable opening state of the second starting hole 3140, is selected with a lower probability than chance fluctuation B.

The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 shown in Fig. 116(2) is a modified example of the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in Fig. 116(1), and is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated. The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 is configured so that when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and chance variation B is selected with a probability of 80%.

Even in this way, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal game state is a "time-saving hit," the probability of transitioning again to the jackpot game state via the second route increases, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, the special pattern fluctuation pattern tables ZC1 and ZC2 are fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the first special pattern hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state after the limiter function is activated, but this is not limited to the first time. For example, in response to the special pattern hold function, when the start information of the special pattern is held up to a specific reserved number (for example, four), the fluctuation pattern tables may be selected based on the special pattern hit determination process up to the specific reserved number, or they may be fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the special pattern hit determination process up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern is a "time-saving hit," there is one chance variation A and one chance variation B, but the configuration may also be such that, based on the variable display time of the normal pattern, there are multiple groups of chance variations A in which the variable display time of the special pattern is equal to or longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern, and multiple groups of chance variations B in which the variable display time of the special pattern is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern.

[6-3-2. Normal pattern variation table]
Fig. 142 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 142 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142 is associated with the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the winning judgment process of the normal symbol, the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 3126A, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the normal symbol. The random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is, for example, 0 to 99 (
The random numbers are selected from among 100 types. However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state at the start of the normal symbol variable display, the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process, and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 3126A. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Notes" column of Figure 142, "Game status when variable display ends,""End time of normal electric device opening," and "End time of normal chart processing" are listed for reference.

"The game state at the end of the variable display" means the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols ends, and may be different from the game state when the variable display of the normal symbols starts.
The "game state at the end of the variable display" also includes a time-saving game state A and a time-saving game state B, but as they are not particularly related to the gameplay of this embodiment, an explanation of these in the notes is omitted.

"Normal electric role release end time" is the end time of the opening pattern of the normal electric role 3146 (
In the normal game state, if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a "normal symbol hit", then only the first opening time of 200 msec will be the normal electric device opening end time, as explained in the normal symbol hit type determination table in FIG. 119. Also, in the C time-saving game state, if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is a "normal symbol hit", then the total of the first opening time, the wait time, and the second opening time, 250 msec, will be the normal electric device opening end time, as explained in the normal symbol hit type determination table in FIG.
The time when the electric feature normally ends is either 0 msec, 4600 msec, or 5600 msec.

"Normal symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the normal symbol control processing shown in Figure 134 for the start information of one normal symbol.

In particular, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when attention is paid to the "normal symbol processing end time" in the "Notes" column of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 142, it has the following characteristics.

When the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern is the normal game state or the C time shortened game state, the variable display time of the normal pattern is set so that the normal pattern change pattern (01H) when it is determined in the hit determination process of the normal pattern that a "normal pattern hit" occurs, and the "normal pattern processing end time" when the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal pattern is the normal game state, is "13,500 msec" in all cases.

In addition, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern is the normal game state or the C time shortened game state, the variable display time of the normal pattern is set so that the change pattern of the normal pattern (02H) when it is determined in the winning determination process of the normal pattern that the "normal pattern miss" is always "13,500 msec" regardless of the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal pattern.

Here, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time shortening game state, if the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state, even if the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the normal symbol is a hit, as shown in Fig. 119, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 will be an unfavorable opening pattern. Also, if the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the normal symbol is a miss, the normal electric device 3146 will not operate,
Naturally, this is disadvantageous to the player.

For this reason, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time shortening game state, the normal symbol variation pattern (predetermined 01H) in which the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the "normal symbol hit" is reached, but the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol becomes the normal game state, and the normal symbol variation pattern (02H) in which the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the "normal symbol miss" is reached, are normal symbol variation patterns that correspond to "effectively a normal symbol miss" that is disadvantageous to the player. The variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that all of the normal symbol variation patterns that correspond to "effectively a normal symbol miss" have the same "normal symbol processing end time".

In addition, when comparing the special pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 140 and FIG. 141 with the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142, the "special pattern processing end time (13500 msec)" in the special pattern variation pattern corresponding to "substantially special pattern miss" (
The "normal pattern processing end time (13,500 msec)" (see Figures 140 and 141) in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern corresponding to "substantially a normal pattern miss" is configured to be the same time (13,500 msec) (see Figure 142).

As a result, even if a reserve function is provided that reserves start information for normal and special patterns up to a predetermined number, as will be described later with reference to Figure 143, the difference in the start times of the variable display of normal and special patterns can be suppressed.

[6-4. Main control processing]
In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU 20 of the main control circuit 200
The various processes (various modules) executed by the fourth pachinko game machine 1 are different from those of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the process for performing the hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, and the time-saving count is not subtracted when the variable display of normal symbols is performed, but the other processes are the same. The process for performing this hold function is the same as that of the first to third pachinko game machines, but the differences will be explained using the drawings used in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

(Special pattern variable display start process)
In the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (S3021
In the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if the control state number of the special symbol is determined to be "0" (YES in S3021), the "special symbol start information shift process" is performed, and then the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) is performed using the start information (random number value for special symbol big hit determination, etc.) stored in the special symbol determination area. However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if the control state number of the special symbol is determined to be "0" (YES in S3021), the "special symbol start information shift process" is performed, and then the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) is performed.

Specifically, in the "special symbol start information shift process", when the special symbol variable display start process is processing the first special symbol, the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area, and the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (3). Note that when the special symbol variable display start process is processing the second special symbol, the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (
Instead of the first special symbol start memory area (4) through the second special symbol start memory area (1), the second special symbol start memory area (1) through the second special symbol start memory area (4) are shifted in the same manner as when the first special symbol is the processing target.

(Normal symbol control processing)
In the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if various random number values are stored as start information in the normal symbol determination area, a normal symbol winning determination process is performed.
In the variable display start process of the normal symbol in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine,
As with the above-mentioned "special symbol start information shift processing", if various random numbers are stored as start information in the normal symbol determination area after the normal symbol start information shift processing is performed, the normal symbol hit determination processing will be performed. Also, in the normal symbol variable display start processing (S3293) of the normal symbol control processing (see FIG. 134), the "normal symbol time reduction management processing" in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will not be performed.

(Switch input detection process)
Switch input detection process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 135)
In the first start port winning detection process (S3381), the second start port winning detection process (S3382), and the ball passing detection process (S3387), the extracted start information is stored in one special symbol determination area or normal symbol start determination area. However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the start information is stored while referring to the free spaces in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4), the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), and the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (4). This is the same as in the first pachinko game machine.

[6-5. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
Figure 143 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in the normal game state or the C-time shortened game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Figure 143 illustrates, from above and below, the fluctuation and stopping of the normal pattern display section 161, the operation and stopping of the normal power solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric device 3146, the fluctuation and stopping of the first special pattern display section 163, and the transition of the game state.

In addition, in FIG. 143, as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the unfavorable opening mode in which the opening time of the normal electric device 3146 in the normal game state is short (200 msec) is illustrated as "short opening", and the normal electric device 3146 in the C time reduction game state is illustrated as "short opening".
The advantageous opening mode in which the opening time of is long (2000 to 3000 msec) is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed in response to the "time-saving hit" is illustrated as "stopping at the C time-saving symbol", and the opening time of the opening and closing winning port 3151 that is opened when the "gimmick opening hit" is illustrated as "gimmick opening end time".

At the time (A) in FIG. 143, the first special symbol and the normal symbol are displayed variably for the first time, and when the game state is the C time-saving game state, the normal symbol display section 161 starts a variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to a "normal symbol miss", and the first special symbol display section 163 starts a variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to a "gimmick to open the special feature".
With the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the game state transitions from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

Although the variable display time of the first special pattern corresponding to a "hit on the reel opening" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to a "miss on the normal pattern", the "special pattern processing end time" obtained by adding the "special electric reel opening end time" to the variable display time of the first special pattern is set to the same time as the "normal pattern processing end time" for the normal pattern.

For this reason, at the time of (a) in Figure 143, the "special pattern processing end time" for the first special pattern and the "normal pattern processing end time" for the normal pattern are set to the same time, so
The timings at which the first special symbol and the normal symbol, which are variably displayed for the first time, start to vary are approximately synchronized.

At the time of (a) in FIG. 143, when the game state is the normal game state, the normal symbol display unit 161 starts a variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", and the first
In the special symbol display section 163, a variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the "time-reduction hit" is started.

The variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to the "time-shortened hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", and after the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol ends, and the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C time-shortened game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to the "normal pattern hit" ends,
The variable display time of the first special symbol has not ended, and the game state is the normal game state.
As shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table 9, a "short opening" is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric role in the normal game state.

And, although the variable display time of the first special pattern of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to a "time-saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to a "normal pattern hit", the "normal pattern processing end time" obtained by adding the time of "short opening", which is the "normal electric role opening end time", to the variable display time of the normal pattern is set to the same time as the "special pattern processing end time" for the first special pattern.

For this reason, even during the period (U) of FIG. 143, the "special pattern processing end time" for the first special pattern and the "normal pattern processing end time" for the normal pattern are set to the same time,
The timings at which the first special symbol and the normal symbol, which are variably displayed for the third time, start to vary are approximately synchronized.

143(C), when the game state is the C time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to the "normal pattern hit" is started in the normal pattern display section 161, and the variable display time of the first special pattern of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time-saving hit" is started in the first special pattern display section 163. Also, with the start of the variable display time of the first special pattern, the game state is shifted from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

At the period (e) in Figure 143, the variable display time of the first special pattern of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to a "time-saving hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the ordinary pattern corresponding to a "normal pattern hit", and the variable display time of the first special pattern ends just before the variable display time of the ordinary pattern ends, and the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

At the time (O) in Figure 143, when the variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to the "normal pattern hit" ends, the variable display time of the first special pattern has already ended and the game state has transitioned to the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal pattern hit type determination table in Figure 119, a "long opening" is performed in the C time-saving game state as the opening mode of the normal electric device.

Thus, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in addition to the configuration that produces the effect in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the "special pattern processing end time" in the special pattern variation pattern (01H, 0BH) corresponding to "substantially special pattern miss" and the "normal pattern processing end time" in the normal pattern variation pattern corresponding to "substantially normal pattern miss" are
(FIG. 140 to FIG. 142) This makes it possible to suppress the difference in the time between the normal and special symbols until a jackpot is hit, even if a reserve function is provided to reserve the start information of the normal and special symbols up to a predetermined number.

<Modification of the fourth pachinko gaming machine>
Next, a fourth pachinko gaming machine that is a modified example of the first and second embodiments will be described.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the game ball flowing down from the left side area 106 collides with the game nails and passes through the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3126B.
However, the first pass gate 312 is configured to allow the ball to pass through/enter directly into the first pass gate 312.
In order for game balls to pass through/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120, the game balls may enter a distribution device (e.g., a so-called Kruen, etc.), and only game balls that are distributed by the distribution device to specific outlets may pass through/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. For example, the stage 118 formed in the center role 115 may be configured as a distribution device, and game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 may be configured to be distributed by the distribution device to multiple outlets (not shown), and only game balls that are distributed to specific outlets may pass through/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120.
It may be configured to pass/enter through the passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120.
In particular, in the case where there is no hold function for holding a predetermined number of start information for normal and special symbols, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the distribution device can maintain interest in the game even if the passing/entering rate to the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120 per unit time is reduced.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol is variable displayed, the variable display time of the special symbol predefined in the variable pattern table of the special symbol is determined. However, when the variable display time of the special symbol is determined, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already variably displayed. For example, when the "chance variation B" of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol that is shorter than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already variably displayed is calculated (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol - 1 second), and the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation B. Also, when the "chance variation A" of the special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol that is longer than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already variably displayed is calculated (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol + 1 second).
The calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation A.
If a machine is provided with a hold function for holding the start information of normal and special symbols up to a predetermined number, this is effective because it allows the end time of the variable display time of the normal and special symbols to be adjusted in real time.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passage gate 3126B is provided in the right area 107 of the game board unit 3010. However, as shown in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passage gate 312
6B may not be provided.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the number of time-saving times is subtracted when the variable display of the special pattern is performed, making it possible to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. However, as with the first to third pachinko game machines, the number of time-saving times may be subtracted after the variable display of the special pattern is performed, making it possible to transition from the time-saving game state to the normal game state.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the number of consecutive jackpots that transition to a jackpot game state under a specific condition (A time-saving game state) is counted,
When the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limit number, a "limiter function" is provided that partially restricts the game state to which the jackpot game state is transitioned after the jackpot game state ends, but the limiter function does not necessarily have to be provided.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the "winning of the opening of the special symbol" is determined when the winning determination process of the first special symbol is performed.
The device may be configured so that when the winning determination process for the first special symbol is performed, the "winning of the reel opening" is not determined.

(others)
The fourth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the fourth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the fourth pachinko gaming machine as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[7. The fifth pachinko game machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko machine will be described. The fifth pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko machine, but while the first pachinko machine was mainly a "special symbol game" using special symbols, the fifth pachinko machine is a "regular symbol game" using normal symbols.
The difference is that the main gameplay is "normal pattern games," and as a result, the configuration of various components is slightly different.

Also, unlike the first pachinko machine, the fifth pachinko machine does not have two types of special symbols (first and second special symbols), but only one type of special symbol. Therefore, there is no concept of a "priority variable machine", a "sequential variable machine", or a "simultaneous variable machine" as described above. However, like the first to third pachinko machines, the fifth pachinko machine may have two types of special symbols (first and second special symbols).

Hereinafter, in describing an embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine are given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed descriptions of their configurations and processing are omitted.

[7-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 5010 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 144. This game board unit 5010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 144 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 5010 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The game board unit 5010 includes a game panel 5100.
Various components are arranged on the gaming panel 5100, and a gaming area 105 is formed on the front side of the gaming panel 5100, in which the launched gaming ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 144, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has a game board unit 5010 that is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that it has a first passage port 5126A and a second passage port 5126B.
B, the starting hole 5140, the normal electric role unit 5145, and the special electric role unit 51
The configuration and arrangement of each of the components are different from those of the component 30. The configuration and arrangement of each component will be described below.

(First Passage)
The first passage opening 5126A is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can pass through (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot pass through). The first passage opening 5126A is also provided with a first passage opening switch 5127A (see FIG. 145 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the first passage opening 5126A. The game ball that passes through the first passage opening 5126A flows down a flow path on the back side of the game panel 5100 and is discharged outside the machine.

(Second Passage)
The second passage opening 5126B is disposed above the normal electric role unit 5145 described later in the right side area 107, and is disposed so that only the game balls hit from the right side can pass through. In addition, the second passage opening 5126B is provided with a second sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball through the second passage opening 5126B.
The ball passing through the second passage 5126B is directed to the right side area 10 toward the normal electric accessory unit 5145.
7 flows down.

The first passage port 5126A or the second passage port 5126B (hereinafter, referred to as "passage port 5126A,
When the gaming ball passes through the "regular symbol counter 5126B", a regular symbol lottery is performed and a regular symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In particular, the fifth pachinko game machine is configured so that when a game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A (when the first passage port switch 5127A detects the game ball), a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three game balls) are paid out, and when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B (when the second passage port switch 5127B detects the game ball), no prize balls are paid out.
In addition, the configuration may be such that a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when the game ball passes through the second passage opening 5126B, and that no prize balls are paid out when the game ball passes through the first passage opening 5126A.

(Starting point)
The starting hole 5140 is disposed in the right area 107 so that a game ball hit to the right can enter the hole (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to enter the hole).
It is arranged below the starting hole 5140 so that the game ball that has passed through B can enter the starting hole 5140. In addition, the starting hole 5140 is provided with a starting hole switch 5141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the starting hole 5140.

When a gaming ball enters the starting hole 5140, a special pattern lottery is held, a special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one gaming ball) is paid out.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric device unit 5145 is a unitary body that integrates a starting hole 5140, a starting hole switch 5141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the starting hole 5140, and a normal electric device 5146, and is located in the right side area 107.

The normal electric device 5146 includes a normal power shutter 5147 of a protruding plate type that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 5148 (see FIG. 145 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 5147.
The normal electric device 5146, i.e., the normal electric shutter 5147, is provided with a starting port 5
The gate is configured to be capable of transitioning between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter starting hole 5140 and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter starting hole 5140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 5147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed in front of the entrance of the starting hole 5140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guidance section inclined toward the starting hole 5140. When the normal power shutter 5147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section moves to a non-ball contact area that is at a distance from the surface of the game panel 5100 that is longer than the diameter of the game ball, and does not hinder the game ball from entering the starting hole 5140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guidance section moves to a non-ball contact area that is at a distance from the surface of the game panel 5100 that is longer than the diameter of the game ball, and does not hinder the game ball from entering the starting hole 5140,
The ball contact area 5140 moves from the surface of the ball to a ball contact area that is at a distance equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, receives the ball flowing down to the right side area 107, and guides the received ball to the starting port 5140.
When the normal power shutter 5147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention section moves to the ball contact point to prevent the ball from entering the starting hole 5140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guide section is embedded in the game panel 5100 and does not accept the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107.
It does not obstruct the flow of the game balls. The above-mentioned normal power shutter 5147 can move forward and backward.
Alternatively, a movable member known as an electric tube may be used.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric role unit 5130 is a unit body that integrates the big prize opening 5131, the big prize opening count switch 5132 that detects the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 5131, and the special electric role 5133. The special electric role unit 5130 is disposed at the bottom in the right side area 107. The special electric role unit 5130 may be disposed below the first passage opening 5126A or above the center role 115.

The large prize opening 5131 is a prize opening that can be switched from a closed state to an open state.
31 goes from a closed state to an open state when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "jackpot".
Or when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived. The big prize winning hole 5131 is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state, and a specified number (
When a game ball enters the big prize opening 5131, prize balls corresponding to the number of game balls in the big prize opening 5131 (for example, 15 game balls) will be paid out.

The special electric device 5133 includes a special electric shutter 5134 of a protruding plate type that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 5135 for operating the special electric shutter 5134 (see FIG. 145 described later).
The special electric device 5133, i.e., the special electric shutter 5134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 5131 and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 5131.

Specifically, the special power shutter 5134 is configured with a plate-shaped roof portion that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the outlet 178. When the special power shutter 5134 is in the open state, the roof portion is embedded in the game panel 5100, and the big prize opening 5131 is opened.
Game balls flowing down the right area 107 and game balls rolling on the roof portion can enter the large prize opening 5131. When the special electric shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the roof portion protrudes from the game panel 5100, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the large prize opening 5131.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the special electricity shutter 5134 is a gently inclined plate-like roof portion, and when the special electricity shutter 5134 is in a closed state, the game ball can roll on the roof portion. Therefore, the game machine is controlled to a small win game state, and the large winning port 5
Even if 131 is opened for only a very short time, one or more game balls rolling on the roof portion are dropped toward the big prize opening 5131, enabling the game balls to enter the big prize opening 5131.

[7-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG.
45 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 145, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is similar to the first pachinko gaming machine in that:
It mainly comprises a main control circuit 200 which controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 which controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the fifth pachinko gaming machine has a special symbol display unit 5160, a special symbol reserve display unit 5161, a normal power solenoid 5
148, special power solenoid 5135, start port switch 5141, first passage port switch 51
The configurations of the second pass switch 5127A, the second pass switch 5127B, and the large prize count switch 5132 are partially different. In addition, the fifth pachinko game machine does not execute the probability change control, so it does not have the probability change notification display unit 167 in the first pachinko game machine. The configurations and arrangements of each are described below.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display unit 5160 displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process.
The LED unit 160 is composed of a plurality of LEDs. Specifically, the special symbol display section 5160 is composed of eight LEDs corresponding to the special symbol display section 5160 of the first pachinko game machine.
It is composed of a group of LEDs, EDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5).

Conditions for starting the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol start conditions")
When the above is established, all or some of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h constituting the special symbol display unit 5160 start to alternately or mutually turn on and off to display the special symbols. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the special symbols stops, and the result of the special symbol winning determination process is derived.

(Special design reserved display section)
The reserved display section 5161 for special symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special symbols") when the start information of the special symbols, i.e., the variable display of the special symbols, is reserved, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs in the LED unit 160. Specifically, the reserved display section 5161 for special symbols is composed of an LED group consisting of two LEDs 165a and 165b corresponding to the first reserved display section 165 for special symbols of the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 5). Here, "the variable display of the special symbols is reserved" refers to a state from when the passage of the game ball into the start hole 5140 is detected and the start information of the special symbols is extracted, until the start condition of the special symbols is established.

The special symbol reserve display unit 5161, like the first special symbol reserve display unit 165 of the first pachinko game machine, displays the number of reserved special symbols that are displayed variably by combining the lighting and extinguishing of two LEDs 165a, 165b.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 5148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 5147. When the normal power solenoid 5148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 5147 forward to open the starting port 5140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it retreats the normal power shutter 5147 rearward to close the starting port 5140.

(Special power solenoid)
The special power solenoid 5135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special power shutter 5134. When the special power solenoid 5135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the special power shutter 5134 backward to open the large prize opening 5131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the special power shutter 5134 forward to close the large prize opening 5131.

(Start switch)
The start hole switch 5141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140. When the start hole switch 5141 detects the entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for effect selection, etc.), and uses the extracted start information of the special symbol in a hit determination process of the special symbol, performs a variable display process of the special symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball).

(First passage switch)
The first passage switch 5127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball through the first passage 5126A. When the first passage switch 5127A detects the passage of a gaming ball through the first passage 5126A, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, a symbol random number value for the normal symbol, a random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect, etc.), and uses the extracted start information of the normal symbol in a winning determination process of the normal symbol, performs a variable display process of the normal symbol, and controls the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, three gaming balls) to the payout/launch control circuit 4.
You will be given instructions to 00.

(Second passage switch)
The second passage switch 5127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball through the second passage 5126B. When the second passage switch 5127B detects the passage of a gaming ball through the second passage 5126B, the main CPU 201 extracts start information for the normal symbol (a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, a random number value for the normal symbol, etc.), and uses the extracted start information for the normal symbol in a winning determination process for the normal symbol, or performs a variable display process for the normal symbol.
Furthermore, even if the second passage switch 5127B detects the passage of a game ball through the second passage 5126B, it does not instruct the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls.

(Big prize slot count switch)
The large prize opening count switch 5132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 5131. When the large prize opening count switch 5132 detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 5131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls (e.g., 15 game balls) corresponding to the large prize opening 5131.

(Display Device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 144) is a device similar to that of the first pachinko gaming machine, but differs in that the display area of the display device 7 does not variably display a special identification pattern for performance that corresponds to a special pattern in the normal gaming state, but variably displays a regular identification pattern for performance that corresponds to an ordinary pattern in the normal gaming state.

[7-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 146 to 153. The fifth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function,
In the following, the description of the setting function will be omitted.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, although the probability variation control is not executed, a time-saving game state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal game state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2
01 is capable of progressing the game in a normal game state or a time-saving game state. In this fifth pachinko game machine, the probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential, and the probability variable control may be executed by setting the probability variable flag to ON according to the type of the jackpot, for example.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C, right hitting is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method that is the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.
In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, although the B time-saving gaming state is not executed, the B time-saving gaming state may be executable.

[7-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 146 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 146 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol winning judgment table contains the range (width) of the random number value for the big win judgment to be determined as a "big win", a "small win" or a "time-saving win" as data used in the winning judgment process of the special symbol executed based on the ball entering the starting hole 5140, and the corresponding judgment value data ("
The random numbers for determining a jackpot are generated in the range of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 146, when a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, the main CPU 201
The result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "big hit," a "small hit," or a "time-saving hit" based on the special symbol hit determination process using a random number value for determining a big hit for the special symbol.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 5140 and a "small win" is determined and the game state transitions to a small win game state, a game ball can enter the large winning hole 5131 and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 150 balls) can be paid out. Even if a "time-saving win" is determined, the game state transitions to the time-saving C game state and a game ball can be entered into the starting hole 5140 again.
Therefore, if the game ball enters the start hole 5140, the game ball will be paid out in response to a "big win" or "small win".
140 is opened, and the game is played with the goal of getting the game ball to enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, when the special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "miss" may be determined. If a "miss" is determined, it is preferable to specify that a "small hit" or a "time-saving hit" is determined with a higher probability than a "miss."

In addition, when the fifth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the probability of a big win or/and a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a big win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a big win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the fifth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of a time-saving win to a common probability in all settings.

[7-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 147 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 147 is generated by the main control circuit 2
00 is stored in the main ROM 202

The special pattern determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select pattern command" and a "pattern designation command" that determine the stopping pattern based on the random number value of the special pattern extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140 and the aforementioned determination value data.

The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a winning symbol, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.
The random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in Fig. 147, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 0 to 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol win determination process, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any one of 0 to 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.
When the random number value of the special symbol is any one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and selects "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special pattern hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected pattern command and selects "zA3" as the pattern designation command regardless of whether the pattern random number value of the special pattern is, for example, 0 to 99.

Although the description of the fifth pachinko gaming machine is omitted, the main ROM of the main control circuit 200
The special symbol stop mode determination table 202 corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12A) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is stored in the special symbol display unit 5160 when the variable display of the special symbol stops.
(see FIG. 145) is a table that is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol derived in response to the selection symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display unit 5160 derives the display mode of the time-saving win, the display mode of the big win, the display mode of the small win, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[7-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
148 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 148, the winning type determination table has the following for the selection symbol command:
The state of the big win game state, the state of the small win game state, and the state of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and determines the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state, and the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the selected symbol command.

Here, in the "jackpot gaming state", the big prize opening 5131 transitions from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined number of rounds. When the open time during which the big prize opening 5131 is open for one round has elapsed or a specified number (10) of gaming balls have entered the big prize opening 5131, the big prize opening 5131 transitions from an open state to a closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the predetermined number of rounds have ended, the big prize gaming state ends.

The "mode of the jackpot gaming state" indicates the mode of opening of the jackpot winning hole 5131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the opening time per round. Note that the number of openings may be determined so that the jackpot winning hole 5131 is opened and closed multiple times per round, or multiple jackpot winning holes may be provided and the jackpot winning hole to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, when 10 game balls enter the big prize opening 5131 in one round, one round ends, and 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out every time a game ball enters the big prize opening 5131. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 148, the selection symbol command "z1" corresponding to "big prize" is set as a result of the special symbol hit determination process.
If so, 10 rounds are determined, and the total is 10 rounds x 10 balls x 15 balls = 1500.
When the selected symbol command is "z2", 4 rounds are determined, and 4 rounds x 10 balls x 15 prize balls = 600 game balls can be paid out.

In the "small win game state", the large prize opening 5131 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined number of times. When the predetermined number of times of opening for one small win game state is completed or a prescribed number of game balls enter the large prize opening 5131, the large prize opening 5131 is switched from an open state to a closed state, and one small win game state ends.

The "mode of small win game state" indicates the mode of opening of the large prize opening 5131 that is opened during the small win game state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of openings and the opening time during the small win game state. Note that multiple large prize openings may be provided, and the large prize opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, ten game balls enter the big winning hole 51 for one small winning game state.
When the ball enters the large prize hole 5131, one small win game state ends, and 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out every time the game ball enters the large prize hole 5131.
As shown in FIG. 1, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z3, z4" corresponding to a "small hit", the number of times of opening is determined to be 10 or 8, and 10 pieces x
15 prize balls = 150 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, the opening time for one round in the small win game state (e.g., 0.15 seconds) is set shorter than the opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 29 seconds),
In a big win game state, the big prize winning hole 5131 is opened by a favorable "first opening mode", and in a small win game state, the big prize winning hole 5131 is opened by a "second opening mode" which is less favorable than the first opening mode.
It can be said that 31 is opened. Furthermore, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 150 balls) is set to be less than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 1500 balls or 600 balls), and it can be said that the big win game state is a "favorable special game state" and the small win game state is a "disadvantageous special game state" compared to the big win game state.

The "game state state" indicates the state of the game state after the end of the big win game state or after the time-saving hit, and indicates the settings of the "time-saving flag" and the "number of time-saving hits." If the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state, and the "time-saving flag" and the "number of time-saving hits" are set.

The "time-saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a time-saving game state is being executed and the type of time-saving game state to be executed, where a time-saving flag = 0 indicates a normal game state, a time-saving flag = 1 indicates a time-saving game state A, and a time-saving flag = 3 indicates a time-saving game state C. Note that in this embodiment, although the time-saving game state B is not executed, if the time-saving game state B can be executed, a time-saving flag = 2 indicates the time-saving game state B.

The "time-saving count" is the number of times that the winning judgment process of the special symbol is performed in the time-saving game state, that is, the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol is performed. This time-saving count is subtracted when the winning judgment process of the special symbol is performed, that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and when the time-saving count becomes 0, the game state transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to the "big hit", the main CPU 201 sets the "time reduction flag"
The game device is configured to determine "1", which indicates the A time-saving gaming state, as the "number of time-saving times", and to determine "10 times".

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is the selected pattern command "z5" corresponding to a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 is configured to determine the "time-saving flag" to be "3," which indicates a C time-saving game state, and to determine the "time-saving count" to be "1 time."

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is the selected pattern command "z5" corresponding to a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 is configured to determine "1 time" as the "time-saving number of times."

In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times is determined to be 10 in the case of a jackpot, and 1 in the case of a time-saving hit. This is because the probability of a "jackpot" being determined as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is low, and this is a premium situation. By transitioning to the A time-saving game state with 10 time-saving times after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times is set to 10.
This is configured so that the game can transition to more small win game states while being controlled to the A time-saving game state for one time. That is, in this embodiment, by setting the number of time-saving times to be large, the game can transition to more small win game states in the time-saving game state, and more game balls can be paid out.

In addition, as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol command "
When the selected symbol command is "z1, z2," the "number of time-saving times" may be determined to be "1 time," just as when the selected symbol command is "z5" corresponding to the "time-saving hit."

[7-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 149 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for the fifth pachinko gaming machine.
The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 149, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the result of the special symbol winning judgment process, the random number value for effect selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variable display time of the special symbol. The random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, FIG. 149
The "Notes" column is provided for convenience.

The main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol winning judgment process and the random number value for effect selection.
Regardless of the time-saving game state (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state C), the special pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is referenced, but the variation pattern table referenced may be different depending on the game state.

Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbols, it transmits a variation pattern command of the special symbols corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbols to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern command of the special symbols transmitted from the main CPU 201.

The "rewind effect" shown in the "Notes" column of FIG. 149 is an effect that suggests that the common "bonus time basic effect (special effect)" that is performed over multiple small win game states will rewind and the small win game state may continue. This "rewind effect" and "bonus time basic effect" will be described in detail later using FIG. 170.
The "full rotation reach" is a presentation that notifies in advance that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit. The "big hit notification reach" is a presentation that suggests that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol may be a big hit, and specifically, a presentation is made to see whether or not three decorative symbols consisting of the word "invincible" are lined up. The "reduced variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short, but between the shortened variation and the small hit game state, the "bonus time basic presentation or bonus time specialized presentation (special presentation)" is performed in terms of presentation.

In the special pattern variation pattern table shown in Figure 149, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the special pattern variation pattern and the variable display time of the special pattern for performing a "rewind performance" are determined.

In addition, when the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "jackpot", a "full rotation reach"
Alternatively, the variation pattern of the special symbols and the variable display time of the special symbols for performing a "big win notification reach" are determined.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit," the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol for performing a "shortened fluctuation" or a "big hit notification reach" are determined.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit," the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "shortened variation" is easily determined, and the short variable display time is determined by determining the special symbol variation pattern for performing the "shortened variation." Therefore, by determining a short variable display time as the variable display time of the special symbol,
A plurality of small win game states can be shifted in a short time.

In addition, by determining a variation pattern of special symbols for performing a "big win notification reach", when the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state is being executed, a performance corresponding to the selection of special symbols can be performed.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit",
The configuration is such that a special symbol variation pattern for performing a "jackpot notification reach" is determined, but a "miss" may be provided as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, and when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss," the special symbol variation pattern for performing a "jackpot notification reach" may be determined.

[7-3-5. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
Fig. 150 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Fig. 150 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal pattern hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal pattern hit determination process, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal pattern hit" or a "normal pattern miss" is obtained based on the game state and the random number value for determining whether a normal pattern hit is obtained when the game ball passes through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B.

The winning judgment table for the normal symbol shown in FIG. 150 includes the game state, the range (width) of the random number value for the winning judgment of the normal symbol, and the winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol missing").
The above are specified in correspondence with each other.

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 150, and determines winning/losing judgment value data based on the game state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol winning judgment.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a winning symbol is any one of 0 to 97, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning symbol is a "winning symbol" and determines the winning/losing determination value data as "winning/losing determination value data". Also, in the normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a winning symbol is any one of 98 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning symbol is a "losing symbol" and determines the determination value data as "losing determination value data".

In the A time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." In the A time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "loss" and sets the determination value data to "loss determination value data."

In the C time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any one of 0 to 97, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." In the C time-saving gaming state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any one of 98 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "loss" and sets the determination value data to "loss determination value data."

Thus, in this embodiment, among the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the probability of winning by hitting a normal symbol (selection rate shown in FIG. 150) is the highest in the A time-saving game state.

In addition, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state is shifted between the normal gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of a normal symbol does not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the time-saving game state A, and the time-saving game state C. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol is not changed, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols to be described later is simply changed for each state, so that the control process can be simplified.

[7-3-6. Normal symbol determination table]
FIG. 151 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 is generated by the main control circuit 2
00 is stored in main ROM 202.

The normal symbol determination table includes the above-mentioned normal symbol winning/losing determination value data, the passage port 5126A,
This is a table to be referenced when selecting a “selection pattern command when hitting a normal symbol” which determines the stopping pattern of the normal symbol based on the random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the gaming ball passes through 5126B.

The "regular symbol winning symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol of the regular symbol, which is determined according to the type of regular symbol winning symbol, when the result of the regular symbol winning determination process is a regular symbol winning symbol.

The normal pattern determination table shown in Figure 151 specifies the win/lose determination value data for the normal pattern ('normal pattern win' or 'miss'), the pattern random number value for the normal pattern, and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern wins.

In addition, the "Reference" column in FIG. 151 shows the combined selection rate of the selection rate of the hit judgment of the normal symbol in the normal game state (see FIG. 150) and the selection rate of the "selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits" for reference. In the normal game state, it is judged as a "normal symbol hit" and, as will be described later, the normal electric role object 5146 (the normal electric shutter 5147) in the normal game state.
This is to explain the "combined selection rate in the normal game state" when the "normal pattern selection command fz1" that advantageously opens the normal pattern is determined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 and determines the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol is hit, based on the winning/losing determination value data for the normal symbol and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 151, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning/losing determination value data for the normal pattern, for example, the selection pattern command when the normal pattern is won is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained as a result of the winning judgment process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 0 to 162, and selects "fz2" as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is 163.
If the result is any of 65535, select "fz2" as the symbol selection command when the normal symbol is hit.

As shown in the "Reference" column of Figure 151, the selection rate of the normal symbol hit determination value data in the normal game state is "98/100" (see Figure 150), and the selection rate of the "selection pattern command fz1 when a normal symbol hits" is approximately "1/402.06", while the "combined selection rate of the normal game state" for finally determining the "selection pattern command fz1 when a normal symbol hits" in the normal game state is set to approximately "1/410.3".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when selecting the "selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit", the selection is made based on the normal pattern hit/loss judgment value data (the result of the normal pattern hit judgment process) and the normal pattern random number value, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal symbol (see FIG. 150) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal symbol, and then refers to the normal symbol judgment table (see FIG. 151) and determines the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

[7-3-7. Normal pattern type determination table]
152 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 152 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147) according to the game status and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is hit.

The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 152 specifies the game state, the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 in correspondence with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the normal symbol selection command, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146.
The sub-CPU 301 transmits an opening pattern command for a normal electric role corresponding to the opening pattern of the normal electric role.

In this embodiment, when the normal game state is in progress and the normal symbol selection command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 2000 msec, the wait time to be 500 msec, and the second opening time to be 3000 msec.
In U201, when in a normal game state, the selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz2".
In this case, the first opening time is determined to be 100 msec, there is no wait time, and there is no second opening time.

Therefore, even in the normal game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command "fz1" is selected, the advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 is determined, and the start hole 51
It is possible to put the game ball into hole 40.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit selection command "fz1" is selected in the normal game state, a predetermined time (e.g., 10,000 msec) of waiting time for opening may be set before the first opening. By setting this waiting time for opening, it is possible to secure time for executing a promotion effect (e.g., an effect such as "Aim to the right!") that encourages the player to enter the normal electric device 5146. By executing this promotion effect, it becomes easier to avoid the so-called "puncture" that the game ball does not enter the normal electric device 5146 even though the normal symbol hit selection command "fz1" is selected, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, if the normal symbol winning time selection symbol command is "fz1", the first opening time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 500 msec, and the second opening time is 3000 msec.
In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, if the normal pattern winning time selection command is "fz2", the first opening time 25
The opening time is determined to be 00 msec, the wait time is 500 msec, and the second opening time is 2500 msec.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the same normal symbol is hit, the selection symbol command (for example, "fz
2"), the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 is configured to differ depending on the game state.

When the game is in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, regardless of the normal pattern selection command, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 is determined, and it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, even when the normal pattern selection command "fz1" or "fz2" is selected in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, a predetermined time (e.g., 5000 msec) of waiting time for opening may be set before the first opening.

[7-3-8. Normal pattern variation table]
153 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 includes a game state, normal symbol winning/losing judgment value data, a selection pattern command when a normal symbol is hit, a random number value for selecting a normal symbol effect extracted when a game ball passes through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B, a normal symbol variation pattern,
The variable display time of the normal symbol is associated with the variable display time of the normal symbol. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 153 is shown for convenience.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in Figure 153, and determines the normal pattern variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal pattern based on the game status, the win/lose judgment value data for the normal pattern, the pattern selection command when the normal pattern is hit, and the random number value for selecting the normal pattern performance.

Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Here, the "long opening" illustrated in the "regular symbol winning symbol selection command" in FIG. 153 refers to an advantageous opening pattern in which the opening time of the normal electric role 5146 is long (see FIG. 152). In this embodiment, the regular symbol winning symbol selection command "f
z1", and "fz1", "fz2" are selected symbol commands when a normal symbol hits in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state. Also, "short opening" refers to an unfavorable opening pattern (see FIG. 152) in which the opening time of the normal electric device 5146 is short, and in this embodiment, refers to the selected symbol command "fz2" when a normal symbol hits in the normal game state, and is not performed in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state.

The "normal reach" shown in the "Notes" column of FIG. 153 is a presentation that suggests that the normal symbol selection command fz1 that opens the normal electric device 5146 advantageously in the normal game state may have been determined. Also, the "super reach" is a presentation that suggests that the normal symbol selection command fz1 that opens the normal electric device 5146 advantageously in the normal game state may have been determined.
The "normal reach", "super reach" and "special reach" are effects that suggest that it is highly likely that "long opening" has been determined in the normal game state, and that the normal electric role device 5146 is advantageously opened when the normal pattern is hit and the selected symbol command fz1 has been determined. In other words, the "normal reach", "super reach" and "special reach" are effects that suggest that "long opening" has been determined in the normal game state, and can also be said to be effects that suggest that it is possible for the game ball to enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, "normal variation" refers to the normal variation in the variable display time of the normal pattern, and "shortened variation" refers to
This is a variation in which the variable display time of the normal pattern is short.

In the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in Figure 153, in the normal game state, when the win/loss judgment value data for the normal pattern is "normal pattern win judgment value data" and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is hit is "fz1", the normal pattern variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal pattern for performing a "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern is "normal pattern winning judgment value data" and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is won is "fz2", the normal pattern variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal pattern for performing "normal variation", "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, in the case of a normal game state, when the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern is "normal pattern losing judgment value data", "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach"
Or, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbols and the variable display time of the ordinary symbols for performing a "special reach" are determined.

In addition, when the game is in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols for performing the "shortened variation" are determined.

When in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, a short variable display time is determined as the variable display time for the normal pattern, so that when the game ball passes through the second passing port 5126B, the normal electric device 5146 is quickly activated, thereby increasing the rate at which the game ball enters the starting port 5140 per unit time.

[7-4. Main control processing]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are S3 in the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).
Although the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and sub-control circuit process performed in the main CPU 201 are partially different, the other processes are similar. Therefore, the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and sub-control circuit process will be described below, and the description of the other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Incidentally, some of the processing performed in the special pattern control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[7-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Fig. 154 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 154, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S5001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game).
After executing the process of S5001, the process proceeds to S5002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process,
Prior to the processing of S5001, an address setting process is performed to set the address of the work area for special symbols in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

In S5002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S5001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (S5002 is N
If the answer is NO, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (S500
2 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5003.

In S5003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol has started to be variably displayed.

If it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol is not variable display start (S5003 is N
In the case of O judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process, and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol is to be variable-displayed (S500
3 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5004.

In S5004, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 155.
After the process of 003 is executed, the special symbol control process is terminated, and the process is returned to the main control process (FIG. 2
0 to (see FIG. 23).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S
It is preferable to perform steps S5001 to S5004 within an interrupt disabled section.

[7-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5004 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG.
The control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S5
021).

If it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (S5021 is N
In the case of O judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S502
1 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S5022.

In S5022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process of S5022, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S5023.
Processing from 5023 onwards is carried out.

In S5023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This process of S5023 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 performs the process of S5024.
Move to.

In S5024, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This process of S5024 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 157. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 performs the process of S5025.
Move to.

In S5025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process.
The process of 025 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Fig. 158. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5026.

In S5026, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening preparation process.
The process of 026 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to Fig. 160. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5027.

In S5027, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening control process.
The process of 027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to Fig. 161. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5028.

In S5028, the main CPU 201 performs a big win end process.
The process is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "5." Details of this big win end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S5023 to S5028, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154). If the special symbol management process is called in S5003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5004 and returns to S5005.
If it is called in S5006, the process returns to S5007; if it is called in S5009, the process returns to S5010; if it is called in S5012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[7-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 156, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S5031).

If it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S50
31 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (
If the determination in S5031 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5033.

In S5033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. In this process, the start information stored in the special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the special symbol start memory area (2) to the special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the special symbol start memory area (1) to the special symbol start memory area (3). After executing the process of S5033, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5034.

In S5034, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol winning determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to a special symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 146) and determines whether the special symbol determination area (0
The special symbol winning determination process is performed using the random number value for determining the winning of the special symbol stored in the special symbol winning determination unit 110. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the winning is a time-saving winning, a small winning, or a big winning.
In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit. After executing the process of S5034, the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S5035.

In S5035, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol determination process.
This is a process for determining the stop pattern of the special pattern corresponding to the result (e.g., time-saving hit, small hit, big hit) of the special pattern hit determination process (S5034). In this process, the special pattern determination table (see FIG. 147) is referenced, and the above-mentioned "selection pattern command" or "pattern designation command" is determined using the random number value of the special pattern stored in the special pattern determination area (0). After executing the process of S5035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5036.

In S5036, the main CPU 201 executes a win type determination process.
This is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (time-saving win, small win, or big win). In this process, a win type determination table (see FIG. 148) is referenced and the type of win is decided according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S5035). Note that, although there are multiple types of wins in this embodiment, there may be only one type of big win, one type of small win, or multiple types of time-saving wins. The main CPU 201 performs S50
After executing the process of S5036, the process proceeds to S5037.

In S5037, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 149) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbols and the variable display time of the special symbols are determined based on the result of the special symbol winning determination process and the random number value for effect selection stored in the special symbol determination area (0). Note that in this embodiment, the variation pattern table of the special symbols shown in FIG. 149 is referenced regardless of the game state, but the variation pattern table to be referenced may be different depending on the game state. The main CPU 201 performs S503
After executing the process of step 7, the process proceeds to S5038.

In S5038, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbols. In this process, the variable display time for the special symbols determined in the process for determining the variation pattern for the special symbols (S5037) is set to the waiting time for the special symbols in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display unit 5160 is caused to start varying display of the special symbols. This waiting time for the special symbols is, for example, 2
The special symbol timer counter is decremented in the system timer interrupt process that is performed every msec.
The process moves to S5039.

In S5039, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving end management process. In the fifth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, the time-saving count is subtracted when "the variable display of the special symbol starts." In this process, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving count counter, and when the time-saving count counter becomes 0, the time-saving flag is cleared and transition control from the time-saving game state to the normal game state is performed. After executing the process of S5039, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5040.

In S5040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed,
The special symbol variable display end process (see S5024 in FIG. 155) is performed. After executing the process of S5040, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5041.

In S5041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, an update process of parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (S322 in FIG. 45).
In step S5041, the main CPU 201 transmits the command to the sub-control circuit 300.
After executing the above process, the process proceeds to S5042.

In S5042, the main CPU 201 performs a game status management process. In this process, the main CPU 201 mainly performs an update process of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., a time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the process of S5042, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5043.

In S5043, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol variation pattern command. The special symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is
Processing for sending performance control commands during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
The signal is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special pattern variable display start process (particularly the game status management process (S5042) and the special pattern variable pattern command transmission reservation process (S5043)) within the interruption prohibited area.

[7-4-4. Special symbol variable display end process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S5051).

If it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S50
51 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is “1” (
If the determination in S5051 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5052.

In S5052, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" in this way, after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (S5 in FIG. 155) is performed.
After executing the process of S5052, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S5053.

In S5053, the main CPU 201 executes a process of reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also executed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5053, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5054.

In S5054, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol number counter.
As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko game machines, the symbol determination number counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game is executed), but it may also manage the number of special symbol games executed under a specific state such as the number of times a special symbol game is remaining or the number of times a time-saving game is remaining, etc. After executing the process of S5054, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S5071).

If it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S50
155), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is “2” (
If the determination in S5071 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5072.

In S5072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S5072, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S5072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201
On the other hand, if it is determined in S5072 that a jackpot has been reached, that is, that the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S5072), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5078.

In S5073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small win.

In S5073, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a small win, that is, that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a miss (if S5073 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a small win, that is, the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (if S5073 is a YES determination), the main CPU
201 shifts the process to S5078.

In S5074, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a time-saving hit has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a time-saving opening hit.

If it is determined in S5074 that the time-saving hit has not occurred, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5077. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5074 that the time-saving hit has occurred, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5075.

In S5075, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the A time-saving gaming state is in effect.
Specifically, the main CPU 201 refers to the time-saving flag and determines whether the time-saving flag indicating the A time-saving gaming state is 1. If it is determined that the A time-saving gaming state is not in effect,
The process is shifted to S5076 to perform the C time-saving state setting process, and if it is determined that the game is in the A time-saving game state, the process is shifted to S5077 without performing the C time-saving state setting process. By this process, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by a lottery for a special symbol during the A time-saving game state, the determination of the "time-saving win" can be invalidated.

In S5076, the main CPU 201 performs a C time-saving state setting process. In this C time-saving state setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148, and determines the mode of the game state (the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times) based on the time-saving winning selection pattern command "z5",
The data of the determined gaming state is set. Specifically, the time-saving flag indicating the C time-saving gaming state is set to 3 (the time-saving flag is turned on), and the time-saving count counter is set to 1. After executing the process of S5076, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5077.

In S5077, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game ending process. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.
When the special pattern game end processing is performed, the special pattern game judgment processing is terminated and the processing is returned to the special pattern management processing (see FIG. 155).

In S5078, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated to be outputted to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 145 for both) or the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. Main CPU
After performing the process of S5078, the process goes to S5079.

In S5079, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting an upper limit value for the number of times the big prize opening 5131 is opened (S5080), and a process of setting a big win signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S5081).

In S5082, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3." By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, a process of preparing to open the big prize opening (see S5026 in FIG. 155) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed.

In S5083, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process (S5
In this process, the main CPU 201 clears various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter, when a jackpot is hit.
When a small win occurs, the process of clearing various flags and counters such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter is not performed. Then, the transmission reservation process of the game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process will be used in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
The signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 .

In S5084, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a big win start display command when it is a big win, and performs a transmission reservation process for a small win start display command when it is a small win. The big win start display command or small win start display command that is reserved for transmission in this process is sent in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
In step S522 of the above procedure, the main CPU 201 transmits the command to the sub-control circuit 300.
After executing the processing of S5084, the special pattern game judgment processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the special pattern management processing (see FIG. 155).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (
It is preferable to perform steps S5071 to S5084 within an interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 159, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5077 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this manner,
The next special symbol game can now be executed. After executing the process of S5092, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5093.

In S5093, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a game state designation parameter for a special symbol. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S509
4). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
The signal is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300. After the process of S5094, the main CPU 201
ends the special pattern game ending process and returns the process to the special pattern game determination process (see FIG. 158).

[7-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 160, a special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described with reference to the special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5026.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S5101).

If it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S51
155). If NO is determined as 01, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is “3” (
If the determination in S5101 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5102.

In S5102, the main CPU 201 loads the large prize opening/closing execution count counter value. When the large prize opening/closing execution count counter is executing a large prize game control process, it corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds in the large prize game state, and when the small prize game control process is executing, it corresponds to a counter that counts the number of openings of the small prize game control process. The count value of the large prize opening/closing execution count counter (large prize opening/closing execution count counter value) is stored in the main RAM 20.
After executing the process of S5102, the main CPU 201 stores the result in a predetermined area in the memory 3.
The process proceeds to S5103.

In S5103, the main CPU 201 judges whether the large prize opening/closing execution count counter value is the upper limit value or not. In this embodiment, as shown in the winning type determination table of FIG. 148, the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the large prize game state is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, and the upper limit value of the number of openings of the small prize game state is 8 times or 10 times.

If it is determined in S5103 that the number of times the large prize opening/closing operation has been performed is the upper limit (S51
03 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5104.

In S5104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S5104)
By switching the control state number by performing the above, after the completion of the large prize opening preparation process,
The big win end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155) is performed.
After executing the process of S5104, the process proceeds to S5105.

In S5105, the main CPU 201 performs a game status designation parameter setting process, and then performs a process of reserving transmission of a game status designation command indicating the current game status.

In S5106, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a big win end display command when it is a big win, and performs a transmission reservation process for a small win end display command when it is a small win. Note that the big win end display command or small win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is sent in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
In step S322 of FIG. 155, the main CPU 201 transmits the special symbol management process to the sub-control circuit 1300. After the process of S5106, the main CPU 201 ends the special prize opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

Returning to S5103, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened and closed is not the upper limit (S5
If step S5103 is judged to be NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S5107.

In S5107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the special prize opening opening/closing execution count counter value. After performing the process of S5107, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S
Move to 5108.

In S5108, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining which jackpot opening is to be opened. In this process, if the jackpot game control process is being executed, the jackpot opening 5 is selected as the jackpot opening.
If the small win game control process is being executed, the large win port 5131 is determined.
After executing the process of S5108, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5109.

In S5109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 5131, the maximum number of balls that can enter the large prize opening 5131, the number of winning balls when a ball enters the large prize opening, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when a large prize game control process is being executed, and corresponds to the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened when a small prize game control process is being executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 5131 is opened multiple times in one round or small prize game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened and closed as separate processes. The main CPU 201 performs S
After executing the process of S5109, the process proceeds to S5110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize winning hole is set to, for example, a maximum of 29,000 msec when the large prize winning game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,500 msec or a maximum of 2,000 msec when the small prize winning game control process is executed. The maximum number of balls that can enter the large prize winning hole is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize winning game control process is executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the small prize winning game control process is executed. Large prize winning hole 5
The number of winning balls when a ball enters 131 is set to, for example, 15. However, the values set or configured in the various setting processes related to the big winning port are not limited to the above.

In S5110, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening opening/closing control process for opening the special prize opening 5131. After executing the process of S5110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5111.

In S5111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S5111)
By switching the control state number by performing the above, after the completion of the large prize opening preparation process,
The big prize opening control process (see S5027 in FIG. 155) is performed.
After executing the process of S5111, U201 transfers the process to S5112.

In S5112, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a game state designation command indicating the current game state.
After executing the process of S5112, the PU 201 shifts the process to S5113.

In S5113, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5113, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-8. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 161, a special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described with reference to the special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5027.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S5121).

If it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (S51
21 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is “4” (
If the determination in S5121 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5122.

In S5122, the main CPU 201 judges whether the number of game balls that have entered the special prize opening 5131 is the maximum number of balls. In this process, it is judged whether the value counted by the special prize opening count switch 5132 (see FIG. 145), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the special prize opening, is the maximum number of balls.
The large prize slot winning counter value counted by the above is stored in a specified area of the main RAM 203.

In S5122, when the main CPU 201 determines that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 5131 is not the maximum number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 5131, the process proceeds to S5123.
If it is determined that the number of winning balls in the winning position 31 is the maximum number of winning balls, the process returns to S51.
Move to 28-1.

In S5128-1, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not it is in a big win gaming state (the big win flag is on). If the main CPU 201 judges that it is in a big win gaming state, it shifts the process to S5124, and if it judges that it is not in a big win gaming state (i.e., it is in a small win gaming state), it shifts the process to S5128-2.

In S5123, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 5131 has elapsed. In this process, various setting processes related to the special prize opening (S510 in FIG. 160) are performed.
9) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 5131 has not elapsed (if S5123 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 terminates the large prize opening opening control processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 5131 has elapsed (if S5123 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5124.

In S5124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the special prize opening 5131. After executing the process of S5124, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5125.

In S5125, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S
By performing S5025) to switch the control state number, the special prize opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) is performed again after the special prize opening control process is completed. After executing S5125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5126.

In S5126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a game state designation command indicating the current game state.
After executing the process of S5126, the PU 201 shifts the process to S5127.

In S5127, if the main CPU 201 is in a jackpot gaming state, it performs a process of reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the next system timer interrupt process (S32 in FIG. 45).
2), the command is sent to the sub-control circuit 1300. Note that during a small win game state, the transmission reservation process for the display command between rounds is not performed. After the process of S5127, the main CPU 201 ends the large win opening control process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 1).
(see 55).

In S5128-2, the main CPU 201 performs a closing setting process for closing the special prize opening 5131. After executing the process of S5128-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5128-3.

In S5128-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this large prize opening control process,
The big win end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155) is performed.
After executing the process of S5128-3, the process proceeds to S5128-4.

In S5128-4, the main CPU 201 performs a game status designation parameter setting process. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game status designation command indicating the current game status. After executing the process of S5128-4, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5128-5.

In S5128-5, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the small win end display command. The small win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S5128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[7-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described with reference to Fig. 162. Fig. 162 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S5131).

If it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S51
31 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big win end process and the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is “5” (
If the determination in S5131 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5132.

In S5132, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and the small win game state (big win opening count counter value, big win win counter value, etc.), time reduction win flag, small win flag, big win flag, symbol determination number counter value, etc. are cleared.
After executing the process of S5132, the process proceeds to S5133.

In S5133, the main CPU 201 performs the A time-saving state setting process. In this A time-saving state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is referenced, and the game state mode (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) is determined based on the time-saving winning selection symbol command, and the data of the determined game state mode is set. Specifically, the time-saving winning selection symbol command "z1
In either case of "z1" or "z2", the main CPU 2 sets the time-saving flag to 1 (turns on the time-saving flag) indicating the A time-saving gaming state, and sets the time-saving count counter to 10.
After executing the process of S5132, the process proceeds to S5034.

In S5134, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 159 is executed.
After executing the processing of S5134, 1 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 155).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 in the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23) will be described.
It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

163 is a flow chart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 163 are control state numbers of normal symbols. The main CPU 201:
The normal symbol game is progressed by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S5
300).

If it is determined in S5300 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 2
01 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S5301.

In S5301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process of S5301, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S5310.
The process from 5310 onwards is carried out.

In S5310, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This processing of S5310 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this variable display start processing for normal symbols will be described later with reference to FIG. 164. Note that, if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 stops the processing in S5310.
Move to 5320.

In S5320, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol variable display end process. This process of S5320 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5330.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "2." If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1," and the process waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S5330, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process.
The process of 330 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 performs the process in S
Move to 5340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or normal symbol miss). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In addition, in the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 5146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection pattern command by referring to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 152, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 to the sub-CPU 202.
Transmit to PU301.

In S5340, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role opening process.
The process of 340 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 performs the process in S
Move to 5350.

In this normal electric device release process, the main CPU 201 performs the release process of the normal electric device 146 according to the release pattern of the normal electric device 5146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S5330. Then, when the release process of the normal electric device 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S5350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol winning end processing.
The process of 350 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol winning end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs the above steps S5310 to S53
A process is performed to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in 40 and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area (0).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned normal symbol control process (S
It is preferable to perform steps S5300 to S5350 within an interrupt disabled section.

[7-4-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 164, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5310 during the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 163) will be described. Fig. 164 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S5311).

When it is determined in S5311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not “0”, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process ( FIG. 16
On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5312.

In S5312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal symbol. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal symbol start memory area (2) to the normal symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (3). After executing the process of S5312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5313.

In S5313, the main CPU 201 performs a win determination process for the normal symbols. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to a win determination table for the normal symbols shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol stored in the normal symbol determination area (0), the main CPU 201 determines the winning/losing determination value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing"). After executing the process of S5313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5314.

In S5314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, and determines a "normal symbol winning selection symbol command" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0).
After executing the process of S5314, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5315.

In S5315, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a variation pattern of the normal symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to a variation pattern table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 153, and determines a variation pattern of the normal symbol based on the game state, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol, the selection command when the normal symbol is hit, and the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0).
The main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time. After executing the process of S5315, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5316.

In S5316, the main CPU 201 performs variable display time setting processing for the normal symbol. In this processing, the variable display time of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination processing (S5315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol display unit 161 is caused to start variable display of the normal symbol. This waiting time of the normal symbol is, for example, 2 m
The normal symbol timer counter is decremented in the system timer interrupt process that is performed every sec. After executing the process of S5316, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5317.

In S5317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the normal symbol variable display start process is completed,
The normal symbol variable display end process (see S5320 in FIG. 163) is performed. After executing the process of S5317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S5318.

In S5318, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is
Processing for sending performance control commands during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
The signal is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300.

[7-5. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 165. Fig. 165 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 165, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S5500).
In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 returns to step S5510.
Move to.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S5500) is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes of S5510 to S5580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S5510, the sub CPU 301 performs a read process of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 145). This process is performed by reading out a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 145) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S5520.

In S5520, the sub CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S5510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S5530.

In S5530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance mode determination process. In this process, for example, a performance pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and a role request) for operating various performance devices are generated based on the determined performance pattern. For details of this performance mode determination process, see FIG.
When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S5540.

In S5540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 145). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. Upon completing this processing, the sub CPU 301 advances the processing to S5550.

In S5550, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 145). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control for outputting audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the processing to S5560.

In S5560, the sub CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 145).
The LED control circuit 306 transmits the message (L
Based on the received ED request, the sub-CPU 301 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46.
Processing then shifts to S5570.

In S5570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a role control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a role request to the role control circuit 307 (see FIG. 145). Based on the message (role request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the roles that make up the performance role group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 executes the sub-CPU control process.
The PU 301 ends the sub-control circuit main processing.

[7-5-1. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S5530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 165) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5531, the sub CPU 301 executes a performance mode determination process. In this process, a performance pattern that defines the display performance mode to be displayed on the display device 7 and the sound performance mode to be output from the speaker 32 is determined based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201. Upon completing this process, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S5532.

In S5532, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S5531. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S5533.

In S5533, the sub CPU 301 executes a drawing request generation process. In this process, the drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S5534.

In S5534, the sub CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, the sound request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 returns to S5534.
Move to 535.

In S5535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process.
In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 returns to S553.
Move to 6.

In S5536, the sub CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, the reel request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 165).

[7-5-2. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S5531 in the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S5531-1 that the command is a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-3.

In S5531-2, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process of determining the variation of the identification symbols for the performance. The "variation of the identification symbols for the performance" refers to the "long opening" of the normal electric role 5146.
This is an effect in which the performance identification symbols are displayed in a predetermined varying manner as an effect suggesting that the has been determined. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process, and returns the process to the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to long opening."

As described above, the "opening pattern command of a normal electric device corresponding to a long opening" refers to the pattern command "fz1" selected when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state, and the pattern commands "fz1" and "fz2" selected when a normal pattern is hit in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state.

When it is determined in S5531-3 that the command is a "normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to the long opening", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-4.
If it is determined that the command is not a "normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to a long opening," the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S5531-5.

In S5531-4, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not a start hole opening effect is to be produced.
This is an effect that notifies the player that it is now possible for the game ball to enter the ball hole 40. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns to the effect mode determination process (
Return to FIG. 166.

In S5531-5, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S5531-5 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-6. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-11.

In S5531-6, the sub-CPU 301 performs a special effect determination process. The "special effects" are variable display of special symbols, background effects performed during a small win game state, and are common effects performed over a number of small win game states. The special effects include a "bonus time basic effect" and a "bonus time specialized effect".
1 refers to the game state, and when it is in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, it decides on the "bonus time basic performance", and when it is in the A time-saving game state, it decides on the "bonus time specialized performance".
Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process, and returns the process to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-7, the sub-CPU 301 performs a bonus time variable effect determination process to determine the variable effect of the special symbols in the bonus time, which will be described later, in accordance with the type of the special symbol variable pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this bonus time variation presentation decision process, as shown in the "Notes" section of Fig. 149, when the command is a "time-saving hit variation pattern command", a presentation pattern for a "rewind presentation" is decided, when the command is a "jackpot variation pattern command", a presentation pattern for a "full rotation reach" or a "jackpot notification reach" is decided, and when the command is a "small hit variation pattern command", a presentation pattern for a "shortened variation" or a "jackpot notification reach" is decided. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern decision process and returns the process to the presentation mode decision process (see Fig. 166).

In S5531-8, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command."

If it is determined in S5531-8 that it is a "small win start display command", the sub-C
The PU 301 shifts the process to S5531-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not the "small win start display command," the sub-CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-10.

In S5531-9, the sub-CPU 301 performs a special effect determination process. This process is the same as S5531-6 described above, and determines a "bonus time basic effect" when in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, and determines a "bonus time specialized effect" when in the A time-saving game state. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."

If it is determined in S5531-10 that the command is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-12.

In S5531-11, the sub-CPU 301 performs a bonus time special effect determination process to determine the "bonus time special effect." When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301
ends the presentation pattern determination process, and returns the process to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-12, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S5531-12 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-C
The PU 301 shifts the process to S5531-13. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 shifts the process to S5531-14.

In S5531-13, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game state setting process to set the game state according to the type of game state designation command. Specifically, if the game state designation command indicates a normal game state, the sub-CPU 301 sets the normal game state data in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. If the game state designation command indicates an A-time shortened game state, the sub-CPU 301 sets the A-time shortened game state data in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. If the game state designation command indicates a C-time shortened game state, the sub-CPU 301 sets the C-time shortened game state data in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 completes the presentation pattern determination process and returns the process to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-14, the sub CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201.
After executing the processing of S5084, the presentation pattern determination processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the presentation mode determination processing (see FIG. 166).

The above-mentioned "Bonus Time Basic Performance or Bonus Time Special Performance (Special Performance)",
The "rewind effect" and "starting hole opening effect" will be described in more detail later using Figure 170.

[7-6. Game state transition diagram]
Next, a transition of a game state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 168. Fig. 168 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing a transition of a game state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first passage opening 5126A, a "normal pattern hit" is determined by a lottery for a normal pattern (a hit determination for a normal pattern), and a normal pattern hit selection command f corresponding to the "long opening" of the normal electric role object 5146 is issued.
Once z1 is determined (with a probability of approximately 1/420.3), it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the starting hole 5140.

When a game ball enters the start hole 5140, start information of the special symbol is extracted. In this embodiment, since the number of reserved special symbols is four, when five or more game balls enter the start hole 5140, start information is stored in the special symbol determination area (0) and the four special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) of the determination, and a total of five special symbol lotteries (special symbol winning determinations) are performed.

When a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery for the special symbol (a hit determination for the special symbol) with a first probability (probability of about 1/319), the game moves to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, as described above, in a 10-round jackpot game state, 1500 game balls can be paid out, and in a 4-round jackpot game state, 600 game balls can be paid out.

The second probability (approximately 1/1.64 probability) is determined by the drawing of the special symbol (determining whether the special symbol is a winning symbol).
When it is determined that a "small win" has been hit, the game state transitions to the small win game state. In this embodiment, as described above, in the small win game state, 150 game balls can be paid out. Note that the game state does not transition as a result of the transition to the small win game state.

The third probability (approximately 1/2.59 probability) is determined by the drawing of the special symbol (determining whether the special symbol is a winning symbol).
When it is determined that a "time-saving hit" has been reached, the game moves to the C time-saving game state.

After the transition to the big win gaming state, the game transitions to the time-saving gaming state A. The time-saving gaming state A is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: "the time-saving count ends 10 times (see FIG. 148)" or "transition to the big win gaming state."

The C time-saving game state is terminated when the time-saving number of times is completed (FIG. 148).
It is set when either the condition "transition to a jackpot game state" (see reference) or "transition to a jackpot game state" is met.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "time-saving number of times" is counted when the variable display of the special symbol starts, but it may be counted when the variable display of the special symbol ends.

In the A time-saving play state and the C time-saving play state, the normal electric device 5146 is "long-opened" (see FIG. 152), making it possible for the game ball to enter the starting hole 5140, and the special pattern can be drawn again.

In this embodiment, the special symbol lottery does not determine a losing symbol, and the starting hole 5140
When a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, either a "big win", a "small win" or a "time-saving win" is determined. If a "big win" or a "small win" is determined, an opportunity to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as "bonus time") is given, and if a "time-saving win" is determined, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state C, in which a game ball can be again entered into the starting hole 5140 to further extend the "bonus time". As described above, the game may be configured so that a "miss" is determined with a relatively low probability in the drawing of the special symbols.

Incidentally, the time-saving game state A is set to have more time-saving times than the time-saving game state C. Therefore, when a "time-saving win" is determined by a lottery for a special symbol during the time-saving game state A, if the time-saving game state A is switched to the time-saving game state C following the determination of the "time-saving win," the number of time-saving times that can be executed may be reduced, which may result in a disadvantage to the player.

Therefore, in the fifth pachinko game machine, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by a lottery of a special symbol during the A time-saving game state, the determination of the "time-saving win" is invalidated (see FIG. 15).
8), control is performed so that the time-saving game state A does not transition to the time-saving game state C. Therefore, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by a lottery for a special symbol during the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state A being executed can be continued.

Furthermore, if the start information for determining the "time-saving hit" remains stored in the pending memory after the end of the A time-saving game state, it is possible to transition to the C time-saving game state based on the start information for determining the "time-saving hit", so that even if a transition is made to the A time-saving game state, the possibility of the time-saving game state continuing again is maintained.

In addition, if a "time-saving hit" is determined by drawing special symbols during the C time-saving game state,
As with the first pachinko game machine, it is ideal to configure it so that a new C time-saving game state is executed in layers, but in order to simplify the control processing, it may also be configured so that the determination of a C time-saving win is invalidated during the C time-saving game state, as with the A time-saving game state.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the time-saving gaming state is A time-saving gaming state and C time-saving gaming state.
The machine has two time-saving game states, but like the first pachinko game machine,
There may be three time-saving game states: a time-saving game state, a time-saving game state B, and a time-saving game state C.

[7-7. Bonus Time Explanation]
As described above, a "bonus time" is provided when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140. The mechanism of this "bonus time" will be described.
13 is an example of an explanatory diagram for explaining a bonus time in the pachinko gaming machine.

Here, in FIG. 169, from the top, the "judgment order" of the lottery for the special symbol, "applicable" indicating the special symbol judgment area (0), and "reserved memory" indicating the special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) are shown, and the start information stored in the "applicable" and "reserved memory" is shown in "circle". Also, the "circle" of the start information is shown as "small" when the start information is for determining a small win,
When the starting information determines a time-saving hit, the word "time" is shown, and when the starting information determines a big hit, the word "big" is shown.

FIG. 169(a) shows the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146, and the start port 5140
This is an example of when five or more game balls enter the reel and all of the special patterns are determined to be a "small win."

As shown in FIG. 169(a), when all the special symbols are determined to be "small wins", a total of five small win games are played and the bonus time ends.
In the case shown in FIG. 9(a), 600 game balls can be paid out (small win game x 5 times = 150 x 5).

FIG. 169(b) shows that the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146 is performed, and the starting hole 5140
This is an example of what happens after five or more game balls enter the slot and the fifth special symbol is drawn to determine a "time-saving win."

As shown in FIG. 169(b), when the first to fourth special patterns are drawn, a "small win" is determined and a small win game is played, and when the fifth special pattern is drawn, a "time-saving win" is determined and after the variable display of that special pattern ends, the game transitions to the C time-saving game state.

When the game transitions to the time-saving game state C, the passing of the game ball through the second passage opening 5126B triggers a "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146, making it possible to allow the game ball to enter the starting opening 5140 again.

After the fifth special pattern is drawn, "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1-4" will be the default data (
Since the start information in "applicable" and "reserved memories 1 to 4" is blank (all start information in "applicable" and "reserved memories 1 to 4" has been consumed), when five or more game balls enter start hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered, and five new start information are stored in "applicable" and "reserved memories".

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the drawing of the sixth and seventh special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and a small win game is played. In the drawing of the eighth special symbol, "
It is determined that a "time-saving hit" has occurred, and after the variable display of the special symbol has ended, the game moves to the C time-saving game state.

When the game transitions to the time-saving game state C, the passing of the game ball through the second passage opening 5126B triggers a "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146, making it possible to allow the game ball to enter the starting opening 5140 again.

After the eighth special symbol is drawn, start information is already stored in "corresponding" and "reserved memory 1," and "reserved memory 2 to 4" are set to default data (blank data). Therefore, when three or more game balls enter start hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered, and three pieces of start information are newly stored in "reserved memory 2 to 4."

Thereafter, in the drawing of the 9th to 13th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(b), a total of 11 small win games = 150 x 11 = 1,650 game balls can be paid out.

FIG. 169(c) shows that the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146 is performed, and the starting hole 5140
This is an example of what happens after five or more game balls enter the jackpot and the fifth special symbol is drawn to determine a "jackpot."

As shown in FIG. 169(c), in the drawing of the first to fourth special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and a small win game is played, and in the drawing of the fifth special symbol, a "big win" is determined.
It is determined that the state is changed to the A time-shortened game state after the end of the big win game state.

As described above, the A time-saving game state is set to 10 time-saving times (see FIG. 148, etc.).
The time-saving game state A can be continued until the lottery for the special symbols is performed ten times. In the time-saving game state A, the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146 is performed when the game ball passes through the second passage opening 5126B, and the game ball can be allowed to enter the start opening 5140 again.

Then, when a "jackpot" is determined in the drawing of the fifth special symbol and the game state transitions to the A time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends, ten drawings of the sixth to fifteenth special symbols are made in the A time-saving game state.

Here, in the lottery of the 9th and 13th special symbols during the A time-saving gaming state, a "time-saving win" is determined. However, as described above, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by the lottery of the special symbols during the A time-saving gaming state, the process of invalidating the determination of the "time-saving win" (
By executing the processing of S5075 shown in FIG. 158), it is possible to continue the A time-shortened game state without transitioning from the A time-shortened game state to the C time-shortened game state.

The selection of the 16th to 19th special symbols is based on the start information (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining reserved information") stored in the "reserved memories 1 to 4" after the A time-saving game state ends.

In the drawing of the 19th special symbol based on the remaining reserved information, it is determined that it is a "time-saving hit." Since the drawing of the 19th special symbol is performed in the normal game state after the A time-saving game state has ended, once it has been determined that it is a "time-saving hit," the game will transition to the C time-saving game state after the variable display of the special symbol has ended. Therefore, even if the A time-saving game state has ended, the time-saving game state can be continued again based on the remaining reserved information, and the A time-saving game state will be continued until the end of the variable display of the special symbol.
It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game due to the end of the time-saving game state.

When the game transitions to the time-saving game state C, the passing of the game ball through the second passage opening 5126B triggers a "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146, making it possible to allow the game ball to enter the starting opening 5140 again.

After the drawing of the 19th special symbol, the "corresponding" and "reserved memories 1 to 4" become default data (blank data), and therefore, when five or more game balls enter the start hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered, and five pieces of start information are newly stored in the "corresponding" and "reserved memories."

Thereafter, in the drawing of the 20th to 24th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(c), the "jackpot" in the fifth special symbol drawing is "1
If the number of balls is 0, the total number of balls that can be paid out is 4,500, which is the sum of the jackpot game (10R) x 1 = 1,500 x 1 = 1,500 balls and the small jackpot game x 20 = 150 x 20 = 3,000 balls.
In the case of "4R", a total of "3,600" game balls can be paid out, which is the sum of the big win game (4R) x 1 = 600 x 1 = "600 balls" and the small win game x 20 = 150 x 20 = "3,000 balls".

In this way, in the fifth pachinko game machine, if a "time-saving hit" is determined by the lottery of the special symbol, the "bonus time" can be extended. This makes it possible to change the end time of the "bonus time", allowing the player to enjoy the fact that the bonus time will continue for a long time, and thus increasing the interest of the game. The condition for ending the bonus time is also "five consecutive small hits determined by the lottery of the special symbol."

［7-8. Bonus Time］
Next, the "bonus time" presentation will be described. Figure 170 shows an example of a display image for explaining the bonus time presentation in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

(Performance when a time-saving hit occurs during bonus time)
(a-1) to (d-1) in the left column of FIG. 170 are "time-saving hits" during bonus time.
This is an example of a display image that explains the effect when
This corresponds to the drawing of the th special symbol.

Figure 170 (a-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the drawing of the first to fourth special patterns in Figure 169 (b) described above.

The "bonus time basic effect" is an effect that is performed in common during the variable display of special symbols in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state and during the small win game state. More specifically, the "bonus time basic effect" is an effect that is performed when a game state designation command indicating the normal game state or the C time-saving game state is received, and a special symbol variable pattern command is received in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, and when a small win start display command is received in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state.

As shown in Fig. 170 (a-1), as the "basic bonus time effect", the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed in the upper left of the display area, "bonus time" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and "hit right" is displayed in the upper right of the display area to notify the normal game mode. Also, a predetermined character image is displayed in the center of the display area, and the "total number of rounds" and "acquired points" are displayed in the lower right of the display area.

Here, the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed by subtracting 1R from 5R, corresponding to the condition for ending the bonus time being "five consecutive small wins in the special symbol lottery". Also, the "cumulative number of rounds" displays the total number of times controlled to the small win game state and the number of rounds executed in the big win game state. The "acquired points" displays the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big win opening 5131.

FIG. 170(b-1) is an example of a display image of the “rewind effect” displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when a time-saving win is determined by a lottery of special symbols, and is the same as the above-mentioned FIG.
This corresponds to the drawing of the fifth special symbol in (b).

The "rewind effect" is an effect that is performed when a special symbol variation pattern command for a time-saving hit is received (see FIG. 149), and is an effect that rewinds the bonus time basic effect and suggests that the small win game state may continue. As shown in FIG. 170 (b-1), the rewind effect is displayed as if the video of the bonus time basic effect so far is being rewound.

Figure 170 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the "starting hole opening effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 after the rewinding effect shown in Figure 170 (b-1) has been performed.

The "starting hole opening effect" is an effect that notifies the player that the game ball can enter the starting hole 5140. Specifically, the "starting hole opening effect" is an effect that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol for the time-saving hit is finished and a game state designation command indicating the C time-saving game state is received, or when the game ball passes through the second passing hole 5126B and a normal symbol winning time selection symbol command for performing the long opening of the normal electric role 5146 is received. As shown in FIG. 170 (c-1), as the starting hole opening effect, a display of "Aim for the chance starting hole!" is performed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the starting hole 5140. In addition, "Right hit" is still displayed in the upper right part of the display area.

Figure 170 (d-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140 again, and corresponds to the drawing of the sixth special pattern in Figure 169 (b) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170(d-1), after the "starting hole opening performance", the game ball is again placed in the starting hole 5.
When the ball lands on 140, the "bonus time basic effect" is performed again. In this "bonus time basic effect", the "remaining rounds" is displayed as increased (rewound), and the character image displays a message notifying the user that the bonus time has been extended.

In this way, the "rewind effect" when a time-saving hit is determined can notify the player that the bonus time has been extended, allowing the player to enjoy wondering how long the bonus time will continue, thereby making the game even more enjoyable.

(Performance when a jackpot is hit during bonus time)
The right column of FIG. 170 (a-2) to (d-2) are examples of display images for explaining the effects when a "big win" occurs during the bonus time.
This corresponds to the drawing of the th special symbol.

FIG. 170(a-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the drawing of the first to fourth special symbols in FIG. 169(c) described above. The "remaining rounds" and "bonus time" shown in FIG. 170(a-2)
The display contents of "Right Hit", "Total Rounds" and "Earned Points" are shown in FIG.
-1).

FIG. 170(b-2) shows the display device 7 when a jackpot is determined by the lottery of the special symbol.
1 is an example of a display image of the "Big Win Notification Reach" displayed in the display area of FIG.
This corresponds to the drawing of the fifth special symbol, 69(c).

The "jackpot notification reach" is an effect that is performed when a command for a variation pattern of a special symbol for a jackpot is received (see FIG. 149), and is an effect of whether or not three decorative symbols consisting of the character "invincible" are aligned. As shown in FIG. 170(b-2), when there is a jackpot, the three decorative symbols "invincible", "invincible", and "invincible" are displayed together as a result of the effect of the jackpot notification reach. When there is no jackpot, decorative symbols such as "invincible", "X", and "invincible" are displayed as a result of the effect of the jackpot notification reach.

Figure 170 (c-2) is an example of a display image of a “bonus time specialized effect” displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the drawing of the 6th to 15th special patterns in Figure 169 (c) described above.

The "bonus time special effect" is an effect that is performed in common during a big win game state, during the variable display of special symbols in the A time-saving game state, and during a small win game state in the A time-saving game state. More specifically, the "bonus time special effect" is an effect that is performed when a big win start display command is received, when a game state designation command indicating the A time-saving game state is received and a special symbol variable pattern command is received in the A time-saving game state, and when a small win start display command is received in the A time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 170(c-2), in the center of the display area, "invincible mode" is displayed as a "bonus time special effect", and in the upper right corner of the display area, "right hit" is displayed to notify the normal game mode. In addition, in the lower right corner of the display area, "total number of rounds" and "acquired points" are displayed, continuing from the "bonus time basic effect".
"Cumulative number of rounds" displays the total number of times controlled in the small win game state and the total number of rounds executed in the big win game state, while "earned points" displays the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 5131 during the small win game state and the big win game state.

FIG. 170 (d-2) shows the state when the A time-saving game state ends and there are four remaining reserved pieces of information.
This is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the drawing of the 16th special symbol in Figure 169 (c) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170(d-2), in the "bonus time basic performance" after the end of the bonus time special performance, the "remaining round number" continued from the bonus time special performance,
The "total number of rounds" and "acquired points" continue to be displayed, and the character image is displayed to notify the player that bonus time has resumed.

In addition, the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed as "4R" corresponding to four remaining reserved information, and if there are three remaining reserved information after the end of the A-time-shortened play state, "3R" is displayed, if there are two remaining reserved information after the end of the A-time-shortened play state, "2R" is displayed, if there is one remaining reserved information after the end of the A-time-shortened play state, "1R" is displayed, and if there is no remaining reserved information after the end of the A-time-shortened play state, "End" is displayed.

In this way, the "bonus time specialized performance" performed during a jackpot and during the A time-saving game state can produce a guaranteed period in which the bonus time will not end, allowing the player to enjoy the bonus time with peace of mind and further increasing the excitement of the game.

In this way, in the fifth pachinko game machine, in the normal game mode, the main game is not a "special pattern game" consisting of a lottery for special patterns, but a "normal pattern game" consisting of a lottery for normal patterns, and the lottery for special patterns does not determine a "loss," but can be treated as a "bonus time" in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, thereby creating new gameplay that has never been seen before and making the game even more exciting.

In addition, if a "time-saving hit" is determined by the lottery of the special symbol, the game moves to a time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) and the game ball can enter the starting hole 5140 again, and the bonus time can be extended. This makes it possible to change the end time of the bonus time, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the presentation when a small win is determined by a lottery for a special pattern and the shortened variation of the special pattern is performed and the presentation when the game is controlled to a small win game state are both treated as a common "special presentation (bonus time basic presentation or bonus time specialized presentation)", and the presentation across successive shortened variations and the small win game state is also treated as a common "special presentation (bonus time basic presentation or bonus time specialized presentation)", so that multiple small win game states can be presented as one bonus time.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the "time-saving hit" is determined by a lottery of special symbols,
When the special symbols are variably displayed, the basic bonus time performance is rewound, and a "rewind performance" is performed, which suggests that the small win game state may continue.
This can increase the interest in the game even when the special symbols are variably displayed.

<Fifth modified example of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, a modified example of the fifth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 170 etc., the bonus time presentation is configured so that when the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving hit is being performed, the bonus time basic presentation is rewound as a "rewind presentation", and in the next bonus time basic presentation, the "remaining number of rounds" is increased (rewound) but instead of displaying the "remaining number of rounds" in the bonus time basic presentation, the "maximum number of rounds" is displayed as the number of times that a small win game state can be executed, and when the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving hit is being performed, a "maximum number of rounds addition presentation" is performed in which the maximum number of rounds is added.

In addition, as a basic bonus time presentation, a battle presentation in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is performed, and in response to the condition for ending the bonus time being "five consecutive small wins in the special pattern drawing," the HP of the ally character is set to 5 points, and each time the game is controlled to a small win game state, the enemy character attacks the ally character and subtracts 1 HP, and when the variable display of the special pattern for the time-saving win is performed, the HP of the ally character is restored.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, both the bonus time basic effect and the bonus time specialized effect can be executed as the special effect of the bonus time.
The bonus time specialized performance may be configured as a performance that is integrated into the bonus time basic performance. In this case, in the jackpot game state, a "jackpot performance" for the jackpot game state can be executed, and in the A time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is added to the "remaining round number" of the bonus time basic performance, or "HOLD" or "STOP" is displayed in the "remaining round number".

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 148, the number of time-saving times is determined as one when the time-saving hit is obtained, but it may be configured to determine two or more times. Furthermore, it may be configured to provide multiple types of special symbols (multiple types of selection symbol commands) corresponding to the time-saving hit, and to determine multiple types of time-saving times. In particular, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of times of time-saving times, it is possible to shift to more small win game states in the time-saving game state, and to pay out more game balls.

The fifth type of pachinko machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko machine.
Like the third pachinko gaming machine, the fifth pachinko gaming machine may be configured as a type 1/2 mixed machine.
A specific area and a non-specific area may be provided inside the large prize opening 5131 (or any other large prize opening to be added), and the large prize game state may be controlled by the passing of the game ball through the specific area.

(others)
The fifth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the fifth pachinko gaming machine as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[8. The 6th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, similar to the second pachinko game machine. However, the sixth pachinko game machine has a different basic specification of playability compared to the second pachinko game machine, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the play area is partially different.

Hereinafter, in describing an embodiment of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine are given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed descriptions of their configurations and processing are omitted.

In addition, the sixth pachinko game machine is a "simultaneous variable machine" in which the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be variably displayed in parallel, but it may also be a "priority variable machine" in which either the start condition of the first special pattern or the start condition of the second special pattern is met by priority, or it may be a "sequential variable machine" in which the start conditions are met in the order of winning, including the first start port and the second start port.

[8-1. Appearance]
The external configuration of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Fig. 171 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

As shown in FIG. 171, the sixth pachinko gaming machine has an external configuration that is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in that it has a performance button device 6310 (first performance operation unit 6311) provided on the upper tray 51.
The configuration is different.

The effect button device 6310 is an operating device that allows a player to operate the effect. In particular, the effect button device 6310 of the sixth pachinko game machine is configured so that its operating mode can be changed, and the effect function can be improved by changing the operating mode of the effect button device 6310.

The following describes the changes in the operation mode of the performance button device 6310.

[8-2. Operation mode of the performance button device]
FIG. 172 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing the change in the operation mode of the presentation button device of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 172(a) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in the first operation mode as the initial operation mode.

172(a), the first operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the first effect operation unit 6311 operable by the player is located on the upper surface side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the first operation mode, the player can press the first effect operation unit 6311.

FIG. 172(b) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in a second operation mode changed from a first operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(b), the second operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the operation drive unit 6313 is rotated by about 45 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side by a drive device such as a motor, and the second effect operation unit 6312 that can be operated by the player is located on the front side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the second operation mode, the player can press the second effect operation unit 6312.
It is possible to press the button diagonally.

FIG. 172(c) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in a third operation mode changed from the second operation mode.

172(c), the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the operation drive unit 6313 rotates about 90 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second effect operation unit 6312 is located on the upper surface side. When the effect button device 6310 is in the third operation mode, the player can press the second effect operation unit 6312 directly downward.

FIG. 172(d) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in a fourth operation mode changed from the third operation mode.

172(d), the fourth operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the second effect operation unit 6312 protrudes upward from the operation drive unit 6313. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fourth operation mode, the player can perform an operation of pressing the second effect operation unit 6312 protruding upward directly downward.

FIG. 172(e) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in a fifth operation mode changed from the fourth operation mode.

172(e), the fifth operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the operation drive unit 6313 rotates toward the protective glass 43 side by approximately 120 degrees, and the protruding second effect operation unit 6312 falls backward. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fifth operation mode, it is possible to pull the second effect operation unit 6312 that has fallen backward toward the front.

Furthermore, the effect button device 6310 has a built-in vibration device (not shown) so that the effect button device 6310 can vibrate. Therefore, more specifically, the effect modes of the effect button device 6310 can be configured from combinations of the first to fifth operation modes and the vibration mode.

The operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is not limited to the above-mentioned operation modes and the number of changes. For example, the effect button device 6310 may be moved forward and backward or left and right, or may simply protrude upward.
It is not necessary for the vibration device to be built-in and for the vibration to not occur.

[8-3. Game board unit]
The sixth pachinko game machine includes a game board unit 6010, which will be described with reference to Fig. 173. This game board unit 6010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 173 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The game board unit 6010 includes a game panel 6100.
Various components are arranged on the gaming panel 6100, and a gaming area 105 is formed on the front side of the gaming panel 6100, in which the launched gaming ball can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 of the sixth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that it mainly includes a ball passage 6108, a deceleration wall portion 6109, a center gimmick 6115 disposed in the approximate center of the game area 105, and a first starting hole (middle) 6120.
A, a first starting port (right) 6120B, a second starting port 6140, and a passing gate 6126,
The normal electric role unit 6145, the big win role unit 6130, and the small win role unit 6150 are different in configuration and arrangement. The configuration and arrangement of each will be described below.

(Ball passage)
The ball passage 6108 is disposed in the right area 107 and is composed of a flat plate portion inclined downward, on which the game ball can roll. The plate portion of the ball passage 6108 is formed of a transparent resin, and the contact surface on which the game ball rolls is embossed. By embossing the ball passage 6108, the rolling game ball can be decelerated, and by embossing the transparent resin, the light emitted from the LED or the like is diffused, and the decorativeness can be enhanced. The ball passage 6108 may be formed of a non-translucent material instead of a transparent resin.

(Deceleration wall)
The deceleration wall portion 6109 is disposed above the ball passage 6108, and is a surface-treated portion that is textured on the surface of the game panel 6100. The deceleration wall portion 6109 processed on the surface of the game panel 6100 can decelerate the rolling game ball, and by making the game panel 6100 out of transparent resin, light emitted from an LED or the like is diffused, enhancing the decorativeness.

(Center role)
The center device 6115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 6100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

The center gimmick 6115, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a warp entrance 117, a stage 118, and a chance entrance 119, but unlike the first pachinko game machine, it also has a circular performance partition 6116 on the front side of the display device 7.

The performance partition 6116 is disposed on the front side of the display area of the display device 7.
The display area is partitioned, and an upper display area 7a is formed as the display area of the display device 7 inside the performance partition section 6116.

In addition, in the display area of the display device 7, while the special symbol is being variably displayed, a performance identification symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, or a performance image according to the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol,
It displays performance images during a big win game state, demo performance images, and reserved images showing the reserved status of variable display of special patterns.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole (middle) 6120A is located below the display area of the display device 7, and is made such that a game ball hit from the left can enter the hole (a game ball hit from the right is difficult or impossible to enter the hole). When a game ball enters the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, the first starting hole switch 6121A (
The game ball is detected by a sensor (see Figure 174 described below).

The first starting hole (right) 6120B is disposed in the right area 107 and is provided in the normal electric role unit 6145 described later. When the first starting hole (right) 6120B is in an open state, a game ball hit from the right can enter the hole (a game ball hit from the left is difficult or impossible to enter the hole). When a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B, the game ball is detected by the first starting hole switch 6121B.

In the embodiment, the first starting port (center) 6120A and the first starting port (right) 6120B
These are collectively referred to as "first start port 6120A, 6120B", and the first start port switch 61
21A and the first start port switch 6121B are collectively referred to as "first start port switch 6121A,
It is also called "6121B".

The first start port switches 6121A and 6121B turn on the first start ports 6120A and 6120B.
When the entry (passage) of a gaming ball into the first start hole 6120A, 6120B is detected, start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for selecting the first effect, random number value for selecting the second effect, etc.) is extracted, and the extracted start information for the first special symbol is reserved up to the "first reserved number (e.g., 4)". When the start condition for the special symbol is established, the reserved start information for the first special symbol is used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. Also, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 6120A, 6120B, the first number of prize balls (e.g., 3) are paid out. However, when the start condition for the first start hole 6120A is satisfied, the first number of prize balls (e.g., 3) are paid out.
The number of winning balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into 6120B is not limited to this.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 6140 is located in the right side area 107 and is connected to the normal electric accessory unit 614 described later.
The second start hole 6140 is disposed below (downstream of) the first start hole 6140, so that a game ball hit to the right can enter the hole (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or cannot enter the hole). When a game ball enters the second start hole 6140, the game ball is detected by a second start hole switch 6141 (see FIG. 174 described later).

In this embodiment, the second starting hole 6140 is a normal electric role unit 6145
Since it is located downstream of (first starting hole (right) 6120B), when first starting hole (right) 6120B is in an open state, a game ball that flows down the right side area 107 enters first starting hole (right) 6120B located upstream before reaching second starting hole 6140, making it difficult for the ball to enter second starting hole 6140. This is also true when in a time-saving game state in which first starting hole (right) 6120B is likely to be in an open state.

When the second start hole switch 6141 detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 6140, the start information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information of the second special symbol (
The random numbers for determining a jackpot, the random number for a pattern, the random number for selecting a first effect, the random number for selecting a second effect, etc. are reserved up to a "second reserved number (e.g., 2)" which is less than the first reserved number. When the start condition of the special pattern is established, the reserved start information of the second special pattern is used for the hit determination process of the second special pattern. Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 6140, a second number of prize balls (e.g., 1) less than the first number of prize balls is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the second start hole 6140 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start hole 6140, the number of reserved balls that reserve start information is smaller than when a game ball enters the first start holes 6120A and 6120B, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is also set to be smaller.
The number of reserved balls or the number of prize balls may be set to be the same when a game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A or 6120B as when a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140.
It may be set so that when the game ball enters number 40, a larger number of reserved balls or a larger number of prize balls will be awarded.

(Passing gate)
The passage gate 6126 is located in the right area 107 and is connected to the normal electric accessory unit 614 described later.
5, and is positioned so that a gaming ball hit to the right can pass through it. The passing gate 6126 is also provided with a passing gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later) that detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 6126. The gaming ball that has passed through the passing gate 6126 is directed toward the normal electric role unit 6145 in the right area 10.
7 flows down.

When the passing gate switch 6127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 6126, the start information of the normal symbol is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, random number value of the normal symbol, etc.) is reserved up to a third reserved number (for example, four). When the start condition of the normal symbol is established, the reserved start information of the normal symbol is used for the winning determination process of the normal symbol (lottery for the normal symbol). Also, even if the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 6126, the gaming ball is not paid out. Note that when the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 6126,
When the ball passes through the reel, a predetermined number of game balls may be dispensed.

The pass gate 6126 may also function as a trigger for operating the consecutive operation device of the accessory. Here, the condition for transition to the big win game state is that both the condition device and the consecutive operation device of the accessory are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a big win is derived, the condition device may be activated but the consecutive operation device of the accessory may not be activated. Then, on the premise that the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the accessory may be activated by the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 6126, that is, the detection of a game ball by the pass gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later), to transition to the big win game state.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 6145 is located in the right area 107, above (upstream of) the second starting hole 6140, and below the passing gate 6126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it.
It is a unit that integrates a first starting hole (right) 6120B, a first starting hole switch 6121B that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole (right) 6120B, and a normal electric device 6146.

The normal electric device 6146 is a normal electric shutter 6147 of a protruding plate type that can move forward and backward, and a normal electric solenoid 6148 (see FIG. 174 described later) that operates the normal electric shutter 6147.
The normal electric device 6146, i.e., the normal electric shutter 6147, is in an open state in which the game ball can or easily enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B, and in a closed state in which the game ball can or easily enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B.
It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter 6120B.

The normal power shutter 6147 is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 100°) toward the second starting port 6140.
When the normal power shutter 6147 is in the open state, the normal power shutter 6147 is embedded in the game panel 6100 to expose the first starting hole (right).
When the normal power shutter 6147 is in the closed state, the normal power shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100 to close the first start opening (right) 6120B, and the first start opening (right) 6120B is opened, and game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and game balls rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 can enter the first start opening (right) 6120B.
When the normal power shutter 6147 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 is prevented from entering the second starting hole 61.
40 or to a small winning role unit 6150 described later. In place of the normal electric shutter 6147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a wing member that can move in the left and right directions, so-called an electric chute, may be used.

(Big Win Unit)
The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is disposed in the right area 107 above the passage gate 6126. The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is a unit body in which a first large prize winning hole 6131, a first large prize winning hole count switch 6132 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning hole 6131, and a jackpot accessory 6133 are integrated.

The first large prize winning hole 6131 is a prize winning hole that can be shifted from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the first large prize winning hole 6131 shifts from a closed state to an open state when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big win" is derived. When the first large prize winning hole 6131 is controlled to a big win game state, game balls up to a first specified number (e.g., 10 balls) can enter, and when a game ball enters the first large prize winning hole 6131, a number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) corresponding to the first large prize winning hole 6131 are paid out.

The jackpot role 6133 includes a jackpot shutter 6134 of a protruding plate type that can move forward and backward, and a jackpot solenoid 6135 for operating the jackpot shutter 6134 (see FIG. 1 described later).
The big win device 6133, i.e., the big win shutter 6134, is
An open state in which a game ball can enter the large prize opening 6131 or an easy open state in which a game ball can enter the large prize opening 6131 and a first large prize opening 613
The gate is configured to be capable of transitioning to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the gate.

The jackpot shutter 6134 is gently inclined (for example, 5
When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the open state, the jackpot shutter 6134 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the first large prize opening 6131 is in an open state, and game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and game balls rolling on the jackpot shutter 6134 can enter the first large prize opening 6131. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the jackpot shutter 6134 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the first large prize opening 6131 is in an open state.
100, the first large winning opening 6131 is closed, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 6131. Also, when the big win shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the big win shutter 6134 is guided to the downstream passing gate 6126.

In the "jackpot game state" in which the jackpot device 6133 is activated, the first jackpot winning hole 6131
The state transition from the closed state to the open state is performed up to the maximum number of rounds. When the maximum open time during which the first large prize winning hole 6131 is open for one round has elapsed or when a first specified number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls enter the first large prize winning hole 6131, the first large prize winning hole 6131 is closed.
31 is shifted from an open state to a closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, the jackpot game state ends. Since game balls are paid out in a number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) corresponding to the first large prize winning port 6131 every time a game ball enters the first large prize winning port 6131, the jackpot game state is a game state that makes it possible to pay out a large number of game balls.

(Small win unit)
The small win unit 6150 is located in the right side area 107, above the second starting hole 6140,
In addition, it is arranged below the normal electric role unit 6145.
Reference numeral 50 denotes a unit body which integrates a second large prize opening 6151, a second large prize opening count switch 6152 which detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 6151, and a small prize device 6153.

The second large prize winning opening 6151 is a prize winning opening that can be shifted from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the second large prize winning opening 6151 shifts from a closed state to an open state when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a "small win" is derived. The second large prize winning opening 6151 can receive up to a second specified number of game balls (e.g., 4 balls) when controlled to a small win game state, and when a game ball enters this second large prize winning opening 6151, the number of game balls (e.g., 14 balls) corresponding to the second large prize winning opening 6151 is paid out.

The small win unit 6150 is a small win shutter 6 of a protruding plate type that can move forward and backward.
154, and a small win solenoid 6155 (see FIG. 174 described later) for operating the small win shutter 6154. The small win role unit 6150, i.e., the small win shutter 6154, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters the second large winning opening 6151, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or has difficulty entering the second large winning opening 6151.

The small hit shutter 6154 is gently inclined (for example, 5
When the small win shutter 6154 is in the open state, the small win shutter 6154 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the second large winning opening 6151 is in an open state, and a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 or a game ball rolling on the small win shutter 6154 can enter the second large winning opening 6151. When the small win shutter 6154 is in the closed state, the small win shutter 6154 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the second large winning opening 6151 is in an open state.
100, the second large winning opening 6151 is closed, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 6151. Also, when the small winning shutter 6154 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the small winning shutter 6154 is guided to the second starting opening 6140 on the downstream side.

In the "small win game state" in which the small win gimmick unit 6150 is activated, the second large winning port 6151 transitions from a closed state to an open state a predetermined number of times.
For one small win game state, a predetermined number of opening times is completed, or the first big win game state is started.
A second specified number (e.g., 4 balls) that is less than the first specified number (e.g., 10 balls) is
When a ball enters the large prize opening 6151, the second large prize opening 6151 is shifted from an open state to a closed state, and one small prize game state ends.
The second large prize winning port 61 has a smaller number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) than the first large prize winning port 6131.
Since the number of prize balls (for example, 14 balls) corresponding to the number of 51 is paid out, the small win game state is a game state that makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.

In this embodiment, the second specified number of the small win game state (for example, 4) is set to be less than the first specified number of the big win game state (for example, 10), but the second specified number of the small win game state may be set to be the same as the first specified number of the big win game state, or may be set to be greater than the first specified number of the big win game state. However, it is preferable to set the second specified number of the small win game state to 10 or less.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 (e.g., 14) is set to be less than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131 (e.g., 15), but the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 may be set to be the same as the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131, or may be set to be greater than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131. However, it is desirable to set the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 to 15 or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first large prize opening 6131 and the second large prize opening 6151 are provided separately, but this is not limited to this, and the large prize opening that is opened when the large prize game control process is executed and the large prize opening that is opened when the small prize game control process is executed may be the same large prize opening.

[8-4. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG.
74 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 174, the sixth pachinko gaming machine is similar to the first pachinko gaming machine in that:
It mainly comprises a main control circuit 200 which controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 which controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the sixth pachinko gaming machine is different from the first pachinko gaming machine in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and arrangement of each of them will be described below.

[8-4-1. Main control circuit]
The sixth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the normal power solenoid 6148, the big win solenoid 6135, and the small win solenoid 6146 are connected to the main control circuit 200.
55. The configurations of the first start port switches 6121A, 6121B, the second start port switch 6141, the passing gate switch 6127, the first large prize port count switch 6132, and the second large prize port count switch 6152 are partially different.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 6148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 6147. When the normal power solenoid 6148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 6147 backward to open the first starting port (right) 6120B, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 6147 forward to close the first starting port (right) 6120B.

(jackpot solenoid)
The jackpot solenoid 6135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the jackpot shutter 6134. The jackpot solenoid 6135 is energized by the main CPU 201 (
When the main CPU 201 is not energized (when the main CPU 201 is OFF), the jackpot shutter 6134 is advanced forward and the first large prize opening 6131 is closed.

(Solenoid for small hits)
The small win solenoid 6155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the small win shutter 6154. The small win solenoid 6155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (
When the main CPU 201 is not energized (when the main CPU 201 is OFF), the small win shutter 6154 is advanced forward and the second large win opening 6151 is closed.

(First start switch)
The first start port switches 6121A and 6121B are through-type proximity switches that detect the entry of game balls into the first start ports 6120A and 6120B.
detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, and the first starting hole switch 6121
B detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

(Second start switch)
The second start port switch 6141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port switch 6140.

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 6127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the passing gate switch 6126.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 6132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 6131. When the first large prize opening count switch 6132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 6131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the first prize ball (e.g., 15 game balls) corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131.

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 6152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 6151. When the second large prize opening count switch 6152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 6151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per small win game state, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the second prize ball (e.g., 14 game balls) corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151.

[8-4-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LE, and a programmable logic circuit 306.
They have in common the inclusion of a D control circuit 306, a gadget control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differ in that they further include a button control circuit 310 and a performance button device 6310.

(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button device 6310. That is, the button control circuit 310 changes the operation mode of the effect button device 6310,
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for vibrating the effect button device 6310. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button device 6310 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

The button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to a player's operation detected by the effect button device 6310. When the button control circuit 310 inputs an operation signal from the effect button device 6310, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub-CPU 301.

(Performance button device)
As shown in FIG. 172, the effect button device 6310 includes a first effect operation unit 6311 and a second effect operation unit 6312.
In addition to having the performance operation unit 6312 and the operation drive unit 6313 as external components, the internal components (not shown) include a first operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the first performance operation unit 6311, a second operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the second performance operation unit 6312, a third operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the operation drive unit 6313, a rotation motor for rotating the operation drive unit 6313, a button solenoid for protruding the second performance operation unit 6312, and a vibration motor for vibrating the vibrating body.

[8-5. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 175 to 185. The sixth pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function,
In the following, the description of the setting function will be omitted.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, there are provided a "normal game state" in which a low probability game state and a non-time-saving game state are controlled, a "high probability time-saving game state" in which a high probability game state and a time-saving game state are controlled, a "high probability non-time-saving game state" in which a high probability game state and a non-time-saving game state are controlled, and a "low probability time-saving game state" in which a low probability game state and a time-saving game state are controlled, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 are not limited to these,
It is also possible to prevent any one of the game states from progressing among the normal game state, the high-probability time-shortened game state, the high-probability non-time-shortened game state, and the low-probability time-shortened game state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the high probability time-saving game state, the high probability non-time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state, right hitting is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 determines the regular game mode (for example, whether to hit right or left) by
For example, control for displaying in the display area of the display device 7 is executed.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first starting port and the second starting port are collectively referred to as "starting port",
The first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols". The winning judgment process of the first special symbol is also called "drawing of the first special symbol", the winning judgment process of the second special symbol is also called "drawing of the second special symbol", and the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are collectively called "drawing of the special symbol".
It is also called.

[8-5-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
175 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 175 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol winning determination table is a table for determining by lottery whether a winning combination is a "big win," a "small win," or a "miss."

The special symbol hit judgment table includes the type of special symbol (type of starting hole) and the probability flag (
Whether or not the probability of winning is increased) and the first start port 6120A, 6120B or the second start port 614
The random number value for determining a jackpot, which is extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering 0, and the hit/miss determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "minor hit determination value data", "miss determination value data") corresponding to "jackpot", "minor hit" or "miss" are specified in correspondence with each other as data used in the hit determination process of the special symbol. The total random number value for the jackpot determination random number value is 6553.
The number is 6.

As shown in Fig. 175, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the lottery for the first special symbol as "jackpot" or "miss" based on the probability variable flag and the random number value for determining the jackpot of the special symbol. Here, in the lottery for the first special symbol, when the probability variable flag is 1 (when the probability variable control is being executed), the random number value for determining the jackpot is specified so that the selection rate for determining the jackpot is higher than when the probability variable flag is 0 (when the probability variable control is being executed).

When the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 2
Based on the probability variable flag and the random number value for determining the probability variable of the special pattern, the random number value for determining the probability variable of the special pattern is determined as the result of the lottery for the second special pattern to be a "big win", a "small win", or a "miss". Here, in the lottery for the second special pattern, when the probability variable flag is 1, the random number value for determining the probability variable is specified so that the selection rate for determining the "big win" is higher than when the probability variable flag is 0, but the random number value for determining the probability variable is specified so that the selection rate for determining the "small win" is the same regardless of the probability variable flag.

In addition, when the sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the probability of a big win or/and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a big win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a big win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[8-5-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 176 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 176 is generated by the main control circuit 2
00 is stored in main ROM 202.

The special symbol winning determination table is a table for selecting the "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the symbols to be stopped.

The "selected symbol information" is symbol information for specifying a winning symbol determined according to the type of winning when the special symbol lottery result is a winning symbol, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops.

The special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol (type of starting hole) and the first starting hole 6120.
The random number value of the special symbol extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering the A, 6120B or the second starting hole 6140, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol are associated and specified. The random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

As shown in FIG. 176, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, if the winning/losing determination value data is the big win determination value data, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z1" with a selection rate of 30/100, selects the selected symbol information "z2" with a selection rate of 30/100, and selects the selected symbol information "z3" with a selection rate of 40/100 based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol.
The selected symbol information "z3" is selected with a selection rate of 00. When the selected symbol information "z1" is selected, "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command, when the selected symbol information "z2" is selected, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command, and when the selected symbol information "z3" is selected, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special pattern, if the winning/losing judgment value data is a losing judgment value data, the main CPU 201:
The selected symbol information "z4" is selected, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the winning/losing determination value data is the big win determination value data, the PU 201 selects the selected symbol information "
z5" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the winning/losing determination value data is small winning determination value data, the PU 201 selects the selected symbol information "
z6" and select "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main C
When the winning/losing judgment value data is loss judgment value data, the PU 201 selects the selected symbol information "
z7" and select "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Although the sixth pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM of the main control circuit 200
The special symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is stored in the first special symbol display unit 16. The special symbol stop mode determination table is used to determine the stop mode of the special symbol when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.
This is a table that is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first or second special symbol display section 163 (see FIG. 174) in accordance with the selected symbol information. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 output the display mode of a big win, a small win, or a miss based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, the decorative symbol stop mode determination table that corresponds to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300.
It is stored in 302.

[8-5-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
177 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The hit type determination table is a table that determines the "state of the big hit game state," the "state of the small hit game state," and the "state of the subsequent game state (probability change flag, number of probability change times, time-saving flag, number of time-saving times)."

The "opening mode of the big win game state" is the first big win port 6 that is opened during the big win game state.
In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 28 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot gaming state are specified in advance, and the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is shown as the opening mode of the first large prize winning port 6131. Note that the maximum opening time per round may be determined,
The closing time of each round (round interval time) may be determined. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

The "opening mode of the small win game state" is the second large winning port 6 that is opened during the small win game state.
In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small win game state are predefined, and indicate the maximum number of openings in the small win game state. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined, or the closing time for each opening may be determined.

Here, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (for example, 28 seconds) is
The maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the small win game state is set to be shorter, and the first large prize winning hole 6131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode" in the big win game state, and the second large prize winning hole 6131 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is less advantageous than the first opening mode in the small win game state.
It can be said that the big prize slot 6151 is opened.

In addition, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 3R x 1
The total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, one small win x 4 (second specified number)) is smaller than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, one small win x 4 (second specified number)).
The number of winning balls in the big win game state is set to be less than the number of winning balls in the small win game state (14 balls x 14 (number of winning balls) = 56 balls), so it can be said that the big win game state is the advantageous "first special game," while the small win game state is the "second special game" which is less profitable than the big win game state.

"Subsequent game state status" refers to the game state status after the end of the big win game state,
The settings for "high probability flag", "number of high probability flags", "time-saving flag" and "number of time-saving flags" are shown.

The "probability change flag" is a flag indicating whether the game is in a low probability game state or a high probability game state, with a probability change flag of 0 indicating a "low probability game state" and a probability change flag of 1 indicating a "high probability game state." The "probability change count" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the high probability game state, that is, the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed.

The "time-saving flag" is a flag indicating whether the game is in a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state, with a time-saving flag of 0 indicating a "non-time-saving game state" and a time-saving flag of 1 indicating a "time-saving game state." The "time-saving count" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the time-saving game state, that is, the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed. In this embodiment, the "time-saving count" indicates the game state at the time when a jackpot is determined to be a hit (whether it is a "normal game state" or "other").
The winning type determination table is configured so that different times of time reduction can be determined depending on the game state (whether the game state is a winning type or not).

As shown in FIG. 177, in the winning type determination table, for the selected symbol information, a "large win game state opening mode", a "small win game state opening mode", and subsequent game state modes such as a "high probability flag", "number of high probability flags", "time-saving flag" and "number of time-saving flags" are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 determines, based on the selected symbol information, the "opening mode of the big win game state" and
The "opening mode of the small win game state", the "probability change flag", the "probability change number of times", the "time-saving flag" and the "time-saving number of times" are determined. Note that if the lottery result of the special symbol is a "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol information is "z4" or "z7"), the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are not determined, so that the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are not determined, so that the mode of the small ...
However, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "miss", the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state, and the mode of the subsequent game state are not determined.
This is shown in FIG.

When the main CPU 201 determines that the special symbol is a "jackpot" as a result of the lottery, it refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 before the start of the jackpot game state. When the selected symbol information is "z1" corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol, it determines the "opening mode of the jackpot game state".
When the selected pattern information is "z2" corresponding to a jackpot with the first special pattern, "5R" is determined as the "opening mode of the jackpot game state", when the selected pattern information is "z3" corresponding to a jackpot with the first special pattern, "3R" is determined as the "opening mode of the jackpot game state", and when the selected pattern information is "z5" corresponding to a jackpot with the second special pattern, "2R" is determined as the "opening mode of the jackpot game state".

Then, after the end of the jackpot game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 177, and when the selected symbol information is "z1 to z3" corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol, it determines "1" indicating a high probability game state as the "probability change flag", and determines "number of probabilities change"
The "time-saving flag" is set to "1" indicating a time-saving game state, and the "time-saving count" is set to "100." When the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to a jackpot of the second special symbol, the "probability change flag" is set to "1" indicating a high probability game state.
The number of times of the special symbol is determined to be "120 times", and the time-saving flag is determined to be "1" indicating the time-saving game state. Then, the selected symbol information "z
In the case of "5", if the game state at the time of winning when it is judged that the jackpot has been won is the normal game state, "100 times" is determined as the "number of times of time reduction", and if the game state at the time of winning when it is judged that the jackpot has been won is not the normal game state, "10,000 times" is determined as the "number of times of time reduction".

In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that a "small win" is the result of the lottery for the second special pattern, it refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 177 before the start of the small win game state, and when the selected pattern information is "z6", it determines "6 times" as the "opening mode of the small win game state".

In addition, after the end of the small win game state, the selected symbol information "
z5", the mode of the game state thereafter is not determined. In other words, the game state does not transition (change) with the small win game state as a trigger.

In this way, in this embodiment, after all big win game states are completed, the game transitions to a "high probability time-saving game state" in which both the time-saving game state and the high probability game state are executed. Therefore, after all big win game states are completed, the chance of transitioning to a big win game state again is increased (providing a so-called chance of consecutive wins), and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, after all jackpot game states have ended, the number of times of probability change in the high probability game state (120 times) is not necessarily set to a number that guarantees a transition to the jackpot game state. Therefore, by making the player expect a transition to the jackpot game state before the number of times the special pattern is variable displayed reaches the number of probability changes, the player can further increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the number of time-saving times (100) is set to be shorter than the number of chance times (120).
After the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the game state transitions to a "high probability time-limited game state" in the first half (1 to 100 times), and then, if the game state does not transition to a jackpot game state again, the game state can transition to a "high probability non-time-limited game state" in the second half (101 to 120 times).

In particular, in this embodiment, when the game moves to the "high probability non-time-saving game state" in the latter half, as described later, it is possible to enter a "small win RUSH" in which the expected value of the number of game balls paid out per number of balls shot per unit time may exceed 1. Here, the number of times of probability change in the high probability game state (12
If the number of times (0 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times that guarantees a transition to a jackpot game state, the expected value of transitioning to a jackpot game state again (the expected value of a so-called consecutive win) decreases as the number of times the variable display of the special symbol approaches the number of times of the probability change, and the interest in the game generally decreases. However, in this embodiment, the expected value of entering the "small win RUSH" is increased as the number of times the variable display of the special symbol approaches the number of times of the probability change, so that the expected value of entering the "small win RUSH" complements the decrease in the expected value of transitioning to the jackpot game state, and the interest in the game can be maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the game state at the time of winning when it is judged that a jackpot has been won after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol is not the "normal game state", that is, if the game state is the "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state" when the regular game mode is the right-hand hit, the number of time-saving times (10,000 times) of the time-saving game state is set to the number of times that guarantees the transition to the jackpot game state. Therefore, when the "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state" (especially the "high probability non-time-saving game state") is in the right-hand hit, the player can expect a jackpot of the second special symbol, and the interest of the game can be further increased.

Here, in this embodiment, the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 6140, which is the chance to draw the second special symbol, mainly occurs when the player is in a non-time-saving game state where the ball is being hit from the right, i.e., in a "high probability non-time-saving game state." For this reason, in the "high probability non-time-saving game state" that can be entered in the latter half after the end of a jackpot game state, i.e., in a "small jackpot rush," the player is made to expect the payout of game balls, and is also made to expect a jackpot of the second special symbol that guarantees a transition to the next jackpot game state, thereby further increasing the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot determined after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol is the "normal game state", the number of time-saving times (100 times) of the time-saving game state is not necessarily set to the number of times that guarantees the transition to the jackpot game state. This is because, in the "normal game state", the left-handed shot is performed as a regular game mode, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 6140 is not recognized as a game characteristic of this embodiment, and corresponds to an "irregular jackpot".

In this embodiment, when the game state at the time of winning when a jackpot is determined to have occurred after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special pattern is the "normal game state" (when it is an irregular jackpot), the number of time-saving times for the time-saving game state (100 times) is set to the same number as the number of time-saving times (100 times) for the time-saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special pattern, but it may be set to a number less than the number of time-saving times for the time-saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special pattern, and the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times may not be set (the number of time-saving times may be 0).

[8-5-4. Game state transition diagram]
Next, the transition of the game state explained in Fig. 177 will be explained in detail with reference to Fig. 178. Fig. 178 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the "normal game state", left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" and "low probability time-saving game state",
In this case, hitting from the right is considered the correct playing mode.

(Normal gameplay state)
In normal game play when hitting from the left, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting hole (middle) 6120A (see Figure 173).

In the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole (middle) 6120A and a "jackpot" is determined by drawing lots for the first special pattern, after the jackpot game state for the first special pattern ends, the game state transitions to a "high probability time-saving game state" in which the number of time-saving times is set to "100 times" and the number of special times is set to "120 times."

(High probability time-saving game state)
In the high probability time-saving game state in which the right hand is hit, the passing gate switch 6126 is configured to allow the game ball to pass, and the time-saving game state is controlled, so that the passing gate switch 612
When the game ball passes through 6, the first starting hole (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric device 6146, allowing the game ball to enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B (see Figure 173).

In the high-probability time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B and a "jackpot" is determined by drawing lots for the first special pattern, after the jackpot game state of the first special pattern ends, the number of time-saving periods and the number of special periods are reset, and the game will transition again to a high-probability time-saving game state (the so-called consecutive wins).

Here, in the high probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled, so that the first starting hole (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric device 6146,
It is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 6140 provided downstream of the starting hole (right) 6120B. For this reason, in a high probability time-saving game state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for a second special symbol triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 6140, and a lottery for a first special symbol is drawn when a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

In the high-probability time-saving game state, if the special symbol is not determined to be a jackpot in the drawing and the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches the set number of time-saving times (100 time-saving times), control of the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to a "high-probability non-time-saving game state."

(High probability non-time-saving game state)
In the high probability non-time-saving game state where right-hand play is performed, since the time-saving game state is not controlled, the first starting hole (right) 6120B is almost closed by the normal electric device 6146, and the game ball rolling on the normal electric shutter 6147 is guided to the small win device unit 6150 or the second starting hole 6140, so that the game ball can enter the second large winning hole 6151 or the second starting hole 6140 (see Figure 173).

For this reason, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for the first special pattern triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole (right) 6120B, and a lottery for the second special pattern is held when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140.

In the high probability non-time shortening game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 and a "small win" is determined by the lottery for the second special symbol, the second large winning hole 6151 is opened, and the number of prize balls (e.g., 14 balls) corresponding to the second large winning hole 6151 is paid out each time a game ball enters the second large winning hole 6151. In the lottery for the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 175, the probability of a "small win" being determined is higher than a "miss", so that a "small win RUSH" to be described later is executed, and the number of game balls obtained increases.

In the high probability non-time shortening game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 and a "jackpot" is determined by drawing the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state of the second special symbol ends, the number of time shortening times is set to "10,000 times", which guarantees that the game state will be transitioned to the jackpot game state.
The game will transition to a "high probability time-saving play state" in which the number of chance times is set to "120 times."

In the high probability non-time-limited play state, if the special symbol lottery is not judged as a jackpot, and the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the first special symbol jackpot play state is set to the number of probability variations (12 of the number of probability variations).
When the number of spins reaches 0, the control of the high probability game state ends, and the game returns to the "normal game state" in which the left hand is hit.

(Low probability time-saving game state)
In the low probability time-saving game state where the right hand is hit, if the special symbol is not determined to be a jackpot in the "high probability time-saving game state" that is entered after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol, and the number of times that the special symbol is drawn after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol is the set number of times of probability change (12 times of probability change
When the game state is reached (0 innings completed), the game state is transitioned to.

In the low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled in the same manner as in the high-probability time-saving game state. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the passing gate switch 6126, the normal electric device 614
6 opens the first starting hole (right) 6120B, allowing a game ball to enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B (see Figure 173).

Furthermore, in the low-probability time-saving game state, as in the high-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled, so it is difficult to draw a lottery for the second special pattern triggered by the game ball entering the second starting hole 6140, and instead, a lottery for the first special pattern is held when the game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

Even if the game transitions to this low-probability time-saving game state, since the remaining number of time-saving times is "9,880," it is guaranteed that the time-saving game state will not end and that the game will transition again to a jackpot game state.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the contents of the lottery for special symbols (see FIG. 175), the rules for transitioning to the game state (see FIG. 177), etc. are organically linked to create unprecedented gameplay and to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the "high probability time-saving gaming state,""high probability non-time-saving gaming state," and "low probability time-saving gaming state," in which right-hitting is the normal gaming mode, are collectively referred to as the "right-hitting gaming state" as appropriate.

[8-5-5. Special symbol variation pattern table]
179 to 181 are examples of a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbols of the sixth pachinko game machine. FIG. 179 is an example of a first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 180 is an example of a second half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 181 is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-hitting game state (any of the game states of "high probability time-shortening game state", "high probability non-time-shortening game state" or "low probability time-shortening game state") of the sixth pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols shown in FIG. 179 to FIG. 181 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko game machine.

The "variation pattern of the special symbol" of the sixth pachinko game machine is composed of two combinations: a "first half variation pattern" corresponding to the first half of the variable display of the special symbol, and a "second half variation pattern" corresponding to the second half of the variable display of the special symbol. As in the first pachinko game machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern may be combined into one variation pattern. In the sixth pachinko game machine, the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern are also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern".

(First half variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
As shown in FIG. 179, the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state is as follows:
The type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the result of the lottery for the special symbol, and the first starting hole 61
The random number value for selecting the first performance, which is obtained based on the ball entering 20A, 6120B or the second starting hole 6140, is associated with a "first half fluctuation pattern number" indicating the first half fluctuation pattern, and the "first half variable display time" of the special symbol in the first half fluctuation pattern. The random number value for selecting the first performance is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 179 shows the performance content for ease of understanding.

In the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, and determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbols and the first half variable display time of the special symbols based on the type of the special symbols (type of the start port), the lottery result of the special symbols, and the random number value for the first performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbols and the first half variable display time of the special symbols based on the type of the special symbols (type of the start port), the lottery result of the special symbols, and the random number value for the first performance selection.
When it is based on the game ball entering 0A, 6120B, the first half fluctuation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special pattern are determined, and when it is based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 6140, the first half fluctuation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special pattern are determined.

Here, the "pseudo consecutive" shown in the "Notes" column of FIG. 179 indicates a "pseudo consecutive performance" in which the decorative symbols displayed while the special symbols are displayed variably are temporarily stopped and then the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are displayed variably again. The "temporary stop display" refers to a mode in which the decorative symbols are slightly swayed or slightly deformed, making the player see that the decorative symbols are stopped. This pseudo consecutive performance can be performed multiple times, and the "pseudo consecutive X times" indicates the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed. Also, the "pseudo consecutive teasing" indicates a performance that teases whether or not the pseudo consecutive performance will be performed.
"NR" stands for "Normal Reach.""LongVariation" refers to a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long.

"Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Extreme Showdown" are specific effects of the same type, in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 a specified number of times to collect up to a specific number (10) of "character icons." The "first half icon count" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed before the Road to the Final Battle or the Road to the Extreme Showdown is performed. The Road to the Final Battle, the Road to the Extreme Showdown, and character icons will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 220 to 222.

According to the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (when the first special symbol is displayed), the first half fluctuation pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to either "normal fluctuation,""X pseudo consecutive times,""Road to the decisive battle," or "Road to the ultimate decisive battle" are determined as the first half fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, in "pseudo consecutive X times",
The random number value for selecting the first effect is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "one pseudo consecutive hit"<"two pseudo consecutive hits"<"three pseudo consecutive hits".

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, in the "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Final Battle",
The random number value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Road to the Final Battle"<"Road to the Ultimate Final Battle."

In addition, according to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG.
When it is based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 6140 (when it is the second special symbol), the first half fluctuation pattern of "long fluctuation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined.

Here, in the sixth pachinko game machine, in the normal game mode, hitting from the left is the regular game mode, and when hitting from the left, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second start hole 6140. However, if hitting from the right is performed as an unintended game mode, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second start hole 6140. However, according to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game mode shown in FIG. 179,
When it is based on the entry of a game ball into the reel, a first half variation pattern of "long variation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined, so that the number of times the second special symbol is drawn per unit time is extremely small, and it is configured so that there is no practical advantage for the player to hit to the right in a normal game state.

(Late-stage variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game mode)
As shown in FIG. 180, the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state is as follows:
The first half variable pattern number, the lottery result of the special pattern, and the first starting port 6120A, 6
The random number value for selecting the second effect, which is obtained based on the ball entering 120B or the second starting hole 6140, is associated with a "second half fluctuation pattern number" indicating the second half fluctuation pattern, and a "second half variable display time" of the special symbol in the second half fluctuation pattern. The random number value for selecting the second effect is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 180 shows the content of the effect for ease of understanding.

When the main CPU 201 is in the normal game state, it refers to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, and determines the already determined first half variation pattern number,
Based on the result of the lottery for the special symbol and the random number value for the second performance selection, the main CPU 201 determines the latter half variable pattern of the special symbol and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol.
When the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, the second half variable display pattern and the second half variable display time of the first special symbol are determined.
The latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol will be determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern during normal game play, it transmits a special symbol fluctuation pattern command combining the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern to the sub-CPU 301 so that the type of the special symbol can be identified. Specifically, it transmits a 3-byte fluctuation pattern command (e.g., 83H00H00H) consisting of "83H", "first half fluctuation pattern number", and "second half fluctuation pattern number" as the "first special symbol fluctuation pattern command", and transmits a 3-byte fluctuation pattern command consisting of "83H", "first half fluctuation pattern number", and "second half fluctuation pattern number" as the "second special symbol fluctuation pattern command".
The three numbers are "84H", "first half fluctuation pattern number" and "second half fluctuation pattern number".
The sub-CPU 301 transmits a variable pattern command (e.g., 84HF1H00H) of bytes. Then, in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 calculates a total variable display time by adding up the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time.
Based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from , the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 are controlled.

Here, "none" shown in the "Notes" column in FIG. 180 means that the latter half of the special symbol's variable pattern and the latter half of the variable display time are not determined, and if the latter half of the special symbol's variable pattern is not determined, only the first half of the special symbol's variable pattern will be executed. In addition, "Normal Reach", "Ninja Reach", "Confrontation Reach" and "Great Battle Reach" are
In normal game mode, this is a reach effect that suggests that the result of the special pattern lottery may be a jackpot. The "Number of icons in the second half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed after the path to the final battle or the path to the ultimate battle is performed. This showdown reach and character icons will be described in detail later.

According to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B, the latter half variation pattern of the first special symbol is “none (only the first half variation)”, “normal reach”, “ninja reach”,
A second half variable pattern and a second half variable display time corresponding to either the "confrontation reach" or the "great battle reach" are determined.

According to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, in the "Normal Reach", "Ninja Reach", "Confrontation Reach" and "Great Battle Reach",
The random number value for selecting the second performance is set so that the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: "Normal Reach"<"NinjaReach"<"ConfrontationReach"<"Great Battle Reach".

In addition, according to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG.
When the game is based on the ball entering the second starting hole 6140, the latter half variable pattern and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined.
When the game ball enters number 40, only the first half fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "long fluctuation", which is the first half fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, is executed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in right-hand play state)
Fig. 181(a) is an example of a first half variation pattern table of a special symbol in a right-hitting game state (any of the game states of "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state") in the sixth pachinko game machine. Fig. 181(b) is an example of a second half variation pattern table of a special symbol in a right-hitting game state in the sixth pachinko game machine, but in this embodiment, the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined in the right-hitting game state, and it is not necessary to have this table, but it is illustrated for convenience in order to clearly show that the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined in the right-hitting game state.

As shown in Figure 181 (a), the first half variation pattern table of the special pattern in the right-hand play state corresponds to the type of special pattern (type of starting port), the winning or losing result of the special pattern lottery, the random number value for selecting the first performance obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 6120A, 6120B or the second starting port 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variable display time" of the special pattern in the first half variation pattern.

When in a right-hand play state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-hand play state shown in Fig. 181 (a) and determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbols and the first half variable display time of the special symbols based on the type of special symbols (type of starting hole), the lottery result of the special symbols, and the random number value for the first performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbols when based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting holes 6120A and 6120B, and determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special symbols when based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 6140.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol during a right-hit game state, it does not determine the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time, and determines the default second half variation pattern number (00H) indicating that the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern are not executed.
The main CPU 201 transmits a special symbol variation pattern command combining the above to the sub-CPU 301. When the main CPU 201 is in a right-hit game state, the main CPU 201 calculates the first half variable display time as the total variable display time. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Here, the "Battle Challenge", "Battle Reach", "Door Opening Effect" and "Open Eye Effect" shown in the "Notes" column of Fig. 181(a) are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result of the special symbol may be a jackpot in the right-hand play state. Also, the "Ultra-Shortened Variation" is a variation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely short.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hand play state shown in Fig. 181 (a), when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (when the first special symbol is present), the first half variation pattern of the first special symbol and the first half variable display time corresponding to either "super shortened variation", "battle challenge" or "battle reach" are determined. Therefore, "battle challenge" and "battle reach" are also reach effects that suggest that the lottery result of the first special symbol in the right-hand play state may be a jackpot.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), in the "Battle Challenge" and "Battle Reach",
The first one is "Battle Challenge"<"BattleReach" so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in that order.
A random number is set for selecting the performance.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 (when the second special symbol is present),
The first half of the special pattern is a "super shortened variation", "door opening effect" and "eye opening effect".
The first half variable pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to either of the above are determined.
The "door opening effect" and "eyes opening effect" are also reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the second special pattern may be a jackpot when playing from the right.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hitting game state shown in FIG. 181(a), in the "door opening performance" and "eye opening performance",
The random number value for selecting the first effect is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "door opening effect"<"eye opening effect".

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), when the reach effect is not performed, the first half variation pattern of "ultra-short variation" in which the variable display time of the special symbols is set to be extremely short is determined. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the first half variation pattern for performing the reach effect is not determined, and all are "
The first half fluctuation pattern of the "ultra-shortening fluctuation" is determined.

For this reason, in the right-hit game state, unlike the normal game state, the number of times the first special symbol is drawn and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn per unit time are increased so that it is practically beneficial for the player to perform right-hit play in the right-hit game state.

Here, the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 6140, which is the trigger for the selection of the second special symbol, is mainly triggered by the high probability non-time-saving game state, which is one of the right-hand play states, and the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be judged as a "small win" (see FIG. 175), and if the lottery result for the second special symbol is a "small win," it is possible to immediately transition the second large winning hole 6151 to an open state (see FIG. 181). Therefore, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, a "small win RUSH" can be realized that increases the rate at which the game ball enters the second large winning hole 6151 per unit time.

[8-5-6. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
182 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 182 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss" is obtained based on the game state and the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol hits, which is extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 6126.

The winning judgment table for the normal symbol shown in FIG. 182 includes the game state, the range (width) of the random number value for the winning judgment of the normal symbol, and the winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol missing").
The above are specified in correspondence with each other.

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 182, and determines winning/losing judgment value data based on the game state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol winning judgment.

In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the random number value for determining whether or not the extracted normal symbol is a winning symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning/losing determination value data is "normal symbol winning determination value data".
201, if the random number value for determining the winning of the extracted normal pattern is between 1 and 99,
The result is judged as "miss" and the judgment value data is determined as "miss judgment value data."

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, when the random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is selected is any one of 0 to 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and determines the win/loss determination value data as "normal symbol win determination value data."
When the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the PU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

[8-5-7. Normal symbol determination table]
FIG. 183 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 is generated by the main control circuit 2
00 is stored in main ROM 202.

The normal symbol determination table includes the above-mentioned normal symbol winning/losing determination value data and the passing gate 6126.
This is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selection pattern command when hitting a normal symbol" that determines the stopping pattern of the normal symbol based on the random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the gaming ball passes through.

The "regular symbol winning symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol of the regular symbol, which is determined according to the type of regular symbol winning symbol, when the result of the regular symbol winning determination process is a regular symbol winning symbol.

The normal pattern determination table shown in Figure 183 specifies the win/lose determination value data for the normal pattern ('normal pattern win' or 'miss'), the pattern random number value for the normal pattern, and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern wins.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, and determines the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol is hit, based on the winning/losing determination value data for the normal symbol and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 183, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning/losing determination value data for the normal pattern, for example, the selection pattern command when the normal pattern is won is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained as a result of the winning judgment process of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 0 to 49, and selects "fz2" as the normal symbol winning selection symbol command if the normal symbol random number value is any of 50 to 100.
If the result is either 00 or 100, select "fz2" as the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is hit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko game machine, the "selection pattern command when a normal symbol hits" is selected based on the normal symbol hit/miss judgment value data (the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process) and the normal symbol random number value, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal symbol (see FIG. 182) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal symbol, and then refers to the normal symbol judgment table (see FIG. 183) and determines the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal symbol and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

[8-5-8. Normal pattern type determination table]
184 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 (normal electric shutter 6147) according to the game status and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is hit.

The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 184 specifies the game state, the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 in correspondence with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol is hit, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146.
The sub-CPU 301 transmits an opening pattern command for a normal electric role corresponding to the opening pattern of the normal electric role.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in a non-time-saving play state and the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz1" or "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "01H" of the normal electric device 6146, and determines 210 msec as the opening time of the normal electric device 6146 corresponding to that opening pattern.

Therefore, when the game is not in a time-saving mode, regardless of the normal symbol selection command, an unfavorable opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 is determined, and the first starting hole (right)
It has become difficult or impossible for the ball to land in 6120B.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving game state is active and the selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz1" or "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "02H" of the normal electric device 6146, and determines 5820 msec as the opening time of the normal electric device 6146 corresponding to that opening pattern.

Therefore, when the time-saving game state is in effect, the advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 is determined regardless of the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and the first starting hole (right) 6
It is possible to insert a game ball into 120B.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 is configured to open only once, but it may be configured to open multiple times by setting a wait time.

[8-5-9. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
185 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal pattern variation pattern table shown in Figure 185 corresponds to the game state, the win/lose judgment value data for the normal pattern, the pattern selection command when the normal pattern is hit, the normal pattern variation pattern, and the variable display time of the normal pattern.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185, and determines the normal pattern variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal pattern based on the game status, the win/lose judgment value data of the normal pattern, and the pattern selection command when the normal pattern is hit.

Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects to be displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.
Controls the sound effects output from

In this embodiment, a relatively short variable display time of the normal symbol is determined so that the number of times the normal symbol is drawn per unit time is large. In particular, in the time-saving game state, if the result of the drawing of the normal symbol is a "win", the first start hole (right) 6120B is immediately opened.
It is possible to transition to an open state, and the first starting port (right) 6 per unit time
The rate at which game balls enter 120B can be increased.

[8-6. Main control processing]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are similar to those in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and sub-control circuit process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and sub-control circuit process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Incidentally, some of the processing performed in the special pattern control processing, normal pattern control processing and sub control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[8-6-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 186. Fig. 186 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 186, the main CPU 201 first executes the second
The control state number of the special symbol is loaded. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S6001, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process,
Prior to the process of S6001, an address setting process is performed in which the addresses of the work areas and the like of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 are set in a predetermined register.

Also, although not shown, the main CPU 201 checks the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol when executing the special symbol control process. If the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a demo display command for the first special symbol, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a demo display command for the second special symbol. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. If the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance if the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol.

In addition, although the sixth pachinko game machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub-CPU 301 mainly controls the presentation of the main special symbol by using one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the main special symbol and the other as the sub-special symbol. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state and the time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state and low-probability time-saving game state), and the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-probability non-time-saving game state. The sub-CPU 301 then performs the display of the decorative symbol and the display of the character, etc., for the main special symbol, and the sound presentation, etc., for the main special symbol. For example, when the result of the hit determination process of the sub-special symbol is, for example, a big hit, the presentation of the main special symbol may be performed while the presentation of the sub-special symbol is performed.

In S6002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed, based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6001.

If it is determined in S6002 that the timing for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is not yet reached (if NO is determined in S6002), that is, if any processing related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6003. For example, during the execution of the big win game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol,
The result is O.

In S6003, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S6003, the process proceeds to S6004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6002 that it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed (if S6002 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6004.

In S6004, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6004, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6005.

In S6005, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variably displayed, based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6004.

If it is determined in S6005 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is not yet reached (if NO is determined in S6005), that is, if any processing related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6006. For example, during the execution of the big win game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol,
The result is O.

In S6006, the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S6006, the process proceeds to S6007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6005 that it is time for the first special symbol to start being variably displayed (if S6005 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6007.

In S6007, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S6007, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6008.

In S6008, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed, based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6007.

If it is determined in S6008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (if S6008 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6008 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S6008 is a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the second special symbol has been executed and the variable display can be started, the main CPU 201 returns to S60.
Move to 09.

In S6009, the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S6009, the process proceeds to S6010.

In S6010, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6010, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6011.

In S6011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variably displayed, based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6010.

If it is determined in S6011 that the timing for starting the variable display of the first special symbol has not yet begun (if S6011 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process.
The process returns to the main control process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S6011 is determined as YES), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been executed and the variable display can be started, the main CPU 201 returns to S60.
Move to 12.

In S6012, the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol management process. As described above, the details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.
After executing the process of S6012, 01 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control process (see Figures 20 to 23).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S6
It is preferable to perform steps S6001 to S6012 within an interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the special pattern management process described below is executed in the following order of priority: when any process related to the second special pattern is being executed, when any process related to the first special pattern is being executed, when no process related to the second special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started, when no process related to the first special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started.

[8-6-2. Special design management process]
Next, referring to FIG. 187, in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186), S6003 and S6
The special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6006, S6009 and S6012 will be described below. Fig. 187 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

For example, the special symbol management process is executed in step S6003 or S6009 during the special symbol control process.
When the special pattern management process is called and executed in S6006 or S6012 during the special pattern control process, the second special pattern is the target for processing, and when the special pattern management process is called and executed in S6006 or S6012 during the special pattern control process, the first special pattern is the target for processing.

The numbers in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG.
The control state number of the special symbol to be processed. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S6
021).

If it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (S6021 is N
In the case of O judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process, and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S602
1 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6022.

In S6022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol.
After executing the process of S6022, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S6023.
The process from 6023 onwards is carried out.

In S6023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This process of S6023 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 188. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 performs the process of S6024.
Move to.

In S6024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S6024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to Figures 189 and 190. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S6025.

In S6025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process.
The process of 025 is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Fig. 191. When the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6026.

In S6026, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening preparation process.
The process of 026 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to Fig. 193. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6027.

In S6027, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening control process.
The process of 027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this special prize opening control process will be described later with reference to Fig. 194. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6028.

In S6028, the main CPU 201 performs a big win end process.
The process is carried out when the control state number of the special symbol is "5." Details of this big win end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After completing the processes of S6023 to S6028, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186). If the special symbol management process is called in S6003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6004 and returns to S6005.
If it is called in S6006, the process returns to S6007; if it is called in S6009, the process returns to S6010; if it is called in S6012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[8-6-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the target of the process. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the target of the process.

As shown in FIG. 188, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6031).

If it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (S60
31 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is “0” (
If the determination in S6031 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6032.

In S6032, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value, and judges whether the special symbol pause flag is off or not based on the loaded special symbol pause flag value. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S6032, even if S6031 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is established), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, is on (if S6032 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process is terminated without proceeding.

If it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., ON (if NO is determined in S6032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S60
32 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6033.

In S6033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. In the shift process of the start information of the first special symbol, which is the processing target of the first special symbol, since the reserved number of the first special symbol is four, the first special symbol start memory area (
The start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the first special symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (3). In addition, in the shift process of the start information of the second special symbol, which is the processing target of the second special symbol, since the reserved number of the second special symbol is two, the start information stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the second special symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the second special symbol start memory area (2) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (3).
The start information stored in the main CPU is shifted to the second special symbol start memory area (1).
After executing the process of S6033, the process of the communication device 201 proceeds to S6034.

In S6034, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to a special symbol winning judgment table (see FIG. 175) and performs a special symbol winning judgment process based on the game state (presence or absence of a probability change flag) and the special symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the special symbol judgment area (0). In this embodiment, the first special symbol is judged to be a winning symbol or a losing symbol, and the second special symbol is judged to be a winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol. In addition, the main CPU 201
If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON, and if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit flag is set to ON. After executing the process of S6034, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6035.

In S6035, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol determination process.
The result of the special symbol hit determination process (S6034) (for example, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss)
In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 176) is referenced, and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose) is determined.
Based on the random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0), the "selected symbol information" and the "symbol designation command" are determined. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, it is not necessary to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, but multiple types of misses may be provided and the stop symbol may be determined when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. After executing the process of S6035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6036.

In S6036, the main CPU 201 executes a win type determination process.
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (small hit or big hit), for example, this process determines the type of the hit. In this process, the hit type determination table (see FIG. 177) is referenced and the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol information" determined in the special symbol determination process (S6035). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of hits,
There may be one type of big win, or multiple types of small win. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of win, multiple types of other wins (e.g., time-saving wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. After executing the process of S6036, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6037.

In S6037, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process of determining a variation pattern of the special symbol. In the process of determining a variation pattern of the special symbol, first, a process of determining a variation pattern of the first half is performed, and then a process of determining a variation pattern of the second half is performed.

In the first half fluctuation pattern determination process, if the game is in a normal game state, the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 179 is determined, and if the game is in a right-hand game state, the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 181 (a) is determined. The first half fluctuation pattern table of the determined special symbol is referred to, and the result of the hit determination process of the above-mentioned special symbol (win/lose) and the special symbol determination area (0) are determined.
and the random number value for selecting the first effect stored in the memory, the first half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

In the latter half variation pattern determination process, if the game is in a normal game state, the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 180 is referenced, and the latter half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the first half variation pattern determined in the first half variation pattern determination process, the judgment result (win or lose) of the hit judgment process of the special symbol described above, and the random number value for the second performance selection stored in the special symbol judgment area (0). In addition, if the game is in a right-hitting game state, a default latter half variation pattern number (00H) is determined, which indicates that the latter half variation pattern is not executed. After executing the process of S6037, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6038.

In S6038, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbols. In this process, in the normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 179 and FIG. 180 is referenced, and the total variable display time is calculated by adding up the first half variable display time of the first half variable pattern determined in the first half variable pattern determination process and the second half variable display time of the second half variable pattern determined in the second half variable pattern determination process. In addition, in the right-hand play state, the first half variable pattern table shown in FIG. 181(a) is referenced, and the first half variable display time of the first half variable pattern determined in the first half variable pattern determination process is calculated as the total variable display time. Then, the calculated total variable display time is set as the waiting time of the special symbols in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display units 163 and 164 are caused to start variable display of the special symbols. This waiting time of the special symbols is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. The main CPU 201 performs S6
After executing the process of S6038, the process proceeds to S6039.

In S6039, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the number of times of the time-saving probability change. In this process, it is determined whether the probability change flag is 1 (high probability game state), and if the probability change flag is 1, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of the probability change. Note that if the probability change flag is 1, the number of times of the probability change is not subtracted.
Also, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is 1 (time-saving game state), and if the time-saving flag is 1, the number of time-saving times is subtracted by 1. Note that if the time-saving flag is 0, the number of time-saving times is not subtracted.

In S6040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed,
The special symbol variable display end process (see S6024 in FIG. 187) is performed. After executing the process of S6040, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6041.

In S6041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (S322 in FIG. 45).
In step S6041, the main CPU 201 transmits the command to the sub-control circuit 300.
After executing the above process, the process proceeds to S6042.

In S6042, the main CPU 201 executes a game status management process. In this process, the main CPU 201 mainly executes an update process of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the process of S6042, the main CPU 201 returns to S604.
Move to 3.

In S6043, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. As the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command, the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command determined in S6035 is performed. As the transmission reservation process for the special symbol variation pattern command, the transmission reservation process for the special symbol variation pattern command that combines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern determined in S6037 so that the type of the special symbol can be known is performed. The special symbol effect start command that is reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special pattern variable display start processing (particularly the game status management processing (S6042) and the special pattern presentation start command transmission reservation processing (S6043)) within the interruption prohibited area.

[8-6-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 189 and FIG. 190, in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187),
A special symbol variable display ending process executed by the main CPU 201 in 6024 will be described below. Figures 189 and 190 are flow charts showing an example of the special symbol variable display ending process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S6051).

If it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (S60
51 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process,
The process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is “1” (
If the determination in S6051 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6052.

In S6052, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value, and determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is OFF based on the loaded special symbol pause flag value.

If it is determined in S6052 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S6052 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern variable display end processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol pause flag is off (S60
If step S6052 is judged as YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S6053.

In S6053, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process. In this process, a predetermined special symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display units 163 and 164 are displayed.
The variable display of the special symbol is stopped at step S604. The waiting time for the special symbol is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed at a cycle of, for example, 2 msec. After executing the process of S6053, the main CPU 201 returns to step S604.
Move to 054.

The symbol determination time of the special symbol may be different depending on the type of hit or may be different depending on the game state. For example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big hit or a miss, the first symbol determination time (for example, 540 msec) may be set, and if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a small hit, the second symbol determination time (for example, 24 msec) may be set, which is shorter than the first symbol determination time. In particular, when creating a small hit RUSH like the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the symbol determination time in the case of a small hit extremely short.

In S6054, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S6025 in FIG. 187) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. After executing the process of S6054, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6055.

In S6055, the main CPU 201 executes a process of reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol is also executed. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6055, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6056.

In S6056, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol number counter.
The symbol determination number counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter for managing the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of times of a probability change or the number of times of a time reduction, may be provided, but the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state may be managed by the symbol determination number counter. After executing the process of S6056, the main CPU 201:
The process proceeds to S6057.

In S6057, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol winning determination process (S
Determine whether the result of the command (see 6034) is a small hit.

In S6057, if it is determined that the result of the special pattern hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is not a small hit (if S6057 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6059.

On the other hand, in S6057, if the result of the special symbol winning determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be a small winning (if S6057 is determined to be YES), the main CPU
201 shifts the process to S6058.

In S6058, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from being started or stopped during the execution of the small win game control process.
After executing the process of S6058, the process proceeds to S6059.

In S6059, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol winning determination process (S
It is determined whether the result of the calculation (see 6034) is a jackpot or not.

In S6059, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be not a jackpot (if S6059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, in S6059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be a big hit (if S6059 is a YES determination), the main CPU
201 transfers the process to S6060.

In S6060, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting during the execution of the big win game control process.
After executing the process of S6060, the process proceeds to S6061.

In S6061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (S6061
If the answer is NO, the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern variable display ending process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S6
If step S6061 is judged as YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to step S6062.

In S6062, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol number counter.
After executing the process of S6062, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6063.

In S6063, the main CPU 201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is
This is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss.
After executing the process of S6063, the process proceeds to S6064.

In S6064, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss and sets it. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol to be processed (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a big hit or a small hit, even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process of this other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a miss. After executing the process of S6064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6065.

In S6065, the main CPU 201 executes a process of clearing a working area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S6065, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6066.

In S6066, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the symbol determination time of the other special symbol. In this process, a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, 540 msec) is set to the main RA.
M203, and stops the variable display of the other special symbol on the special symbol display sections 163 and 164. After executing the process of S6066, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6067.

In S6067, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2".
After executing the process of S6067, the main CPU 201 returns to the process of S606.
Move to step 8.

In S6068, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, it performs a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. The game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6068, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6069.

In S6069, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the other special symbol effect stop command. Note that the other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is
Processing for sending performance control commands during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
After executing the process of S6069, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns to the special symbol management process (FIG. 187).
Return to the previous page (see reference).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end process of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed, and the winning determination process of this special symbol (FIG. 18
If the result of the step S6034 of No. 8 is a jackpot and the other special symbol is being variably displayed, a process is performed to forcibly stop the variably displayed other special symbol as a miss.

[8-6-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 191, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol game judgment process is called in S6025 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the object of processing. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called in S6025 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the object of processing.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6071).

If it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (S60
187), the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern game determination process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is “2” (
If the determination in S6071 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6072.

In S6072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S6072, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot (if NO is determined in S6072), the main CPU 201
On the other hand, if it is determined in S6072 that a jackpot has been reached, that is, that the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S6072), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6075.

In S6073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small win.

In S6073, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a small win, that is, that the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a miss (if S6073 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S6082.

On the other hand, in S6073, if it is determined that the special symbol is a small win, that is, the stopped special symbol is a stop display mode indicating a small win (if S6073 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2
01 transfers the process to S6075.

In S6075, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals outputted to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 174 for both) or the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the processing targets of the special symbol game determination processing.
After performing the process of S6075, the process proceeds to S6076.

In S6076, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the first big prize opening 6131 is opened (S6077), and a process of setting a big win signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S6078).

In S6079, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3." By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, a process of preparing to open the big prize opening (see S6026 in FIG. 187) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed.

In S6080, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 sets the probability variable flag, the probability variable number of times,
It also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the number of times time-saving has occurred. Note that in the case of a small win, processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special probability flag, the number of special probability flags, the time-saving flag, and the number of times time-saving has occurred, is not performed. Then, it performs processing to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this processing will be transmitted during the performance control command transmission processing during the next system timer interrupt processing (S in FIG. 45).
The signal is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 at step 322.

In S6081, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a big win start display command when it is a big win, and performs a transmission reservation process for a small win start display command when it is a small win. The big win start display command or small win start display command reserved for transmission in this process is sent in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
In step S522 of the above procedure, the main CPU 201 transmits the command to the sub-control circuit 300.
After executing the processing of S6081, the special pattern game judgment processing is terminated, and the processing is returned to the special pattern management processing (see FIG. 187).

In S6082, the main CPU 201 executes a game state transition judgment process. In this game state transition judgment process, both a "low probability game state transition judgment process" for judging a transition to a low probability game state and a "non-time-saving game state transition judgment process" for judging a transition to a non-time-saving game state are executed. After executing the process of S6082, the main CPU 201 executes the process of S608.
Move to 3.

In the low probability game state transition judgment process, it is judged whether the probability change flag is 1 (high probability game state), and if the probability change flag is 1, it is next judged whether the probability change count is 0, and if the probability change count is 0, the probability change flag is set to 0 (low probability game state), and the game state is transitioned from the high probability game state to the low probability game state. Also, if the probability change flag is 0, the low probability game state transition judgment process is terminated,
If the number of times of the special probability is not 0, the special probability flag is kept at 1 and the process of determining whether to transition to the low probability game state is terminated.

In the non-time-shortened game state transition judgment process, it is judged whether the time-shortened flag is 1 (time-shortened game state), and if the time-shortened flag is 1, it is next judged whether the number of time-shortened times is 0, and if the number of time-shortened times is 0, the time-shortened flag is set to 0 (non-time-shortened game state), and a transition is made from the time-shortened game state to the non-time-shortened game state. Also, if the time-shortened flag is 0, the non-time-shortened game state transition judgment process is terminated, and if the number of time-shortened times is not 0, the non-time-shortened game state transition judgment process is terminated while the time-shortened flag is 1.

In S6083, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game ending process. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.
When the special pattern game end processing is performed, the special pattern game judgment processing is terminated and the processing is returned to the special pattern management processing (see FIG. 187).

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (
It is preferable to perform steps S6071 to S6081 within an interrupt prohibited section.

[8-6-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6083 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this manner,
After executing the process of S6092, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6093.

In S6093, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process for the special symbol. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a game state designation command indicating the current game state. The game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 3 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
After executing the process of S6093, the main CPU 201 returns to S6
Move to 094.

In S6094, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6094, the main CPU 201:
The special pattern game end processing is terminated, and processing returns to the special pattern game judgment processing (see FIG. 191).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability change flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[8-6-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described with reference to the special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6026.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the large prize opening preparation process is called in S6026 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the large prize opening preparation process is called in S6026 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S6101).

If it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (S61
187), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is “3” (
If the determination in S6101 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6102.

In S6102, the main CPU 201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When the large prize opening counter value is a large prize opening control process, it corresponds to a count value that counts the number of rounds in the large prize game state, and when the small prize game control process is executed, it corresponds to a count value that counts the number of openings of the small prize game control process. The large prize opening counter value is stored in the large prize opening counter in the main RAM 203. Main CP
After executing the process of S6102, U201 transfers the process to S6103.

In S6103, the main CPU 201 judges whether the large prize opening count counter value is the upper limit value or not. In this embodiment, as shown in the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177, the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the large prize game state is 3, 5, or 10 rounds, and the upper limit value of the number of openings in the small prize game state is 6 times.

If it is determined in S6103 that the large prize opening count counter value is the upper limit (S
If the determination in S6103 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6104.

In S6104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S6104)
By switching the control state number by performing the above, after the completion of the large prize opening preparation process,
The big win end process (see S6028 in FIG. 187) is performed.
After executing the process of S6104, the process proceeds to S6105.

In S6105, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a win end display command, in which if the big win game state is over, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a big win end display command, and if the small win game state is over, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a small win end display command (S6106).
In addition, the big win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 3 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
00. After the process of S6106, the main CPU 201 ends the special prize opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

Returning to S6103, if it is determined that the value of the large prize opening counter is not the upper limit (
If the determination in S6103 is NO, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6107.

In S6107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special prize opening count counter. After performing the process of S6107, the main CPU 201 returns to S61
Move to 08.

In S6108, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, if a large prize game control process is being executed, the first large prize opening 6131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened, and if a small prize game control process is being executed, the second large prize opening 6151 is selected. After executing the process of S6108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6109.

In S6109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening can be opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening, the maximum number of winning balls that can be won into the large prize opening, the number of winning balls when a ball enters the large prize opening, etc. are set. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or small win game control process. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S6109, the main CPU 201:
The process moves to S6110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize winning port is set to, for example, a maximum of 28,000 msec when the large prize winning control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 100 msec when the small prize winning control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls that can be won into the large prize winning port is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize winning control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 4 balls when the small prize winning control process is being executed. The number of winning balls that can be won into the large prize winning port is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize winning control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 4 balls when the small prize winning control process is being executed.
For the large prize opening 131, 15 pieces are set, and for the second large prize opening 6151, 14 pieces are set. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S6110, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening (the first large prize opening 6131, the second large prize opening 6132) is a large prize opening.
The main CPU 20 performs a large prize opening setting process for opening the large prize opening 6151.
After executing the process of S6110, the process proceeds to S6111.

In S6111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S6111)
By switching the control state number by performing the above, after the completion of the large prize opening preparation process,
The large prize opening control process (see S6027 in FIG. 187) is performed.
After executing the process of S6111, U201 transfers the process to S6112.

In S6112, the main CPU 201 executes a transmission reservation process for the command to display the large prize opening. The command to display the large prize opening reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6112, the main CPU 201 executes the process of S6112.
The large prize opening preparation process is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern management process (see Figure 187).

[8-6-8. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 194, a special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described with reference to the special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6027.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this large prize opening control process is called in S6027 during the special symbol management process for the first special symbol, the first special symbol is the object of processing. Similarly, when this large prize opening control process is called in S6027 during the special symbol management process for the second special symbol, the second special symbol is the object of processing.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6121).

If it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not “4” (S61
21 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is “4” (
If the determination in S6121 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6122.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening (the first large prize opening 6131, the second large prize opening 6132) is a large prize opening.
It is determined whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 6151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening winning counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening is the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening winning counter value counted by the large prize opening winning counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening (the first large prize opening 6131, the second large prize opening 6132) is a large prize opening.
If it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 6151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, the process moves to S6123, and the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) are opened.
If it is determined that the number of winning balls is the maximum number of winning balls, the process is terminated at S6128.
Move to -1.

In S6128-1, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not it is in a big win gaming state (the big win flag is on). If the main CPU 201 judges that it is in a big win gaming state, it shifts the process to S6124, and if it judges that it is not in a big win gaming state (i.e., it is in a small win gaming state), it shifts the process to S6128-2.

In S6123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening (the first large prize opening 6131, the second large prize opening 6132) is a large prize opening.
It is determined whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 6151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S6109 in FIG. 193) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) has not elapsed (if NO is determined in S6123), the main C
The PU201 terminates the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see Figure 187).

On the other hand, in S6123, the large prize winning slots (first large prize winning slot 6131, second large prize winning slot 6151)
If it is determined that the maximum opening time has elapsed (YES in S6123), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6124.

In S6124, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening (the first large prize opening 6131, the second large prize opening 6132) is a large prize opening.
The main CPU 201 performs a closing setting process to close the large prize opening 6151.
After executing the process of S6124, the process proceeds to S6125.

In S6125, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this manner, the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S
By performing S6125) to switch the control state number, the special prize opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 187) is performed again after the special prize opening control process is completed. After executing S6125, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6126.

In S6126, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S6126, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6127.

In S6127, if the main CPU 201 is in a jackpot gaming state, it performs a process of reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the next system timer interrupt process (S32 in FIG. 45).
In step S6127, the display command is sent to the sub-control circuit 300. In the small win gaming state, the display command is not sent. After the process of S6127,
The main CPU 201 ends the special prize opening control process and returns to the special symbol management process (FIG. 18
Return to step 7.

In S6128-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first big prize slot (the first big prize slot 6131,
The main CPU 201 executes a closing setting process for closing the second large prize opening 6151. After executing the process of S6128-2, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6128-3.

In S6128-3, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this large prize opening control process,
The big win end process (see S6028 in FIG. 187) is performed.
After executing the process of S6128-3, the process proceeds to S6128-4.

In S6128-4, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S6128-4, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6128-
Move to 5.

In S6128-5, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the small win end display command. The small win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after the process of S6128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-9. Big win end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described with reference to Fig. 195. Fig. 195 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In addition, this jackpot end processing is S6 during the special symbol management processing for processing the first special symbol.
When called in S6028, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the big win end processing is called in S6028 during the special symbol management processing in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S6131).

If it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (S61
31 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the big win end process and the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is “5” (
If the determination in S6131 is YES, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6132.

In S6132, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and the small win game state (big win opening count counter value, big win opening winning counter value, etc.), small win flag, big win flag, symbol determination number counter value, special symbol pause flag, etc. are cleared. After executing the process of S6132, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6133.

In S6133, the main CPU 201 performs a game state setting process. In this game state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is referenced, and the probability variable flag, the number of probability variable times, the time-saving flag, and the number of time-saving times are set based on the selected symbol information. Specifically, as shown in the winning type determination table in FIG. 177, after the end of the big win game state of the first special symbol, the probability variable flag is set to 1 (high probability game state), the number of probability variable times is set to 120, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving game state), and the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol, the probability bonus flag is set to 1 (high probability game state), the number of probability bonuses is set to 120, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving game state), and if the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won is the normal game state, the number of time-saving bonuses is set to 100, and if the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won is not the normal game state, the number of time-saving bonuses is set to 10,000.
After the small win game state ends, none of the data for the probability change flag, probability change count, time-saving flag, and time-saving count are set. In other words, the game state does not transition (change) as a result of the small win game state. After executing the process of S5133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6134, the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol game end process. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 192 is executed.
After executing the processing of S6134, 1 terminates the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special pattern management processing (see Figure 187).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[8-6-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, referring to FIG. 196, in the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23), the main CPU
196, the main CPU 201 determines whether the start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied or not, as in the special symbol control process.

196 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flow chart shown in FIG. 196 are control state numbers of normal symbols. The main CPU 201:
The normal symbol game is progressed by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S6
300).

If it is determined in S6300 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 2
01 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201
The process proceeds to S6301.

In S6301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol.
After executing the process of S6301, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S6310.
The process from 6310 onwards is carried out.

In S6310, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This processing of S6310 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this variable display start processing for normal symbols will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. Note that, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 performs the processing in S6310.
Move to 6320.

In S6320, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol variable display end process. This process of S6320 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6330.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 judges whether the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it judges that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, it extends the predetermined normal symbol fixed time (for example, 540 msec) to the main R.
The waiting time of the normal pattern in AM203 is set, and the control state number of the normal pattern is set to "2". This waiting time of the normal pattern is subtracted as a normal pattern timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at a 2 msec cycle. If the variable display time of the normal pattern has not ended, the control state number of the normal pattern is held at "1" and the variable display time of the normal pattern is waited for to end.

The pattern determination time of the normal pattern may be different depending on the type of winning or the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the first pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec) may be set, and in the time-saving game state, the second pattern determination time (e.g., 132 msec) may be set, which is shorter than the first pattern determination time. In particular, when creating a small winning RUSH like the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the pattern determination time in the time-saving game state extremely short.

In S6330, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game determination process.
The process of 330 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 performs the process in S
Move to 6340.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or normal symbol miss). If the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 6146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 6146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 6146, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 6146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection pattern command by referring to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in Fig. 184, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146.

In S6340, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric accessory opening process.
The process of 340 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 performs the process in S
Move to 6350.

In this normal electric role release process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the normal electric role 6146 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric role 6146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S6330. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric role 6146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S6350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol winning end processing.
The process of 350 is a process performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol winning end process, it ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs the above steps S6310 to S63
In step 40, a process is performed to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and executes the above-mentioned normal symbol control process (S
It is preferable to perform steps S6300 to S6350 within an interrupt disabled section.

[8-6-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196) will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S6311).

When it is determined in S6311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not “0”, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process ( FIG. 19
On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6312.

In S6312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal symbol. In this process, the start information stored in the normal symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal symbol start memory area (2) to the normal symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal symbol start memory area (1) to the normal symbol start memory area (3). After executing the process of S6312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6313.

In S6313, the main CPU 201 performs a win determination process for the normal symbols. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to a win determination table for the normal symbols shown in FIG.
Based on the game state and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol stored in the normal symbol determination area (0), the main CPU 201 determines the winning/losing determination value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing"). After executing the process of S6313, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6314.

In S6314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, and determines a "normal symbol winning selection symbol command" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0).
After executing the process of S6314, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6315.

In S6315, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 185, and determines the variation pattern of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the normal symbol based on the game state, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol, and the symbol selection command when the normal symbol is hit. After executing the process of S6315, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6316.

In S6316, the main CPU 201 performs variable display time setting processing for the normal symbols. In this processing, the variable display time for the normal symbols determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination processing (S6315) is set to the waiting time for the normal symbols in the main RAM 203, and the normal symbol display unit 161 is caused to start variable display of the normal symbols. This waiting time for the normal symbols is, for example, 2 m
The normal symbol timer counter is decremented in the system timer interrupt process that is performed every sec. After executing the process of S6316, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6317.

In S6317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the normal symbol variable display start process is completed,
The normal symbol variable display end process (see S6320 in FIG. 196) is performed. After executing the process of S6317, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S6318.

In S6318, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is
Processing for sending performance control commands during the next system timer interrupt processing (see S322 in FIG. 45)
The signal is then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300.

[8-7. Small Hit RUSH]
In the sixth pachinko gaming machine described above, a "small win rush" can be realized. The mechanism of the small win rush will be described below.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, in the high-probability non-time-limited game state, the frequency with which game balls enter the second large winning port 6151 is increased compared to other game states (e.g., normal game state, high-probability time-limited game state, low-probability time-limited game state), resulting in a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

As shown in Fig. 173, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 6126 and the normal electric role unit 6145. In the high probability non-time-reduction game state, since the non-time-reduction game state is controlled, it is difficult for the normal power shutter 6147 to be in an open state (see Figs. 182 to 184), and the normal power shutter 6147 is in a closed state protruding from the game panel 6100, and the game ball rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 is guided to the second large winning opening 6151 and the second starting opening 6140.

Therefore, if the second large winning opening 6151 is open, the game ball hit to the right is guided to the normal power shutter 6147 and can enter the second large winning opening 6151. Each time a game ball enters the second large winning opening 6151, for example, 14 game balls are paid out.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with an extremely high probability of 1/1.07 (estimated) as shown in the hit determination table for special symbols (see FIG. 175), but also an ultra-shortened variation with an extremely short variable display time is executed as shown in the variation pattern table for special symbols in the right-hit play state (see FIG. 181(a)), so that the frequency of game balls entering the second large winning hole 6151 is higher than in other play states (for example,
This is increased compared to the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state.

In this way, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in a game state where the time-saving game state is controlled (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the normal power shutter 6147 is likely to be in an open state buried in the game panel 6100 (see Figures 182 to 184), and most of the game balls hit from the right will enter the first starting hole (right) 6120B. Therefore, even if the second large winning hole 6151 is open, the second large winning hole 6151 will not enter the first large winning hole 6120B.
The expected value of a gaming ball entering the big winning hole 6151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a gaming ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out.

In this way, in a game state in which the time-saving game state is controlled (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the game value paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time (for example, the number of winning balls, etc.)
The expected value of does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered to be a regular game mode. However, if a right hit is performed, since the non-time-saving game state is controlled, the game ball hit from the right will not enter the second starting hole 614.
However, as described above, as shown in the first half variation pattern table (see FIG. 179) of the special symbol in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, the first half variation pattern of "long variation" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined, so that the number of times the second special symbol is drawn per unit time is extremely small, and there is no practical benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state.

In this embodiment, the small win RUSH is generated in the high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the high probability time-saving game state in which the special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol without executing the electric support control to increase the frequency of opening the first starting hole (right) 6120B by operating the normal electric role 6146, the small win RUSH is generated.
It may be so arranged that:

[8-8. Production flow]
Next, the outline of the presentation performed in the sixth pachinko game machine will be explained using the overall presentation flow. Fig. 198 is an example of the presentation flow in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. Fig. 199 is an example of the presentation flow in the right-hand play state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

(Flow of presentation in normal game mode)
In a normal game state where the ball is hit from the left, a game ball can enter the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, and the display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern, the display of characters, etc., the sound display, the change in the operation mode of the display button device 6310, etc. are performed. In this embodiment, the decorative patterns are composed of three main patterns, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern, and a sub-pattern that is much smaller than the main patterns. The number and types of the decorative patterns are not limited to these.

In addition, in the normal game mode of the sixth pachinko game machine, the main gameplay is to collect "character icons" and aim for a jackpot.

When the game ball enters the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, all the decorative symbols in the display area of the display device 7 start to change rapidly and independently ("change of all symbols starts").

When all the decorative patterns are changing, it is possible to perform one of the following preview effects: "Dialogue Preview", "Button Challenge Preview", or "Sakura Accumulation Preview".
Other notices may be possible.

For example, a "dialogue preview" will show one of several characters.
This is a preview effect that suggests that the lottery result for the first special pattern may be a jackpot, based on the lines spoken by the displayed character.

The "button challenge notice" is, for example, a case where the effect button device 6310 is operated (hit repeatedly) multiple times.
It is a preview performance that displays whether or not you can get a certain number of "character icons" or "letter icons" that show the expectation of a big hit (for example, super hot) or the reach content that will develop (for example, SP). Note that there are cases where you cannot get any icons in the "button challenge preview."

The "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is, for example, a notice performance in which cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, and are absorbed into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, and cherry blossoms are accumulated step by step. When the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a "Yakuza icon" indicating that a predetermined number of "character icons" or the "Road to the Ultimate Battle" will be displayed, and when the "Yakuza icon" is displayed, the game will develop into the "Road to the Ultimate Battle". These cherry blossoms can be accumulated up to three levels over the current change or multiple changes due to foresight, and the more cherry blossoms are accumulated, the higher the expectation of the "Yakuza icon" being displayed and the higher the number of "character icons" being displayed. The details of the performance of this "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described later with reference to FIG. 215 and FIG. 216.

If the number of "character icons" displayed thus far is five ("five character icons acquired"), the game progresses to "The Road to the Final Battle."

After all the symbols start to change, and the left and right symbols are displayed as temporarily stopped (``left and right symbols temporarily stopped''), it is possible for all the symbols to stop, resulting in a ``miss'', or for a ``pseudo consecutive stimulation'' or ``normal reach'' to occur.

The "pseudo consecutive fanning effect" is an effect in which the right pattern, which is temporarily stopped, changes again (right pattern slip), and the fanning effect predicts whether the "character icon" will stop at the position of the middle pattern. When the "character icon" stops at the position of the middle pattern, the above-mentioned "pseudo consecutive effect" is performed, and if the "character icon" does not stop at the position of the middle pattern, it is a "miss". Note that multiple "character icons" can also stop at the position of the middle pattern.

A "normal reach" is a reach effect that occurs when the left and right symbols are the same type, for example, a reach effect in which the middle symbol changes at a slow speed. In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol stops and displays a different type of symbol from the left and right symbols, it is a "miss", and if the middle symbol stops and displays the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a "jackpot". In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol is not displayed and a "character icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, it develops into a "pseudo consecutive performance", and if the middle symbol changes at high speed, it develops into a "ninja reach".

"Ninja reach" is a reach effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach, for example, a reach effect in which a ninja character tries to stop a center symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols. In "ninja reach", if the center symbol stops and displays a different type of symbol from the left and right symbols, it is a "miss", and if the center symbol stops and displays a symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols, it is a "jackpot". In "ninja reach", if the center symbol is not stopped and the "decisive battle icon" stops at the position of the center symbol, it develops into "decisive battle reach".

In addition, when the "character icon" stops and the "pseudo consecutive performance" is performed, if the number of "character icons" displayed so far is 5 (5 character icons obtained), the "pseudo consecutive performance"
Without this, it develops into "The Road to the Showdown."

The "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Battle" are specific effects of the same kind in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 a specified number of times to collect a specific number (10) of "character icons." For more information on the "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Battle," see FIG.
This will be described later using Figure 222.

"Road to the Final Battle" is an effect in which, since the player has already acquired five character icons, the player operates the effect button device 6310 five times to collect the remaining five "character icons."

In "Road to the Ultimate Showdown", since the player has not yet acquired a character icon, the player is prompted to operate the effect button device 6310 ten times in order to collect ten "character icons".

And, the "Character Icons" you collected in "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Ultimate Final Battle"
If the number is less than 10 ("Less than 10 character icons acquired"), it will progress to "Confrontation Reach",
If you collect 10 "character icons"("obtain 10 character icons"), it will progress to the "Great Battle Reach."

The "Confrontation Reach" is a reach effect with a higher expectation of a big win than the Ninja Reach, for example, a friendly character faces off against an enemy character, and if he wins it is a "big win", and if he loses it is a "miss". Furthermore, in the "Confrontation Reach", a reach effect is performed using the "character icons" collected on the "Road to the Showdown". Also, in the "Confrontation Reach", when the "Great Battle Icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, the "Confrontation Reach" develops into the "Great Battle Reach". For more details on this "Confrontation Reach", see Figs. 223 and 22
4 will be used later.

The "Great Battle Reach" is the reach effect that has the highest expectation of a jackpot among all reach effects in normal game mode. For example, it is a reach effect in which your army faces off against the enemy army, and if your army wins, it is a "jackpot," and if your army is defeated, it is a "miss."

(Presentation flow in right-hand play state)
Among the right-hit game states, in the "high probability time-saving game state" and the "low probability time-saving game state", a game ball can enter the first start hole (right) 6120B, and the first special symbol is given priority as a special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol variation display and character display performance for the first special symbol, audio performance, and change in the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 are performed. Also, in the "high probability non-time-saving game state", a game ball can enter the second start hole 6140, and the second special symbol is given priority as a special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol variation display and character display performance for the second special symbol, audio performance, and change in the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 are performed.
In addition, when only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is variably displayed in the right-hand play state, the special symbol being variably displayed may be made to correspond to the decorative symbol as a special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol.

In the "high probability time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state", the first starting hole (right) 6120
When the game ball enters B, all the decorative symbols start to vary at high speed in the display area of the display device 7 ("all symbols start to vary"). Also, when the game ball enters the second start hole 6140 in the "high probability non-time-saving game state", all the decorative symbols start to vary at high speed in the display area of the display device 7 ("all symbols start to vary").

When all decorative patterns are undergoing a changing display, it is possible for either a "treasure ball announcement" or a "lotus flower announcement" to be performed.

The "treasure ball preview" is a preview effect that displays the expected probability of a jackpot (for example, "super hot") in the upper display area 7a of the display device 7 (see Figure 173), for example.

The "Lotus Flower Notice" is, for example, a notice that suggests that a bud will open and develop into a "Door Opening" effect. The bud can be displayed over multiple variations based on pre-reading, and the bud continues to be displayed even when a small win is occurring. For more information on the contents of this "Lotus Flower Notice", see Figure 2.
This will be described later using 25.

In addition, in the "high probability time-saving play state" or the "low probability time-saving play state", it is possible to perform a reach performance of "battle challenge" or "battle reach".

In the "Battle Challenge", the effect button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode (FIG. 172 (
173)。 (see Figure 173 d) When the second performance operation unit 6312 protruding upward is operated once (one hit), the group of performance props 58 (see Figure 173) falls, resulting in a reach performance in which the first special pattern is hit.

In the "battle reach", an ally character and an enemy boss face off against each other, and each time the ally character attacks, the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 changes (grows), and when the final operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is operated and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls, a first special symbol is hit, which is a reach effect. The contents of the performance of this "battle reach" will be described in detail later using FIG. 226 and FIG. 227.

In addition, in the "high probability non-time-saving play state", it is possible to perform a reach effect of "door opening effect" or "eye opening effect".

The "door opening effect" is a reach effect in which the effect button device 6310 is operated (hit repeatedly) multiple times, causing the door to gradually open, and when the door is completely open, a jackpot of the second special pattern is awarded.

The "eye-opening effect" is a reach effect in which an ally character gradually opens his/her eyes, and if the eye-opening is successful, a jackpot of the second special pattern is awarded.

The above-mentioned "development" includes the display of information required for the progress of a game or presentation, the progress of a game or presentation itself, and is a concept that includes the direct or indirect progress of a game or presentation. Also, the "development" of displaying information required for the progress of a game or presentation is a concept that includes the display of predetermined development information (for example, icons, etc.) and the display of the displayed development information by adding or subtracting.

[8-9. Sub-control circuit]
In order to execute the above-mentioned effects, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, the details of the various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[8-9-1. Symbol presentation pattern determination table for normal game state]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a symbol presentation pattern in a normal gaming state will be described below. FIG. 200 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "symbol presentation pattern" refers to information that defines the display presentation of related characters and the like, sound presentation, and presentation of changes in the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310, centering on the variation mode of the decorative symbol for the special symbol. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, various display presentations such as a notice presentation pattern can be superimposed and executed.

In addition, the symbol presentation pattern in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine is composed of a combination of a "pre-reach presentation pattern" corresponding to the first half of the special symbol variation pattern and a "reach presentation pattern" corresponding to the latter half of the special symbol variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 200, the symbol presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state is, in the first special symbol, the "first half variation pattern number" of the variation pattern command of the first special symbol,
The "number of icons in the second half", when character icons described later are displayed in the second half, is associated with the "pre-reach performance pattern", and the "second half change pattern number", "number of icons in the second half" and "reach performance pattern" of the change pattern command for the first special symbol are associated with each other.
When the latter half variation pattern number is "00H", the "performance end information" is determined so that only the pre-reach performance pattern is executed as the reach performance pattern.

In this embodiment, by combining the first half variation pattern number (09H-10H) with the second half variation pattern number (14H-16H, 24H-26H), after executing any of the pre-reach performance patterns 9-32 of "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Ultimate Battle", any of the reach performance patterns 4-8, 12-16 of "Confrontation Reach" or "Great Battle Reach" can be executed. And, the pre-reach performance patterns 9-32 of "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Ultimate Battle" can also be executed with the reach performance patterns 4-8, 12-16 of "Confrontation Reach" or "Great Battle Reach".
Since 12 to 16 are also determined based on the "number of icons in the second half," the two effects are associated by the "number of icons in the second half." If the number of icons in the second half is 10, reach effect patterns 8 and 16 of the "Decisive Battle Reach" are executed, and if the number of icons in the second half is 8 or 9, reach effect patterns 4 to 7 and 12 to 15 of the "Confrontation Reach" can be executed.

In the symbol presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state, for the second special symbol, all the variation pattern commands of the second special symbol are associated with the "standby presentation pattern".

This "standby effect pattern" is a pattern in which the three main decorative symbols, the left symbol, the center symbol, and the right symbol, are left in a standby state (stopped display) without being displayed in a variable manner, and only the sub-symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in a flashing manner. Even if this standby effect pattern is executed, the player does not notice that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the so-called irregular variation can be quietly ended.

[8-9-2. Right-Hit Game State Symbol Presentation Pattern Determination Table]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a symbol presentation pattern in a right-hand play state will be described below. Fig. 201 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in a right-hand play state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 201, the pattern presentation pattern determination table for the right-hand play state corresponds the special pattern change pattern command (first half change pattern number, second half change pattern number), the selection rate (first random number value), and the "pattern presentation pattern."

Here, the "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the acquired first random number value is within a predetermined range for the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, it is described as the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and the term "selection rate of 0%" is not excluded. The above is described in FIG. 202 to FIG.
The same applies to the “selection rate” in the table shown in FIG.
There are many types of random number values with different random number ranges, and explanation of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

In addition, the first symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, and the second symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. However, when both the first symbol presentation pattern and the second symbol presentation pattern are executed simultaneously (such as when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are varying simultaneously), the execution of the first symbol presentation pattern is prioritized in the "high probability time-shortened game state" or the "low probability time-shortened game state", and the execution of the second symbol presentation pattern is prioritized in the "high probability non-time-shortened game state".

[8-9-3. Second half icon number determination table in normal game state]
In the normal game state, a second half icon number determination table for determining the number of second half icons will be described. Fig. 202 is an example of a second half icon number determination table in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine. Note that the determination of the second half icon number is performed before the determination of the symbol presentation pattern (see Fig. 200) in the normal game state.

"Number of icons in the second half" refers to the total number of character icons that are ultimately displayed in "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Battle", and although the maximum number is 10 in this embodiment, the number is not limited. Also, the "number of icons in the second half" includes the "number of icons in the first half" described below, and the relational expression "number of icons in the second half" = "number of icons in the first half" + α is established.

As shown in FIG. 202, the second half icon number determination table corresponds the first special pattern change pattern command (second half change pattern number), the selection rate (second random number value), and the "second half icon number."

In this embodiment, the latter half icon number determination table is configured so that when the "Great Battle Reach (reach performance patterns 8, 16: see FIG. 200)" is performed in response to the latter half variation pattern number (16H, 26H), the maximum number of latter half icons is determined to be 10. As a result, when 10 character icons are finally displayed in the "Road to the Final Battle" or the "Road to the Ultimate Battle", the "Great Battle Reach" is performed.

[8-9-4. First Half Icon Number Determination Table in Normal Game State]
A first half icon number determination table for determining the number of first half icons in the normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 203 shows an example of a first half icon number determination table in the normal gaming state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Number of icons in the first half" refers to the total number of character icons ultimately displayed during "normal fluctuation" or "pseudo consecutive performance." In this embodiment, the maximum number is five, but the number is not limited.

As shown in FIG. 203, the first half icon number determination table corresponds the winning command (first half variable pattern number) of the first special pattern, the selection rate (third random number value), and the "first half icon number."

Here, the "winning command of the first special symbol" is a command including information for increasing the reserved number of the first special symbol by one, information on the variation pattern of the first special symbol (i.e., a variation pattern command of the first special symbol), etc., as explained in the first pachinko game machine.
The special symbol winning command is scheduled for transmission when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (see S397 in FIG. 52), and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. This also applies to the "second special symbol winning command" described later (see S397 in FIG. 52).
(See S403 below).

In this embodiment, the first half icon number determination table is configured so that when "Road to the Final Battle" is performed in accordance with the first half variation pattern number (09H to 0FH), the first half icon number is determined to be the maximum number of five.
In the "pseudo consecutive performance," when five character icons are finally displayed, the "Road to the Final Battle" will take place.

[8-9-5. First Half Icon Number Determination Table in Normal Game State]
A first half icon display scenario determination table for determining a first half icon display scenario in a normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 204 shows an example of a first half icon display scenario determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"First half icon display scenario" refers to the first half icon number of character icons, where,
This refers to information that specifies the trigger for display, such as when and how many to display, the timing of display, and the number of items to display.

As shown in FIG. 204, the first half icon display scenario determination table includes the winning command (first half variable pattern number) of the first special pattern, the number of determined first half icons, and the selection rate (
The fourth random number value is associated with the "first half icon display scenario."

In addition, the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table shows the "contents of the first half icon display scenario" for reference. Also, the "change" refers to the change display of the decorative pattern based on the drawing of the special pattern for the start information that is the subject of the first half icon display scenario determination.

In this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured to display one or more character icons each time a pseudo consecutive performance is performed when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed 1 to 3 times. This allows players to have hope that a character icon will be added each time a pseudo consecutive performance is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured to be able to display one or more character icons in the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" or "button challenge notice" before the pseudo consecutive performance is performed. The "cherry blossom accumulation notice" and the "button challenge notice" have different execution timings, and are both configured to be executable.

[8-9-6. First Half Icon Set Order Scenario Determination Table for Normal Game State]
A first half icon collection order scenario determination table for determining a first half collection order scenario in a normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 205 shows an example of a first half icon collection order scenario determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half collection order scenario" refers to information that defines the display order in which the character icons of the types corresponding to the number of icons in the first half are to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 205, the first half icon set order scenario determination table corresponds the winning command for the first special pattern, the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fifth random number value), and the "first half set order scenario."

In addition, the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table shows the "Contents of the first half assembly order scenario" for reference. Character icons A to E in the "West Army Mode" described below are shown as "A" to "E", and character icons F to J in the "East Army Mode" described below are shown as "F" to "J". As will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 214, "A" and "F", "B" and "G", "C" and "H", "D" and "I", "E" and "J"
The display positions of the symbols correspond to each other and have similar roles.

The last number of the first half collection order scenario shown in FIG. 205 indicates the “number of icons in the first half”-“display order pattern”, and in the case of first half collection order scenario 1-1, it indicates “number of icons in the first half 1”-“display order pattern 1”.

In this embodiment, the "display sequence pattern" of the first half set sequence scenario is as follows:
"Display Order Pattern 1" displays the character icons in order from A (F) up, such as "A → B → C → D → E (F → G → H → I → J)" (see Figure 214).
Like "D → C → B → A → E (I → H → G → F → J)", with E (J) as the last, and D (I
) down (see Figure 214) in "Display Order Pattern 2"
"and,
After displaying D (I), like "D → A → B → C → E (I → F → G → H → J)",
(F), and the character icons are displayed in order from A(F) up (see Figure 214) in "Display Order Pattern 3";
and "display sequence pattern 4" in which character icons are displayed in sequence from E (J) downwards (see FIG. 214), such as "E → D → C → B → A (J → I → H → G → F)." Note that the number and order contents of the display sequence patterns are not limited to those described above.

In this embodiment, "display sequence pattern 1" is a normal display sequence pattern, "display sequence pattern 2" is a display sequence pattern that increases the expectation of a big win, "display sequence pattern 3" is a display sequence pattern that suggests that a pseudo consecutive announcement will be made, and "display sequence pattern 4" is a display sequence pattern that suggests that the performance of the path of the decisive battle or the path of the extreme decisive battle will be made. In this way, in this embodiment, the order in which the characters are displayed can also create interest in the future game content and further increase the excitement of the game.

[8-9-7. Sakura Accumulation Notice Determination Table in Normal Game Mode]
A cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table for determining the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the normal gaming state will be described. Fig. 206 is an example of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table in the normal gaming state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 206, the cherry blossom accumulation prediction determination table includes the "first special symbol winning command (first half variable pattern number)", the "number of reserved first special symbols", and the "number of character icons displayed" (FIG. 20) displayed in the cherry blossom accumulation prediction determined by the first half icon display scenario.
4), the selection rate (sixth random number value), and the “cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern” are associated with each other.

In addition, the rightmost column of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table shows the "contents of the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern" for reference. In addition, "the change" refers to a lottery for a special pattern for the start information that is the subject of the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern determination, and a display of a change in the decorative pattern that is performed based on the lottery. "Pre-change" refers to a display of a change in the decorative pattern that is started before the "change". This pre-change is performed multiple times depending on the number of reserved first special patterns, and if the number of reserved first special patterns is 4, three pre-changes will be performed from the next change, if the number of reserved first special patterns is 3, two pre-changes will be performed from the next change, and if the number of reserved first special patterns is 2, one pre-change will be performed from the next change. In this embodiment, a maximum of two pre-changes are configured to be executable, but a maximum of three pre-changes may be configured to be executable.

As mentioned above, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a notice performance in which cherry blossoms are accumulated in stages, and when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "Yakuza icons" are displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is composed of a stage performance in which cherry blossoms are accumulated in stages and an icon display performance in which icons are displayed.

The stage presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable throughout the pre-change and the change itself, and the icon display presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable during the change itself.

In addition, in the cherry blossom accumulation notice, cherry blossoms will dance all over the display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms will try to be sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, but it is also possible to execute a notice performance (cherry blossom accumulation 0 stage notice - YK0) in which the cherry blossoms fail to accumulate.
It can increase the overall appearance rate of cherry blossom accumulation announcements, creating interest in whether or not cherry blossoms will accumulate.

In this embodiment, each time the stage of the cherry blossom accumulation notice develops (cherry blossom accumulation 1 stage notice <
The Sakura Accumulation Notice Determination Table is constructed so that the probability of the "Yakuza Icon" appearing and the number of "Character Icons" displayed increases in the Sakura Accumulation 2-stage Notice < Sakura Accumulation 3-stage Notice (in that order). This adds interest in the progression of the stage presentation (the accumulation of Sakura), and makes the game more entertaining. In particular, the Sakura Accumulation Notice stage presentation is
Since the system is configured to be executable across both pre-variations and the actual variations, it is possible to increase the interest in the game across multiple variations.

[8-9-8. Support Icon Display Scenario Determination Table for Showdown Reach in Normal Game State]
A support icon display scenario determination table for displaying a support icon in a showdown reach in a normal game state will be described. Fig. 207 is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for a showdown reach in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "support icon display scenario" refers to a scenario where the player operates the performance button device 6 in a showdown reach.
The display contents are displayed by the support icon triggered by the operation of the effect button device 6310, and refer to information determined in association with the number of times the effect button device 6310 is operated and the display contents. The "support icon" of the showdown reach will be described in detail later with reference to Figs. 223 and 224.

As shown in Figure 207, the support icon display scenario determination table corresponds to a reach presentation pattern (see Figure 200) corresponding to a showdown reach, the determined number of second half icons, a selection rate (seventh random number value), and a "support icon display scenario."

In addition, in the rightmost column of the support icon display scenario determination table, a "support icon display scenario" is illustrated for reference. Here, "lines" refers to the display of lines of a character corresponding to the support icon, "opportunity" refers to the display of the word "opportunity" indicating that there is an expectation of a big win, and "hot" refers to the display of the word "hot" indicating that there is a higher expectation of a big win than with "opportunity". In addition, "LED" refers to the LED group 46 emitting a predetermined amount of light, and "big battle" refers to the display of a "big battle icon". Note that the contents displayed by the "support icon display scenario" are not limited to the above, and characters such as "change of reserved image" which changes the display mode of the reserved image, "performance accessory" which causes the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) to fall, and "change of performance button" which changes the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the reach effect pattern 6 in which the showdown reach develops into the big battle reach is
The support icon display scenario determination table is configured so that the "Great Battle Icon" is always displayed when the number is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 14, or 15. In this way, when the "Great Battle Icon" is displayed by the support icon of the showdown reach, the great battle reach can be performed.

[8-9-9. Lotus flower notice decision table in right-hand play mode]
In the right-hand play state, a lotus flower notice determination table for determining the lotus flower notice will be described. FIG. 208 is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table in the right-hand play state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 208, the lotus flower announcement determination table corresponds the "winning command of the second special pattern (first half variation pattern number and second half variation pattern number)", the "number of reserved second special patterns", the selection rate (8th random number value), and the "lotus flower announcement performance pattern".

As mentioned above, the "lotus flower preview" is a preview performance in which a bud is displayed and the bud opens, suggesting that the performance will develop into a "door opening performance". The display of the bud changes multiple times (
It is possible to display the entire range of fluctuations (prior to the forecast).

In addition, the lotus flower notice performance pattern includes a notice performance pattern of "lotus flower success notice" and a notice performance pattern of "lotus flower failure notice". In the notice performance pattern of "lotus flower success notice", a bud is displayed from the next change (pre-change) after the lotus flower notice performance pattern is determined by the winning command of the second special symbol, and the bud opens when the change occurs. In addition, in the notice performance pattern of "lotus flower failure notice", a bud is displayed from the next change (pre-change) after the lotus flower notice performance pattern is determined by the winning command of the second special symbol, and the bud disappears when the change occurs.

In this embodiment, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that when the "door opening effect" is performed in response to the first half variation pattern number (41H, 45H), the notice effect pattern of the "lotus flower success notice" is determined with a predetermined selection rate. As a result, after the lotus flower success notice is performed, the door opening effect is performed.

[8-9-10. Fan notice determination table for jackpot game state]
A folding fan notice determination table for determining a folding fan notice in a big win gaming state will be described. Fig. 209 shows an example of a folding fan notice determination table in a big win gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "fan notice" in the jackpot game state is a notice in which a fan falls from the display area of the display device 7 every time a game ball enters the first large winning hole 6131 in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, and the color of the fan indicates whether the start information stored in the special symbol start memory area is a jackpot or not. In other words, it is a notice that indicates a so-called reserved consecutive win in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol. Note that, in this embodiment, the "fan notice" is configured to be performed only in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, but the "fan notice" may also be configured to be performed in the jackpot game state of the second special symbol.

In addition, the "Folding Fan Announcement" is performed under the condition that the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit of two (start information is stored in each of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (2)). Note that the "Folding Fan Announcement" may be configured to be performed regardless of the number of reserved second special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 209, the fan prediction determination table is a first special symbol start memory area (1
) to (4), and the start information (jackpot information, round information) stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to (2),
The selection rate (9th random number value) is associated with a "fan preview performance pattern."

The jackpot information means a random number value for determining whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and the round information means a random number value for determining the number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, there are three types of fan preview patterns available: a ``white fan preview'', where a white fan falls, a ``red fan preview'', where a red fan falls, a ``rainbow fan preview'', where a rainbow fan falls, and a ``gold fan preview'', where a golden fan falls.

In this embodiment, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that the notice performance pattern of the "red fan notice" suggests that start information for a jackpot of 3R or more (3R, 5R, 10R) is stored in the first special pattern start memory area, and the notice performance pattern of the "rainbow fan notice" suggests that start information for a jackpot of 10R is stored in the first special pattern start memory area.

In addition, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that the notice performance pattern of the "Golden Fan Notice" suggests that the start information of a 2R jackpot is stored in the second special pattern start memory area.

For this reason, the preview performance pattern of the ``Red Fan Preview'' and the ``Rainbow Fan Preview'' are fan previews that suggest a jackpot with the first special pattern, and the preview performance pattern of the ``Golden Fan Preview'' can be said to be a fan preview that suggests a jackpot with the second special pattern.

In this embodiment, when jackpot start information is stored in both the first special pattern start memory area and the second special pattern start memory area, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that the ``golden fan notice'' notice performance pattern, which suggests a jackpot with the second special pattern, cannot be determined, but the ``red fan notice'' notice performance pattern or the ``rainbow fan notice'' notice performance pattern, which suggests a jackpot with the first special pattern, can be determined.

[8-9-11. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 210. Fig. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 210, the sub CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S6500).
In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 returns to step S6510.
Move to.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S6500) is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes of S6510 to S6580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S6510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data.
In this data input process, the command input port 308 is read and the effect button device 63 is
10 and both input processing are performed.

In the read process of the command input port 308, the command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 and set in the command input port 308 is read.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button device 6310, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button device 6310 is input from the button control circuit 310. When the sub-CPU 301 receives the operation information from the button control circuit 310, the sub-CPU 301 judges whether to validate the input operation information or to discard it as invalid, and also judges whether to discard the input operation information according to the current state of the effect, etc.
An acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, a validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and an invalidation period during which the input operation information is invalid are set.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button device 6310 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6520.

In S6520, the sub CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S6510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S6530.

In S6530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance mode determination process. In this process, for example, a performance pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a performance button drive request, etc.) for operating various performance devices are generated based on the determined performance pattern. Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 211. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU
U301 transfers the processing to S6540.

In S6540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 174). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. Upon completing this processing, the sub CPU 301 advances the processing to S6550.

In S6550, the sub CPU 301 executes a sound control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the sound control circuit 305 (see FIG. 174). The sound control circuit 305 performs sound control for outputting sound from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6560.

In S6560, the sub CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 174).
The LED control circuit 306 transmits the message (L
Based on the received ED request, the sub-CPU 301 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46.
Processing then shifts to S6570.

In S6570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a role control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a role request to the role control circuit 307 (see FIG. 174). Based on the message (role request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301, the role control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or part of the roles that make up the performance role group 58. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 executes the sub-CPU control process.
The PU 301 transfers the process to S6580.

In S6580, the sub CPU 301 executes an effect button control process. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 (see FIG. 174). The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 or vibrating the effect button device 6310 based on the message (effect button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[8-9-12. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S6530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 210) will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in a sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance mode determination process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 determines the display performance mode to be displayed on the display device 7, the sound performance mode to be output from the speaker 32, the performance button device 6310, and the like, based on a command sent from the main CPU 201.
The details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to Figs. 212 and 213. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 30
1, the process proceeds to S6532.

In S6532, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S6533.

In S6533, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating a drawing request. In this process, the drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S6532. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S6534.

In S6534, the sub CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S6535.

In S6535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process.
In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in the above S6531. Upon completing this process, the sub CPU 301 advances the process to S6536.

In S6536, the sub CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, the reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6537.

In S6537, the sub CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button drive request. In this process, the sub CPU 301 generates a performance button drive request based on the performance pattern determined in S6531. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 210).

[8-9-13. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, referring to FIG. 212 and FIG. 213, in the performance mode determination process (see FIG. 211), S6
Details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in 531 will be described below. Figures 212 and 213 are flow charts showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "winning command for the first special symbol."

If it is determined in S6531-1 that the command is a "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-2, the sub-CPU 301 updates the number of reserved first special symbols,
The first reserved image update display process is performed to update and display the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-3.

In S6531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state."

When it is determined in S6531-3 that the state is the "normal gaming state", the sub-CPU 301
On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-4, the sub-CPU 301 executes a first half icon number determination process for determining the number of first half icons in the normal gaming state.

In the first half icon number determination process, the first half icon number is determined based on the winning command of the first special symbol and the third random number value by referring to the first half icon number determination table shown in Fig. 203. After completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-5.

In S6531-5, the sub-CPU 301 performs an icon scenario determination process. In this icon scenario determination process, both a first half icon display scenario determination process for determining a first half icon display scenario and a first half collection order scenario determination process for determining a first half collection order scenario are performed.

In the first half icon display scenario determination process, the first half icon display scenario determination table shown in Figure 204 is referenced, and a first half icon display scenario is determined based on the winning command for the first special pattern, the number of first half icons determined in S6531-4 above, and the fourth random number value.

In the first half collection order scenario determination process, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table shown in Figure 205 is referenced, and the first half collection order scenario is determined based on the winning command for the first special pattern, the number of first half icons determined in S6531-4 above, and the fifth random number value.

When both the first half icon display scenario determination process and the first half collection order scenario determination process are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-6.

In S6531-6, the sub-CPU 301 performs a cherry blossom accumulation notification determination process to determine a cherry blossom accumulation notification in the normal gaming state.

In the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination process, the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern is determined based on the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of character icons displayed in the cherry blossom accumulation notice according to the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5, and the sixth random number value, by referring to the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table shown in Fig. 206. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see Fig. 211).

In S6531-7, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "winning command for the second special symbol."

If it is determined in S6531-7 that the command is a "second special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-8. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "second special symbol winning command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-10.

In S6531-8, the sub-CPU 301 updates the number of reserved second special symbols,
A second reserved image update display process is performed to update and display the reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-9.

In S6531-9, the sub-CPU 301 performs lotus flower announcement determination processing to determine the lotus flower announcement in the right-hit gaming state.

In the lotus flower notice determination process, a lotus flower notice presentation pattern is determined based on the winning command of the second special symbol, the reserved number of the second special symbol, and the eighth random number value, with reference to a lotus flower notice determination table shown in Fig. 208. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see Fig. 211).

In S6531-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "big prize opening winning command."

If it is determined in S6531-10 that the command is a "prize command for the big prize opening", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "prize command for the big prize opening", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-20.

In S6531-11, the sub-CPU 301 performs a fan prediction determination process to determine a fan prediction in the jackpot gaming state.

In the fan notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, and if it is not in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, the fan notice determination process is terminated. Next, if the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the second special symbol is the upper limit number of 2, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the upper limit number of 2, the fan notice determination process is terminated. Then, if the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol is the upper limit number of 2, the fan notice determination table shown in FIG. 209 is referenced, and the fan notice performance pattern is determined based on the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area, the start information stored in the second special symbol start memory area, and the ninth random number value. When this process is terminated, the sub-CPU 301 terminates the performance pattern determination process and transfers the process to the generation process of the animation request (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-20, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

When it is determined in S6531-20 that the command is a "variation pattern command for special symbols", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-21. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command is not a "variation pattern command for special symbols", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-30.
Move to.

In S6531-21, the sub-CPU 301 executes a second-half icon number determination process for determining the number of second-half icons in the normal gaming state.

In the latter half icon number determination process, the latter half icon number is determined based on the variable pattern command of the first special symbol and the second random number value by referring to the latter half icon number determination table shown in Fig. 202. After completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-22.

In S6531-22, the sub CPU 301 executes a pattern effect pattern determination process for determining a pattern effect pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 returns to S653
Move to 1-23.

In the symbol effect pattern determination process, the game state is first referred to. If the game state is a normal game state, the game state shown in FIG.
If the game is in a right-hand play state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined.

When the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined, the determined symbol effect pattern table
5. Referring to the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5, if the symbol presentation pattern is a variation pattern command for the first special symbol, a pre-reach presentation pattern and a reach presentation pattern are determined based on the variation pattern command for the first special symbol and the number of latter-stage icons determined in S6531-21 above.
Also, in the normal game state, if the command is for a variation pattern of the second special symbol, a standby presentation pattern is determined.

In addition, in the normal game state, when a reach effect pattern is determined, the reach effect pattern and the above S653 are determined by referring to the support icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG.
A support icon display scenario is determined based on the number of second half icons determined in 1-21.

When the symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined, the determined symbol effect pattern determination table shown in FIG.
The special symbol variation pattern command and the first symbol variation pattern command are determined by referring to the symbol performance pattern determination table shown in
A symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the random number value.

In S6531-23, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining the dialogue preview and the button challenge preview, and other preview performance patterns.
U301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In the dialogue announcement in the announcement performance pattern determination process, in order to suggest the possibility of a jackpot by the dialogue of the displayed character, a dialogue announcement determination table (not shown) is referenced, and the first special symbol variation pattern command and a predetermined selection rate (10th random number value, etc.)
Based on this, a dialogue preview performance pattern is determined.

In addition, in the button challenge notice in the other notice performance pattern determination process, first, the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 is referenced, and if there is a number of character icons to be displayed in the button challenge notice according to the first half icon display scenario, a first button challenge notice performance pattern is determined in which the displayed number of character icons are displayed. In this first button challenge notice performance pattern, the player operates the performance button device 6310 multiple times to display the displayed number of character icons, but even if the player does not operate the performance button device 6310,
After the reception time of 310 ends, the displayed number of character icons will be displayed.

On the other hand, in the button challenge notice in the other notice performance pattern determination process, if there is no number of character icons displayed in the button challenge notice by the first half icon display scenario, a second button challenge notice performance pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined selection rate (11th random number value, etc.) by referring to a button challenge notice determination table (not shown) so that a character icon indicating the expectation degree of a big hit or the content of a developing reach can be displayed. In this second button challenge notice performance pattern, the character icon is displayed by the player operating the performance button device 6310 multiple times. In the second button challenge notice performance pattern, if the player does not operate the performance button device 6310, the character icon is not displayed, but the character icon may be displayed after the reception time of the performance button ends.

In S6531-30, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command."

If it is determined in S6531-30 that the command is a "symbol designation command", the sub-CPU
On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "symbol designation command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-40.

In S6531-31, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative symbol determination process to determine the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed according to the type of symbol designation command. If the type of symbol designation command is a command corresponding to a jackpot symbol, the sub-CPU 301 sets the number of rounds of the jackpot. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-40, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol effect stop command."

If it is determined in S6531-40 that the command is a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol effect stop command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-50.

In S6531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative symbol stopping process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols. When this process ends, the sub CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process and shifts the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-50, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command."

If it is determined in S6531-50 that the command is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-60.

In S6531-51, the sub-CPU 301 performs a jackpot performance determination process to determine a jackpot performance pattern for performing a jackpot performance. In this jackpot performance determination process, the jackpot performance pattern is determined according to the jackpot round number data set in the above S6531-31. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-60, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether or not the command transmitted from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S6531-60 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-C
The PU 301 transfers the process to S6531-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-70.

In S6531-61, the sub-CPU 301 executes a game state setting process for setting a game state according to the type of the game state designation command.
1 transfers the process to S6531-62.

In S6531-62, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation mode determination process to determine the presentation mode.

In this presentation mode determination process, the presentation mode is set to "Battle Mode" in the "High Probability Time-Shortening Game State", "Golden Hour Mode" in the "High Probability Non-Time-Shortening Game State", and "Dream Mode" in the "Low Probability Time-Shortening Game State". In addition, in the "normal game state", the mode alternates between "West Army Mode" and "East Army Mode" based on a predetermined transition rate (e.g., 12th random number value). In addition, in the "normal game state", the mode is set to "West Army Mode" and "East Army Mode" based on a predetermined number of changes of the special symbol, regardless of the predetermined transition rate (e.g., 12th random number value).
In the normal game state, the presentation modes are not limited to the two, "West Army Mode" and "East Army Mode", and three or more presentation modes may be transitionable. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process, and returns to the animation request generation process (FIG. 211).
Refer to the reference page for details.

In S6531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demo display command."

If it is determined in S6531-70 that the command is a "demo display command", the sub-CPU
On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-73.

In S6531-71, the sub CPU 301 executes a demo display effect pattern determination process for determining a demo display effect pattern for performing effects during game standby. Upon completing this process, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S6531-72.

In S6531-73, the sub-CPU 301 performs a button effect initialization process to instruct the button control circuit 310 to return the operation mode of the button effect device 6310 to the first operation mode (see FIG. 172(a)) as the initial operation mode. When this process ends, the sub-CPU
U301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

The effect button initialization process is configured to be performed when a "demo display command" is received, but in addition to this, it may also be configured to be performed when at least any one of the following commands is received: "special symbol winning command,""special symbol changing pattern command,""special symbol effect stop command," or "jackpot start display command."

Also, the effect button initialization process may be configured to be performed according to the current game state and various commands. For example, the effect button initialization process may be performed when a "demo display command" is received regardless of the game state, but may also be configured to be performed when any of the commands "special symbol winning command", "special symbol variation pattern command" and "special symbol effect stop command" in the normal game state is received. In particular, since the average variation time of the special symbol and the operation frequency of the effect button device 6310 differ depending on the game state, the effect button device 6310 can be initialized while taking into consideration the game state.

In S6531-13, the sub CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern according to various commands sent from the main CPU 201.
The PU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

[8-10. Production Contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effects of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described below.

(Normal display image)
First, the normal display images of the "West Army Mode" and the "East Army Mode" in the normal game state will be described. Fig. 214 shows an example of the normal display images of the West Army Mode and the East Army Mode in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine, Fig. 214(a) shows an example of the normal display image of the West Army Mode in the normal game state, and Fig. 214(b) shows an example of the normal display image of the East Army Mode in the normal game state.

As described above in FIG. 173, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, a performance partition section 6116, which is a ring-shaped structure, is disposed on the front side of the display area of the display device 7.
An upper display area 7a is formed inside the display device 6 as a display area for the display device 7. Various icons, characters, etc., which will be described later, are displayed in the upper display area 7a.

As shown in Fig. 214(a), in the normal display image of the West Army mode in the normal game state, a left pattern 6071L, a middle pattern 6071C, and a right pattern 6071R are configured to be displayed as main patterns of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern at the center of the display area of the display device 7. Also, at the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-pattern 6071A as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, a second sub-pattern 6071B as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and a third sub-pattern 6071C as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern are displayed.
In the normal game state, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol 6071L, the middle symbol 6071C, the right symbol 6072A, and the sub symbol 6072B are displayed in a small size.
The 071R and first sub-pattern 6071A are displayed in a variable manner, but when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, only the second sub-pattern 6072A is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the normal display image of the Western Army mode, the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed at the bottom left of the display area of the display device 7, and a special first reserved image 607 indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) according to the reserved number of first special symbols is displayed.
2a, a special 1st special pattern indicating that start information is stored in the 1st special pattern start memory area (2)
The reserved image 6072b, the special 1 third reserved image 6072c indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (3), and the special 1 fourth reserved image 6072d indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (4) are configured to be displayed.
In this embodiment, the number of reserved second special symbols is not displayed, but a number or the like indicating the number of reserved second special symbols can also be displayed.

In the normal display image in the Western Army mode, a Western Army icon display section 6074L indicating that a character icon is displayed is formed on the left side of the display area of the display device 7. This Western Army icon display section 6074L includes an icon A display image 6074a indicating that a character icon A (e.g., Western Army General A is participating in the battle) is displayed, an icon B display image 6074b indicating that a character icon B (e.g., Western Army General B is participating in the battle) is displayed, and a character icon C (
For example, an icon C display image 6074c indicating that a Western Army General C has joined the battle) is displayed, and an icon D display image 6074b indicating that a character icon D (for example, a Western Army General D has joined the battle) is displayed.
074d, and an icon E display image 6074e showing that a character icon E (for example, Western Army General E has joined the battle) has been displayed. As will be described in detail later, when each character icon is displayed, the Western Army icon display area 6074L corresponding to that character icon is
The icon display image will be displayed as lit up.

As shown in FIG. 214(b), in the normal display image of the East Army mode in the normal game state, the left pattern 6071L, the middle pattern 6071C, the right pattern 6071R,
First sub-pattern 6071A, second sub-pattern 6072A, special 1 first reserved image 6072a, special 1 second
It is configured to be able to display a reserved image 6072b, a special 1 third reserved image 6072c, and a special 1 fourth reserved image 6072d.

In the normal display image in the Eastern Army mode, an Eastern Army icon display section 6074R, which indicates that a character icon is displayed, is formed on the right side of the display area of the display device 7. This Eastern Army icon display section 6074R includes an icon F display image 6074f, which indicates that a character icon F (e.g., Eastern Army General F participating in the battle) is displayed, an icon G display image 6074g, which indicates that a character icon G (e.g., Eastern Army General G participating in the battle) is displayed, and a character icon H (
For example, an icon H display image 6074h indicating that an Eastern Army General H has joined the battle) is displayed, and an icon I display image 6075h indicating that a character icon I (for example, an Eastern Army General I has joined the battle) is displayed.
074i, and an icon J display image 6074j showing that a character icon J (for example, Eastern Army General J has joined the battle) has been displayed. As will be described in detail later, when each character icon is displayed, the Eastern Army icon display area 6074R corresponding to that character icon is
The icon display image will be displayed as lit up.

In this embodiment, in the Western Army mode in the normal game state, the character icons A to E correspond to the above-mentioned "first half icon", and the number of icon display images displayed in the Western Army icon display section 6074L corresponds to the above-mentioned "first half icon number". Also, in the Eastern Army mode in the normal game state, the character icons F to J
corresponds to the "first half icon", and the number of icon display images lit up in the East team icon display portion 6074R corresponds to the above-mentioned "number of first half icons".

In this embodiment, the West Army icon display portion 6074L and the East Army icon display portion 607
Although 4R is configured as a specified display image using the display device 7, it may also be configured using a separate LED display for performance that can light up multiple locations individually.

(Cherry Blossom Accumulation Announcement Production)
Next, the effect of the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described. Figures 215 and 216 are examples of display images for explaining the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, in explaining the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the symbols attached in FIG. 214 are omitted because the characters are small and lack visibility, which may interfere with the explanation of the performance content. In addition, the first sub-pattern 6071A and the second sub-pattern 6072A, which are displayed very small, are also omitted. This is the same for the performances explained in FIG. 217 to FIG. 227.

Using Fig. 215 and Fig. 216, a stage performance in which cherry blossoms are gradually accumulated is performed in two stages, a pre-change and the start of the change, and a cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the cherry blossom accumulation two-stage notice-YK7 notice performance pattern (see Fig. 206) in which "two character icons" are displayed in the change is performed. Alternatively, a stage performance in which cherry blossoms are gradually accumulated is performed in two stages, a pre-change and the start of the change.
Sakura accumulation 2-stage notice - YK, which is carried out in stages and displays the "Yakuza icon" at the time of the change
We will explain an example of a cherry blossom accumulation preview presentation that corresponds to the 24 preview presentation patterns (see Figure 206).

Fig. 215(a) is an example of a display image when the number of reserved first special symbols is 2 and the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. Also, as shown in Fig. 215(a), none of the icon display images are displayed in the West Army icon display section.

Fig. 215(b) is an example of a display image when the display of the decorative pattern is started as a pre-change from the state of Fig. 215(a). As shown in Fig. 215(b), when the display of the decorative pattern is started, at the start of the pre-change, cherry blossoms are dancing in the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are being drawn into the upper display area 7a.

Fig. 215(c) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossom is sucked into the upper display area 7a from the state of Fig. 215(b) and the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. As shown in Fig. 215(c), when the cherry blossom is sucked into the upper display area 7a, a one-step accumulation image indicating that the cherry blossom has been accumulated in one step is displayed in the upper display area 7a, and then the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Note that in the case of a cherry blossom accumulation notice (cherry blossom accumulation 0 step notice - YK0) in which the cherry blossom is sucked into the upper display area 7a but fails to accumulate the cherry blossom, the one-step accumulation image is not displayed in the upper display area 7a.

Fig. 215(d) is an example of a display image when the display of the decorative pattern starts as the state of Fig. 215(c) or the corresponding change. As shown in Fig. 215(d), when the display of the decorative pattern starts, at the start of the change, cherry blossoms dance all over the display area of the display device 7, and a display image is produced in which the cherry blossoms are being sucked into the upper display area 7a.

Fig. 216(e) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a from the state of Fig. 215(d). As shown in Fig. 216(e), when new cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a, a two-stage accumulation image indicating that cherry blossoms have been accumulated in two stages is displayed in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 216(f) is an example of a display image when a character icon A (for example, Western Army General A joins the battle) is displayed due to a button challenge notice or the like from the state of FIG. 216(e).
As shown in 6 (f), when character icon A (for example, Western Army General A joins the battle) is displayed due to a button challenge announcement or the like that is different from the cherry blossom accumulation announcement, the icon A display image is lit up in the Western Army icon display section, and a two-stage accumulation image and a text image indicating the number of character icons, "1 person concentrated" are displayed in the upper display area 7a.

Fig. 216(g) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released. As shown in Fig. 216(g), at a predetermined timing, such as before a win, the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released, and the entire display area is covered with the cherry blossoms. The timing at which the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released can be freely changed as needed.

Figure 216 (h-1) shows that after Sakura is released, the path to the ultimate showdown begins.
This is an example of a display image when the "Yakuza Icon" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 216 (h-1), in the case of the cherry blossom accumulation two-stage notice-YK24, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, the "Yakuza Icon" is displayed, indicating that the game will progress to the Road to the Ultimate Showdown. After that, the performance of the Road to the Ultimate Showdown will be performed.

FIG. 216(h-2) is an example of a display image when two character icons are displayed after the release of cherry blossoms. As shown in FIG. 216(h-2), the cherry blossom accumulation two-stage notice-YK7
In this case, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, two character icons, character icon B (for example, Western Army General B joins the battle) and character icon C (for example, Western Army General C joins the battle), are displayed. Then, the icon B display image and the icon C display image are lit up and displayed in the Western Army icon display section, and "3 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

In addition, in Figures 215 and 216, an example of the cherry blossom accumulation notice's presentation corresponding to the notice presentation patterns of Cherry Blossom Accumulation 2-Stage Notice-YK7 and Cherry Blossom Accumulation 2-Stage Notice-YK24 has been explained, but the same applies to other notice presentation patterns of the Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice (see Figure 206).

In this way, the cherry blossom accumulation notice of this embodiment gradually increases the sense of anticipation for the game by developing a stage-by-stage presentation across the pre-change and the change itself (or just the change itself), and the display results also create interest, making the game even more enjoyable.

(Pseudo consecutive performance)
Next, the "pseudo consecutive winning performance" will be described. Figures 217 to 219 are examples of display images for explaining the pseudo consecutive winning performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

217 to 219, an example of a pseudo consecutive performance corresponding to the first half icon display scenarios A38 and A39 (see FIG. 204) in which two pseudo consecutive performances are performed, five character icons are displayed, and the game progresses to the path to a decisive battle will be described. The display order of the character icons in the pseudo consecutive performance described using FIG. 217 to 219 is based on the first half collection order scenario 5-1 (see FIG. 205) corresponding to the display order pattern 1.

Fig. 217(a) is an example of a display image when all the decorative patterns of the left pattern, the center pattern, and the right pattern are changing. As shown in Fig. 217(a), the icon A display image and the icon B display image of the West Army icon display section are lit up, and "2 people convergence" is displayed as a character icon number in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 217(b) is an example of a display image when the left pattern is displayed as a provisional stop, and then the right pattern is also displayed as a provisional stop.

Figure 217 (c) is an example of a display image when the right pattern, which is displayed as a temporary stop, starts to change again (right pattern slips) from the state of Figure 217 (b).

FIG. 217(d) is an example of a display image when the first pseudo consecutive fanning performance is being performed to fan whether or not a predetermined character icon will stop at the position of the middle pattern. As shown in FIG. 217(d), when the right pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the "character icon C (
A display will be displayed to tease whether or not "Western Army General C joins the battle" will be stopped.

Fig. 218(e) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle pattern and the first pseudo consecutive stimulating performance is successful. As shown in Fig. 218(e), when the pseudo consecutive stimulating performance is successful and "character icon C (Western Army General C joins the battle)" stops at the position of the middle pattern, the icon C display image is lit up in the Western Army icon display section, and "3 people convergence" is displayed as a text image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

In addition, when the first pseudo consecutive teasing performance fails, "Character Icon C (Western Army General C
"Participate" is erased, the right pattern is temporarily stopped with a different type of pattern than the left pattern, and then all decorative patterns are stopped, resulting in a "miss."

FIG. 218(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle pattern and the first pseudo consecutive performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 218(f), as the first pseudo consecutive performance, "pseudo x 1 time" is displayed, indicating the first pseudo consecutive performance,
All decorative patterns, including the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern, begin to change display.

FIG. 218(g) is an example of a display image when the second pseudo consecutive fanning performance is being performed. As shown in FIG. 218(g), when the left pattern is temporarily stopped, "
A display is displayed to tease whether or not character icon D (Western Army General D joins the battle) and character icon E (Western Army General E joins the battle) will stop.

FIG. 218(h) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle pattern and the second pseudo consecutive fanning performance is successful. As shown in FIG. 218(h), "character icon D (Western Army General D participation)" and "character icon E (Western Army General E)" are displayed at the position of the middle pattern.
When "Join the Battle" stops, the icon D display image and the icon E display image are lit up in the Western Army icon display section, and "5-man concentrated" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Also, when the second pseudo consecutive teasing performance fails, "Character Icon D (Western Army General D
" (Western Army General E joins the battle)" and "Character Icon E (Western Army General E joins the battle)" will disappear, and the right-hand pattern will be displayed as a temporary stop pattern of the same type as the left-hand pattern, resulting in a normal reach.

FIG. 219(i) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle pattern and the second pseudo consecutive performance is performed. As shown in FIG. 219(i), as the second pseudo consecutive performance, "pseudo x 2 times" is displayed, indicating the second pseudo consecutive performance,
All decorative patterns, including the left pattern, middle pattern, and right pattern, begin to change display.

FIG. 219(j) shows that all icon display images are lit up in the Western Army icon display section,
This is an example of a display image when the "path icon" indicating the development to the path to the decisive battle is displayed. As shown in FIG. 219(j), after the second pseudo consecutive performance starts, all icon display images are lit up in the West Army icon display section, and the "path icon" indicating the development to the decisive battle is displayed. After that, the performance of the path to the decisive battle is performed.

In addition, in FIG. 217 to FIG. 219, the first half icon display scenario A38 or A39
An example of pseudo-consecutive performance corresponding to first half set order scenario 5-1 has been described above, but the same applies to pseudo-consecutive performances corresponding to other first half icon display scenarios (see Figure 204) and other first half set order scenarios (see Figure 205).

In this way, the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment is not just whether or not re-variation is performed,
The number of character icons displayed during re-changing, the types of character icons, the display order of the character icons, etc. can also add new interest and make the game more exciting.

(Direction of the road to the final battle)
Next, the effect of "Road to the Final Battle" will be described. Figures 220 and 221 are examples of display images for explaining the effect of "Road to the Final Battle" in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 220 and 221, we will explain an example of the presentation of the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Western Army mode, and corresponds to pre-reach presentation patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 (see Figure 200), in which eight character icons are displayed and the path to the decisive battle develops into a confrontation reach.

Here, the path to the final battle is an effect in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 a first number of times and aims to collect 10 character icons before a predetermined time has elapsed, and the “operation effect time” during which the player can operate the effect button device 6310 a first number of times is set as
In this embodiment, the reception time of the effect button device 6310 is set to 3 seconds, and the display time for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result is set to 1 second, which is one set (4 seconds).
The "operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the operation of the effect button device 6310 can be performed five times as the first operation number. The operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle and the configuration of the reception time of the effect button device 6310 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

As shown in Fig. 220 and Fig. 221, in the performance of the road to the decisive battle which is developed from the Western Army mode, it is assumed that all the icon display images of the Western Army icon display section are lit, so a text image of "Western Army Assemble" is displayed near the Western Army icon display section, indicating that all the icon display images of the Western Army icon display section are lit. Also, a "countdown display image" which counts down the number of seconds until the "operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle" ends is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. In this embodiment, the "countdown display image" suggests the maximum number of operations of the performance button device 6310 (see Fig. 228), but instead of the countdown display image, a number image indicating the maximum number of operations of the performance button device 6310 may be displayed.

Fig. 220(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to operate the effect button device 6310 for the first time. As shown in Fig. 220(a), when it is possible to operate the effect button device 6310, an effect button image for encouraging the player to operate the effect button device 6310 and a gauge image showing the reception time of the effect button device 6310 are displayed below the effect button image. This is also the case in the performance of the Road to Extreme Showdown.

Fig. 220(b) is an example of the case where "character icon H (Eastern Army General H joins the battle)" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in Fig. 220(b), when "character icon H (Eastern Army General H joins the battle)" is displayed, the icon H display image is lit up in the Eastern Army icon display section, and "6 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

FIG. 220(c) is an example of a display image when it is possible to operate the performance button device 6310 a second time.

220(d) is an example of a display image when "Approaching?!" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the second time. This "Approaching?!" icon is an icon that corresponds to a so-called miss, where no character icon is displayed, and the icons displayed are adjusted according to the selection rate, scenario, etc. so that a predetermined number of character icons are ultimately displayed.

FIG. 221( e ) is an example of a display image when the third and fourth operations of the effect button device 6310 have been completed and it is possible to perform the fifth (final) operation of the effect button device 6310 .

Fig. 221(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined icon is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the fifth (final) time. As shown in Fig. 221(f), when "character icon G (Eastern Army General G joins the battle)" and "character icon F (Eastern Army General F joins the battle)" are displayed as the predetermined icon, the icon G display image and the icon F display image are lit up in the Eastern Army icon display section, and "8 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Figure 221 (g) is an example of a display image when the countdown display image reaches zero and the final number of character icons is displayed.

Fig. 221(h) is an example of a display image when a text image indicating that the game will progress to a showdown reach is displayed after the final number of character icons is displayed. In the showdown reach, a performance is performed using the displayed character icons, so as shown in Fig. 221(h), a text image indicating the number of character icons is continuously displayed in the upper display area 7a. After the display shown in Fig. 221(h) is performed, the performance of the showdown reach will be performed.

In Figures 220 and 221, an example of the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Western Army mode and corresponds to pre-reach performance patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 has been explained, but the same applies to the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Eastern Army mode and other pre-reach performance patterns that involve the path to the decisive battle (see Figure 200).

In this way, the Road to the Final Battle presentation in this embodiment is a presentation in which the player aims to collect 10 character icons by operating the presentation button device 6310 before a specified time has elapsed, which encourages the player to actively participate in the game and further increases the enjoyment of the game.

(Direction of the road to the ultimate showdown)
Next, the effects of "The Road to the Ultimate Showdown" will be described. Fig. 222 is an example of a display image for explaining the effects of "The Road to the Ultimate Showdown" in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 222 shows a performance of the path to the ultimate battle, which develops from the Western Army mode. In this performance, ten character icons are displayed and the game progresses to the ultimate battle.
An example of the presentation of the road to the ultimate showdown corresponding to the above-mentioned game (see 00) will now be described.

Here, the Road to the Ultimate Showdown is a specific presentation of the same type as the Road to the Showdown, and is a presentation in which the player operates the presentation button device 6310 a second number of times before a predetermined time has elapsed, aiming to collect 10 character icons, and an "operation presentation time" during which the presentation button device 6310 can be operated a second number of times is set. In this embodiment, one set (4 seconds) is made up of a reception time of 3 seconds for the presentation button device 6310 and a display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon based on the operation result, and 1 second is set as the second number of operations, which is greater than the first number of operations.
In order to allow the operation of the performance button device 6310 to be performed 0 times, the "Operation performance time of the road to the ultimate showdown" is set to "0 times".
is set to 40 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 222, in the performance of the Road to the Ultimate Battle, which is developed from the Western Army mode, a "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "operation performance time of the Road to the Ultimate Battle" ends is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. Note that in this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of times the performance button device 6310 can be operated.
A number image showing the maximum number of operations of 10 may be displayed.

Fig. 222(a) is an example of a display image when the first operation of the effect button device 6310 can be performed. At the start of the effect of the Road to the Extreme Battle, the icon display image displayed as lit continues to be displayed in the Western Army icon display section until the effect of the Road to the Extreme Battle starts. In Fig. 222(a), the character icon A is already displayed by the time the effect of the Road to the Extreme Battle starts, and the icon A display image continues to be displayed as lit in the Western Army icon display section.

Fig. 222(b) is an example of a display image when a specific character icon D is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in Fig. 222(b), when "character icon D (Western Army General D joins the battle)" and "character icon H (Western Army General H joins the battle)" are displayed as the specific icon, the icon D display image in the Western Army icon display section and the icon H display image in the Eastern Army icon display section are lit up, and "3 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Fig. 222(c) is an example of a display image when the tenth operation of the effect button device 6310 is completed, the countdown display image becomes zero, and the final number of character icons is displayed. In Fig. 222(c), all icon display images in the West Army icon display section and the East Army icon display section are lit up.

FIG. 222(d) is an example of a display image when a text image indicating that the game will progress to the Final Battle Reach is displayed after the final number of character icons is displayed. At this time, the text image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is erased.
After the display shown in 22(d) is performed, a "Great Battle Reach" effect is performed.

In FIG. 222, an example of the performance of the path to the ultimate battle that develops from the Western Army mode and corresponds to the pre-reach performance pattern 32 in which 10 character icons are displayed and the path develops into the great decisive battle reach has been described. However, the performance of the path to the ultimate battle that develops from the Eastern Army mode and other pre-reach performance patterns that lead to the path to the great decisive battle (FIG. 2
The same applies to 00.

In this embodiment, in the performance of the Road to the Final Battle or the Road to the Ultimate Final Battle, the number of icon display images that are lit and displayed in the West Army icon display section and the East Army icon display section is set to the above-mentioned "
This corresponds to the "number of icons in the second half".

(The showdown reach production)
Next, the effects of the "showdown reach" will be described. Figures 223 and 224 are examples of display images for explaining the effects of the showdown reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 223 and 224, we will explain an example of a presentation corresponding to reach presentation patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 (see Figure 200) in which a showdown reach is made after eight character icons are displayed.

FIG. 223(a) is an example of a display image when a showdown reach starts.
As shown in (a) (and FIG. 221 (h)), the upper display area 7a continuously displays a text image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the Road to the Final Battle and Road to the Ultimate Final Battle performances.

223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is converted into the number of support icons displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display device 7. Note that the decorative pattern is displayed in a small manner and shifted to the lower right of the display area of the display device 7 so as not to impair the character presentation.

Fig. 223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons is converted and displayed as the number of support icons. As shown in Fig. 223(b), a display image is produced in which "8-person concentration" is displayed as a text image showing eight character icons in the upper display area 7a, and is converted and displayed as "Support x 8" as the number of support icons. When "9-person concentration" is displayed as a text image showing nine character icons in the upper display area 7a, a display image is produced in which the number of support icons is converted and displayed as "Support x 9".

FIG. 223(c) is a display image when an enemy character appears, and FIG.
Continuing from above, this is an example of a display image when eight character icons are converted and displayed as eight support icons.

FIG. 223(d) is an example of a display image when a friendly character is facing off against an enemy character, and when a support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a.
As shown in FIG. 223(d), the upper display area 7a displays a performance button device 6310 to the player.
A support icon is displayed, which consists of a letter image of "PUSH" to prompt the player to operate the game and a face image (for example, the face of Western Army General A) corresponding to a character icon already displayed on the road to the decisive battle or the road to the ultimate decisive battle.

Fig. 224(e) is an example of a display image when an ally character is facing an enemy character, and when the effect button device 6310 is operated and a predetermined effect result is displayed in the upper display area 7a. In Fig. 224(e), when a support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the effect button device 6310 is operated and the word "opportunity" is displayed as the predetermined effect result. Note that what is displayed as the predetermined effect result is not limited to "opportunity", and may be any of a support icon display scenario (Fig. 207
Based on the character's name (see reference), one of the following icons can be displayed: "Line", "Good Opportunity", "Extremely Hot", "LED", or "Great Battle Icon".

Fig. 224(f) is an example of a display image when a friendly character is facing an enemy character, and is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated and the "Great Battle Icon" is displayed in the upper display area 7a. After the display shown in Fig. 224(f) is displayed, the effect of the Great Battle Reach is performed.

FIG. 224(g) is an example of a display image when the support icon disappears and the ally character confronts the enemy character to display the final result. As shown in FIG. 224(h-1),
If the friendly character wins, it is a big win, and if the friendly character loses, it is a loss, as shown in FIG. 224 (h-2).

In addition, in FIG. 223 and FIG. 224, the reach performance patterns 4 and 6 which perform the showdown reach are
An example of the presentation corresponding to , 12, and 14 has been explained, but the same applies to the presentation of other reach presentation patterns (see Figure 200) in which a showdown reach is made after nine character icons are displayed.

In this way, the presentation of the showdown reach in this embodiment can be controlled based on the number of character icons collected up until the showdown reach is reached (the presentation of the road to the decisive battle or the road to the ultimate showdown), thereby making the game even more exciting.

(Lotus flower preview performance)
Next, the effect of the "Lotus Flower Notice" will be described. Figure 225 is an example of a display image for explaining the effect of the Lotus Flower Notice in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figure 225, we will explain an example of a lotus flower announcement presentation that corresponds to the announcement presentation pattern of the lotus flower success announcement (see Figure 208).

FIG. 225(a) is an example of a display image when a bud is displayed in a pre-variation in the "Golden Hour Mode," which is a high-probability non-time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 225(a), in the "Golden Time Mode" which is a high probability non-time shortening game state, a text image "Golden Time" indicating the Golden Time mode, a count display image "Jewel" which accumulates and counts the number of game balls that enter and are paid out from the first large winning opening 6131 and the second large winning opening 6151 when in the right-hand hitting state, and an operation instruction image "Right Hit" for performing a right-hand hit are displayed.
is displayed.

Fig. 225(b) is an example of a display image when the pre-change has ended but the bud continues to be displayed. Also, the bud that has been continuously displayed since the pre-change will continue to be displayed when the change of the change starts.

Here, the buds that have been continuously displayed since the pre-change will be continuously displayed from the pre-change to the small win game state to the change, even if the pre-change is a change corresponding to a small win. Therefore, in the lotus flower notice presentation of this embodiment, the small win game state that is likely to be entered when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 allows the player to enjoy the lotus flower notice continuously without interrupting the presentation.

Fig. 225(c) is an example of a display image when the bud opens and is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation. The opening of this bud suggests that the development will progress to the "door opening effect" shown in Fig. 225(d).

In addition, in FIG. 225, an example of the performance of the lotus flower announcement corresponding to the notice performance pattern of the lotus flower success notice is described, but the notice performance pattern of the lotus flower failure notice (see FIG. 208)
The same is true for the corresponding lotus flower preview.

(Battle Reach Production)
Next, the effects of the "battle reach" will be described. Figures 226 and 227 are examples of display images for explaining the effects of the battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 226 and 227, we will explain an example of a battle reach presentation corresponding to the first pattern presentation patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 (see Figure 201) in which the final operation mode of the presentation button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode or the fifth operation mode.

226(a) is an example of a display image of a button promotion chance effect that is performed when a battle reach is started. In a battle reach, it is possible to perform a button promotion chance effect first.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), above the display area of the display device 7, there is a performance button device 63.
The "button operation icon" showing the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is scrolled from left to right. In addition, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, a "effect button state image" showing the current state of the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is displayed.

FIG. 226(b) is an example of a display image when the button operation icon is displayed frozen and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 changes.

226(b), the upper display area 7a displays a frozen button operation icon of "Level 3 consecutive hits," which indicates the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310. Correspondingly, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, a changeable effect button state image, which indicates the state of the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310, is displayed.

FIG. 226(c) is an example of a display image when an ally character is facing off against an enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(c), the upper display area 7a continuously displays a button operation icon of "Lv3 consecutive hits", which indicates the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310.

FIG. 226(d) is an example of an image displayed when an attack by an ally character hits an enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(d), when an attack of an ally character hits an enemy boss, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a rises by one level, and the effect button device 631
The button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a changes to a "Level 4 One Strike" button operation icon indicating the fourth operation mode of level 4.0. Note that if an attack by an ally character does not hit the enemy boss, or if the enemy boss attacks an ally character, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a does not change.

Figure 227 (e) is an example of a display image when the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 changes, following Figure 226 (d).

As shown in Figure 226 (e), the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a has changed to the "Lv4 One Strike" button operation icon, and therefore a change is made to the effect button state image displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7, indicating the state of the fourth operation mode of the effect button device 6310.

In FIG. 227(f-1), the battle between the ally character and the enemy boss is repeated, and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally becomes the fourth operation mode, and the player presses the effect button device 6310
13 is an example of a display image when performing the operation.

In FIG. 227(f-2), the battle between the friendly character and the enemy boss is repeated, and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally becomes the fifth operation mode, and the player presses the effect button device 6310
13 is an example of a display image when performing the operation.

Figure 227 (g-1) is an example of a display image in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 from the state of Figure 227 (f-1) or Figure 227 (f-1), causing a group of effect props 58 (see Figure 173) to fall (not shown), indicating a jackpot.

Figure 227 (g-2) is an example of a display image indicating that when the player operates the effect button device 6310 from the state of Figure 227 (f-1) or Figure 227 (f-1), the group of effect props 58 (see Figure 173) does not fall (not shown), resulting in a miss.

In addition, in FIG. 226 and FIG. 227, an example of the battle reach corresponding to the first symbol presentation patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 has been described. However, the first symbol presentation patterns 2 and 7 (FIG. 20
The same applies to the presentation of the Battle Reach corresponding to the above (see 1).

In this way, the battle reach presentation of this embodiment changes the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310 depending on the result of the presentation content, so that the player can be aroused by the change in the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310 (the growth of the presentation button) which he or she will now be directly operating, thereby making the game even more enjoyable.

[8-11. Configuration of operation performance time and reception time]
Next, an explanation will be given of the operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the presentation button device 6310. Fig. 228 is an example of a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the presentation button device in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 228 (1) is a diagram explaining the composition of the operation presentation time for Road to the Final Battle.

As shown in FIG. 228(1), in the performance of the road to the decisive battle, the performance button device 631
The operation time of 0 is composed of 4 seconds, which is the sum of 3 seconds of reception time and 1 second of display time for displaying a predetermined icon depending on the operation result, and the "operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the presentation button device 6310 can be operated 5 times. Therefore, as shown in Figures 220 and 221, the "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle" ends suggests the maximum number of times the presentation button device 6310 can be operated. This is also true for the presentation of the road to the extreme decisive battle, although the number of operations is different.

In addition, if the effect button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, a predetermined icon is continuously displayed from the time of operation until the end of the display time.
If the operation in step 10 is not performed, a predetermined icon will be displayed from the end of the reception time until the end of the display time.

When the effect button device 6310 is operated within such a reception time, the reception time ends and a specified image is displayed from the time of the operation (a specified effect is performed), and such an effect related to the effect button device 6310 is called a "single operation effect", and the same is true for the effect on the road to the ultimate showdown, etc.

Figure 228 (2a) is a diagram explaining the configuration of the reception time for a single operation performance.

As shown in FIG. 228 (2a), the reception time of the effect button device 6310 for one-time operation effect is set as a "start invalid period" in which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be invalid for a first period (e.g., 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately after the start of the reception time, and a second period (e.g., 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately before the end of the reception time is set as a "start invalid period" in which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be invalid.
The period from the "start invalid period" to the "end invalid period" is set as the "valid period" during which operation of the effect button device 6310 is determined to be valid.

As shown in Fig. 228 (2b), the period immediately before the start of the reception time may be set as the "start invalid period" and the period immediately after the end of the reception time may be set as the "end invalid period" without including the "start invalid period" and the reception time as it is. In this case, the reception time directly corresponds to the "valid time".

On the other hand, even if the button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, the reception time does not end, and the button device 6310 can be operated multiple times within the reception time in the "continuous operation performance (for example, a button challenge notice, a door opening performance, a battle reach when the operation mode of the button device 6310 finally becomes the third operation mode (Level 3 continuous press), etc.)"
The reception hours are structured differently.

Figure 228 (3) is a diagram explaining the configuration of the reception time for the rapid-fire operation effect.

As shown in FIG. 228 (3), the acceptance time for the rapid-fire operation effect is set to a “start invalid period,” an “end invalid period,” and a “valid period (initial),” which is similar to the configuration of the acceptance time for the single operation effect.

Then, when the effect button device 6310 is operated within the "valid period (initial period)", a new "operation invalid period" is set by the sub-CPU 301, during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be invalid for a specified period of time following the operation.

The "operation invalid period" is set by the sub-CPU 301 in accordance with the content of the performance triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310. For example, when the performance is progressing, the performance button device 6310 vibrates and a third period (
In contrast to this, when the performance is not progressing, the performance button device 6310 does not vibrate, and a fourth period (for example, 4 frames, 4/60 seconds, etc.) shorter than the third period is set as the “invalid operation period.”

In this way, in the rapid-fire operation presentation, different periods are set depending on the presentation content triggered by the operation of the presentation button device 6310, so that the presentation content triggered by the operation of the presentation button device 6310 can be reliably performed.

[8-12. Signals output to outside the machine]
Next, we will explain the signals output from the external terminal board 184 (see Figure 6) to outside the sixth pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see Figure 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island).

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 generates "external information 1" to "external information 8" in the game state designation parameter setting process, and
The external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to
These are various signals of "External Information 8", "Prize Ball Information 2" and "Security". However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or any of these signals may be configured not to be output.

229 is a table showing an example of the output conditions of the signal output to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine. In the sixth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 65), each CH outputs "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8",
Various signals of "prize ball information 2" and "security" are output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. However, the sixth pachinko gaming machine differs in part from the first pachinko gaming machine in the output conditions of the "external information 3" signal output from CH3 of the connector. The output conditions of "external information 3" are explained below.

As shown in FIG. 229, in addition to the fact that "external information 3" is "output during all jackpots, during special probability mode, and during time-saving mode" as in the first pachinko game machine, a new output condition has been added that "the special information 3" is "output until the special pattern that has started to change during special probability mode finishes changing."

Here, in a "simultaneous variable machine" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variable displayed in parallel, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started from a specific game state consisting of a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, and a low probability time-saving game state, but when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, the game state may be shifted to the normal game state by the special symbol whose variable display ends first, and an error case may occur in which the special symbol whose variable display ends later is judged to be a jackpot or miss in the normal game state.
By adding the above-mentioned new output condition to "External Information 3", the occurrence of the above-mentioned error case is eliminated, and in the "Simultaneous Variable Machine", it is possible to accurately measure the number of jackpots and consecutive wins that were triggered by a specific game state. This will be specifically explained using the timing chart of the signal of "External Information 3" as an example.

Figure 230 is an example of a timing chart of the "External Information 3" signal, among the signals outputted to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 230 illustrates, from above and below, the variable display and stopped display of the first special pattern, the variable display and stopped display of the second special pattern, the output and stopping of external information 3, and the transition of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 230, in a high probability non-time shortening gaming state, which is one of the specific gaming states,
The special symbol starts variable display for the 119th spin after the end of the big win game state. After that, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, the second special symbol starts variable display for the 120th spin after the end of the big win game state.

The second special symbol stops variable display before the first special symbol stops variable display, and the game state transitions from the high probability non-time-saving game state to the normal game state.

The first special symbol is variably displayed from the high probability non-time-saving game state, but is displayed as a stopped symbol in the normal game state.

Even if the game state is shifted from a high probability non-time shortening game state to a normal game state, the external information 3 continues to be output until the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to a new output condition of "outputting until the special symbol that has started to vary during the probability variation ends."

As a result, even if a jackpot occurs with the first special symbol on the 119th spin, it can be counted as the number of jackpots triggered by a specific game state.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, as described in FIG. 178 etc.,
By organically relating the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the lottery contents of the special symbols (see FIG. 175), the rules for transition to the game state (see FIG. 177), etc., at the end of all big win game states, the game state is transitioned to a "(first half) high probability time-limited game state" where the expectation of consecutive big wins is high, and when the high probability game state ends and the expectation of consecutive big wins becomes low, the game state is transitioned to a "(second half) high probability non-time-limited game state: small win RUSH", and the transitioned "high probability non-time-limited game state: small win RUSH"
In this case, the player can expect not only the payout of game balls but also the jackpot of the second special pattern that guarantees transition to the next jackpot game state, thereby creating unprecedented gameplay and making the game even more exciting.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, as described in FIG. 198, when a yakuza icon is displayed by performing a cherry blossom accumulation notice, the game progresses to the performance of the Road to the Ultimate Showdown, and when five character icons are collected by performing a pseudo consecutive performance, the game progresses to the performance of the Road to the Ultimate Showdown. When the performance progresses to the performance of the Road to the Ultimate Showdown or the Road to the Showdown, a specific performance of the same type (a performance aiming to collect 10 character icons) can be executed. Therefore, various performances can be associated with each other to further increase the interest of the game.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is composed of a stage effect in which cherry blossoms are accumulated in stages, and an icon display effect in which the accumulated cherry blossoms are released to display a predetermined number of "character icons" or "Yakuza icons". The stage effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable throughout the pre-variation and the actual variation, and the icon display effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable during the actual variation. The stage effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is set so that the more cherry blossoms are accumulated, the higher the expectation of the "Yakuza icon" being displayed and the number of "character icons" being displayed.
For this reason, the "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice" of this embodiment gradually increases the sense of anticipation for the game by developing a stage-by-stage presentation across the pre-change and the change itself (or just the change itself), and the display results also create interest, making the game even more enjoyable.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the "pseudo consecutive performance" is performed when any one of a plurality of character icons stops, and each time the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, it is possible to collect one or more character icons. When five character icons are collected, the performance progresses to the Road to the Final Battle. The content of the upcoming game is also suggested by the number of character icons collected, the type of character icons, the order in which the character icons are collected (display order), and the like.
For this reason, the "pseudo consecutive performance" of this embodiment adds new interest not only in whether or not a re-change occurs, but also in the number of character icons displayed during a re-change, the type of character icons, the display order of the character icons, etc., thereby making the game even more enjoyable.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Final Battle" are performed by the player operating the performance button device 6310 for 10 seconds before the end of a predetermined time.
The aim is to collect 10 character icons.
When character icons are collected, it develops into the Great Battle Reach, which has the highest chance of winning. In addition, the number of character icons collected, the type of character icon, and the order in which the character icons are collected (display order) can also suggest the content of future games.
For this reason, the "Road to the Final Battle Presentation" and "Road to the Ultimate Final Battle Presentation" of this embodiment encourage the player to actively participate in the game (by operating the presentation button device 6310), thereby making the game even more interesting.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "showdown reach" converts the character icons collected up until the showdown reach (the performance of the road to the decisive battle or the road to the ultimate showdown) into support icons,
By operating the effect button device 6310, effects can be produced using support icons.
Therefore, in the "showdown reach" of this embodiment, operation effects can be performed using the icons collected up until the showdown reach, which can further increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "lotus flower notice" is configured to be executable throughout the pre-variation and the relevant variation, and even if the pre-variation is a variation corresponding to a small win, it is configured to be continuously displayed from the pre-variation through the small win game state to the relevant variation.
For this reason, in this embodiment of the invention, the "Lotus Flower Notice" allows the player to continue enjoying the Lotus Flower Notice without interrupting the presentation by entering a small win game state which is likely to occur when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the "battle reach" is an effect in which the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is changed depending on the result of the effect content.
For this reason, the "Battle Reach" of this embodiment can generate new interest in the change in the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, which the player will now be directly operating (the growth of the effect button), thereby making the game even more enjoyable.

(others)
The sixth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the sixth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the sixth pachinko gaming machine as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

The following is a description of the technologies related to this invention.

<Additional Note 1: The fourth pachinko machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole, display a variable special pattern on a pattern display device, and control the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode (so-called Type 1 pachinko gaming machines), and gaming machines that, based on the gaming ball entering the starting hole, change a movable member of a variable winning device (large winning hole) from a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter to a state in which it is easier, and control the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the gaming ball that entered the variable winning device enters a specific area provided within the variable winning device (so-called Type 2 gaming machines).

In addition to the big prize hole and the starting hole, the game area is provided with a passing gate that activates normal symbols, and when a game ball passes through the passing gate, a lottery for a normal symbol is held.
If the regular symbol is selected, a movable member (a so-called electric tulip) provided in a specific starting hole opens.
And most gaming machines with these moving parts have the following features to enhance the fun of the game:
There is a time-saving game state in which the movable member is more likely to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable member is less likely to open per unit time (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-273866 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, with regard to the operation of the movable member provided at a specific starting port, the only thing of interest was whether the game ball passed through the passing gate when in a time-saving game state, or whether the game ball passed through the passing gate when in a non-time-saving game state, and there was room for further improvement in order to increase the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further increase the entertainment value of the game.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (e.g., gaming panel 3100, 4100) in which a gaming area through which gaming balls flow down is formed, a starting area detection means (e.g., first starting area switch 3121) for detecting the entry of a gaming ball into a starting area (e.g., first starting area 3120) provided in the gaming area, and a passing area (e.g., first starting area switch 3122) provided in the gaming area.
A pass area detection means (e.g., a first pass gate switch 3127A) for detecting the entry of a game ball into a pass gate 3126A), a start variable winning device (e.g., a normal electric device 3146) that is provided in the game area and can be changed between an open state that makes it easier to receive a game ball and a closed state that makes it harder to receive a game ball, a normal game judgment means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that makes an open/close judgment as to whether or not to change the start variable winning device from a closed state to an open state on the condition that a game ball is detected by the pass area detection means, a normal pattern display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that starts a variable display of a normal pattern on the normal pattern display device and controls the normal pattern display device to stop displaying the normal pattern after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, and The present invention is provided with an opening mode determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining an opening mode for changing the winning device between the open state and the closed state, a start opening/closing control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for performing opening/closing control for changing the starting variable winning device between the open state and the closed state according to the opening mode determined by the opening mode determination means when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the normal symbol display control means, and a game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for transitioning to a predetermined game state (e.g., a C time-saving game state) and controlling the transitioned game state when a special condition (e.g., a C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed) is established in response to detection of a game ball by the starting area detection means,
The normal game judgment means performs the opening/closing judgment based on the game state when the variable display of the normal pattern is started by the normal pattern display control means, and the opening mode determination means is capable of determining the opening mode based on the game state when a specific normal pattern is stopped and displayed by the normal pattern display control means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a start variable winning device detection means (e.g., a second start port switch 3141) for detecting the entry of a gaming ball into the start variable winning device, a first special game control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling a special game advantageous to a player when a first transition condition (e.g., when a stop display mode indicating a "jackpot" is derived) is established in response to the detection of a gaming ball by the start variable winning device detection means, and a second special game control means (e.g., the main CPU 203) for controlling the special game when a second transition condition (e.g., when a gaming ball that has entered the V attacker 3152 passes through the V winning port) is established in response to the detection of a gaming ball by the start variable winning device detection means.
1) and
It is desirable that the second transition condition is set to be more likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) which determines whether or not to control a special game advantageous to a player on condition that a gaming ball has been detected by the starting area detection means; and a special symbol display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) which causes the special symbol display device to start variable display of special symbols, and controls the special symbol display device to stop displaying special symbols after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.
The game state control means is configured to control a specific game state (e.g., A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state) when the special game determination means determines that the special game is not to be controlled and the special symbol display control means stops and displays a specific special symbol (e.g., C time-saving symbol, etc.).
It is desirable to be able to transition to a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state consisting of a time-saving gaming state) and control the specific gaming state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a first special symbol that is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol.
A plurality of variable time tables (e.g., FIG. 113 to FIG. 114) in which the selection rate of the variable display time of each special symbol is differently defined for the variable display time of a plurality of special symbols, which includes at least the variable display time and a second variable display time of the special symbol that is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.
The game machine includes a variable time table storage means (e.g., the main ROM 202) that stores a variable pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. 16, a variable time table determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that determines one variable time table from among a plurality of variable time tables stored in the variable time table storage means according to a predetermined change condition (e.g., small win symbol switching information, the presence or absence of operation of a limiter function, etc.), and a special symbol variable time determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that determines a variable display time of the special symbol,
It is preferable that the special symbol variation time determining means is capable of determining a variable display time of the special symbol based on the variation time table determined by the variation time table determining means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention further comprises a special symbol determination means (e.g.,
A main CPU 201,
The special symbol determination means is capable of determining a first special symbol (e.g., a big win symbol) when it is determined by the special game determination means that a first special game capable of providing a first benefit is to be controlled, and is capable of determining a second special symbol (e.g., a "hit symbol for opening a special device" corresponding to small win symbol switching information) when it is determined by the special game determination means that a second special game capable of providing a second benefit having a lower profit rate than the first benefit is to be controlled, and it is desirable that the variable time table determination means is capable of determining a special variable time table from among a plurality of variable time tables (e.g., variable pattern tables T1 to T3 of special symbols in a normal game state shown in Figs. 113(1) to (3), and variable pattern tables C1 to C3 of special symbols in a C-time-saving game state shown in Figs. 114(1) to (3)) stored in the variable time table storage means when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, in determining the variable display time of the special symbol from the next time onwards.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a special game number counting means (for example, the main CPU 201) for counting the number of times the control of the special game is performed under a specific condition (A time-saving gaming state).
) and
It is desirable that the game state control means, when a specific number of times (e.g., a limiter number) is counted by the special game counting means, transition to a normal game state which is disadvantageous to the player, and that the variable time table determination means, when a specific number of times is counted by the special game counting means, is capable of determining a specific variable time table (e.g., special pattern variable pattern tables Z1, Z2 shown in FIG. 116) in which the second variable display time of the special pattern is executed more frequently than the first variable display time of the special pattern until a predetermined termination condition is met.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific special symbol (e.g., a C time-saving symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the gaming state control means transitions to the specific gaming state (e.g., a time-saving gaming state consisting of an A time-saving gaming state, a B time-saving gaming state, and a C time-saving gaming state, mainly the C time-saving gaming state), and after a first ending condition is established (e.g.,
When the control of the specific game state is ended and the first special symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means,
It is desirable that the game state be transitioned to the specific game state (for example, a time-shortened game state consisting of a time-shortened game state A, a time-shortened game state B, and a time-shortened game state C, with the time-shortened game state being mainly the time-shortened game state A), and that after a second termination condition is established (for example, 100 variable displays of special symbols), the control of the specific game state be terminated, and that the first termination condition and the second termination condition be different termination conditions.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming board is provided in the gaming area close to the starting area in the direction of travel of the gaming ball that has passed through the passing area, and the gaming ball that has passed through the passing area is configured to be able to pass through the starting area.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Appendix 2: The fifth pachinko machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area.
(A so-called two-type gaming machine.) When the machine is controlled to such a big win gaming state, the big prize opening is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy for the gaming ball to enter the big prize opening, and prize balls corresponding to the gaming ball that enters the big prize opening are paid out, so that the player can acquire the gaming ball.

In addition to the big prize hole and the starting hole, the game area is provided with a passing hole that activates a normal symbol, and when a game ball passes through the passing hole, a lottery for a normal symbol is held. If the lottery for a normal symbol is won, a movable member (a so-called electric tulip) provided in a specific starting hole is activated.
In order to increase the interest of the game, most gaming machines equipped with such movable members have a time-saving game state in which the movable members are more likely to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable members are less likely to open per unit time, and in the time-saving game state, the chances of winning a lottery for special symbols are increased (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-273866 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, even in a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving game mode as in Patent Document 1, if the only opportunity for a player to win a game ball is through a lottery for a special symbol, the gameplay becomes monotonous, and there is still room for improvement in order to increase the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further increase the entertainment value of the game.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a gaming board (e.g., a gaming panel 5100) in which a gaming area through which gaming balls flow down is formed, normal area detection means (e.g., a first passing port switch 5127A, a second passing port switch 5127B) for detecting the entry of gaming balls into a normal area (e.g., a first passing port 5126A, a second passing port 5126B) provided in the gaming area, a first variable winning device (e.g., a normal electric device 5146) provided in the gaming area and changeable between an open state which makes it easy to receive gaming balls and a closed state which makes it difficult to receive gaming balls, and a second variable winning device (e.g., a special electric device 5133) provided in the gaming area and changeable between an open state which makes it easy to receive gaming balls and a closed state which makes it difficult to receive gaming balls, and an opening/closing determination as to whether or not to change the first variable winning device to an open state on the condition that a gaming ball is detected by the normal area detection means. a first variable winning device detection means (e.g., a start switch 5141) for detecting an entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device; a benefit awarding determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to award one of a plurality of types of benefits including a special benefit (e.g., a small win) for opening the second variable winning device on the condition that a game ball has been detected by the first variable winning device detection means, and a status benefit (e.g., a time-saving win) for controlling a predetermined game status without opening the second variable winning device; and a game status control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling the execution of a normal game status in which the first variable winning device is unlikely to be opened, or a specific game status (e.g., a time-saving game status) in which the first variable winning device is likely to be opened.
The advantage awarding determination means is more likely to determine that either the special advantage or the state advantage will be awarded than to determine that neither the special advantage nor the state advantage will be awarded, and the game state control means is characterized in that it becomes possible to execute the specific game state when the advantage awarding determination means determines that the state advantage will be awarded.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the benefit awarding determination means determines whether the second variable winning device is in an open state or a closed state in accordance with a first opening mode (e.g., a big win game state) or whether the second variable winning device is in an open state or a closed state in accordance with a second opening mode that is more disadvantageous to a player than the first opening mode (e.g., a big win game state).
For example, it is desirable to determine whether or not to award one of a number of types of benefits, including a small win game state and the state benefit, and to make it easier to determine that the second special game should be awarded than the first special game.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when the benefit-granting determination means judges a predetermined number of times (e.g., one time of time-saving), in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state, and if the benefit-granting determination means judges that the state benefit will be granted before the predetermined number of judgments are made, it is desirable that the specific gaming state can be executed until the predetermined number of judgments are made again.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., time-shortened game state A) that can be executed after the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the special benefit will be granted, and a second specific game state (e.g., time-shortened game state C) that can be executed after the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the state benefit will be granted, the first specific game state being a game state that is more advantageous to a player (e.g., having a greater number of time-shortened games) than the second specific game state, and it is desirable that the game state control means is capable of continuing to execute the first specific game state without executing the second specific game state when the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the state benefit will be granted while the first specific game state is being executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a presentation means for performing a predetermined presentation (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46, a sub-CPU 3
01) and
It is desirable that, when the special benefit is awarded, the presentation means is capable of performing a common special effect (e.g., a basic bonus time effect or a specialized bonus time effect) that can be executed across a plurality of the special benefits, and, when the benefit awarding determination means determines that the state benefit will be awarded, is capable of performing a continuing special effect (e.g., a rewind effect) that suggests that the special effect will be further extended and continued.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Appendix 3: The sixth pachinko game machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area.
(A so-called two-type gaming machine.) When the machine is controlled to such a big win gaming state, the big prize opening is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy for the gaming ball to enter the big prize opening, and the prize ball (gaming ball) corresponding to the gaming ball that entered the big prize opening can be paid out.

Then, based on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, in order to enhance the interest of the game, the first reach performance (long reach, SP reach) is performed, and then the second reach performance (SP
A gaming machine that performs a special bonus (SP reach) is known (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2013-236850 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, it has been desired to increase the relevance of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the like, and to further improve the reach effect and other effects, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further increase the entertainment value of the game.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of an identification symbol when a predetermined start condition is satisfied,
A performance execution means (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, a performance accessory group 58, and a performance button device 6) that performs a predetermined performance when the variable display of the identification pattern is being performed.
A sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the main CPU 310,
The performance execution means includes:
When a first effect (e.g., a cherry blossom accumulation notice) is performed and a first effect execution condition (e.g., the acquisition of a Road to the Ultimate Showdown icon) is established, a second effect (e.g., the Road to the Ultimate Showdown) can be executed;
When a second performance execution condition (for example, display of five character icons) is established by performing a third performance (for example, a pseudo consecutive performance) different from the first performance, a fourth performance (for example, the path to the decisive battle) can be executed;
The second effect and the fourth effect are characterized in that they are capable of executing a specific effect of the same type (for example, an effect in which the aim is to collect 10 character icons).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means
As the first effect, a stage effect in which the effect progresses in stages (for example, a cherry blossom accumulation notice),
A first development display effect (
For example, it is desirable to be able to display a text image indicating the number of character icons, such as "1 person concentrated," or to have an icon display image lit up in the Western Army icon display area, etc.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means
As the third performance, the identification symbol being displayed in a varying manner is temporarily stopped and displayed,
It is possible to perform a pseudo-consecutive effect multiple times in which the identification pattern that has been temporarily stopped is displayed again in a variable manner, and it is desirable that each time the pseudo-consecutive effect is performed, a second development display effect can be performed in which specified development information (e.g., character icons) can be displayed (e.g., an effect in which one or more character icons are displayed in a stopped state, or an icon display image is displayed lit up in the Western Army icon display area, etc.).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation unit (for example, a first performance operation unit 6311 and a second performance operation unit 6312 of a performance button device 6310) is provided, by which a player can perform operations for the performance,
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific presentation, it is possible to perform an operation presentation (for example, a single operation presentation in Road to the Final Battle or Road to the Ultimate Final Battle) that causes the player to perform a predetermined number of operations on the presentation operation unit, and it is desirable that the number of operations in the operation presentation in the second presentation be greater than the number of operations in the operation presentation in the fourth presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means
By performing the second performance or the fourth performance, a third performance execution condition (for example,
When the number of character icons is less than 10, a fifth performance (for example, a showdown reach) can be executed.
As the specific performance, it is possible to perform a performance in which predetermined development information is displayed and a development progress performance (for example, a performance in which the aim is to collect 10 character icons) that progresses according to the displayed development information,
As the fifth effect, it is desirable to be able to perform a development effect (for example, an effect using a support icon) related to the development information displayed as it progresses in the development progress effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a start information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for acquiring start information when the predetermined start condition is established, and a first special game (e.g.,
A first special game determination means (e.g., main C) that determines whether or not to control a big win game
a second special game determination means (e.g., main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a second special game (e.g., small win game) having a lower profit than the first special game based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a control means (e.g., main CPU 202) for controlling the first special game under the condition that the first special game determination means determines that the first special game is to be controlled.
A special game control means (e.g.,
a main CPU 201), and a reservation storage means (
a main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area; a pre-determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of determining whether or not to control the first special game or the second special game based on the start information stored in the reserve storage means before the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means make a determination; and a pre-effect execution means (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, a L
A sub-control circuit 30 for controlling the ED group 46, the performance props group 58, and the performance button device 6310
0, sub-CPU 301),
The pre-performance execution means includes:
It is desirable that, even if the special game control means controls the second special game during the specified presentation period, it is possible to continue the pre-presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a start information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for acquiring start information when a first start condition or a second start condition is established, and a special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to a player based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means;
A first reserved storage means (e.g., a main RAM 203 having first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4)) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a first reserved number when the first start condition is established in a state in which the special game determination means is unable to make a determination, and a second reserved storage means (e.g., a main RAM 203 having second special symbol start storage areas (1) and (2) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a second reserved number when the second start condition is established in a state in which the special game determination means is unable to make a determination. a main RAM 203 for storing a program for controlling the game, a pre-determination means (e.g., a main CPU 201) capable of determining whether or not to control the special game based on start information stored in the first reserve storage means or the second reserve storage means before the special game determination means makes a determination, and a pre-effect execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32, the group of LEDs 46, the group of accessories for performance 58, and the performance button device 6310) capable of performing a reserve pre-effect (e.g., a folding fan notice) based on a result of the determination by the pre-determination means,
The pre-performance execution means includes:
It is desirable that when a predetermined number of start information items (e.g., two) are stored in the second hold memory means, it is possible to perform a hold pre-performance based on the start information stored in the first hold memory means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention further comprises a performance operation unit (e.g., a first performance operation unit 6311 and a second performance operation unit 6312 of the performance button device 6310) by which the player can operate the performance, operation detection means (e.g., first to third operation unit detection switches of the performance button device 6310) for detecting operations on the performance operation unit, and operation determination means (e.g., the sub-CPU 301) for determining whether the operations detected by the operation detection means are valid or invalid,
When there is a reception time during which multiple operations can be received on the performance operation unit, the operation determination means determines that the operation on the performance operation unit is invalid during a start preparation period set at the start time of the reception time, determines that the operation on the performance operation unit is invalid during an end preparation period set at the end time of the reception time, and determines that the operation on the performance operation unit is valid during a valid operation period set from the end of the start preparation period to the start of the end preparation period, but is capable of setting an invalid operation period from when an operation detected during the valid operation period is determined to be valid until the next operation is determined to be valid;
It is desirable that the operation invalid period be set to a different period depending on a presentation based on an operation determined to be valid during the operation valid period.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation unit (e.g., a performance button device 6310) that allows a player to perform operations for the performance and can execute a plurality of types of operation modes;
An operation display performance execution means (e.g., a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46) capable of performing an operation display performance (e.g., displaying a performance button state image) that displays the performance operation unit
, a sub-control circuit 300 for controlling the performance props group 58 and the performance button device 6310, a sub-control circuit
PU 301),
The operation display performance execution means, in response to a change in the operation mode of the performance operation unit to be operated,
It is desirable to perform the above-mentioned operation display presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation unit (e.g., a performance button device 6310) that allows a player to perform operations for the performance and can execute a plurality of types of operation modes;
It is desirable to provide an operation mode return means (e.g., a button control circuit 310, a sub-control circuit 300, and a sub-CPU 301) that returns the operation mode of the presentation operation unit to an initial operation mode when certain conditions are met, including the passage of a certain amount of time since a certain game was played by a player.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first start condition is satisfied, a first notification symbol display control means (e.g., a main C) starts a variable display of a first notification symbol (e.g., a first special symbol), and when a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the first notification symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stopped state.
PU201), and when the second start condition is satisfied, a second notification pattern (for example, a second special pattern)
and when a predetermined variation time has elapsed, a second notification symbol display control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for stopping and displaying the second notification symbol in a predetermined stopped state;
When the first notification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode by the notification symbol display control means, or when the second notification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode by the second notification symbol display control means,
A game state control means for controlling a specific game state from a normal game state (e.g., the main CPU 20
1), and an external information output means for outputting external information related to a game to a predetermined external device (e.g.,
and an external terminal board 184,
The variable display of the first notification symbol by the first notification symbol display control means and the variable display of the second notification symbol by the second notification symbol display control means can be executed in parallel,
The game state control means, in the specific game state,
When the notification symbol is stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times, the specific game state is changed to the normal game state,
In addition to continuously outputting specific external information (e.g., external information 3) during the output period from when the specific game state is controlled by the game state control means to when the normal game state is controlled, it is desirable for the external information output means to also continuously output the specific external information during a first additional period until the first alarm pattern is displayed stationary when the first alarm pattern display control means starts to display the varying first alarm pattern when the specific game state is controlled, and during a second additional period until the second alarm pattern is displayed stationary when the second alarm pattern display control means starts to display the varying second alarm pattern when the specific game state is controlled.

In addition, "development information" refers to information that is displayed as the game or presentation progresses, and includes information such as text information showing the content of the presentation that is about to progress, character icon information displaying a specified character, number information showing the number of displayed character icons, number information showing the number of pseudo-consecutive wins that have already been performed, and time information until the presentation that is about to progress, and refers to development patterns consisting of numbers, letters, figures, symbols, etc.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

7 Display device 7a Upper display area 201 Main CPU
202 Main ROM
203 Main RAM
301 Sub CPU
310 Button control circuit 6100 Game panel 6120A First starting hole (middle)
6120B First starting hole (right)
6140 Second starting gate 6126 Passing gate 6131 First major winning gate 6151 Second major winning gate 6310 Performance button device

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display of an identification symbol when a predetermined start condition is established, and capable of transitioning to a special gaming state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means capable of performing a predetermined performance when the variable display of the identification pattern is being performed,
The performance execution means includes:
When the first performance execution condition is satisfied by performing the first performance, the second performance can be executed;
When a second performance execution condition different from the first performance execution condition is established by performing a third performance different from the first performance, a fourth performance can be executed;
The second effect and the fourth effect are capable of executing a specific effect of the same kind related to an operating means,
When a third performance execution condition is established by performing the second performance or the fourth performance, a fifth performance different from the special performance can be executed without executing a special performance, and when the third performance execution condition is not established , the special performance can be executed without executing the fifth performance ;
As the specific performance, it is possible to display predetermined development information and perform a development progression performance that progresses according to the displayed development information,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, as the fifth presentation, a development presentation related to the development information can be performed.